JP6664142B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (variable display by a plurality of pieces of identification information or the like) is executed based on establishment of a start condition, and a game is performed based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player.

  In such a gaming machine, a sound output unit (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and a sound effect is output from the sound output unit at a predetermined volume in accordance with the state of the game, A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-233590 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired volume cannot be set. Was.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of setting the volume of effect sound output from a sound output unit to a desired volume.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention provides a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and a production sound output for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit according to a game state. (Effect control board 130), the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22) operable by a game clerk. The first sound volume setting means (effect control board 130) for setting the value to any one of a plurality of sound volume values, and the first sound volume based on the operation of a second operation unit (cross key 19) operable by a player. A second volume value setting unit (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the volume value setting unit to a predetermined volume value, and a determination result as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. Floating effect to execute a variable effect to inform Line means (effect control board 130); notification means (effect control board 130) for outputting a predetermined notification sound from the sound output unit based on occurrence of a predetermined abnormality during operation of the gaming machine; A volume value image display unit (effect control board 130) for displaying a volume value image corresponding to the current volume value on a predetermined display unit based on an operation of the second operation unit, and the second volume value setting unit Volume notification sound output means (effect control) for outputting a volume notification sound (any of “do”, “re”, “mi”, “fa”, and “so”) from the sound output unit based on the setting of the volume value. Substrate 130), and the predetermined abnormality includes a first abnormality (dispensing abnormality, full tray, etc.) and a second abnormality (power-on, power-on, power-on recovery, illegal winning, abnormal) that is more important than the first abnormality. winning, magnetic anomaly, Telecommunications abnormal, and a frame opening, etc.), the Starring Sound output means outputs the variation effect sound during execution of the fluctuation effect, when the output of the based on the first abnormality occurs in the output of the variation effect sound predetermined alarm sound is initiated, the current Even when the volume value is lower than the maximum volume value of the plurality of volume values, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is reduced from the previous volume, or When the output sound is inaudible and the output of the predetermined notification sound based on the occurrence of the first abnormality ends during the output of the fluctuation effect sound, the volume of the fluctuation effect sound is changed to the occurrence of the first abnormality. The volume value image display unit is restored to a state before the predetermined notification sound based on the output is output, and the volume value is set by operating the first operation unit while the volume value image is not displayed. The volume value screen corresponding to the newly set volume value. Without displaying the image, the sound volume alarm sound output means, if the volume value and the second operating unit is operated to plying in a state where the variation effect is not executed is set, outputting the sound volume alarm sound While the predetermined notification sound based on the occurrence of the first abnormality is being output, the volume value can be set by the second volume value setting means, but the predetermined notification based on the occurrence of the second abnormality can be performed. During output of the sound, setting of the sound volume value by the second sound volume value setting means is restricted .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to set the volume of the production sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

It is a figure showing an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure showing an example of a perspective view of a game machine in the state where a glass frame was opened. It is a figure showing an example of a winning ball flow path provided on the back side of the game board. It is a figure showing an example of an image displayed on a display field of the 1st image display device and the 2nd image display device. It is a figure showing an example of the perspective view of the back side of a game machine. It is a figure showing an example of a block diagram of the whole game machine. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the big hit determination table for 1st special symbols, and (b) is a figure which shows an example of the big hit determination table for 2nd special symbols. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table for a big hit, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table for a small hit, (c) is a special symbol determination table for a loss It is a figure showing an example of. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table for 1st special symbols. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table for 2nd special symbols. It is a figure showing an example of a prior judgment table of judgment information. (A) is a figure showing an example of a big hit game control table, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a small hit game control table. It is a figure showing an example of a special winning opening opening and closing control table. It is a figure showing an example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a hit determination table for ordinary symbols, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stop symbol determination table for ordinary symbols, and (c) is a variation pattern determination for ordinary symbols. It is a figure showing an example of a table, and (d) is a figure showing an example of an opening mode decision table of the 2nd starting opening. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM, (b) is a diagram showing an example of each storage section of the special symbol holding storage area, (c) is a normal symbol of the main RAM It is a figure which shows an example of a hold | maintenance storage area, (d) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol hold | maintenance storage area. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process in a main control board. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an initialization process in a main control board. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a timer interrupt process in the main control board. It is a figure showing an input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure showing a general winning opening detection switch input processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening detection switch input processing in a main control board. It is a figure showing the 1st starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing the 2nd starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing the gate detection switch input processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing a winning check processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the big hit determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure showing special design change processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure showing a jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a figure showing the big hit game end processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing the small hitting game processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the general-purpose power control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal symbol change process in a main control board. It is a figure showing an auxiliary game processing in a main control board. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an abnormality determination process in a main control board. (A) is a figure which shows the main processing in a payout control part, (b) is a figure which shows the timer interruption processing in a payout control part. It is a figure which shows the abnormality determination process in a payout control part. (A) is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, (b) is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the payout control board to the main control board or the production control board. is there. It is a figure showing the kind of the command transmitted to the production control board from the main control board. It is a figure showing the kind of the command transmitted to the production control board from the main control board. It is a figure showing the main processing in the production control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in the effect control part. It is a figure showing the information control processing in the production control part. It is a figure showing the correspondence table showing the correspondence at the time of the occurrence of the event which should be notified. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect process in the effect control part. It is a figure showing the variable production start processing in the production control unit. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation effect pattern determination processing in the effect control part. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table 1. It is a figure showing an example of fluctuation production pattern decision table 2. It is a figure which shows the symbol pattern determination process in the effect control part. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol pattern decision table. It is a figure which shows the notice effect determination processing 1 in the effect control part. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the determination table 1 of the fixed effect, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the determination table 2 of the fixed effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table of a probability change confirmation effect. It is a figure which shows the process during a fluctuation effect in the effect control part. It is a figure which shows the big hit effect start processing in the effect control part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special game effect pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification timing determination table. It is a figure which shows the process during a big hit effect in the effect control part. It is a figure showing the information setting processing in the production control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting process in the effect control part. It is a figure showing the 1st operation acceptance processing in the production control part. It is a figure showing the 2nd operation acceptance processing in the production control part. (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a first determination table, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a second determination table. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process in a liquid crystal control unit. (A) is a figure which shows the command reception interruption processing in a liquid crystal control part, (b) is a figure which shows the V blank interruption processing in a liquid crystal control part. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a mode switching process in a liquid crystal control unit. (A) is a figure which shows a changeover switch, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of an adjustment mode. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a determination table for a notification sound in an adjustment mode. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the mode switching process in the liquid crystal control unit. (A) is a figure which shows the changeover switch in a modification, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the adjustment mode in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table of the notification sound of the adjustment mode in a modified example, and (b) which shows the setting screen of the power saving mode displayed on a 1st image display device. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a setting process of an animation pattern in a liquid crystal control unit. It is a figure which shows the notification process of the occurred event in a liquid crystal control part. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a notification screen of an occurrence event displayed on a first image display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table of the notification sound of an occurrence event. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a process of setting a volume in a liquid crystal control unit. (A) is a figure which shows the guidance image of volume adjustment, (b) is a figure which shows the notification image of the volume value for every volume value, (c) is a figure which shows the notification sound of the volume for each volume value is there. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a process of changing a volume in a liquid crystal control unit. (A) is a figure which shows the volume value reset processing in a liquid crystal control part, (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the volume value reset processing in a liquid crystal control part. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a setting process of luminance in a liquid crystal control unit. (A) is a figure which shows the guidance image of a brightness adjustment, (b) is a figure which shows the alert | report image of the brightness value for every brightness value. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a luminance changing process in a liquid crystal control unit. (A) is a figure which shows the reset process of the brightness value in a liquid crystal control part, (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the reset process of a brightness value in a liquid crystal control part. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a control process of a power saving mode in a liquid crystal control unit. It is a figure showing an example of output sound volume by a voice control part. It is a figure showing the modification of the output sound volume by a voice control part. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a main process in a lamp control unit. (A) is a diagram showing a command reception interrupt process in the lamp control unit, (b) is a diagram showing a V blank interrupt process in the lamp control unit, and (c) is a timer interrupt process in the lamp control unit. FIG. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the brightness | luminance of LED in a lamp control part. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of light emission luminance in a lamp control unit. It is a figure which shows the setting process of the light emission information of the notification LED in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the setting processing of the light emission information of the handle LED in a lamp control part. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a setting process of drive information of a blower in a lamp control unit. It is a timing chart before and after the start of the fixed effect. It is a timing chart before and after the end of the fixed effect. It is a figure showing an example of a production of a fixed production. It is a timing chart before and after the start of the certain change confirmation effect with button operation. It is a timing chart before and after the start of the certain change confirmation effect without button operation. It is a timing chart before and after the end of the certain change confirmation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of a certain change confirmation effect. It is a timing chart before and after the start of the promotion notification effect. It is a figure showing the example of a production of a promotion announcement production. It is a timing chart before and after the start of the continuous notification effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of a continuous notification effect. It is a timing chart which shows the modification about a fixed production and a certain change fixed production. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the guidance image of volume adjustment, and the guidance image of brightness adjustment. It is a timing chart in case an adjustment mode is changed during the waiting of a customer waiting effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when an adjustment mode is changed during standby of a customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart at the time of changing a volume value and an adjustment mode during standby of a customer waiting effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when a volume value and an adjustment mode are changed during standby of a customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart at the time of changing a volume value and an adjustment mode during standby of a customer waiting effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when a volume value and an adjustment mode are changed during standby of a customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart in a case where a customer waiting effect is executed after a volume value is changed during a waiting for a customer waiting effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when a customer waiting effect is performed after a volume value is changed during the waiting of a customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart when a power failure (power interruption) occurs after the volume value is changed during the waiting for the customer waiting effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when a power failure (power cutoff) occurs after the volume value is changed during the waiting for customer waiting effect. It is a timing chart in case an adjustment mode is changed during a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when an adjustment mode is changed during a fluctuation effect. It is a timing chart when a sound volume value is changed during a possible adjustment period during a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when a volume value is changed during a possible period of adjustment during a fluctuation effect. It is a timing chart in the case where an adjustment mode is changed during a variable production in which a pseudo continuous production is executed. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when an adjustment mode is changed during a fluctuation production in which a pseudo continuous production is executed. It is a timing chart when a magnetic abnormality and a dish full occur during a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when a magnetic anomaly and a dish full occur during a fluctuation effect. It is a timing chart when a magnetic abnormality and a dish full occur during a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when a magnetic anomaly and a dish full occur during a fluctuation effect. It is a timing chart at the time of outputting the notification sound which becomes a big hit decision during a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine when an announcement sound which becomes a big hit is output during a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing the timer interruption processing of the production control part in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the first half of operation acceptance processing of the production control part in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the latter half of the operation acceptance processing of the production control unit in the second embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a third determination table. It is a figure showing an example of operation of a game machine before and after menu operation. It is a figure showing the main processing of the liquid crystal control part in a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing the timer interruption processing of the production control part in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing the main processing of the liquid crystal control part in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing V blank interruption processing of a liquid crystal control part in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing the first half of the processing of setting the volume of the liquid crystal control unit in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing the latter half of the setting processing of the volume of the liquid crystal control unit in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing the first half of the setting processing of the brightness of the liquid crystal controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing the latter half of the setting processing of the brightness of the liquid crystal controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing the customer waiting processing of the liquid crystal control part in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing the setting processing of the animation pattern of the liquid crystal control part in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing operation operation processing of a liquid crystal control part in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing V blank interruption processing of a liquid crystal control part in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing the first half of operation acceptance processing of a liquid crystal control part in a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing the latter half of the operation acceptance processing of the liquid crystal control unit in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the circuit structure of the effect control board in 1st-5th embodiment.

(1st Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machines)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention with the glass frame opened. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning ball flow path provided on the back side of the game board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed in a display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 in which a game area 5a in which a game ball flows is formed.

  The outer frame 2 is provided with a decorative plate 2b attached to a lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a having a central portion opened in the front-rear direction, and is fixed to an island facility of a game store (for example, a nail or a fastener). A) fixed through.

  The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Have been. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are provided. Maintenance and the like can be performed.

  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported by the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. I have. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5 a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

  An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper portion of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8 a (a glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like) is formed to cover the opening 8 from behind. The game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

  Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper tray 11 and flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described below; A launch operation device 13 capable of performing an operation for launching is provided.

  The audio output device 9 is provided at two intervals on the upper part of the glass frame 4 at an interval, and outputs a BGM (background music), an SE (sound effect), or the like to perform an effect by sound (music, voice). It has become. In addition, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform lighting effects by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a (not shown) that is controlled to be turned on / flashing when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality described below occurs.

  In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction of the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

  In addition, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) functioning as input devices for performing a determination operation and a selection operation related to various effects described below are provided on a central front side portion of the upper tray 11. They are provided side by side.

  The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (see FIG. 2) capable of performing a determination operation or the like (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 6) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect. A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 6) having a button driving motor for moving the button 17 in the vertical direction is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (see FIG. 2) capable of performing operations such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a connected to the cross key 19 for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 6) so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  A lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 so that a lending operation of a game ball and a return operation of a storage medium such as a card storing a balance can be performed. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the balance of the game stored in the storage medium received by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to allow the lending of the game ball. When a return button (not shown) of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

  Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, there is formed an overflowing ball channel (not shown) for receiving game balls that cannot fit in the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. Further, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 6) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower tray 12 is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path, and the fullness of the lower tray 12 is detected by the full detection switch 32a. During this time, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.

  The firing operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 6), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 6) composed of a variable resistor whose resistance varies according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A light emitting device 15c (corresponding to the presentation means of the present embodiment) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b operates to send out the game balls one by one.

  The light emitting device 15c of the handle forms a front portion of the firing handle 15, is formed in a dome shape bulging forward, and has a plurality of LEDs arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Has been established. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light-emitting effect of causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode (such as a certainty-determining effect, a promotion-notifying effect, a continuation-notifying effect, etc., which will be described later). Further, at the front end of the light emitting device 15c of the handle, an air outlet 15d serving as an outlet of the wind (air) sent from the air blower 21 described later is opened.

  On the back side of the glass frame 4, a blowing device 21 (corresponding to a rendering means) for blowing out wind (air) in a predetermined manner at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13 is provided. The blower 21 includes a blower (not shown) for sending out wind (air) and a motor (not shown) for operating the blower, and the wind (air) sent by the blower is provided. Is transmitted from the air outlet 15d to the player's hand through the base 14 of the firing operation device 13 and the inside of the light emitting device 15c of the handle. By operating the blowing device 21, it is possible to execute a blowing effect (such as a fixed effect to be described later) in which wind (air) is sent out in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player operating the firing handle 15. It has become.

  It should be noted that the blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13 but is provided around the decorative plate 2b of the outer frame 2 or around the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4 so that the wind (air) is directed toward the player. ) May be sent out. Further, a plurality of blowers 21 may be provided.

  The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for firing game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

  The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and can store the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

  The game ball launching device 26 has a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b for driving the launching member 28 (see FIG. 6), and a launching member 28 directed to the lower left end of the game board. A firing rail 29 that rises and inclines, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a firing position that is a lower end portion of the firing rail 29 is provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the firing position, the game ball A is hit toward the game area 5a by the operation of the hitting member 28.

  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked, and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed. 4 is released, and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding a game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game balls fired by the game ball launch device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream portion of the game area 5a for guiding game balls flowing down to the outside of the game area (recovery portion of the game board mounting frame 3).

  At the approximate center of the game area 5a, there is provided a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 for restricting the entry of a game ball into a so-called center case, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. A warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decoration frame 40 is provided on a side portion of the decoration frame 40, and a decoration frame 40 is provided below the decoration frame 40 by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage section 42 for rolling game balls introduced into the inside of the box and flowing the balls down below the decorative frame 40.

  In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of general winning ports 43 in which gaming balls can always win (enter) are provided at intervals, and the general winning ports 43 are provided. When the game balls that have won (entered) are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 6), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 5). It is paid out to the upper receiving tray 11 as a ball.

  On both sides (left game area, right game area) of the game area 5a, general-purpose gates 44 (general-purpose start areas) through which game balls can pass are provided, and games passing through the general-purpose gates 44 are provided. When a ball is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 6), a normal symbol hit lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. In addition, the winning lottery of the normal symbol will be described later.

  A first starting port 45 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can always win (enter) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage section 42, and the first starting port 45 is provided. When the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 6) detects a game ball that has won (entered) a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 5). The ball is paid out to the upper receiving tray 11 as a prize ball. In addition to the payout of the prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Immediately below the first starting port 45, a game ball is changed from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win (enter) a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (usually winning a lottery with a symbol). A variable starting unit 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball entry) is possible or easy.

  The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball) and a second detecting port for detecting a winning of the game ball (entering a ball) to the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 6), a movable member 48 for converting (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening / closing solenoid for opening and closing the movable member 48 48b (see FIG. 6). When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( Ball entry) is possible or easy.

  When a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are supplied to the game ball payout apparatus 100 (see FIG. 5). ) Is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the general-purpose gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which it is impossible to win (enter) a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the winning of the special symbol jackpot lottery). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (ball entry).

  The variable winning section 49 includes a special winning opening 50 in which a game ball can win (enter), and a special winning opening detection switch 50a (FIG. 7) for detecting a winning (entering) of a game ball to the special winning opening 50. 6), an opening / closing member 51 for converting (variable) the special winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for converting the opening / closing member 51 to open / close. When the special winning opening 50 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the special winning opening 50 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball (entering the ball) is performed. ) Is possible or easy.

  When a game ball that has won (entered) the special winning opening 50 is detected by the special winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of the game balls are output from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball.

  On the back side of the gaming board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won and the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second A winning ball flow path 52 (see FIG. 3) is provided for receiving the game balls detected by the start-up opening detection switch 47a and the special winning opening detection switch 50a and flowing them down while collecting them.

  A passage detection switch 52a (see FIGS. 3 and 6) for detecting a game ball flowing down the prize ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches is provided in a downstream portion of the prize ball flow path 52. . The passage detection switch 52a detects the game ball again after being detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the special winning opening detection switch 50a. Is used to determine whether the winning is a proper winning (ball entry) or an abnormal winning (ball entry).

  Outside the game area 5a, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, and a second special symbol hold A hold display device including a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, and a round number display 66 (see FIG. 6) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, will be described later. A right-handed indicator 67 (see FIG. 6) for urging the player to shoot a game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a during a jackpot game (special game state) or a time-saving game state is provided.

  The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery performed on condition that a game ball wins (enters) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol performed on condition that the game ball wins (enters) in the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) a result of a normal symbol winning lottery performed on condition that a game ball wins (enters) at the general symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

  The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol means that when a game ball wins (enters) in the first starting port 45, a jackpot determination random value or the like (judgment information) is obtained, and the obtained jackpot determination random value and the jackpot are acquired. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing with a determination value. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol display unit 60 displays the variation of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol stop display indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

  The jackpot lottery of the second special symbol means that when a game ball wins (enters) in the second starting opening 47, a jackpot determination random number value (judgment information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination random value and the jackpot are acquired. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing with a determination value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol indicator 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is information of the lottery result.

  The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lit in a mode (big hit mode, small hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of each big hit lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the term “big hit” refers to a jackpot game (special game state) in the first special symbol jackpot lottery (special game judgment) or the second special symbol jackpot lottery (special game judgment). A state in which rights have been acquired. The "big hit game (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the special winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

  Although the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the special winning opening 50 even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. When nine (for example, nine) win (enter a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "big hit game (special game state)" is a game state that is advantageous to a player who easily obtains a prize ball. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage for the player can be generated, which will be described in detail later.

  The normal symbol hit lottery means that a hit determination random value is obtained when a game ball passes through the general figure gate 44, and the obtained hit determination random value is compared with the hit determination value to determine whether it is "hit". It corresponds to judging whether or not. Note that when a normal symbol hitting lottery is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the ordinary symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  Note that the ordinary symbol display 62 is constituted by one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined symbol variation display. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (winning mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

  In the present embodiment, “winning” refers to a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) has been obtained in a normal symbol winning lottery. The term “winning game (auxiliary game)” refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined mode.

  The maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the second opening 47 in the hit game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, but the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time are not set before the second opening 47 is reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) win (enter), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is in a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition of the variable display is easily satisfied). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

  The first special symbol holding display 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is a first special symbol jackpot lottery (the first special symbol of the first special symbol) stored when a game ball is won (enters) in the first starting port 45. This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing the variable display), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved storages. In addition, the first hold storage is configured to store up to four, but may be less or more than four.

  The second special symbol holding display 64 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball is won (enters) in the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing the variable display), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved storages. Although the maximum number of the second reserved storages is four, the number of the second reserved storages may be smaller or larger than four.

  The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol change display) stored when a game ball is won (passed) at the general symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of (Public figure on-hold storage), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of (Public figure on-hold storage). It should be noted that up to four general-purpose pending storages are stored, but the number may be less or more than four.

  Note that the first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, when the special symbol jackpot lottery is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, and if it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. "Should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the special symbol change display, the stop result of the previous change display is displayed by turning on the LED. Therefore, when the change display starts, the change display is started by turning off the LED. It becomes easy to grasp that it has started.

  A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) formed of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the effect space 40a, and is provided below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) including a liquid crystal display having a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. Is provided. Note that the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) correspond to the first display device (first display means) and the second display device (second display means) of the present embodiment. Equivalent to.

  The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, there is a customer waiting effect that is executed when the special symbol change display is not performed, or the effect display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed when the special symbol change display is performed, or a sign effect by a character. And notices. In addition, it is also possible to replace the effect design with the effect identification information.

  Further, the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) drives a panel drive constituted by a solenoid, a motor, and the like during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect can be performed by moving with the device 75 (see FIG. 6).

  Specifically, a standby position (first position) located closer to an end (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and a center position (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Is moved up and down (up and down) with the effect position (second position) located at the position. Note that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has three rows of variable display areas 70A such as a left area, a center area, and a right area, and a current display area 70A. A mode display area 70B indicating the effect mode is formed, and the effect symbol 70a displayed in each of the variable display areas is scrolled in the vertical direction (from the top to the bottom in the present embodiment) to display the variation of the effect symbol 70a. Is performed.

  The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, a symbol indicating a number from “1” to “8”, and the special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. In response to (synchronous), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a fluctuating manner. That is, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to a symbol indicating a number.

  In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a stops for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (loss mode, small hit mode, big hit mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as “777” or a combination of effect symbols having regularity such as “357”, and the small hit mode (special result mode). Is a combination of effect symbols having regularity such as “357”, and the loss mode is another mode. In addition, the mode of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be such that scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot is possible.

  In addition, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) or the second image display device according to the result of the jackpot. By being displayed on the 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's sense of expectation for occurrence of a big hit (special game state) is enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, an icon display area 71 </ b> A in which a special-drawing hold icon (to be described later), the change icon, and the like are displayed on the display (effective display area) of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal). And an effect display area 71B in which an effect display (display of a character image or the like) related to a change display of the effect symbol 70a executed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed vertically. ing.

  The icon display area 71A includes a first reserved icon display area 71C for displaying the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) which is the current number of first reserved storages, A second holding icon display area 71D for displaying a number of second holding icons corresponding to the second special symbol holding number (U2), which is the number of second holding memories, and a special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed. The variable icon display area 71E for displaying the relevant variable icon TH corresponding to (related to) the variable display is formed.

  The first reserved icon display area 71C is partitioned in the form of a first display section 71C1, a second display section 71C2, a third display section 71C3, a fourth display section 71C4 from the side close to the variable icon display area 71E, On each of the display units 71C1 to 71C4, a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is displayed. That is, the number of the first reserved icons increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol reservation number (U1).

  Specifically, first holding icon H11 indicating the first holding storage in which the first special symbol change display is first performed is displayed on first display portion 71C1, and 2nd holding icon H11 is displayed on second display portion 71C2. First, a first holding icon H12 indicating a first holding storage in which the first special symbol change display is executed is displayed, and third change display of the first special symbol is executed third on the third display portion 71C3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold storage is displayed, and the first display icon H14 indicating the first hold storage in which the fourth special symbol change display is executed fourthly is displayed on the fourth display unit 71C4. Is done.

  The second reserved icon display area 71D is partitioned in the form of a first display section 71D1, a second display section 71D2, a third display section 71D3, a fourth display section 71D4 from the side closer to the variable icon display area 71E, On each of the display sections 71D1 to 71D4, the number of the second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is displayed. That is, the number of the second reserved icons is increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the second special symbol reserved number (U2).

  More specifically, the first display section 71D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating a second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 71D2 displays 2nd hold icon H21. Secondly, the second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the third display portion 71D3 executes the third variable display of the second special symbol. A second holding icon H23 indicating the second holding storage is displayed, and a second holding icon H24 indicating the second holding storage in which the second special symbol is displayed in a fourth manner is displayed on the fourth display unit 71D4. Is done.

  The fluctuating icon display area 71E is formed immediately above the pedestal image D1 for clearly distinguishing it from the first reserved icon display area and the second reserved icon display area, and rides on the pedestal image D1, or The change icon TH is displayed so as to float.

  Specifically, the first reserved icon H11 or the second reserved icon display area displayed on the first display unit 71C1 of the first reserved icon display area 71C with the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The change icon TH is displayed by the movement (shift) of the second holding icon H21 displayed on the first display unit 71D1 of the 71D, and the change icon TH is displayed at the end of the change display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TH disappears (deletes). Note that the change icon TH may be deleted during the change display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

  In the effect display area 71B, a first special symbol variation display area DZ1 for variably displaying a first special symbol (first specific identification information called a so-called fourth symbol) and a second special symbol (a so-called fourth symbol) are displayed. A second special symbol variation display area DZ2 for variably displaying the second specific identification information called), and a first reserved number display area SH1 for simply displaying the first special symbol reserved number (U1) with arithmetic numerals. , A second reserved number display area SH2 for simply displaying the second special symbol reserved number (U2) with arithmetic numerals.

  In the first special symbol variation display area DZ1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started in response to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is varied in response to the stop of the variation display of the first special symbol. The variable display of the symbol is stopped. That is, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and the execution state of the variation display of the first special symbol depends on the variation state of the first special symbol. Is notified (suggested) to the player.

  In the second special symbol variation display area DZ2, the variation display of the second special symbol starts in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol responds in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. The variable display of the symbol is stopped. That is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the execution state of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol depends on the fluctuation state of the second special symbol. Is notified (suggested) to the player.

  The first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) indicate, for example, a symbol “○” indicating a large hit mode, a symbol “□” indicating a small hit mode, and a loss mode. It is composed of "X" symbols and the like. During the fluctuation display, "O" symbols, "□" symbols and "X" symbols are sequentially displayed, and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, " When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, it is stopped and displayed in the symbol "□". When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the loss mode, "x" is displayed. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol.

  In the embodiment of the present invention, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) performs the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the second image display device 71 (the sub liquid crystal) performs the variable display of the first special symbol. The player of the glass frame 4 and the game board 5 can visually recognize the 1 special symbol change indicator (fourth symbol LED) and the second special symbol change indicator (fourth symbol LED) for changing and displaying the second special symbol. May be arranged at a suitable position (for example, the decorative frame 40 or the like), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner there. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  In the first reserved number display area SH1, arithmetic numerals from 0 to 4 indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) are displayed, and the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is increased or decreased. Arithmetic numbers displayed correspondingly change.

  In the second reserved number display area SH2, arithmetic numerals from 0 to 4 indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed, and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) increases or decreases. Arithmetic numbers displayed correspondingly change. The display mode such as color may be changed so that the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2 can be distinguished.

  The movable effect member 73 emits light by the panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of lamps (eg, LEDs) during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A light emission effect can be performed, and a movement effect can be performed by moving the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 6) including a solenoid, a motor, and the like.

  Specifically, a light emission effect is performed by emitting a plurality of lamps (LEDs or the like) in a predetermined light emission color in accordance with the progress of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Further, the standby position (first position) is located closer to the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and is located closer to the center (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect is performed by moving (elevating, descending) in the up-down direction with respect to the effect position (second position). In addition, you may comprise so that a light emission effect and a movement effect may be performed by operation of the effect button 17.

  The back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5 is supplied from a game ball payout apparatus 100 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), island facilities, and the like. Ball storage unit 101 for storing game balls to be supplied to the game ball payout apparatus 100, a main control device 110A including a main control substrate 110 for integrally controlling the progress of the game, and payout from the main control substrate 110. A payout control device 120A having a built-in payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 in accordance with the control command, and an effect control board 130 for controlling the effect in accordance with the effect control command from the main control board 110 are incorporated. And a power supply device 160A including a power supply board 160 for supplying a power supply voltage to various control devices, and output game information (game signals) to the outside of the gaming machine. Game information output terminal board 90 and the like of the eye are provided.

  Further, an opening / closing door-type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right directions around a rotation axis set on one side on the left and right sides so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire effect control device 130A from behind. The effect control device 130A includes the sound volume of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (a frame lighting device 10, a panel lighting device, and the like). A changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the brightness of 74) is provided.

  Note that the changeover switch 22 can be operated by the clerk of the game store by opening the cover member 23, but the player is covered by the cover member 32 on the back side of the gaming machine 1. The operation unit is provided at a position where operation by the user is impossible or difficult. Further, since the entirety of the game ball is covered by the cover member 23, the game ball that has fallen from the island equipment does not collide with the game machine and is not operated erroneously at the time of inspection of the gaming machine. Instead, the upper portion may be simply covered with a member such as an eave in consideration of operability. Further, the eaves may be formed by a part of the board box of the effect control device 130A.

  In addition, the changeover switch 22 may be provided on the front side of the game board mounting frame or on the backside of the glass frame 4 so that the clerk of the game store can operate when the glass frame 4 is opened. May be provided at a position where the clerk and / or the player of the game store can operate from the front side of the gaming machine and is more difficult to operate than the cross key 19, for example, at the top or side of the glass frame 4. .

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, a control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 is a main control one-chip microcomputer including a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to volatile storage means) serving as a work area for the arithmetic processing. 110 m and an input port and an output port for main control. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs an arithmetic process related to a game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling the controlled device (various solenoids and various displays). ) And transmits a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

  Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is based on the main control board. A command (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.

  The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detecting switch 43a, a gate detecting switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a winning opening detecting switch 50a, a passing detecting switch 52a, The magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RAM clear switch 55a, the payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input ports, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

  The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening / closing solenoid 48b, a special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special opening. The symbol hold display 63, the second special symbol hold display 64, the ordinary symbol hold display 65, the number of rounds display 66, the right-hand display 67, the game information output terminal board 90, the effect control board 130, etc. are connected. I have. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information to be notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the game machine (such as a hall computer) via an output port. Is output.

  The payout control board 120 is a dependent control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of a payout command from the main control board 110 and controls the emission of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launching device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a for performing arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c serving as a work area for the arithmetic processing, input ports and output ports for payout control, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs an arithmetic process regarding payout of the game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. It controls the payout device 100 and transmits a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

  An open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101, and the like are connected to input ports of the payout control unit 121. The payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to an output port of the payout control unit 121.

  Upon receiving the payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 controls the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a When the payout of the predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control for paying out the game balls ends.

  The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b.

  When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows energization to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and launches. When detecting that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed according to the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven, and the firing solenoid is controlled so as to have a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving 28b.

  The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft, and the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A by rotating the rotating shaft. . Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the game ball is fired for one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

  The effect control board 130 is a dependent control board (dependent control means) that controls an effect related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes an effect control unit 130m including a sub CPU 130a for performing an operation process, a sub ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, and a sub RAM 130c serving as a work area during the operation process, and a first image display device 70 (main A display control section 140 for controlling the liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), etc .; the frame lighting device 10; the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel; And a lamp control unit 150 for controlling the panel lighting device 74, the panel driving device 75, etc., and an input port and an output port for effect control (dependent control means, display control means, image display means, effect Execution means).

  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs an operation process related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, so that the command received from the main control board 110 In accordance with the detection signal (input signal) from the or the effect button detection switch 17a or the cross key detection switch 19a, control is performed to cause the various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) to execute various effects ( Output data and commands).

  The effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. In the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, a process for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

  The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and performs control to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), It controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio or sound.

  The display control unit 140 includes a general CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, a general ROM 143 storing a general control program, a liquid crystal control unit 141 including a general RAM 144 that is a work area for the arithmetic processing, and a VDP (Video Display) as an image processor. Processor 145, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, and a VRAM 147 provided inside the image controller 145 and having a frame buffer and the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. And an audio control unit 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 storing audio data and the like, and an input / output port to which the audio output device 9 and the switch 22 are connected.

  The overall CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the overall ROM 143, and performs an arithmetic process relating to the effect while utilizing the overall RAM 144 as a work area, thereby receiving from the effect controller 130m. Control (output of data and commands, etc.) for causing the image control unit 145 and the sound control unit 148 to execute various effects in accordance with the effect instruction command and the like, and the volume of sound and sound output from the sound output device 9 ( Control for changing the volume value) and control for changing the brightness (brightness value) of the image display device and various lamps / LEDs are performed.

  The integrated ROM 143 is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands, and animation of an effect pattern. Animation patterns, animation scene information, and the like.

  The animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting the specific contents of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes a weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method , The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) include various information such as a duty ratio which is a parameter of luminance.

  The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various types of image data are stored, and commands (display lists, drawing commands, etc.) from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (the general CPU 142) and the CGROM 146 are stored in the CGROM 146. Drawing data that is a source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the image data. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, a rendered design image, a background image constituting the rendered design background, and a character. This is material data representing each image such as an image and a line image. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

  The CGROM 146 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like. The CGROM 146 compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

  Further, the CGROM 146 stores, without compressing, palette data in which color number information designating a color number and display color information for actually displaying a color are associated with each other. Note that the CGROM 146 may have a configuration in which not all image data is compressed, but only part of the image data. As the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 147 is configured by an SRAM that writes or reads image data at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (the central CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). And the like corresponding to the frame buffer area.

  The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are switched alternately between a “drawing frame buffer” and a “display frame buffer” each time drawing is started.

  Therefore, based on an instruction (display list) from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (the general CPU 142), the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147. , Read drawing data from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area, generate a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the read drawing data, and generate a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and The image is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

  The image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operation clock from a crystal oscillator. By dividing the frequency of the operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 are operated. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the (sub-liquid crystal) is generated and output to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal). In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) may be set so that 60 times (drawing of an image) are performed per second.

  A general-purpose board 72 for converting image data into a predetermined image format and outputting the image data is provided between the image control unit 145 and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Is connected. The general-purpose substrate 72 has a bridge function of converting the image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying image data. Absorbs the difference in resolution between when a 19 inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17 inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) is connected. .

  The sound control unit 148 is connected to the sound output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), and the like from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

  The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a for performing arithmetic processing, a lamp RAM 150b in which a lamp / drive control program is stored, a lamp RAM 150c serving as a work area for the arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

  The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs an arithmetic process relating to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In accordance with the received instruction command and the like, control is performed to output a predetermined effect to controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices (data and commands are output).

  The input / output port of the lamp control unit is connected to the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the blower device 21, and the panel lighting device 74, and the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). By performing lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the steering wheel light emitting device 15c, and the panel lighting device 74 based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from By performing drive control of a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the button driving device 17b, the blower 21 and the panel driving device 75, an operation effect (moving effect described above) or the like is performed.

  The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, To the effect control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to power supply means). A power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power interruption (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power interruption (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

  The power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and various electronic components), and an OFF state in which the power supply is stopped. A power switch (corresponding to a state switching means) is provided so that it can be operated by a store clerk. When the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

  The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power interruption detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

  The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the gaming machine. When a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110 c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is turned off (power failure), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power was turned off (power failure) after recovery from the power failure (power failure). Can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, a game state when the game proceeds will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the special symbol jackpot lottery has a “low-probability gaming state” and a “high-probability gaming state”, and the state relating to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 has a “non-time-saving gaming state”. "And" time saving game state ". The states relating to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the states relating to the movable member 48 (non-time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state) can be related to each other and can be independent. . That is,
(1) When the game is in the “low-probability game state” and the “time reduction game state” (first specific game state),
(2) When the game is in the “low-probability game state” and the “non-time-saving game state” (normal game state),
(3) In the case of the “high-probability game state” and the “time-saving game state” (second specific game state),
(4) The case where the game state is the “high-probability game state” and the “non-time saving game state” (third specific game state) can be provided.
The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a “low-probability gaming state” and is set to a “non-time-saving gaming state”. Will be referred to as "normal gaming state".

  In the present embodiment, the “low-probability gaming state” refers to a special symbol jackpot lottery performed on condition that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, and the jackpot winning probability is For example, it means a game state set as low as 1/2. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set to, for example, 1 / 59.8 as high. . Therefore, in the “high-probability gaming state”, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the “low-probability gaming state”. It is to be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after a jackpot game described later is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as “probable change jackpot”. The jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is referred to as “normal jackpot”.

  In the present embodiment, the “non-time-saving gaming state” refers to the average fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the ordinary symbol winning lottery performed on condition that the game ball has passed through the ordinary symbol gate 44. Is set to be longer than the “time-saving game state”, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a win is won is easily set to be short. For example, when a game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 44, a normal symbol hit lottery is performed, and the ordinary symbol display unit 62 performs an ordinary symbol variation display. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be in an open state for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the ordinary symbol.

  On the other hand, the "time reduction gaming state" is a normal symbol hitting lottery performed on condition that a game ball has passed through the general symbol gate 44, and the average variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is determined. A game state that is set shorter than the "non-time-saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a win is won is set to, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time-saving game state". Say. Further, in the "non-time-saving game state", the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is set to, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving game state", the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is set to, for example, 127. / 128 is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled to the open mode than in the "non-time saving game state". Thereby, in the "time saving game state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming the game ball.

  In the embodiment, the “time saving game state” is set such that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery are more advantageous than the “non-time saving game state”. Have been. However, the “time saving gaming state” may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes advantageous. In the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a win in a normal symbol win lottery may be, for example, 0/128.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a jackpot determination table that is referred to when determining whether to generate a jackpot. Specifically, FIG. 7A shows a jackpot determination table for a first special symbol which is referred to in a jackpot determination (lottery) executed based on a prize (entering) of a game ball to the first starting port 45. FIG. 7B is a jackpot determination table for a second special symbol which is referred to in a jackpot determination (big hit lottery) executed based on a prize (entering) of a game ball to the second starting port 47. is there. Although the big hit probability is the same in the tables of FIGS. 7A and 7B, the small hit does not occur in the table of FIG. 7B.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b), the jackpot determination table shows the probability game state and when the game ball has won (entered) the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. The acquired random number for jackpot determination (judgment information) is associated with the result of the jackpot determination (lottery).

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7A or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. It is determined which of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “loss” based on the random number value for big hit determination.

  For example, according to the big hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7A, when the game is in the low-probability gaming state, two big hit determination random numbers “7” and “8” are “big hits”. Is determined, and when the game is in the high-probability gaming state, the ten large hit determination random numbers from "7" to "16" are determined to be "big hit". In addition, in the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, the four large hit determination random numbers “50”, “100”, “150”, and “200” are determined as “small hits”.

  When the game is in the low-probability game state, random numbers for jackpot determination other than “7”, “8”, “50”, “100”, “150”, and “200” are determined as “losing”, When in the gaming state, random numbers for jackpot determination other than “7” to “16”, “50”, “100”, “150”, and “200” are determined as “losing”. In addition, since there is a possibility that a big hit may be aimed at by a combination of the initialization of the random number value for the jackpot determination due to intentional power-off and a so-called hanging substrate, "0" is always set to "losing". I have.

  Accordingly, since the random number range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 598, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is 1/299, and is determined to be a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state. The probability is increased by a factor of 5 to 1 / 59.8. Note that the probability of determining a jackpot is not limited to five times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as three times or ten times.

(Special design decision table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table that is referred to when determining a stop symbol of a special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery). Specifically, FIG. 8A is a special symbol determination table for a big hit, which is referred to to determine a special symbol stop symbol when it is determined to be a big hit (winning), and FIG. FIG. 8C is a special symbol determination table for a small hit which is referred to for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined that the small hit is a winning (winning). FIG. It is a special symbol determination table for a loss which is referred to determine a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the special symbol determination table for the jackpot, the type of the starting port (special symbol display type) in which the game ball has won (entered), the first starting port 45 or the first starting port 45, or the like. 2 shows a special symbol determination random value (judgment information) obtained when a game ball wins (enters) the starting ball 47, the type (type) of the special symbol, and the type (type) of the special symbol. The stop special figure data is associated with an effect symbol designating command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the special symbol.

  The special symbols A and B associated with the first starting port 45 are special symbols for generating a 16-round probable jackpot game, and the special symbols CE are special symbols for generating a 13-round probable jackpot game. The special symbol F is a special symbol for generating a 13-round normal jackpot game, and the special symbol G is a special symbol for generating a 2-round positive jackpot.

  The special symbols a to d associated with the second starting port 47 are special symbols that generate a 16-round probability jackpot game, and the special jackpot special symbol e is a special symbol that generates a 16-round normal jackpot. Has become.

  In addition, after the end of the probable variable jackpot game generated by the special symbols A to E, G, and a to d, the second specific game state in which the number of time-saving games and the number of high-probability games are set to 10000 (a so-called probability-variable game state) ), And after the end of the normal jackpot game generated by the special symbols G and e, the first specific game state (the so-called time shortening game state) in which the number of times saved is set to 100 and the number of high-probability games is set to 0 ).

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in the special symbol determination table for small hits, the type of the starting port (special symbol display type) in which the game ball has won (entered) and the first starting port 45 include Special symbol determination random value acquired when a game ball wins (enters a ball), type (type) of special symbol, special stop data indicating the type of special symbol, and information indicating the type of special symbol The effect symbol designating command transmitted to the effect control board 130 is associated therewith.

  The special symbols H and I associated with the first starting port 45 are special symbols for which the number of rounds is not set, but the special jackpot special symbol G and the special symbol for generating the small jackpot game in which the opening and closing mode of the special winning opening 50 are the same. Has become. Note that, unlike the big hit game, the game state is not changed before and after the small hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (c), the type of the starting port (special symbol display type) in which the game ball has won (entered), the first starting port 45 or the first starting port 45 are stored in the special symbol determination table for the loss. (2) A special symbol determination random number value acquired when a game ball is won (entered) in the starting port 47, the type (type) of the special symbol, the stop special symbol data indicating the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol. The effect designating command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the information indicating the type of the symbol is associated.

  The special symbol J associated with the first starting port 45 and the special symbol j associated with the second starting port 47 are special symbols that do not generate any of the big hit games and the small hit games. In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, one loss special symbol is associated with each of the first startup port 45 and the second startup port 47, but a plurality of loss special symbols may be associated.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8, determines the type of the special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of the starting port, the random number for determining a special symbol, and the like, and determines the determined special symbol. Based on the type of the symbol (stop special figure data), an effect symbol designation command as information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined.

  Here, the rendering symbol designating command is such that one command is composed of two bytes of data, one byte of MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and one byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. And data. This is the same for a variation pattern designation command and the like to be described later.

  In addition, the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the end of the jackpot game are determined by the type of the special symbol (stop symbol data). However, only the type of the jackpot game may be determined. Alternatively, only the game state after the end of the big hit game may be determined.

(Variation pattern determination table for special symbols)
FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing a special symbol change pattern determination table which is referred to when performing a special symbol change display. More specifically, FIG. 9 is a first special symbol variation pattern determination table which is referred to when performing a variation display of a first special symbol based on winning (entering) of a game ball to the first starting port 45. FIG. 10 is a variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol which is referred to when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on winning (entering) of a game ball to the second starting port 47. .

  As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery), the type of the special symbol (stop symbol data), the first starting port 45 or the second The reach determination random number value (determination information) acquired when a game ball wins (enters) the starting opening 47, and the first special symbol reserved number (U1), which is the current number of first reserved memories, or the current And the number of reserved balls indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2), which is the number of second reserved memories, and when a game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern determining random number (judgment information), the fluctuation pattern (number) of the special symbol, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the type of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Variable pattern specification command It has been.

  Therefore, it can be said that the “special symbol variation pattern” can specify at least the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is a loss, the reach determination random value is referred to. However, in the case of a jackpot, a reach occurs except for special cases, so the reach determination random value is referred to. Not configured. The reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value have a random number range of 100 (0 to 99).

  In the variation pattern determination tables for special symbols shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the variation pattern 1 (so that the average variation time of the special symbol decreases as the number of reserved balls (U 1 or U 2) increases. The variation pattern 2 (short variation: variation time 3 seconds) is easier to determine than normal variation: variation time 12 seconds. Further, in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, the fluctuation pattern 4 (normal fluctuation: fluctuation time 10 seconds) is more than the fluctuation pattern 3 (normal reach: fluctuation time 20 seconds). ) Is easier to determine.

  Although the maximum number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol may be "4", the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the reserved ball number of the special symbol. Therefore, “4” is not set as the number of reserved balls.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 or FIG. 10, and determines the result of the jackpot determination (lottery), the type of the special symbol (stop symbol data), the random number for reach determination, the special symbol. The change pattern of the special symbol and the change time of the special symbol are determined based on the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) and the random number for determining the special symbol variation pattern. Then, a variation pattern designation command for the special symbol is generated based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol, and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Here, the variation pattern designation command for special symbols is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E3H”, a variation pattern designation command for a special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 corresponding to the game ball winning in the first starting port 45 is shown. When "E4H" is set, a variation pattern designation command for a special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 corresponding to the game ball winning in the second starting port 47 is shown.

  Further, in the effect control board 130, as described later, the effect contents and the like relating to the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a are determined based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (fluctuation pattern designation command). The effect contents (fluctuation effect patterns) of the effect symbols 70a and the like are described in the rightmost column of the fluctuation pattern determination tables for special symbols shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 for reference.

  Here, as the effect contents, “normal fluctuation” and “shortening fluctuation” mean that the plurality of effect symbols 70a fluctuate at high speed in a discrete manner and stop without reaching reach. The difference from the shortening variation is that the shortening variation ends in a shorter variation time than the normal variation.

  In addition, the “reach” is a variation mode in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate, thereby giving the player an expectation of the jackpot. Means For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 70a of “777” is set as the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot (the jackpot result mode), two effect symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7 "means that the temporary effect is temporarily stopped and the remaining effect symbols 70a fluctuate in the central area.

  In addition, the "temporary stop" means that the effect design 70a fluctuates slightly, or the effect design 70a is deformed small, so that the effect appears to the player as if the effect design 70a is stopped (complete stoppage). Not).

  Further, the “normal reach” means a reach with a low degree of expectation of a jackpot in which two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left region and the right region, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the central region. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach" does not cause a big hit, but the "normal reach" may make a big hit.

  The “SP reach” means a super reach that has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect design 70a in the central area that is not temporarily stopped fluctuates specially or a special character is displayed.

The “SPSP reach” means a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher degree of expectation of a jackpot than the super reach.
In addition, the “full rotation reach” means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify the jackpot fluctuates at a low speed in a state where all the combinations are arranged, and in the present embodiment, only when the winning in the jackpot lottery is won. It means the reach to be performed.

  Note that the variation pattern determination tables for special symbols shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 are referred to regardless of the game state, but a variation pattern determination table in which the variation pattern selection mode differs for each of a plurality of game states is provided. Alternatively, the variation pattern determination table to be referred to may be changed according to the game state at that time.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 11 shows that the determination information (result of the special symbol change display) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 is obtained before the special symbol change display is performed. It is a figure showing the prior judgment table referred when the prior judgment is made.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the starting port, the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery), the type of the special symbol (stop symbol data), the first starting port 45 or the second starting port are stored in the preliminary determination table. Reach judgment random number value (judgment information) acquired when a game ball enters the 47, and special figure variation acquired when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 A random number for pattern determination (judgment information) is associated with a start-up winning designating command indicating a planned variation pattern (number).

  Here, any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing” is determined according to the random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning (entering) a game ball into the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. Can be determined in advance, and the type of special game and the presence / absence of transition to the high-probability game state can be determined in advance by the special symbol determination random value.

  Furthermore, the effect contents (whether or not reach has occurred, the type of reach) and the like can be determined in advance with the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random number value. DATA), it is possible to determine the information of the type of the jackpot and the contents of the effect (planned fluctuation pattern).

  The main CPU 110a refers to the prior determination table shown in FIG. 11 and, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure change pattern determination random number, determines the “starting prize information”. Is determined. Then, based on the determined start winning information, a result of the jackpot determination, a start opening winning designation command for notifying the type of the jackpot, the scheduled change pattern, and the like are generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The start port winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E6H”, a start port winning designation command corresponding to the game ball winning in the first starting port 45 is shown, and when the MODE data is “E7H”, the second starting mode is set. The starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the opening 47 is shown.

  Note that the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 11 is similar to the variation pattern determination tables for special symbols shown in FIGS. 9 and 10. However, the prior determination table shown in FIG. 11 is used when a game ball is won (entered) in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, whereas the variation for the special symbol shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 is used. The difference is that the pattern determination table is used at the start of the change of the special symbol. In addition, whether or not to refer to the “number of reserved balls” is different.

  For this reason, in the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 11, the type of the jackpot and the type of the fluctuation pattern can be determined, but the type of the starting port is “first starting port” and the determination result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is If the loss is “miss” and the reach determination random number is “0 to 89”, the type of the starting port is “second starting port” and the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is “losing” and the reach When the random number for determination is “0 to 97”, the planned fluctuation patterns are the fluctuation patterns 1 to 4, but whether the planned fluctuation pattern is “normal fluctuation”, “shortened fluctuation”, or “normal reach” is determined. It cannot be determined.

  Although the special symbol pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 11 is referred to regardless of the game state at that time, a pre-judgment table in which the variation pattern selection mode differs for each of a plurality of game states is provided. The prior determination table to be referred to may be changed according to the gaming state.

(Game control table)
FIG. 12A is a diagram illustrating a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of the jackpot game (special game state) when the jackpot determination (lottery) results in a jackpot win. (B) is a diagram illustrating a small hitting game control table for determining the progress of a small hitting game (special game state) when a small hitting win is determined as a result of the big hit determination (lottery).

  As shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the big hit game control table and the small hit game control table have stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol, the opening time of the special game state, and the special winning opening. The numbers of the special winning opening / closing control table for determining the 50 opening / closing modes are associated with the ending time of the special gaming state.

  When generating a big hit game, the main CPU 110a refers to the big hit game control table shown in FIG. 12A, and determines the opening time, the big winning opening opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the stop symbol data. Become. Since the number of rounds in the jackpot game is set (determined) by determining the type of the special winning opening opening / closing table, the rightmost column in FIG. The effect contents during the game, the type of the jackpot game, the effect state after the end of the jackpot game, and the like are additionally described.

  Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the small hitting game control table shown in FIG. 12B when generating the small hitting game, and based on the stop symbol data, sets the opening time, the special winning opening opening / closing control table, and the ending time. Will decide. In the rightmost column of FIG. 12B, the effect state and the like after the end of the small hit game are additionally described.

(Large winning opening opening and closing control table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a special winning opening opening / closing control table referred to when a special game state (big hit game or small hit game) occurs. As shown in FIG. 13, the special winning opening opening / closing control table includes a table number (TBL. No.), a round number indicating the number of rounds, and a special power operation number indicating the number of times the special winning opening 50 is opened during one round. (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 50, and the closing time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening 50 between each opening of the special winning opening 50 are associated with each other.

  The main CPU 110a specifies the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the special winning opening 50 with reference to the special winning opening opening / closing control table shown in FIG. 13, and the first to twelfth special winning opening opening / closing control tables (TBL. No = 01). -12), and executes the small hit game based on the thirteenth special winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. = 13).

  According to the first special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. = 01), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is set to 29 per round from the first round to the thirteenth round. A first jackpot game in which the game is released until 0.5 seconds, and from the 14th round to the 16th round, is released up to 0.18 seconds per round is executed. Note that the game transitions to the probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot game. However, since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from the 14th round to the 16th round and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the first jackpot game is It can be said that it is a thirteen round probable jackpot game.

  According to the second special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No = 02), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area to 29 per round from the first round to the seventh round. A second jackpot game is executed in which the game is released up to 0.5 seconds, and is opened up to 0.18 seconds per round from rounds 8 to 16. In addition, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state. However, since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short from the 8th round to the 16th round and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the second big hit game is It can be said that it is virtually a round seven jackpot game.

  Note that since the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game have the same opening / closing mode of the seven-round jackpot 50, it is difficult to know which jackpot game is up to halfway. . Therefore, when the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game occurs, the type of the jackpot game is not notified in the closing period (time) of the jackpot 50 between the 7th round and the 8th round, without informing which one the jackpot game is. Is performed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), for example, to promote or not to be promoted to a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player.

  In the promotion effect that is executed during the first jackpot game (promotion effect during the round), a notification indicating that the game is a jackpot game of 13 rounds is finally performed, the process proceeds to the 8th round and thereafter, and the execution is performed during the second jackpot game. In the promotion effect that is performed, a notification indicating that the game is a jackpot game of seven rounds is finally performed, and the process proceeds to the eighth round and thereafter. By doing so, the player's expectation of the promotion effect is increased. A specific example of the promotion effect will be described later.

  According to the third special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. = 03), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area from 1 round to 13 rounds. A third big hit game to be opened up to 5 seconds is executed. In addition, after the big hit game ends, the game is shifted to the probability fluctuation game state, and since the opening time of the big winning opening is long from the first round to the thirteenth round and it is easy to obtain a prize ball, the third big hit game is substantially performed. It can be said that it is a thirteen round probable jackpot game.

  According to the fourth special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. = 04), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area to 29 per round from the first round to the eighth round. A fourth jackpot game is executed in which the game is released for up to 0.5 seconds, and is opened for 0.18 seconds per round from rounds 9 to 13. In addition, after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the probability fluctuation game state. However, since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short from round 9 to round 13 and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the fourth big hit game is It can be said that it is practically an eight round probable jackpot game.

  According to the fifth special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No = 05), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area to 29 per round from the first round to the fourth round. A fifth jackpot game in which the game is released until 0.5 seconds, and from the 5th round to the 13th round, is opened up to 0.18 seconds per round is executed. After the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to the probability fluctuation game state. However, since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from the 5th round to the 13th round and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the fifth jackpot game is It can be said that it is essentially a four-round probable jackpot game.

  Since the third jackpot game, the fourth jackpot game, and the fifth jackpot game have the same opening mode of the special winning opening 50 up to the fourth round, it is difficult to know which jackpot game until the middle. It has become. In addition, since the third jackpot game and the fourth jackpot game have the same opening mode of the special winning opening 50 up to 8 rounds, it is difficult to grasp which jackpot game is halfway. .

  Therefore, when the third jackpot game, the fourth jackpot game, and the fifth jackpot game occur, which jackpot game is not notified, the third jackpot game and the fourth jackpot game are performed between the fourth round and the fifth round. During the closing period of the special winning opening and the closing period of the special winning opening between the 8th and 9th rounds, and in the fifth jackpot game, during the closing period of the special winning opening between the 4th and 5th rounds, prize balls are played. A continuous effect (rank-up effect) for determining whether or not the round game that can be acquired is continued is executed by, for example, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  In the continuous production performed during the third jackpot game, a notification indicating that the round game in which the prize ball can be obtained continues for both times is performed, and the process proceeds to the next and subsequent rounds, and is performed during the fourth jackpot game. In the continuous production, a notification that the round game in which the prize ball can be acquired will be continued for the first time and the game proceeds to the next and subsequent rounds, but the round game in which the prize ball can be acquired for the second time ends. Is performed and the game proceeds to the next and subsequent rounds. In the continuous production performed during the fifth jackpot game, a notification indicating that the round game in which a prize ball can be acquired is completed is performed and the next and subsequent rounds are performed. Proceed to. By doing so, the player's sense of expectation for the continuous production is increased. A specific example of the continuous effect will be described later.

  According to the sixth special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. 06), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area to 29 per round from the first round to the fourth round. A sixth big hit game is executed in which the game is released for 0.5 seconds and the rounds from 5 to 13 are opened for 0.18 seconds per round. In addition, after the big hit game ends, the game mode shifts to the normal game state, and since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short from the 5th round to the 13th round and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the sixth big hit game is substantially performed. It can be said that it is a four-round regular jackpot game.

  According to the seventh special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. 07), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area is set at 0. A seventh big hit game to be opened up to 18 seconds is executed. Note that the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the jackpot game, but since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from the first round to the second round and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the seventh jackpot game is It can be said that it is a virtually zero round sudden change jackpot game.

  According to the eighth special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. 08), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area from 1 round to 16 rounds. An eighth jackpot game to be released for up to 5 seconds is executed. In addition, after the big hit game ends, the game shifts to the probability variation game state, and since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is long from the first round to the 16th round and it is easy to obtain a prize ball, the eighth big hit game is substantially performed. It can be said that this is a 16-round probable jackpot game.

  According to the ninth special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. 09), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area from the first round to the thirteenth round. A ninth jackpot game in which the game is released for 5 seconds and is released for 0.18 seconds per round from rounds 14 to 16 is executed. In addition, although the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the jackpot game, since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from the 14th round to the 16th round and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the ninth jackpot game is It can be said that it is a thirteen round probable jackpot game.

  According to the tenth winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. = 10), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area from the first round to the eighth round per round. A ninth big hit game is executed in which the game is released for 5 seconds and the round is opened for 0.18 seconds per round from rounds 9 to 16. In addition, although the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the jackpot game, since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from round 9 to round 16 and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the tenth jackpot game is It can be said that it is practically an eight round probable jackpot game.

  According to the eleventh special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. = 11), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area from the first round to the fourth round. The eleventh jackpot game in which the game is released for 5 seconds and the rounds from 5 to 16 are opened for 0.18 seconds per round is executed. In addition, after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the probability fluctuation game state. However, since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from round 5 to round 16 and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the eleventh big hit game is It can be said that it is essentially a four-round probable jackpot game.

  According to the twelfth special winning opening opening / closing table (TBL. No. = 12), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to set the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area from the first round to the fourth round. A twelfth jackpot game is opened in which the game is released for 5 seconds and is opened for 0.18 seconds per round from rounds 5 to 16. After the jackpot game is over, the game shifts to the normal floating game state, and since the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is extremely short from the 5th round to the 16th round, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. It can be said that it is a four round normal jackpot game.

  According to the thirteenth special winning opening opening and closing table (TBL. No. = 13), the small winning game in which the opening and closing member 51 is operated to open the special winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area twice to 0.18 seconds. Is executed. In addition, although the game state does not change before and after the small hit game, since the opening mode of the big winning opening 50 is the same as the seventh big hit game, it can be said that the small hit game is a simulation of the two round big hit game. .

  Note that since the seventh jackpot game and the small jackpot game have the same opening mode of the special winning opening 50, it is difficult to grasp which one has occurred. Therefore, after the end of the seventh big hit game and the small hit game, a probability variation latent effect for expecting a probability variation state is provided on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) for a predetermined period (variable display of a predetermined number of times). Until it is executed, until the end lottery is won, after the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, until the end lottery is won, etc.). By doing so, the player's expectation that the player may have shifted to the probability fluctuation state is increased.

  Here, in the above-described first jackpot game to twelfth jackpot game, if a specified number (for example, nine) of game balls wins in the special winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, the opening time does not elapse. However, the special winning opening 50 is closed and the game of one round is finished. In the small hit game, if a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins in the special winning opening 50 before the second opening time of the special winning opening 50 elapses, the opening time does not elapse. Also, the special winning opening 50 is closed and the small hit game is finished.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a game state setting table for setting (determining) the game state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 14, in the game state setting table, the type of the starting port that triggered the execution of the variable display that generated the jackpot game, the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving games (J), the probability game state, and the high probability game count (X) are associated with each other.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 14 and, at the end of the big hit, based on the type of the starting port and the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games (J), the probability game state and the high Determine the number of probable games (X). When the low-probability gaming state is determined as the probable gaming state, the high-probability gaming count (X) is not determined.

  The feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 14 in the present embodiment is that, in the case of the stop symbol data 10 to 13 and the stop symbol data 20 to 22, the number of time-saving games (J) and the number of high-probability games (X) Is not set to infinity, but set to 10000 times. However, in the high-probability gaming state, the probability of winning a jackpot is extremely high before 10,000 jackpot determinations (lottery) are performed. It can also be said that the probability gaming state continues.

(A hit judgment table for ordinary symbols)
FIG. 15A is a hit determination table for a normal symbol which is referred to in a hit determination (lottery) executed based on the passage (entering) of a game ball to the general-purpose gate 44. As shown in FIG. 15 (a), the hit determination table includes the presence or absence of a time saving game state, a hit determination random value acquired when a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 44, and a hit determination random value. Is associated with the determination result.

  For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 15A, when the game is in the non-time saving game state, one hit determination random number value of “127” is determined as a hit, and when the game is in the time saving game state, “1” is determined. ”To“ 127 ”are determined as hits. Therefore, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time saving game state is 1/128, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time saving game state is 127/128.

(Stop symbol determination table for ordinary symbols)
FIG. 15B is a stop pattern determination table of a normal symbol for determining a stop symbol of the normal symbol corresponding to the determination result of the hit determination (lottery). As shown in FIG. 15B, in the stop symbol determination table, the presence or absence of the time saving game state, the hit determination result indicating the result of the hit determination (lottery), and the time when the game ball passes the general-purpose gate 44 are displayed. The winning symbol determination value for determining the obtained random number value for determining the ordinary symbol, the type (type) of the ordinary symbol as the determination result, the stopped ordinary symbol data indicating the type of the ordinary symbol, and the type of the ordinary symbol The general-purpose designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the information to be indicated is associated with it.

  The normal symbol 0 is a normal symbol of a loss that does not generate an auxiliary game for opening the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 in a predetermined mode, and the normal symbols 1 to 3 are the movable members 48 of the second starting port 47. Is a normal symbol for generating an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

(Fluctuation pattern determination table for ordinary symbols)
FIG. 15C is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for ordinary symbols that is referred to when performing the variation display of ordinary symbols. As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the variation pattern determination table for the ordinary symbol includes a gaming state, a determination result of a hit determination (lottery), a random number value for determining an ordinary symbol variation pattern, and a variation time of the ordinary symbol. And a general figure change designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the normal pattern change pattern.

  Therefore, it can be said that at least the determination result of the hit determination (lottery) and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol can be specified. In the normal symbol change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15C, the normal symbol change time is set to be shorter in the case of the time saving game state than in the case of the non-time saving game state. In this state, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short span. In addition, you may make the fluctuation | variation time of a normal symbol the same in the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state.

(Second opening opening mode determination table)
FIG. 15D is a diagram illustrating an opening mode determination table of the second starting port which is referred to when the second starting port 47 is opened by the occurrence of the auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 15D, the open mode determination table for the second starting port includes the general stoppage data, the maximum number of times the second starting port 47 is opened, the opening time of the winning game (auxiliary game), The first opening time and closing time of the second starting port 47 are associated with the second opening time and closing time.

  The stop symbol data 01 (ordinary symbol 1) converts the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 into an open state only once (0.2 seconds) (performs short opening of the second starting port 47). The stop symbol data 02 (ordinary symbol 2) converts the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 into the open state twice (0.2 seconds and 3 seconds). (A long opening of the second starting port 47) is a normal symbol for generating the second auxiliary game, and the stop symbol data 03 (ordinary symbol 3) causes the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 to rotate twice. (2.5 seconds and 2.5 seconds) is converted to an open state (a long opening of the second starting port is performed).

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 16A shows a special symbol holding storage area in which various information is stored when a game ball is won (entered) in the first starting port 45 and / or the second starting port 47. FIG. 16B is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit in the special symbol storage area, and FIG. 16C is a diagram showing various types of information when a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 44. Is a normal symbol holding storage area, and FIG. 16D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first special symbol holding storage area, a second special symbol holding storage area, and a special symbol holding storage area. The reserved storage section and the second special symbol reserved storage area are respectively divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section, and the special symbol storage area is constituted by a 0th storage section.

  Note that the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area are a first display unit 71C1 and a second display unit 71C2 of the first holding icon display area 71C. , The third display unit 71C3 and the fourth display unit 71C4. Also, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area are the first display unit 71D1, the second display unit 71D2 of the second holding icon display area 71D, They correspond to the third display unit 71D3 and the fourth display unit 71D4, respectively. Further, the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area corresponds to the variable icon display area 71E.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), each storage unit stores a random number for a jackpot determination for storing a random number for a jackpot determination, and a random number storage for a special symbol determination for storing a random number for a special symbol determination. The area is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number, and a special figure change pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure change pattern determination random number.

  Then, when a game ball wins (enters) in the first starting port 45, the special figure determination is made in the storage unit having the smallest number among the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. Information (big hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, reach determination random number, special figure variation pattern determination random number) is stored. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the special figure determination information (in the second special symbol holding storage area having the smallest number among the storage sections in which the random numbers are not stored) is stored. The random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure variation pattern determination are stored.

  The 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area is stored in the first storage unit of the storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area, which is the storage area in which the condition for starting the change display of the special symbol is satisfied. By shifting the stored special figure determination information, the special figure determination information relating to the current variable display of the special symbol is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, the ordinary symbol holding storage area is divided from the 0th storage section to the fourth storage section, and as shown in FIG. A hit determination random number storage area for storing a numerical value, a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing a normal symbol determination random number value, and a normal figure change for storing a general pattern change pattern random number value It is divided into a pattern determination random number storage area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process described later. In this process, the main CPU 110a reads a startup program from the main ROM 110b in response to power-on, and performs a process of initializing flags and the like stored in the main RAM 110c, which will be described in detail later.

  In step S20, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random number value and the special symbol determination random value for determining the special symbol variation mode (variation time). In step S30, the jackpot determination initial value An initial value random number update process for updating the random number value, the initial value random number value for special symbol determination, the initial value random number value for hit determination, and the initial value random number value for ordinary symbol determination is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines in step S40 whether or not a power interruption (power failure) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power failure detection signal has not been input (step S40: No), the process proceeds to step S20. The process proceeds to step S41 when the power interruption detection signal is input (step S40: Yes).

  In step S41, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt, and in step S42, a power-off notification command for notifying the payout control board 120 that the power-off process has started. Is transmitted.

  Subsequently, in step S43, the main CPU 110a performs a process of receiving an unpaid number-of-payouts designation command transmitted from the payout control board 120 that has received the power-off notification command. The unpaid payout number designation command is a command indicating the remaining payout number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c of the payout control board 120 when the power-off notification command is received.

  In step S44, the main CPU 110a saves (stores) the remaining payout number specified by the unpaid payout number designation command received from the payout control board 120 in the payout counter stored in the main RAM 110c. A process of clearing the port is performed, and in step S46, a process of calculating a checksum of the main RAM 110c and storing it in a predetermined storage area is performed. In step S47, a process of turning on a backup flag to be referred to at the time of restoration from power failure Then, in step S48, a process of prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the process waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

(Main control board initialization processing)
The initialization process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the initialization processing in the main control board.

  In step S10-1, the main CPU 110a waits for 1000 ms so that the activation of the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 is completed earlier, and permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S10-2. .

  Next, in step S10-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 55a is ON. If the RAM clear switch 55a is not ON (S10-3: No), the process proceeds to step S10-4, and if the RAM clear switch 55a is ON (S10-3: Yes). Then, the process proceeds to step S10-11.

  In step S10-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the backup flag stored in the main RAM 110c is ON. If the backup flag is ON (S10-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-5, and if the backup flag is not ON (S10-4: No), the process proceeds to step S10-11.

  The main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S10-5, compares the checksum stored in the main RAM 110a with the calculated checksum in step S10-6, and determines whether the checksum is normal. Is determined. If the checksum is normal (S10-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-7. If the checksum is not normal (S10-6: No), the control state before the power is turned off is restored to normal. The process proceeds to step S10-11 assuming that the image cannot be recovered.

  The main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in step S10-7, and performs a setting process of the main RAM 110c at the time of power restoration in step S10-8. By performing this setting process, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off (by the control state returning means). Equivalent).

  In step S10-9, the main CPU 110a performs a process of transmitting a power restoration designation command. Specifically, in step S10-8, the restored current game state is referred to, and a power restoration specification command corresponding to the current game state (a power restoration designation command for customer waiting, which will be described later, Any of a power restoration designation command, a power restoration designation command for a medium hit, and a power restoration designation command for a small hit) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Thus, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current game state.

  The main CPU 110a performs a process of transmitting a unique information signal in step S10-10. Specifically, a maker code for identifying the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 and a model code for identifying the model of the gaming machine 1 are stored as specific information signals in a predetermined storage unit of the main control one-chip microcomputer 110m. The 39-byte unique information including the unique ID and the like is output as serial data from the game information output terminal board 90 for three seconds.

  The main CPU 110a clears the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the stack area in step S10-11, and performs a setting process of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on in step S10-12. By performing this setting process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized, so that the game can be played from the state of the gaming machine 1 at the time of shipment.

  In step S10-13, the main CPU 110a performs a process of transmitting a power-on designation command. Specifically, a power-on designation command indicating that the main RAM 110c has been cleared (initialized) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. This allows the effect control board 130 to know that the game progress state (control state) has been initialized.

  The main CPU 110a performs a process of transmitting a unique information signal in step S10-14. Specifically, a maker code for identifying the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 and a model code for identifying the model of the gaming machine 1 are stored as specific information signals in a predetermined storage unit of the main control one-chip microcomputer 110m. The 39-byte unique information including the unique ID and the like is output as serial data from the game information output terminal board 90 for three seconds.

  Different unique information signals may be transmitted in step S10-10 and step S10-14. In this case, at least one of the maker code, model code, and unique ID is transmitted in step S10-10. In step S10-14, all the manufacturer code, model code, and unique ID may be transmitted.

  Subsequently, in step S10-15, the main CPU 110a refers to the payout counter stored in the main RAM 110c, and in step S10-16, outputs the initial payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number specified by the payout counter. A process for transmitting to the payout control board 120 is performed. Thereby, the payout control board 120 can grasp (specify) the remaining payout number of the game balls paid out at the time of the power interruption, and allow the game ball payout device 100 to appropriately pay out the remaining payout number. Become.

  The main CPU 110a performs a start process of a CTC (counter timer circuit) in step S10-17, performs a start process of a random number circuit in step S10-18, and permits an interrupt in step S10-19. When this process ends, the current initialization process ends.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. The clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds), so that a timer interrupt process described below is executed.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter for opening the special electric accessory, and the like. , An ordinary symbol time counter, an opening and closing time of the movable member 48, and the like, and a time control process for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, or a starting opening closing timer counter is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for the special symbol determination, the random number for the special figure variation pattern, the random number for the hit determination, the random number for the ordinary symbol determination, and the random number for the general symbol variation pattern determination. A specific random number update process for updating a numerical value is performed. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial number of rounds, The new random number value is newly updated by setting the initial random number value to be used as a new round initial value.

  In step S130, the main CPU 110a updates the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random number value for special symbol determination, the initial value random number value for hit determination, and the initial value random number value for ordinary symbol determination in the same manner as in step S30. Perform initial value random value update processing.

  In step S200, the main CPU 110a determines whether the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the special winning opening detecting switch 50a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, the gate detecting switch 44a, the passing detecting switch 52a, etc. It is determined whether or not an input has been made to the switch, and when there is an input, an input control process for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination (eg, jackpot determination), display control of special symbols, opening / closing control of the special winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), control of a game state, and the like. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol memory control process (such as a hit determination), a normal symbol display control, and a general symbol power control process for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 47 (the movable member 48). However, details will be described later.

  Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, and sets the respective prize ball counters (three prize balls). With reference to the counter, the prize ball counter for ten, and the prize ball counter for fifteen, a payout control process for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 is performed. Thereby, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

  In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and specifies an error designation command for a magnetic abnormality or an error designation for a radio abnormality. An abnormality determination process is performed to prepare for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130, which will be described later in detail.

  The main CPU 110a, in step S700, external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, starting opening / closing data output to the second starting opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large output to the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening and closing data, special symbol display data to be output to the special symbol displays 60 and 61, ordinary symbol display data to be output to the ordinary symbol display 62, special symbol hold display data to be output to the special symbol hold indicators 63 and 64, A data creation process for creating data such as ordinary symbol hold display data to be output to the ordinary symbol hold display 65 is performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data, starting opening / closing data, and special winning opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, and special symbol display data. Display output processing for outputting signals such as symbol hold display data and ordinary symbol hold display data, a payout command transmission processing for transmitting a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, An output control process of executing an effect command transmission process of transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 or the effect control board 130 is performed.

  The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the payout control board 120 will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, and the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. This will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an input control process in the main control board 110.

  In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In the general winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the general winning opening 43, and predetermined data is set. . Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In this special winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the special winning opening 50, and predetermined data is set. . Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In the first starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether a game ball has won the first starting port 45 or not. Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting port detection switch input process. In the second starting port detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second starting port 47, and a predetermined Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process. In this gate detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the ordinary figure gate 44, and predetermined data is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation process in step S260. In this winning confirmation process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the passage detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path 52, and predetermined data is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current input control process ends.

(General winning port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The general winning opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a general winning opening detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S210-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a. If the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a is input (S210-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S210-2, and if the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a is not input ( In S210-1: No), the current general winning opening detection signal input processing ends.

  In step S210-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating ten prize balls to a prize ball counter for ten prize balls used for prize balls, and in step S210-3, to enter a winning opening. “1” is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of winning (entering) gaming balls, and the updated value is updated (D ← D + 1), and the current general winning opening detection signal input processing ends.

(Input processing for the big winning opening detection switch on the main control board)
The big winning opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S220-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a. If the detection signal from the special winning opening detection switch 50a has been input (S220-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S220-2, and if the detection signal from the special winning opening detection switch 50a has not been input. In (S220-1: No), the current big winning opening detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S220-2, the main CPU 110a adds and updates the data indicating the fifteen prize balls to the fifteen prize ball counters used for the prize balls. "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of winning (entering) gaming balls and updated (D ← D + 1).

  In step S220-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game progress is in a special game state (big hit game, small hit game). If it is in the special game state (S220-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S220-10, and if it is not in the special game state (S220-4: No), the process proceeds to step S220-5. Proceed.

  In step S220-5, the main CPU 110a determines the counter (E) indicating the number of game balls that have won (entered) the specific winning opening (the second starting opening 47, the special winning opening 50) outside the winning possible period. ) Is updated by adding “1” (E ← E + 1), and in step S220-6, it is determined whether the number of counters (E) for fraud determination is greater than a prescribed number (10) (error determination). Means). If the number is larger than the specified number (10) (S220-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S220-7, and if the number is smaller than the specified number (10) (S220-6: No), Finishes the special winning opening detection switch input processing.

  In step S220-7, the main CPU 110a determines that an illegal winning (entering) in which a game ball wins (enters) outside the winning possible period has occurred, and sends an error specifying command for illegal winning to the effect transmission data storage area. set. Thereby, the error designation command for illegal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 which has received the error designation command for illegal winning performs error notification of an irregular winning described later to perform the illegal winning. Notify that a has occurred.

  In step S220-8, the main CPU 110a sets, in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal indicating that an illegal winning (entering) has occurred. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

  In step S220-9, the main CPU 110a clears the counter (E) for fraud determination to 0, and ends the current winning opening detection switch input processing. In this manner, by clearing the value of the counter (E) for fraud determination to 0, even if the next special winning opening detection switch input processing is executed, an error designation command for fraudulent winning or a fraudulent winning is immediately performed. No signal is transmitted.

  In step S220-10, the main CPU 110a sets "1" to the special winning opening winning ball counter (C) indicating the number of game balls that have won (entered) the special winning opening 50 during the special gaming state (big hit game). The addition is updated (C ← C + 1), and the current special winning opening detection switch input processing is terminated.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input (step S230-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S230-2, and the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input. If it has (Step S230-1: No), the present first start-up opening detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a adds and updates the data indicating the three winning balls to the three winning ball counters used for the winning balls, and updates the winning port in step S230-3. "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of winning (entering) gaming balls and updated (D ← D + 1).

  In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the number of first hold memories stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, is less than four. . If the first special symbol hold number (U1) is less than 4 (step S230-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S230-5, and the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not less than 4. In (Step S230-4: No), the present first start-up opening detection switch input processing ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) in step S230-5 and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, outputs the random number value for jackpot determination. The obtained random number value for jackpot determination is sequentially retrieved from the first storage unit in the first special symbol holding storage area, and the obtained random number value is stored in the empty storage unit.

  In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol, searches the first storage unit in the first special symbol holding storage area sequentially for empty storage units, and searches for empty storage units. The obtained special symbol determination random number value is stored in the section, and in step S230-8, the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random number value are obtained, and the first storage in the first special symbol holding storage area is performed. The search unit searches the empty storage units sequentially from the unit, and stores the obtained reach determination random number value and special figure variation pattern determination random number value in the empty storage unit.

  As described above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol holding storage area stores the first random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the random number for determining special figure variation pattern, and the like. Hold storage (determination information) is stored (corresponding to a determination information acquisition unit and a determination information storage unit).

  The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In the first pre-determination process, referring to the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for special symbol determination, a random number for reach determination, a random number for special figure variation pattern determination, etc. acquired this time. Based on the determination information, the determination result of the newly stored first reserved storage (determination information) is notified to the effect control board 130 before the special symbol variation display based on the first reserved storage is performed. Start winning information is determined.

  In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a first starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the first starting winning information determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area. .

  As a result, the first start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start port winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first starting port winning designation command, The oral winning designation command is analyzed, and a predetermined announcement effect is provided from before the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the first starting opening winning designation command is started to one or a plurality of variation displays executed before that. Can be executed, and a pre-reading advancement effect such as a hold change advancement effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding hold icon to a special display mode can be executed. The prefetch notice effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the board lighting device 74.

  In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol reserved number (U1), which is the number of first reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area, and updates in step S230-5. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the performed first special symbol reservation number (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the present first start-up opening detection switch input processing is ended.

(Input processing of the second starting port detection switch on the main control board)
With reference to FIG. 24, the second starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the second starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a has been input. If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a has been input (step S240-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-2, and the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input. If it has been (Step S240-1: No), the present second start-up opening detection switch input processing is ended.

  In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding data indicating three prize balls to a prize ball counter for three prize balls used for prize balls and updating the data. "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of winning (entering) gaming balls, and the updated (D ← D + 1).

  In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an auxiliary game (winning state) is being performed. If the auxiliary game is being performed (step S240-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-10. If the auxiliary game is not being performed (hit state) (step S240-4: No), the process proceeds to step S240-5. Transfer processing.

  In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a determines the counter (E) for indicating the number of game balls that have won (entered) the specific winning opening (the second starting opening 47, the special winning opening 50) outside the winning possible period. ) Is updated by adding “1” to (E ← E + 1).

  In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the counter (E) for fraud determination is greater than a prescribed number (10) (corresponding to an error determination unit). If the number is larger than the specified number (10) (step S240-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-7, and if the number is smaller than the specified number (10) (step S240-6: No), The process moves to step S240-11.

  In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a determines that an illegal winning (entering) in which a game ball wins (enters) outside the winning possible period has occurred, and sends an error specifying command for illegal winning to the production transmission data storage area. set. An error designation command for illegal prize is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 notifies an error of an illegal prize, thereby notifying that an illegal prize has occurred.

  In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a sets, in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal indicating that an illegal winning (entering) has occurred. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

  In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the fraud determination counter (E) to zero. In this way, by clearing the value of the counter (E) for fraud determination to 0, even if the second start-up opening detection switch input processing is executed next, an error designation command for fraudulent prize or fraudulent operation is immediately performed. No winning signal is transmitted.

  In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets the winning ball counter (L) for the second starting port, which indicates the number of gaming balls that have won (entered) the second starting port 47 during the auxiliary game (hit game), as " 1 is added and updated (L ← L + 1).

  In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol holding number (U2), which is the number of second holding symbols stored in the second special symbol holding memory area, is less than four. . If the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4 (step S240-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-12, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not less than 4. In (Step S240-11: No), the current second starting port detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding (1) to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) and updating (U2 ← U2 + 1), and in step S240-13, outputs the random number value for jackpot determination. The acquired random number value for jackpot determination is sequentially retrieved from the first storage unit in the second special symbol holding storage area starting from the first storage unit.

  In step S240-14, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol, searches the first storage unit in the second special symbol holding storage area sequentially for empty storage units, and searches for empty storage units. The special symbol determination random number value acquired in the section is stored.

  In step S240-15, the main CPU 110a acquires the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random number value, and sequentially stores the empty storage units in the second special symbol holding storage area from the first storage unit. The search is performed, and the obtained reach determination random number value and special figure variation pattern determination random number value are stored in an empty storage unit.

  As described above, the predetermined storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area stores the second random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the random number for determining special figure variation pattern, and the like. Hold storage (determination information) is stored (corresponding to the determination information acquisition means and the determination information storage means).

  The main CPU 110a performs a second preliminary determination process in step S240-16. In the second pre-determination process, referring to the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the random number for determining special figure variation pattern, etc. Based on the second, the determination result of the newly stored second reserved storage (determination information) is notified to the effect control board 130 before the display of the special symbol based on the second reserved storage is performed. 2 Determine start winning information.

  In step S240-17, the main CPU 110a sets a second starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the second starting winning information determined in the second preliminary determination process of step S240-16 in the effect transmission data storage area. .

  As a result, the second start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start opening winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start opening winning designation command, The oral winning designation command is analyzed, and a predetermined announcement effect is provided from before the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the second starting opening winning designation command is started to one or a plurality of variation displays executed before that. Can be executed, and a pre-reading advancement effect such as a hold change advancement effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding hold icon to a special display mode can be executed. The prefetch notice effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the board lighting device 74.

  In step S240-18, the main CPU 110a refers to the second special symbol hold number (U2), which is the number of second hold memories in the second special symbol hold storage area, and is updated in step S240-12. The second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current second start-up opening detection switch input processing is terminated.

(Gate detection switch input processing of main control board)
The gate detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a gate detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a. If the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input (step S250-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-2, and if the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has not been input (step S250-). 1: No), the current gate detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number (G) of the ordinary symbol pending storage, which is the number of the ordinary symbol pending storages stored in the ordinary symbol pending storage area, is less than four. If the number of ordinary symbol reservations (G) is less than 4 (step S250-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-3, and if the number of ordinary symbol reservations (G) is not less than 4 (step S250-). 2: No), the current gate detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S250-3, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding (1) to the normal symbol hold count (G) and updating (G ← G + 1), and in step S250-4, acquires a hit determination random value. Then, the vacant storage units are sequentially searched from the first storage unit in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, and the obtained hit determination random number value is stored in the vacant storage unit.

  In step S250-5, the main CPU 110a obtains a random number value for determining a normal symbol, searches the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area for an empty storage unit, and sequentially searches the empty storage unit. The acquired normal symbol determination random number value is stored, and in step S250-6, the normal symbol variation pattern determination random value is acquired, and the storage units that are vacant in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area are sequentially stored. The search is performed, and the obtained random number value for determining a general-purpose variation pattern is stored in an empty storage unit.

  In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a obtains a random number value for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern, searches the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area sequentially for empty storage units, and searches for empty storage units. The obtained random number value for determining a general-purpose variation pattern is stored in the storage unit.

  As described above, in the predetermined storage unit of the ordinary symbol holding storage area, the general symbol holding memory including the random number for hit determination, the random number for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining the general figure variation pattern, and the like is stored. (Corresponding to a public figure determination information acquisition unit and a general figure determination information storage unit).

  In step S250-7, the main CPU 110a refers to the ordinary symbol holding number (G1), which is the number of ordinary symbol holding memories in the ordinary symbol holding memory area, and updates the ordinary symbol holding number updated in step S250-3. An ordinary symbol storage designation command corresponding to (G1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S250-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal input from the gate detection switch 44a is due to the passing of the game ball to the right general gate 44 provided in the right area of the game area 5a. I do. If the game ball is passed to the right general gate 44 (step S250-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-9, and the game ball is passed to the right general gate 44. If not (step S250-8: No), the current gate detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S250-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state). If the current gaming state is in the non-hours-saving gaming state (step S250-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-10, and if the current gaming state is not in the non-hours-saving gaming state (step S250-9). : No), the current gate detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S250-10, the main CPU 110a determines that the game ball has been shot in the right area of the game area 5a despite the game state in which the game ball should be shot in the left area of the game area 5a. An error designation command for right-handed operation is set in the effect transmission data storage area on the assumption that an error has occurred. As a result, a right-handed error designation command can be transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 fires a game ball from the right area of the game area 5a to the left area of the game area 5a to the player. An error notification (right-handed warning) of a right-handed error for prompting (warning) can be executed. When this processing ends, the current gate detection switch input processing ends.

(Winning confirmation process for main control board)
The winning confirmation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a winning confirmation process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the passage detection switch 52a. If the detection signal from the passage detection switch 52a has been input (S260-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S260-2, and if the detection signal from the passage detection switch 52a has not been input (S260-1: No), the process moves to step S260-3.

  In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a updates (D ← D-1) by subtracting “1” from the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of gaming balls winning (entering) the winning opening. In S260-3, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning ball counter (D) is larger than an upper limit value (20) (corresponding to an error determining means). If the number is larger than the upper limit (20) (S260-3: Yes), the number of game balls winning the winning opening is excessive (error) than the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball channel 52. If so, the process proceeds to step S260-6, and if it is equal to or less than the upper limit (20) (S260-3: No), the process proceeds to step S260-4.

  In step S260-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the winning ball counter (D) is smaller than a lower limit (−10) (corresponding to an error determination unit). If the number is smaller than the lower limit value (−10) (S260-4: Yes), the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path 52 is excessive (error) than the number of game balls winning the winning opening (error). , The process proceeds to step S260-5, and if it is equal to or more than the lower limit (−10) (S260-4: No), the current winning confirmation process ends.

  The main CPU 110a determines in step S260-5 that the error is determined again as an error again when the winning ball counter (D) is decremented by "1", not when the winning confirmation process is executed next. The counter (D) is updated by adding “1” (D ← D + 1), and the process proceeds to step S260-7.

  In step S260-6, the main CPU 110a determines that the winning ball is again determined to be an error again when the winning ball counter (D) is incremented by “1”, not when the next winning confirmation process is executed. The counter (D) is updated by subtracting “1” from the counter (D) (D ← D−1), and the process proceeds to step S260-7.

  In step S260-7, the main CPU 110a generates an abnormal prize (ball entry) in which the number of game balls that have won the various prize holes and the number of game balls that are discharged from the prize ball channel 52 are different (not coincident). As a result, an error designation command for abnormal winning is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Accordingly, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning is notified of an abnormal winning error described later to notify that an abnormal winning has occurred.

  In step S260-8, the main CPU 110a sets external information data (output data) for outputting an abnormal winning signal indicating that an abnormal winning (ball entry) has occurred. As a result, an abnormal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can recognize (specify) that an abnormal winning has occurred. When this processing ends, the current winning confirmation processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, the difference (width) in the plus direction between the upper limit value, which is one of the determination values for determining the occurrence of abnormal winning, and the initial value “0” of the winning ball counter is determined by the other determination. It is set to be larger than the amount of deviation (width) in the negative direction between the lower limit value, which is the value, and the initial value “0” of the winning ball counter. That is, the amount of deviation in the negative direction is smaller. Thus, while absorbing the time lag of the gaming balls flowing into the various winning openings flowing down the winning ball flow path 52, the erroneous determination of abnormal winning due to the excessive winning balls is reduced, and the structure around the passage detection switch 52a is reduced. It is possible to quickly detect the occurrence of an abnormal prize due to an insufficient number of prize balls due to the above problem.

  Also, the lower limit, which is the other determination value, is smaller than the difference (width) in the positive direction between the upper limit value, which is one determination value for determining the occurrence of abnormal winning, and the initial value “0” of the winning ball counter in the positive direction. The amount of deviation (width) in the minus direction between the value and the initial value “0” of the winning ball counter may be set to a larger value, or both may be set to the same value.

(Special figure special power control processing of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 27, the special figure special power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special power processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special power processing data = 0, special processing is performed. The process proceeds to a symbol storage determination process (step S310). If the special figure special power processing data = 1, the process proceeds to a special symbol variation process (step S320). If the special figure special power process data = 2, a special symbol stop process. The process proceeds to (Step S330). If the special figure special power processing data = 3, the process proceeds to the big hit game processing (Step S340). If the special figure special power processing data = 4, the process proceeds to the big hit game end processing (Step S350). If the processing is shifted to the special figure special power processing data = 5, the processing is shifted to the small hitting game processing (step S360).

  This "special figure special power processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the special figure special power control processing as described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. .

(Special design memory determination process for main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being changed and displayed. Here, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol time counter = 0) (step S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2, and the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display (special symbol). If the time counter> 0) (step S310-1: Yes), the current special symbol storage determination process ends.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol hold number (U2), which is the number of second hold memories stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more (step S310-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-3, and the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If not (step S310-2: No), the process moves to step S310-4.

  The main CPU 110a updates (U2 ← U2-1) by subtracting “1” from the second special symbol reservation number (U2) in step S310-3.

  In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the number of first hold memories stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, is 1 or more. When it is determined that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is 1 or more (step S310-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-5, and the first special symbol hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If not (step S310-4: No), the process moves to step S318-1.

  The main CPU 110a updates (U1 ← U1-1) by subtracting “1” from the first special symbol hold number (U1) in step S310-5.

  In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the special symbol holding number (U1 or U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or S310-5. . Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit or the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit.

  Note that the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) (used for the previous fluctuation display). The random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure variation pattern determination) are erased from the special symbol holding storage area.

  In this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted (digested) with priority over the first special symbol holding storage area. The first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area may be shifted (digested) in the order in which the game balls have won the 45 or the second starting port 47, or the first special symbol holding storage area. May be shifted (digested) with priority over the second special symbol holding storage area.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a issues a special symbol storage designation command based on the first special symbol hold number or the second special symbol hold number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. It is determined and the determined special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  The main CPU 110a, in step S311, based on the data (the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination) stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol holding storage area in the above step S310-6. Determines whether to win a jackpot, etc., determines the special symbol and stop symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and sets the design symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect. Perform processing (corresponding to special game determination means). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S312, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol based on the data (the random number for reach determination and the random number for determining the special figure variation pattern) written in the determination storage area (zeroth storage section) of the special symbol holding storage area. A special figure variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S313, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state at the start of the change, sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area, and determines in step S314 in step S312. The change time (counter value) of the special symbol based on the change pattern is set in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of S110.

  In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets, in a predetermined processing area, variable display data for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to perform the variable display (LED blinking) of the special symbol. . Thus, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in the data creation processing in step S700, and the created data (signal) is output in step S800. By the output in the control process, the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 starts the variable display of the special symbol.

  In step S316, the main CPU 110a sets “00H” in a customer waiting determination flag for determining whether or not the special symbol change display is not performed, and in step S317, the special figure is set. "1" is set in the special power processing data, preparations are made to shift the processing to the above-described special symbol variation processing, and the current special symbol storage determination processing ends.

  In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting determination flag is “01H”. If the customer waiting determination flag is not “01H” (step S318-1: No), the process proceeds to step S318-2, and the customer waiting determination flag is “01H” (step S318-1). : Yes), the current special symbol storage determination process ends.

  In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets “01H” in a customer waiting determination flag for determining whether or not the customer is in a customer waiting state in which a special symbol change display is not performed. In step 3, a customer waiting command indicating that the customer is waiting is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the special symbol storage determination process of this time is ended. As a result, the customer waiting command can be transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the later-described customer waiting effect can be executed by the effect control board 130 that has received the customer waiting command.

(Jack judgment process for main control board)
The big hit determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process in the main control board 110.

  In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the big hit determination process is to be performed by the first hold storage based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 45. If the main CPU 110a determines that it is the first startup port (step S311-1: Yes), it moves the process to step S311-2 and determines that it is not the first startup port (it is the second startup port). In this case (step S311-1: No), the processing is shifted to step S311-3.

  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a selects the big hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. On the other hand, in step S311-3, the main CPU 110a selects the big hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 110a compares the current probability game state and the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area with the selected jackpot determination table. Then, it is determined which of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “loss”.

  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a jackpot has been won. When it is determined that the big hit has been won (step S311-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for the big hit shown in FIG. 8 in step S311-6, and proceeds to step S311-10. Transfer.

  When determining that the big hit has not been won (step S311-5: No), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small hit has been won in step S311-7. When it is determined that the small hit has been won (step S311-7: Yes), the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for the small hit shown in FIG. 8 in step S311-8, and proceeds to step S311-10. Transfer processing to

  If it is determined that the small hit has not been won (step S311-7: No), the main CPU 110a selects the special design determination table for the loss shown in FIG. 8 in step S311-9, and proceeds to step S311. The processing is shifted to 10.

  In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a determines the type of the starting port for which the jackpot determination (lottery) is to be performed, the special symbol determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area, The type of the special symbol (stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the selected special symbol determination table.

  The determined special symbol (stop symbol data) is used to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 32, as described later, and a special winning opening in the big hit game process of FIG. It is also used to determine the operation mode, and is also used to determine the game state after the end of the big hit in the big hit game end processing of FIG.

In step S311-11, the main CPU 110a sets stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-10 in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area, and in step S311-12, sets the above step S311-8. The effect symbol designating command corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in is set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the current special figure variation pattern determination processing ends. Thereby, the effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
(Determining special figure fluctuation pattern of main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S312-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special figure variation pattern determination processing is to be performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 45. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening is the first starting port (step S312-1: Yes), in step S312-2, the main CPU 110a selects the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. The process moves to S312-4.

  When determining that the main CPU 110a is not the first starting port (it is the second starting port) (Step S312-1: No), the main CPU 110a selects the variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. The process moves to step S312-4.

  In step S312-4, the main CPU 110a determines the result of the jackpot determination (lottery), the type of the special symbol (stop symbol data), and the reach determination randomness stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area. By comparing the numerical value and the random number for determining a special figure variation pattern, the current number of reserved balls, and the selected variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined.

  In step S312-5, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the special symbol time counter. Note that the special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.

  In step S312-6, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Special design change processing of main control board)
The special symbol change processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process in the main control board 110.

  In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in step S312-5 has elapsed (whether the special symbol time counter = 0). When determining that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S320-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S320-2 and determines that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S320-1: In No), the current special symbol variation process is ended.

  In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops the change display of the special symbol. Specifically, stop special figure data for stopping and displaying the special symbol determined in step S311-10 on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is set in a predetermined processing area. . As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, and the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) is notified to the player.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the special symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125) in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets “2” in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to shift the processing to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 32, and ends the current special symbol change processing.

(Special design stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

  In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (whether the special symbol time counter is 0 or not). When determining that the symbol stop time has elapsed (step S330-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S330-2, and determines that the symbol stop time has not elapsed (step S330- 1: No), the present special symbol stop processing ends.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is set (ON) in the time saving game flag storage area. When the time saving game flag is set (step S330-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S330-3, and when the time saving game flag is not set (step S330-2: No). Then, the process moves to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a updates “J” by subtracting “1” from the number of time savings (J) stored in the time savings (J) storage area (J ← J−1). , It is determined whether the new number of time savings (J) is “0”. If the main CPU 110a determines that the number of time savings (J) is “0” (step S330-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-5, and the number of time savings (J) is not “0”. If it is determined (Step S330-4: No), the process proceeds to Step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a clears (OFF) the time reduction game flag set in the time reduction game flag storage area. As a result, the time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is set (ON) in the high-probability game flag storage area. When the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area (step S330-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S330-7 and stores the high-probability game flag in the high-probability game flag storage area. If the game flag has not been set (step S330-6: No), the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a updates (X ← X−1) by subtracting “1” from the high-probability game count (X) stored in the high-probability game count (X) storage area. In S330-8, it is determined whether or not the new high-probability game count (X) is “0”. When determining that the number of high-probability games (X) is “0” (step S330-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S330-9 and sets the number of high-probability games (X) to “ If it is determined that the value is not “0” (step S330-8: No), the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a clears (OFF) the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area. Thereby, the high-probability gaming state ends and the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a checks the current game state, and sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a special jackpot symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a special jackpot symbol (stop special figure data = 10-16, 20-24). If the main CPU 110a determines that the symbol is a special jackpot (step S330-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-12, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a special jackpot (S330-12: No), Then, the process is shifted to step S330-15.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special power processing data and prepares to shift the processing to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG. 33, and resets the gaming state and the number of times saved in step S330-13. . Specifically, the data stored in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game count (X) storage area, the time reduction game flag storage area, and the time reduction number (J) storage area are cleared.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a selects the big hit game control table shown in FIG. 12 to start the big hit game.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a small hit special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is of a small hit special symbol (stop special figure data = 17, 18). If the main CPU 110a determines that the symbol is a small hit special symbol (step S330-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-16, and if the main CPU 110a determines that the symbol is not a special small hit symbol (step S330-15: No). ), The process proceeds to step S330-21.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 110a prepares to set 5 in the special figure special power processing data and shifts the processing to the small hitting game processing shown in FIG. 35, and in step S330-17, starts the small hitting game. The small hit game control table shown in FIG. 12 is selected.

  In step S330-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the special game timer counter based on the selected game control table and the special symbol stop symbol data. Note that the special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.

  In step S330-19, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of stop symbol data (big hit, small hit) in the effect transmission data storage area. Thus, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S330-20, the main CPU 110a sets a special winning opening opening / closing control table. Specifically, referring to the big hit game control table shown in FIG. 12 (a) or the small hit game control table shown in FIG. 12 (b), a special winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No) corresponding to the stop symbol data. Is set. When this processing ends, the current special symbol stop processing ends.

  In step S330-21, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 28, and ends the present special symbol stop processing.

(Big hit game processing of main control board)
The big hit game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game process in the main control board 110.

  In step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the round game number (R) storage area. When determining that the opening is currently being performed (step S340-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S340-2, and determines that the opening is not currently being performed (step S340-1: No). Shifts the processing to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in step S330-18 has elapsed. When determining that the opening time has elapsed (step S340-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S340-3 and determines that the opening time has not elapsed (step S340-2: In No), the current jackpot game process ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process in step S340-3. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the number-of-round-games (R) storage area to update (R ← R + 1). Here, since no round game has been performed yet, “1” is stored in the round game number (R) storage area.

  The main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process in step S340-4. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the special winning opening 50 has not been opened yet, "1" is stored in the opening count (K) storage area.

  The energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. Also, referring to the special winning opening mode determination table set in step S330-20, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is specially set based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K). Set to the game timer counter.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, a round designation command for the first opening is set. When this process ends, the current big hit game process ends.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening 50 is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When determining that the special winning opening 50 is open (step S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S340-7 and determines that the special winning opening 50 is not open ( In step S340-6: No), the process is transferred to step S340-9.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening condition of the special winning opening has been satisfied. Specifically, that the value of the special winning opening winning ball counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or that the opening time has elapsed at the current number of times of opening (K) (special game timer counter = 0) Is applicable. When determining that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S340-7: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S340-8 and determines that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S340-). 7: No), the current jackpot game process ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs an interval (large winning opening closing) process in step S340-8. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b to convert the open / close member 51 of the special winning opening 50 to the closed state is cleared. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the special winning opening 50 is closed. Also, referring to the special winning opening mode determination table set in step S330-20, the closing time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K). Set to the game timer counter. When this process ends, the current big hit game process ends.

  In the interval (large winning opening closing) process of step S340-8, an interval designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area is stored in the transmission data storage area for effect. It may be set so that the interval designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current interval (large winning opening closing) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. If the main CPU 110a determines that it is during the interval (close the special winning opening) (step S340-9: Yes), it moves the process to step S340-10 and determines that it is not during the interval (close the special winning opening). In this case (step S340-9: No), the processing is shifted to step S340-19.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening 50 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter has become “0”. When determining that the closing time has ended (step S340-10: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S340-11, and determines that the closing time has not ended (step S340-10: In No), the current jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special winning opening winning ball counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or whether the number of times of opening (K) has reached the maximum number of times of opening. When determining that the current round has ended (step S340-11: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S340-13 and determines that the current round has not ended (step S340-). 11: No), the process moves to a step S340-12.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of release (K) stored in the number of times of release (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). The energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. Also, referring to the special winning opening mode determination table set in step S330-20, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is specially set based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K). Set to the game timer counter. When this processing ends, the current jackpot game processing ends.

  The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-13 whether or not the last round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area has reached the maximum number of round games of the current big hit game. If it is determined that the final round has ended (step S340-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-17, and if it is determined that the final round has not ended (step S340-13: No), The process moves to step S340-14.

  The main CPU 110a performs a round data setting process in step S340-14. More specifically, “0” is set in the number-of-openings (K) storage area and the special winning opening winning ball number counter (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) stored in the number-of-round-games (R) storage area is set. ) Is updated by adding “1” to (R ← R + 1).

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). The energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. Also, referring to the special winning opening mode determination table set in step S330-20, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is specially set based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K). Set to the game timer counter.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current big hit game process ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs an ending shift process in step S340-17. More specifically, "0" is set in the number-of-openings (K) storage area, the special winning opening winning ball number counter (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) storage area to clear the value of each storage area. . The ending time is set in the special game timer counter based on the big hit game control table and the stop symbol data. Note that the special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets a jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the ending designation command for the jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current big hit game process ends.

  In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. If the ending is being performed (step S340-19: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S340-20. If the ending is not being performed (step S340-19: No), the main CPU 110a executes the current jackpot game processing. finish.

  In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time has elapsed. When determining that the ending time has elapsed (step S340-20: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-21, and determines that the ending time has not elapsed (step S340-20: No). ), The current jackpot game process ends.

  In step S340-21, the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special power processing data, prepares to shift the processing to the big hit game end processing shown in FIG. 34, and ends the current big hit game processing.

(End processing of jackpot game on main control board)
The big hit game end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board 110.

  In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop symbol data set in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area, and selects the game state setting table shown in FIG.

  The main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process in step S350-2. Specifically, with reference to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 14, if the stop symbol data sets the high probability game flag, the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, If the stop symbol data does not set the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area or the high-probability game flag storage area is cleared. For example, if the stop symbol data is "10", a high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area, and if the stop symbol data is "16", the high-probability game flag is not set.

  The main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process in step S350-3. Specifically, referring to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 14, if the stop symbol data sets the number of high-probability games, a predetermined number is stored in the remaining change number (X) storage area of the high-probability game state. Set the number of times. For example, if the stop symbol data is "10", 10000 is set in the remaining variation count (X) storage area of the high-probability gaming state, and if the stop symbol data is "16", the remaining variation of the high-probability gaming state is set. Nothing is set or 0 is set in the count (X) storage area.

  The main CPU 110a performs a time reduction game flag setting process in step S350-4. Specifically, with reference to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 14, when the stop symbol data sets the time reduction game flag (for example, when the stop symbol data is “10”), the time reduction game flag is set. When the time reduction game flag is set in the storage area and the stop symbol data does not set the time reduction game flag (for example, when the stop symbol data is “14”), the time reduction game flag is set in the time reduction game flag storage area. Not set or clear the time reduction game flag storage area.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a performs a number-of-time-savings-games setting process. Specifically, with reference to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 14, if the stop symbol data sets the number of time-saving games, the predetermined number of times of the remaining fluctuations (J) in the time-saving game state is stored in the storage area. Is set. For example, if the stop symbol data is "10", 10000 is set in the remaining variation number (J) storage area of the time reduction game state, and if the stop symbol data is "23", the remaining variation number of the time reduction game state (J) is set. J) Set 10 in the storage area.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state with reference to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time reduction game flag storage area, and transmits a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state to the production transmission data storage area. Set to. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets “0” in the special figure special power processing data, prepares to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 28, and ends the current big hit game end processing.

(Small hit game processing of main control board)
The small hitting game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the small hitting game process in the main control board.

  The main CPU 110a determines in step S360-1 whether the opening is currently being performed. When it is determined that the opening is currently being performed (step S360-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S360-2, and when it is determined that the opening is not currently being performed (step S360-1: No). Shifts the processing to step S360-5.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-18 has elapsed. When determining that the opening time has elapsed (step S360-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S360-3 and determines that the opening time has not elapsed (step S360-2: In No), the current jackpot game process ends.

  In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the special winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. = 13) set in step S330-20 is selected.

  The main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process in step S360-4. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the special winning opening 50 has not been opened yet, "1" is stored in the opening count (K) storage area.

  The energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. Also, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is set in the special game timer counter based on the number of times of opening (K) with reference to the special winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S330-20. When this processing is completed, the current small hitting game processing is completed.

  In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening 50 is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When determining that the special winning opening 50 is open (step S360-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S360-6 and determines that the special winning opening 50 is not open ( In step S360-5: No), the process is transferred to step S360-8.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening condition of the special winning opening has been satisfied. Specifically, that the value of the special winning opening winning ball counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or that the opening time has elapsed at the current number of times of opening (K) (special game timer counter = 0) Is applicable. When determining that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S360-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S360-7 and determines that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S360-). 6: No), the current small hitting game process ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs an interval (large winning opening closing) process in step S360-7. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b to convert the open / close member 51 of the special winning opening 50 to the closed state is cleared. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the special winning opening 50 is closed. Also, referring to the special winning opening mode determination table set in step S330-20, the closing time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K). Set to the game timer counter. When this processing is completed, the current small hitting game processing is completed.

  In step S360-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current interval (large winning opening closing) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the interval (the special winning opening is closed) is being performed (step S360-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S360-9, and determines that the interval is not being performed (the special winning opening is closed). In this case (step S360-8: No), the processing is moved to step S360-14.

  The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening 50 has ended in step S360-9. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter has become “0”. When determining that the closing time has ended (step S360-9: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S360-10, and determines that the closing time has not ended (step S360-9: In No), the current small hitting game process is terminated.

  In step S360-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small hit ending condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special winning opening winning ball counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or whether the number of times of opening (K) has reached the maximum number of times of opening. When determining that the small hit end condition is satisfied (step S360-10: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S360-12, and determines that the small hit end condition is not satisfied (step S360-10). In S360-10: No), the process proceeds to step S360-11.

  The main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process in step S360-11. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of release (K) stored in the number of times of release (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). The energization data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. Further, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (K) with reference to the special winning opening mode determining table set in step S330-20. When this processing ends, the current small hitting game processing ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs an ending shift process in step S360-12. Specifically, "0" is set in the number-of-openings (K) storage area and the special winning opening winning ball number counter (C) storage area to clear the values in each storage area. The ending time is set in the special game timer counter based on the small hit game control table and the stop symbol data. Note that the special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.

  In step S360-13, the main CPU 110a sets a small hit ending designation command corresponding to the stopped symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the ending designation command for the small hit is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this processing is completed, the current small hitting game processing is completed.

  In step S360-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. If the ending is being performed (step S360-14: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S360-15. If the ending is not being performed (step S360-14: No), the main CPU 110a executes the current jackpot game processing. finish.

  The main CPU 110a determines in step S360-15 whether the ending time has elapsed. When determining that the ending time has elapsed (step S360-15: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S360-16, and determines that the ending time has not elapsed (step S360-15: No). ), The current small hitting game process is terminated.

  In step S360-16, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 28, and ends the current small hitting game processing.

(General control and control of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 36, the general-purpose control system will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose power control process in the main control board 110.

  In step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the general-purpose general-purpose processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the general-purpose general-purpose processing data loaded in step S402, and, if the general-purpose general-purpose processing data = 0, sets a normal symbol. The processing is shifted to the fluctuation processing (step S410), and if the general-purpose electric power processing data = 1, the processing is shifted to the auxiliary game processing (step S420).

  This “Public-Public-Electric-Processing Data” is set as needed in each subroutine of the PIX-Public-Electricity control processing, as described later, so that the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. become.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process of step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process, an ordinary symbol determination process of determining an ordinary symbol to be stopped and displayed, an ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process of determining a variation time of an ordinary symbol, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the auxiliary game process of step S420, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the auxiliary game (hit game). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Normal symbol fluctuation processing of the main control board)
With reference to FIG. 37, the ordinary symbol change processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol changing process in the main control board 110.

  In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 110a determines that the normal symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (ordinary symbol time counter> 0) (step S410-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-15, and the fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol is performed. If not (step S410-1: No), the process moves to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol reservation number (G1) storage area that stores the general symbol reservation number is 1 or more. If the main CPU 110a determines that the value of the ordinary symbol hold count (G1) storage area is equal to or greater than 1 (step S410-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S410-3, and proceeds to step S410-3. If it is determined that the value of the storage area is not equal to or greater than 1 (step S410-2: No), the current ordinary symbol variation process ends.

  In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates (G ← G−1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the normal symbol hold count (G1) storage area.

  In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area corresponding to the ordinary symbol holding number (G1) storage area subtracted in step S410-2. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit in the ordinary symbol storage area is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit.

  The data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit), and the data already stored in the determination storage area (the hit determination random number value used for the previous variation display). , The ordinary symbol determination random number value and the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number value) are deleted from the ordinary symbol holding storage area. In addition, a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of ordinary symbol reservations (G1) stored in the ordinary symbol reservation number (G1) storage area is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the normal symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The main CPU 110a selects the ordinary symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 15 in step S410-5, and performs a hit determination process in step S410-6. Specifically, the current time-saving game state and the random number for hit determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area are compared with the hit determination table for normal symbols selected in step S410-5. Judgment as to whether or not it is a win (normal lottery for a symbol) is performed.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a selects the stop symbol determination table for the normal symbol shown in FIG. 15, and performs the normal symbol determination process in step S410-8. Specifically, the current time saving game state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-6, the normal symbol determination random number stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area, and step S410-7. The type of the normal symbol (stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the stop symbol determination table for the normal symbol selected in the above, and is set in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.

  In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a specifies the general symbol designation command based on the stop symbol data of the ordinary symbol determined in step S410-8, and sets the identified general symbol designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect. I do. As a result, the general figure designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a selects the fluctuation pattern determination table for the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 15, and in step S410-11, performs a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, the current time-saving game state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-6, the random number value for determining a general symbol variation pattern stored in the 0th storage unit of the ordinary symbol holding storage area, and step S410 The fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the normal symbol is determined by collating with the fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal symbol selected in -10.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a specifies a general figure change specifying command corresponding to the normal symbol change time (change pattern) determined in step S410-11, and uses the specified general figure change specifying command for production. Set in the transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal figure change designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-13, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol determined in step S410-11 in the ordinary symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the above step S110.

  In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the ordinary symbol variation display data on the ordinary symbol display 62 and starts the variation display of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol variation display data includes information such as the result of the ordinary symbol hit lottery, the normally stopped symbol data, and the variation time (variation pattern) of the ordinary symbol.

  In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol time counter set in step S410-13 has become "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol has ended (step S410-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-16, and determines that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol has not ended. In (Step S410-15: No), the current ordinary symbol variation process ends.

  In step S410-16, the main CPU 110a stops the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol so as to become the stopped symbol corresponding to the stopped symbol data of the ordinary symbol. Specifically, if the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol, the stop symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol indicator 62. If the stop symbol data of the ordinary symbol is a lost stop symbol, the normal symbol indicator is displayed. At 62, the losing stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an ordinary symbol confirmation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. The main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S410-19 if it is a hit stop symbol (step S410-18: Yes), and if it is not a hit stop symbol (step S410-18: No), The fluctuation processing ends.

  In step S410-19, the main CPU 110a sets “1” in the general-purpose general-purpose processing data in order to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing illustrated in FIG. 2 Select the opening mode determination table for the starting port.

  In step S410-21, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the opening mode determination table selected in step S410-20 and the stop symbol data of the ordinary symbol. Note that the auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the time control process of step S110.

  In step S410-22, the main CPU 110a issues a winning opening designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data of the ordinary symbol based on the opening mode determination table of the second starting port selected in step S410-20. Set in the transmission data storage area. Thus, the winning opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this processing is completed, the current ordinary symbol variation processing is completed.

(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110.

  In step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening is currently being performed. When determining that the opening is currently being performed (step S420-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S420-2, and determines that the opening is not currently being performed (step S420-1: No). Shifts the processing to step S420-5.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in step S410-21 has elapsed. When determining that the opening time has elapsed (step S420-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S420-3 and determines that the opening time has not elapsed (step S420-2: In No), the current auxiliary game process ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game start process in step S420-3. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of release (S) stored in the number of times of release (S) storage area to update (S ← S + 1). In this case, since the opening of the second starting port has not been performed yet, “1” is stored in the opening count (S) storage area.

  The main CPU 110a performs a second opening opening process in step S420-4. Specifically, energization data for energizing the second opening / closing solenoid 48b for opening the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 is set. As a result, the movable member 48 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 47 is opened. Further, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S) with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG.

  In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second start port is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second opening / closing solenoid 48b has been set. When determining that the second startup port 47 is open (step S420-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S420-6 and determines that the second startup port 47 is not open. In this case (step S420-5: No), the processing moves to step S420-8.

  In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for terminating the opening of the second startup port is satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the value of the winning ball counter (L) for the second starting opening has reached the specified number (10) or that the opening time in the current opening count (S) has elapsed (the auxiliary game timer counter = 0). When determining that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S420-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S420-7 and determines that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S420-). 6: No), the current auxiliary game process ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs a second startup port closing process in step S420-7. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the second opening / closing solenoid 48b to convert the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 to the closed state is cleared. As a result, the movable member 48 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the second starting port 47 is closed. In addition, the closing time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S) with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG. When this processing ends, the current auxiliary game processing ends.

  In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current interval (closed) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second opening / closing solenoid 48b has been set. When determining that the interval (closed) is being performed (step S420-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S420-9, and determines that the interval is not (closed) (step S420-8). : No), the current auxiliary game process ends.

  In step S420-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time of the second starting port has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter is not at “0”. When determining that the closing time of the second startup port has elapsed (step S420-9: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S420-10, and the closing time of the second startup port has not elapsed. Is determined (step S420-9: No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

  In step S420-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final opening has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of releases (S) stored in the number-of-openings (S) storage area has reached the maximum number of times this auxiliary game has been opened. If the final opening has been completed (step S420-10: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to step S420-13, and if the final opening has not been completed (step S420-10: No). Then, the process is shifted to step S420-11.

  In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a performs processing for advancing an auxiliary game. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of release (S) stored in the number of times of release (S) storage area to update (S ← S + 1).

  The main CPU 110a performs a second opening opening process in step S420-12. Specifically, energization data for energizing the second opening / closing solenoid 48b for opening the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 is set. As a result, the movable member 48 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 47 is opened. Further, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S) with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port shown in FIG. When this processing ends, the current auxiliary game processing ends.

  In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a performs an end process of the auxiliary game. Specifically, the value of each storage area is cleared by setting “0” in the storage area for the number of times of opening of the second startup port (S) and the storage area for the winning ball counter (L) for the second startup port.

  In step S420-14, the main CPU 110a sets a winning ending designation command corresponding to the current auxiliary game in the effect transmission data storage area. Thus, the winning ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  In step S420-15, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the general-purpose general-purpose process data, and prepares to shift the process to the normal symbol variation process illustrated in FIG. When this processing ends, the current auxiliary game processing ends.

(Main control board abnormality judgment processing)
The abnormality determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the abnormality determination processing of the main control board 110.

  First, in step S600-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the magnetic detection sensor 53a. If the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 53a has been input (S600-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S600-2, and if the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 53a has not been input (S600-1). : No), the process moves to step S600-6.

  In step S600-2, the main CPU 110a adds and updates “1” to a magnetic detection counter (M) for measuring a time (number of times) that a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined magnetic force is continuously detected ( M ← M + 1).

  In step S600-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the magnetic detection counter (M) is greater than a specified value (50) (corresponding to an error determination unit). If the value of the magnetic detection counter (M) is larger than the specified value (50) (S600-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S600-4, where the magnetic detection counter (M) is set to the specified value. (50) In the following cases (S600-3: No), the process moves to step S600-7. Note that the abnormality determination process is a process executed in a timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Therefore, when the counter (M) for magnetic detection reaches a specified value, a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined magnetic force is detected. Is detected continuously for 0.2 seconds.

  In step S600-4, the main CPU 110a sets an error designation command for magnetic abnormality in the effect transmission data storage area on the assumption that a magnetic abnormality in which magnetism exceeding a predetermined magnetic force is continuously detected has occurred. Thereby, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for the magnetic anomaly performs an error notification of the magnetic anomaly described later to notify that the magnetic anomaly has occurred.

  In step S600-5, the main CPU 110a sets external information data (output data) for outputting an abnormality signal indicating occurrence of a magnetic abnormality. As a result, an abnormal signal indicating the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can grasp (specify) that a magnetic abnormality has occurred.

  In step S600-6, the main CPU 110a clears, to 0, the value of a magnetic detection counter (M) for measuring the time during which a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined magnetic force is continuously detected. In this manner, by clearing the value of the magnetic detection counter (M) to 0, even if the abnormality determination processing is executed next, the error designation command for the magnetic abnormality or the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality is immediately indicated. No abnormal signal is transmitted.

  In step S600-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the radio wave detection sensor 54a. If the detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor 54a has been input (S600-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S600-8, and if the detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor 54a has not been input (S600- 7: No), the process proceeds to step S600-12.

  In step S600-8, the main CPU 110a updates "N" by adding "1" to a radio wave detection counter (N) for measuring a time (number of times) that a radio wave of a predetermined frequency is continuously detected. ← N + 1).

  In step S600-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) is greater than a prescribed value (50) (corresponding to an error determination unit). If the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) is larger than the specified value (50) (S600-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S600-10, where the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) is increased. If the value is equal to or smaller than the specified value (50) (S600-9: No), the current abnormality determination process ends.

  Since the abnormality determination process is a process executed in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms, when the radio wave detection counter (N) has reached the specified value, the radio wave of the predetermined frequency is generated. This means that the detection is continued for 0.2 seconds.

  In step S600-10, the main CPU 110a sets an error designation command for radio wave abnormality in the production transmission data storage area assuming that a radio wave abnormality in which a radio wave of a predetermined frequency is continuously detected has occurred. Accordingly, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for radio wave abnormality performs error notification of a radio wave abnormality described later to notify that a radio wave abnormality has occurred.

  In step S600-11, the main CPU 110a sets external information data (output data) for outputting an abnormal signal indicating occurrence of radio wave abnormality. As a result, an abnormal signal indicating the occurrence of the radio wave abnormality is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and the external device can grasp (specify) that the radio wave abnormality has occurred.

  In step S600-12, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) for measuring the time during which the radio wave of the predetermined frequency is continuously detected to 0, and executes the current abnormality determination process. finish. As described above, by clearing the value of the radio wave detection counter (N) to 0, even if the abnormality determination processing is executed next, the error designation command for the radio wave abnormality or the occurrence of the radio wave abnormality is immediately indicated. No abnormal signal is transmitted.

(Main processing of the payout control unit)
The main process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A is a flowchart illustrating a main process of the payout control unit 121.

  First, the payout CPU 121a performs an initialization process in step H10. Specifically, the storage contents of the payout RAM 121c and the stack area are cleared, and the setting processing of the payout RAM 121c at the time of power-on is performed.

  In step H20, the payout CPU 121a determines whether a power-off notification command has been received. If the power-off notification command has been received (H20: Yes), the process proceeds to step H21. If the power-off notification command has not been received (H20: No), step H20 is repeated.

  The payout CPU 121a prohibits the interruption in step H21, loads the unpaid number from the payout counter stored in the payout counter storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H22, and corresponds to the unpaid number loaded in step H23. A command transmission process at the time of power-off for transmitting the unpaid number of payout designation command to the main control board 110 is performed.

  As a result, the main control board 110 can grasp (specify) the remaining payout number (unpaid number) of the game balls paid out at the time of power-off (power failure), and the remaining payout number at power-on (restoration). A corresponding initial payout number designation command can be transmitted to the payout control board 120.

  The payout CPU 121a performs a process of clearing the output port in step H24, prohibits the RAM access in step H25, and waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

(Timer interrupt processing of the payout control unit)
The timer interruption process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the payout control unit 121. A clock pulse is generated at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the payout control board 120, so that a timer interrupt process described below is executed.

  First, in step H100, the payout CPU 121a performs a process of saving information stored in a register to a stack area, and in step H200, performs a command analysis process of analyzing a command stored in a reception buffer of the payout RAM 121c. .

  When receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 performs a command reception interrupt process (not shown) for storing the received command in the reception buffer. Analysis processing can be performed.

  In step H300, the payout CPU 121a performs various timer counters such as update processing of a payout timer counter such as a driving time of the payout motor 100b of the game ball payout apparatus 100 and an interval time provided after the payout of one unit (15) of game balls. Perform time control processing for updating. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a driving time timer counter or an interval time timer counter is performed.

  In step H400, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the open detection switch 31a, the payout ball detection switch 100a, the fullness detection switch 32a, and the ball presence detection switch 101a. Input control processing such as setting of predetermined data is performed.

  In step H500, the payout CPU 121a controls the initial payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 and the prize ball control for paying out the game balls for the payout number corresponding to the payout number designation command from the game ball payout apparatus 100. Perform processing.

  In step H600, the payout CPU 121a pays out the game ball dispensing apparatus 100 as a unit of a number of game balls equivalent to 100 yen while performing ball lending communication with a ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1. A ball lending control process for taking out is performed. The ball lending control process is performed based on the operation of the lending button of the lending operation unit 20.

  In step H700, the payout CPU 121a detects an event (abnormality) such as a frame open, the lower tray 12 being full, a payout abnormality, etc., based on input signals from the open detection switch 31a, the fullness detection switch 32a, the ball presence detection switch 101a and the like. The occurrence is determined, and an abnormality determination process is performed to prepare for transmitting an error specification command for opening a frame, an error specification command for a full abnormality, an error specification command for a dispensing abnormality, and the like to the main control board 110. This abnormality determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step H800, the payout CPU 121a performs data creation processing for creating data such as external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90 and drive data output to the payout motor 100b.

  In step H900, the payout CPU 121a outputs a command such as a port output process for outputting signals such as external information data and drive data created in H800, and a command set in the main control transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c. An output control process of executing a main control command transmission process of transmitting the command set to the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c to the effect control board 130 is performed. Note that the command transmission to the effect control board 130 may be such that the corresponding command is transmitted from the payout control board 120 to the main control board 110, and transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board. Good.

  In step H1000, the payout CPU 121a restores the information saved in step H100 to the register of the payout CPU 121a, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Abnormality determination processing of the payout control unit)
The abnormality determination process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormality determination process in the payout control unit 121.

  First, in step H700-1, the payout CPU 121a determines whether the detection signal from the open detection switch 31a has been switched from OFF to ON. If the detection signal of the open detection switch has been switched from OFF to ON (H700-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step H700-2, and if the detection signal of the open detection switch has not been switched from OFF to ON (H700-1). (−1: No), the process moves to step H700-3.

  In step H700-2, the payout CPU 121a sets a frame opening error designation command indicating that the glass frame 4 has been opened in the effect transmission data storage area. Accordingly, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the frame opening error designation command performs a process for performing a frame opening error notification and notifies that the frame opening has occurred.

  In step H700-3, the payout CPU 121a determines whether the detection signal from the open detection switch 31a has been switched from ON to OFF. If the detection signal of the opening detection switch has been switched from ON to OFF (H700-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step H700-4, and if the detection signal of the opening detection switch has not been switched from ON to OFF (H700-3). -3: No), the process moves to step H700-5.

  In step H700-4, the payout CPU 121a sets a frame opening error release designation command indicating that the glass frame 4 has been closed in the effect transmission data storage area. Thus, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the frame release error release designation command performs a process for ending the frame release error notification.

  In step S700-5, the payout CPU 121a determines whether the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a has been switched from OFF to ON. If the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a has been switched from OFF to ON (H700-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step H700-6, and the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a has been switched from OFF to ON. If not (H700-5: No), the process moves to step H700-7.

  In step H700-6, the payout CPU 121a sets an error designation command for a full abnormality indicating that the lower tray 12 is full of gaming balls in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for a full abnormality performs a process for starting an error notification of a full tray, and notifies that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. .

  In step H700-7, the payout CPU 121a determines whether the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a has been switched from ON to OFF. If the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a has been switched from ON to OFF (H700-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step H700-8, where the detection signal from the full detection switch 32a has been switched from ON to OFF. If not (H700-7: No), the process moves to step H700-9.

  In step H700-8, the payout CPU 121a sets an error release designation command for a full abnormality indicating that the full state of the lower tray 12 has been eliminated in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error release designation command for a full abnormality performs processing for terminating the error notification of the full plate.

  In step H700-9, the payout CPU 121a determines whether the detection signal from the ball presence detection switch 101a has been switched from ON to OFF. If the detection signal from the ball presence detection switch 101a has been switched from ON to OFF (H700-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step H700-10, where the detection signal from the ball presence detection switch 101a changes from ON to OFF. If it has not been switched (H700-9: No), the process moves to step H700-11.

  In step H700-10, the payout CPU 121a sets a payout abnormality error designation command indicating that the game balls stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are insufficient in the effect transmission data storage area. Accordingly, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for the payout abnormality performs a process for starting the error notification of the payout abnormality, and notifies that the payout abnormality has occurred.

  In step H700-11, the payout CPU 121a determines whether the detection signal from the ball presence detection switch 101a has been switched from OFF to ON. If the detection signal from the ball presence detection switch 101a has been switched from OFF to ON (H700-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step H700-12, where the detection signal from the ball presence detection switch 101a changes from OFF to ON. If it has not been switched (H700-11: No), the current abnormality determination processing ends.

  In step H700-12, the payout CPU 121a sets a payout abnormality error release designation command indicating that the shortage of the game balls stored in the game ball storage unit 101 has been resolved in the effect transmission data storage area. The current abnormality determination processing ends. Accordingly, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error release designation command for the abnormal payout performs a process for ending the error notification of the abnormal payout.

(Explanation of commands related to payout control board)
The types of commands transmitted between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A shows the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the payout control board 120. FIG. 42B shows the types of commands transmitted from the payout control board 120 to the main control board 110 or the effect control board 130. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted to.

  The “initial payout number designation command” is a command for instructing the payout control board 120 of the remaining payout number of the game balls interrupted at the time of power interruption (power failure), and “MODE” is “FAH”. The information “DATA” is set in accordance with the number of remaining payouts.

  The initial number-of-payouts designation command is, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on (restored), the initial number-of-payouts designation command corresponding to the remaining number of game balls paid out at the time of power-off. Sent to. Specifically, in step S10-16, an initial payout number designation command corresponding to the value of the payout counter referred to in step S10-15 is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the output of step S800 It is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the control processing.

  The “dispensing state confirmation command” is a command for the main control board 110 to confirm the dispensing state of the dispensing control board 120. “MODE” is set to “FBH” and “DATA” is set to “00H”. Have been.

  The payout state confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 when the main control board 110 intends to pay out the game balls to the payout control board 120. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the payout control process of step S500, and is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the output control process of step S800.

  The “number-of-payouts designation command” is a command for designating the number of payouts of winning balls to be paid out by the main control board 110 to the payout control board 120. “MODE” is set to “FBH”, and "DATA" is set.

  The payout number designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 when a payout number request designation command is received from the payout control board 120 as a result of transmitting the payout state confirmation command. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the payout control process of step S500, and is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the output control process of step S800.

  The “power cutoff notification command” is a command for the main control board 110 to notify the payout control board 120 of the occurrence of power cutoff (power failure), in which “MODE” is set to “FCH” and “DATA” is set. “00H” is set.

  The power-off notification command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 when the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of the power-off (power failure). Specifically, it is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in step S42.

  The “payout state notification command” is a command for the payout control board 120 to notify the main control board 110 that a game ball can be paid out. “MODE” is set to “FDH”, and “DATA” is set. Is set to “00H”.

  The payout state notification command is transmitted to the main control board 110 when the power is turned on, when the payout of the prize ball or the lending ball is completed, or when returning from an error. Specifically, it is transmitted to the main control board 110 in the initialization processing in step H10, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in the prize ball control processing in step H500, the ball lending control processing in step H600, and the like. , In the output control process of step H900.

  The “payout number request command” is a command for requesting the main control board 110 to notify the number of game balls to be paid out. “MODE” is set to “FDH”, and “DATA” is set to “01H”. Have been.

  The request command of the number of payouts is transmitted to the main control board 110 when a payout state confirmation command is received from the main control board 110. More specifically, in the command analysis process of step H200, when the receipt of the check command of the payout state is confirmed, the command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c, and is output to the main control board 110 in the output control process of step H900. Will be sent.

  The “unpaid payout number designation command” is a command for notifying the main control board 110 of the value of the payout counter (the number of payouts) stored in the payout counter storage area of the payout RAM 121c when the power is turned off (power failure). Yes, “MODE” is set to “FEH”, and “DATA” is set according to the value of the payout counter.

  When the power-off notification command is received from the main control board 110, the unpaid-out number designation command is transmitted to the main control board 110 corresponding to the value of the payout counter. Specifically, an unpaid-payout-number designation command corresponding to the unpaid-out number (remaining payout number) loaded in step H22 is transmitted to the main control board 110 in step H23.

  The “frame opening error designation command” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the opening of the glass frame 4 has been detected, “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA” is “ 00H ”.

  The frame opening error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the opening detection switch 31a detects the opening of the glass frame 4. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-2, and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.

  The “error designation command for full abnormality” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA” is set. Is set to “01H”.

  This error designation command for a full abnormality is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-6, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.

  The “error designation command for payout abnormality” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the game balls (payout standby balls) stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are insufficient, and “MODE”. Is set at "FFH" and "DATA" is set at "02H".

  The error designation command for the payout abnormality is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the ball presence detection switch 101a detects that the game balls (payout standby balls) stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are insufficient. Is done. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-10, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.

  The “frame opening error release designation command” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the closing of the glass frame 4 has been detected, and “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA” is set. “05H” is set.

  The error release designation command for opening the frame is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the closing of the glass frame 4 is detected by the opening detection switch 31a. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-4, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.

  The “error clear designation command for full error” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the lower tray 12 is no longer full, “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA” is It is set to “06H”.

  The error release designation command for the full abnormality is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the full state detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is no longer full. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-8, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.

  The “error release designation command for payout abnormality” is a command for notifying the effect control board 130 that the shortage of the game balls (payout standby balls) stored in the game ball storage unit 101 has been resolved. “MODE” is set to “FFH”, and “DATA” is set to “07H”.

  The error release designation command for the payout abnormality is sent to the effect control board 130 when it is detected by the ball presence detection switch 101a that the shortage of the game balls (payout standby balls) stored in the game ball storage unit 101 has been resolved. Sent. Specifically, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c in step H700-12, and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step H900.

(Explanation of commands related to production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIGS. 43 and 44 are diagrams illustrating types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.

  The “first special symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, and “MODE” is set to “E0H”, and the number of reserved memories is set. Is set in accordance with.

  This first special symbol storage designation command is, when the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is increased or decreased, in step S230-11 or step S310-7, the retained storage after the increase or decrease. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

  The “second special symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area. “MODE” is set to “E0H”, and the number of reserved memories is set. Is set in accordance with.

  This second special symbol storage designation command is, when the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is increased or decreased, in the above-mentioned step S240-18 or the above-mentioned step S310-7, the retained storage after the increase or decrease. The second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

  In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol storage designation command” and the “second special symbol storage designation command” may be collectively referred to as a “special symbol storage designation command”.

  The “effect design specification command” indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. For the first special symbol, “MODE” is set to “E1H”, and for the second special symbol, “MODE” is set. Is set as "E2H", and the information of DATA is set according to the type of the special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot and the game state after the end of the jackpot, it can be said that the effect symbol designation command indicates the type of the jackpot and the game state after the end of the jackpot. .

  In this effect design designation command, when various special symbols are determined, and when the special symbol change display is started, the effect design designation command corresponding to the special symbol in the above step S311-12 is transmitted to the effect transmission data in the main RAM 110c. It is set in the storage area, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing in step S800.

  The “variation pattern designation command for first special symbol” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, and “MODE” is set to “E3H”, and various DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  The variation pattern designation command for the first special symbol is used when the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 is started, and the first special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined in step S312-6. The design variation pattern designating command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

  The “variation pattern designation command for the second special symbol” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, and “MODE” is set to “E4H”. DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

  The variation pattern designation command for the second special symbol is used when the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61 is started in the above-mentioned step S312-6. The design variation pattern designating command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

  In the present embodiment, the “variation pattern specification command for the first special symbol” and the “variation pattern specification command for the second special symbol” may be collectively referred to as a “variation pattern specification command”.

  The "special symbol determination command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E5H" and "DATA" is set to "00H".

  This special symbol determination command is used when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 in step S320-3. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

The “ordinary symbol confirmation command” indicates that the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and “MODE” is set to “E5H” and “DATA” is set to “01H”.
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, the normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect transmission data in the main RAM 110c in step S410-17. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “starting port winning designation command” is information for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance. If the command is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45, “MODE” Is set at "E6H" and if the game is based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47, "MODE" is set at "E7H" and the information of DATA is set according to various winning information. I have.

  The starting port winning designation command is, when a game ball has won the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the starting port winning designation command corresponding to the starting winning information in the above step S230-10 or S240-17. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

  The “big hit opening designation command” indicates that various big hit games (special game state) start, “MODE” is set to “E8H”, and information of DATA is set according to the type of big hit game. Is set.

  When the various jackpot games are started, the jackpot opening designation command sets the jackpot opening designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330-19. Then, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “round designation command” indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, “MODE” is set to “E9H”, and information of DATA is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

  When the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the rendering transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above step S340-5 or step S340-16. , In the output control process of step S800.

  The “big hit ending designation command” indicates that various big hit games have been completed, “MODE” is set to “EAH”, and information of DATA is set according to the type of big hit game. .

  When the various jackpot games end, the jackpot ending designation command sets the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game in the rendering transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340-18. Then, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The "small hit opening designation command" indicates that various small hit games (special game state) start, and "MODE" is set to "EBH", and is set in accordance with the type of the small hit game. DATA information is set.

  When the various small hitting games are started, the small hitting opening specifying command corresponding to the type of the small hitting game is transmitted to the effect transmission data of the main RAM 110c in step S330-19. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “small hit ending designation command” indicates that various small hit games have been completed, and “MODE” is set to “EBH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of the small hit games. Have been.

  When the small hitting game is completed, the small hitting ending designation command stores the effect transmission data storage in the main RAM 110c in step S360-13 corresponding to the small hitting game type. It is set in the area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “ordinary symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of retained symbols stored in the ordinary symbol reserved number (G1) storage area, and “MODE” is set to “ECH”. Information is set.

  This ordinary symbol storage designation command corresponds to the number of suspended storages after the increase or decrease in step S250-7 or step S410-4 when the value stored in the ordinary symbol hold number (G1) storage area increases or decreases. The normal symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

  The “ordinary symbol designation command” indicates the type of the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 62, and “MODE” is set to “EDH”, and the information of DATA is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. Is set.

  When the ordinary symbol is determined, various ordinary symbols are determined, and when the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started, in step S410-9, the ordinary symbol specifying command corresponding to the ordinary symbol is transmitted to the effect transmission data in the main RAM 110c. It is set in the storage area, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing in step S800.

  The "normal figure change designation command" indicates the change time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62. "MODE" is set to "EEH", and the information of DATA is set in accordance with the change time of the various normal symbols. Is set.

  When the ordinary symbol variation designation command is started, the ordinary symbol variation designation command corresponding to the ordinary symbol variation time is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S410-12. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “winning opening designation command” indicates that various auxiliary games are started, “MODE” is set to “EFH”, and information of DATA is set according to the type of the auxiliary game. .

  When the auxiliary game is started, the winning opening designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S410-22. , In the output control process of step S800.

  The “winning ending designation command” indicates that various auxiliary games have been completed, “MODE” is set to “EFH”, and information of DATA is set according to the type of auxiliary game. .

  When the various auxiliary games end, the winning ending designation command stores the winning ending designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S420-14. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “game state designation command” indicates whether or not the game mode is a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state. “MODE” is set to “F0H”, and “MODE” is set according to each game state. DATA "is set.

  The game state designation command is used in the above step S313, step S330-10, and step S350-6 when the special symbol starts changing, when the special symbol ends changing (when the big hit game starts), and when the big hit ends. The game state designation command corresponding to the state is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “power-on designation command” and the “power-restoration designation command” indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves initialization of the main RAM 110c, and “MODE” is “F1H”. When the main RAM 110c is initialized, “DATA” is set to “00H”, and when the main RAM 110c is not initialized, “DATA” is set to “01H to 04H”.

  The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command corresponding to the presence / absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c and the game state in step S10. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “customer waiting command” indicates that the special symbol change display is not performed, and “MODE” is set to “F1H” and DATA is set to “05H”. .

  This customer waiting command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above-mentioned step S318-3 when the special symbol change display is not performed, and in the output control process in step S800. This will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “error designation command” indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, “MODE” is set to “F2H”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the type of error.

  The error designation command is used when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or radio wave abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination processing in step S600, or when the occurrence of an abnormal winning is determined in the winning confirmation processing in step S260. When it is determined in the winning port detection switch input processing or the second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240 that an unauthorized winning has occurred, or when it is determined in the gate detection switch input processing in step S250 that a right-handed error has occurred. The error designation command corresponding to the type of error is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
The main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control unit 130m.

  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt in step E10, and performs an initialization process in step E20. In this processing, the sub CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 130b in response to turning on the power, initializes flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial setting.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an interruption permission for permitting the timer interruption in step E30, and performs a sub random number updating process in step E40. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 46, the timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in the effect control unit 130m. By generating a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130m, a timer interrupt process described below is executed.

  The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs a timer update process in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in Step E130. In this input control process, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a have been input, and performs a process of setting predetermined data when the input has been performed. .

  The sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process in Step E150. In this command analysis processing, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and if the various commands have been transmitted, the received command is stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Perform the process of storing in.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a notification control process in Step E200. In this notification control processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and refers to various events (power on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormal, radio wave abnormal, open frame, full tray, dispensing abnormal, It determines whether a command indicating the occurrence or termination of a right-handed error or the like has been received, and if so, performs processing to start reporting the event corresponding to the command, or reports the event that occurred. Or processing for terminating the process. The notification control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in Step E350. In this game state update processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a game state designation command has been received, and if so, the game stored in the sub RAM 130c. Perform the process of updating the status.

  Sub CPU 130a performs update processing of the hold information in step E400. In the process of updating the hold information, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command has been received. The first special symbol hold number, the second special symbol hold number, the normal symbol hold number, etc. stored in the RAM 130c are updated, and the updated first special symbol hold number, the second special symbol hold number, the normal symbol hold are updated. A process of setting an icon display command corresponding to the number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a prefetching effect process in step E500. In this pre-reading effect process, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start opening winning designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Processing for executing a look-ahead notice effect that gives a notice (suggestion) that a jackpot (game) is likely to occur or a jackpot (game) is likely to occur before the symbol change display (change effect) is started. I do.

  More specifically, a predetermined announcement effect (display of an announcement image, display of an announcement image, etc.) is performed over one or more variation displays executed before the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening winning designation command is started. A continuous announcement effect of performing a background image change, etc., a hold change announcement effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command to a special mode different from the normal mode, during a jackpot game (during a specific round game) During the ending, etc., a process for executing a jackpot notice or the like for performing a predetermined notice effect (display of notice image, change of background image, etc.) is performed.

  Sub CPU 130a performs a first effect processing in step E600. In the first effect processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and displays an effect symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol determination command, a jackpot opening designation command, and a round designation command. , Determine whether or not a jackpot ending specification command, small hit opening specification command, small hit ending specification command, etc. have been received, and if so, perform an effect corresponding to the received command To perform the process. The first effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Sub CPU 130a performs the second effect processing in step E800. In the second effect processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and designates a general figure designation command, a general figure change designation command, a normal symbol confirmation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command. Then, it is determined whether or not an effect has been received, and if so, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an information setting process in Step E850. In this information setting process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a notification command of the adjustment mode from the display control unit 140 has been received. A process of setting information on whether the brightness adjustment is possible or impossible in the sub RAM 130c is performed. The information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting process in Step E860. In the customer waiting process, the sub CPU 130a promotes the player to play a game when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without performing the special symbol change display (change effect) (game) The process for executing the customer waiting effect for performing the appeal of the machine) is performed. The customer waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Sub CPU 130a performs a first operation accepting process in step E870. In the first operation accepting process, the sub CPU 130a adjusts the volume of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 by the operation of the cross key 19 (input accepting unit) by the player. A process for accepting an operation for performing the operation is performed. The first operation receiving process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Sub CPU 130a performs a second operation accepting process in step E880. In the second operation accepting process, the sub CPU 130a operates the back button of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) by operating the cross key 19 (input accepting unit) by the player. A process for receiving an operation for adjusting the brightness (also referred to as illuminance, brightness, or light amount) of the light (LED), the lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 is performed. The second operation accepting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in Step E900. In the output control process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Do.

  In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Information control processing of the production control unit)
The notification control process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the notification control processing in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E210, the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on notification control process. In the power-on notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the power-on designation command has been received. A notification start command for turning on the power is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power-on notification start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. The notification end command for input is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a power-on notification start command and a power-on notification end command are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the power-on is generated using the image display device and the audio output device 9. Power-on notification for notification is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a power restoration notification control process in Step E220. In this power restoration notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the power restoration designation command has been received. The notification start command for power recovery is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  Also, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for power recovery was set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. The notification end command for recovery is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a power recovery notification start command and a power recovery notification end command are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the occurrence of power recovery is performed using the image display device and the audio output device 9. The notification of the power supply restoration for the notification is executed.

  In step E230, the sub CPU 130a performs a notification control process of an unauthorized winning. In the notification control processing of the illegal prize, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for an illegal prize has been received. As a result, the notification start command for illegal winning is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  Further, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for illegal winning is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A prize notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a notification start command for illegal winning and a notification end command for illegal winning are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the sound output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is transmitted. An error notification of improper prize for notifying the occurrence of improper prize is executed.

  In step E240, the sub CPU 130a performs an abnormal winning notification notification control process. In this abnormal prize notification control processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for abnormal prize has been received. As a result, the notification start command for abnormal winning is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  Further, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for abnormal winning is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A prize notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a notification start command for abnormal winning and a notification end command for abnormal winning are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the sound output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is transmitted. An error notification of an abnormal prize for notifying the occurrence of the abnormal prize is executed.

  In step E250, the sub CPU 130a performs a magnetic abnormality notification control process. In the magnetic abnormality notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for a magnetic abnormality has been received. As a result, the notification start command for the magnetic abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for the magnetic abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. The notification end command for abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a notification start command for magnetic abnormality and a notification end command for magnetic abnormality are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the sound output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is transmitted. The error notification of the magnetic anomaly for notifying the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly is performed by using the information.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a radio wave abnormality notification control process in Step E260. In the radio wave abnormality notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for radio wave abnormality has been received. As a result, a notification start command for radio wave abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  The sub CPU 130a determines whether a notification time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for the radio wave abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. The notification end command for abnormality is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a notification start command for radio wave abnormality and a notification end command for radio wave abnormality are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the audio output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is transmitted. The error notification of the radio wave abnormality for notifying the occurrence of the radio wave abnormality is performed by using the error notification.

  In step E270, the sub CPU 130a performs a frame release notification control process. In the frame release notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for frame release has been received. As a result, the notification start command for opening the frame is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  Further, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error release designation command for frame release has been received. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a frame opening notification start command and a frame opening notification end command are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the sound output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is transmitted. The error notification of the opening of the frame for notifying the occurrence of the opening of the frame is executed by using the information.

  In step E280, the sub CPU 130a performs a payout abnormality notification control process. In the notification control process of the payout abnormality, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for the payout abnormality is received. As a result, the notification start command for the abnormal payment is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  Further, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the payout error error canceling designation command is received. The notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a notification start command for a dispensing abnormality and a notification end command for a dispensing abnormality are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the sound output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is controlled. An error notification of a payout abnormality for notifying the occurrence of the payout abnormality is executed.

  Sub CPU 130a performs a full abnormality notification control process in step E290. In the full abnormality notification control process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error designation command for the full abnormality has been received. As a result, a full abnormality notification start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  Further, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not an error release designation command for a full error has been received. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. By these processes, the notification start command for the full abnormality and the notification end command for the full abnormality are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the sound output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is transmitted. The error notification of the full abnormality for notifying the occurrence of the full abnormality is performed by using the error notification.

  In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs a right-handed error notification control process. In the notification control processing of the right-handed error, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the right-handed error designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c as a right-handed error notification start command.

  The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a notification time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the notification start command for the right-handed error is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. An error notification end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Through these processes, a notification start command for a right-handed error and a notification end command for a right-handed error are transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and at least one of the image display device, the sound output device 9, and the notification LED 10a is transmitted. The error notification of the right-handed error for notifying the occurrence of the right-handed error is performed by using the two methods. When this process ends, the current notification control process ends.

(Correspondence table)
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence table representing a correspondence when an event to be notified occurs. As shown in FIG. 48, the correspondence table includes the type of the event, the notification start condition for starting the notification of the occurrence event, and the transmission command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the notification start condition is satisfied. And a notification end condition for ending the notification of the occurrence event, a transmission command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the notification end condition is satisfied, a priority order between each event, and a notification of each occurrence event. Remarks indicating the type of volume to be referred to when performing are associated with each other.

  The priority of each event is set so as to be lower in the order of power-on, power-on, power-on, illegal prize, abnormal prize, magnetic anomaly, radio wave anomaly, open frame, payout anomaly, dish full, right-handed error. In the present embodiment, power-on, power-on, power-on, illegal prize, abnormal prize, magnetic anomaly, and radio wave anomaly are positioned as important events with high vigilance (importance), which may threaten the security of the gaming machine. , Open slots, abnormal payouts, full dishes, and right-handed errors as normal events that have a lower alertness (importance) than important events (less or less likely to compromise the security of the gaming machine) I have.

  Note that the positioning of the important event and the normal event is set in advance. For example, the opening of the frame, abnormal payout, or the like may be positioned as the important event. The position of each event may be arbitrarily set and changed at the game store by operating an input receiving unit such as 19.

  In addition, the type of volume set in the remarks column will be described. "Fixed volume value" means a volume output depending on (corresponding to) a fixed volume value ("6") described later. , "Variable volume value" means a volume output depending on (corresponding to) a volume value ("0" to "5") described later. In other words, the sound output device 9 outputs the notification sound of the occurrence event at a sound volume (value) where the fixed sound volume value is larger than the variable sound volume value.

(First effect processing of effect controller)
The first effect processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first effect processing in effect controller 130m.

  First, in step E610, the sub CPU 130a loads the value of the effect processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded effect processing data, and if the effect processing data = 0, performs processing in the variable effect start processing (step E620). If the effect processing data = 1, the process proceeds to the variable effect process (step E640). If the effect process data = 2, the process proceeds to the variable effect end process (step E660), and the effect process data = 3. If it is, the processing is shifted to the jackpot effect start processing (step E680). If the effect processing data = 4, the processing is shifted to the jackpot effect processing (step E700). If the effect processing data = 5, the jackpot effect ending processing (step E680). The processing is shifted to step E720), and if the effect processing data = 6, the process proceeds to the small hit effect processing (step E740) The transfer.

  The "effect processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the first effect processing as described later, so that the subroutines required in the game are appropriately processed.

(Variable production start processing of the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 50, a description will be given of the variable effect start processing of the effect control unit 130m. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variable effect start processing in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E621, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the effect designating command has been received. If it is determined that the effect symbol designating command has not been received (step E621: No), Then, the process shifts to step E623, and when it is determined that the command has been received (step E621: Yes), the received effect designating command is stored (moved) in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 130c in step E622.

  In step E623, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the variation pattern designation command for the special symbol has been received, and determines that the command has not been received (step E623: No). On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation effect start process of this time has been completed and it has been received (step E623: Yes), in step E624, the received fluctuation pattern designation command for the special symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. Store (move) in the storage area.

  In step E625, the sub CPU 130a refers to the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not two commands of the effect symbol designation command and the variation pattern designation command for the special symbol are normally received, and determines that the commands are normally received. In this case (step E625: Yes), the process proceeds to step E626. If it is determined that the data is not normally received (step E625: No), the process proceeds to step E632.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a variable effect pattern determination process in Step E626. In the variation effect pattern determination processing, the sub CPU 130a determines the variation effect pattern when the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed based on the variation symbol designation command for a special symbol stored in the variation effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c. To perform the process. The fluctuation effect pattern determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a symbol pattern determination process in a step E627. In this symbol pattern determination process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process for determining a symbol pattern for variably displaying the effect symbol 70a based on the effect symbol designation command and the like stored in the variable effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c. . The symbol pattern determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 130a performs the notice effect determination processing 1 in Step E628. In this announcement effect determination process 1, the sub CPU 130a definitively notifies (informs) a jackpot based on an effect symbol designating command, a variable effect pattern, and the like, and definitively informs the user that a probable jackpot is to be achieved ( A process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a one-shot notification effect (equivalent to a notification effect) such as a certain change confirmation effect to perform notification, and to determine the type (effect mode) of the one-notification effect to be performed. The notice effect determination process 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 130a performs the notice effect determination processing 2 in Step E629. In this announcement effect determination process 2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute an announcement effect for giving an announcement that there is a possibility of a big hit on the basis of a fluctuating effect pattern, a symbol pattern, or the like, and an announcement effect to be executed. To determine the production mode (kind) of the game.

  The sub CPU 130a performs the notice effect determination processing 3 in Step E630. In the announcement effect determination process 3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a roulette effect for announcing the progress and the result (a degree of expectation to be a big hit, etc.) of the variable effect pattern, and determines whether or not to execute the roulette effect. Processing for determining the effect mode (kind) is performed.

  In step E631, the sub CPU 130a sets “1” in the effect processing data, prepares to shift the processing to the above-described variable effect processing, and ends the current variable effect start processing.

  In step E632, the sub CPU 130a clears the effect symbol designation command and / or the special symbol variation pattern designation command stored in the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, if the effect design designation command and the variation pattern designation command for the special symbol are not normally received, the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 70a cannot be appropriately performed. The command and the variation pattern designating command for the special symbol are erased as a set so that the variation effect is not executed this time. When this process ends, the current fluctuation effect start process ends.

(Variation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 51, a description will be given of the variable effect pattern determination processing of the effect control unit 130m. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a variable effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E626-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the fluctuation pattern designation command for the special symbol stored in the fluctuation effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E626-2, the random number value for fluctuation effect pattern determination In step E626-3, the current effect mode stored in the effect mode information storage area of the sub RAM 130c is confirmed.

  In step E626-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode B for the normal gaming state. If the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (step E626-4: No), the step E626 is performed. In -5, the variable effect pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 52 is selected, and in the effect mode B (step E626-4: Yes), in step E626-6, the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Select 2. The variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

  In step E626-7, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variation effect pattern determination table, determines the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination random value, and in step E626-8. Then, the determined variation effect pattern is stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

  In step E626-9, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the variable effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.

  In step E626-10, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect time corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the variable effect time timer, and in step E626-11, the variable effect data (effect contents) corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern. , The presence of an operation effect, the start time of an operation effect, the presence or absence of a promotion effect, the start time of a promotion effect, etc.), and the current variable effect pattern determination processing ends.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 are diagrams illustrating a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variation effect pattern. FIG. 52 is a fluctuating effect pattern determination table 1 which is referred to when performing a fluctuating display of the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a in the effect mode A and the effect mode C. FIG. 53 is a special symbol and effect symbol in the effect mode B. It is a fluctuation effect pattern determination table 2 referred to when performing the fluctuation display of 70a.

  The fluctuating effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 correspond to the fluctuating pattern designating command, the selectivity based on the fluctuating effect pattern determining random number acquired in step E626-2, and the fluctuating display of the special symbol. The type (kind) of the fluctuation effect pattern performed is associated with the effect content corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation effect content (variation effect scenario) corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern are described for reference. ing.

  Here, the "reach-inducing" of the variable effect content is a reach-inducing effect for inducing whether or not a reach is formed, and specifically, is the same as the variable display region on the left and the variable display region on the right. Of the effect design 70a to stop (temporarily stop) whether or not the effect design 70a stops (temporary stop), and the effect design 70a stopped in the left or right fluctuation display area in the previous fluctuation display without changing the display. Then, after the next variation display is started, a symbol hold effect to produce whether the same effect symbol 70a as the symbol held and stopped (temporary stop) is stopped (temporary stop) is performed, and temporary stop and re-variation of the effect symbol are performed by one. A pseudo continuous production repeated one or more times, a stage production repeated one or more times to step up and / or step down a predetermined production display stage, and the like.

  The “reach effect” of the variable effect content means that the same effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display regions, and the effect symbol 70a is moved at high speed and / or in the central variable display region. Alternatively, it refers to an effect of performing a variable display (scroll) at a low speed.

  In addition, the “SP reach” is an effect in which the jackpot is expected to be higher than the reach effect as described above, and a special change display is made on the effect design 70a in the center change display area that is not temporarily stopped. , Or the effect of displaying a special character.

“SP reach A” is a reach effect set so that the jackpot expectation degree is the lowest among SP reach A to C.
“SP reach B” is a reach effect set so that the expectation of big hits is higher than SP reach A and the expectation of big hits is lower than SP reach C.
“SP reach C” is a reach effect set so that the expectation of the jackpot is the highest among SP reach A to C.

  The “SPSP reach” is an effect that is performed after the SP reach as described above and has a higher jackpot expectation than the SP reach, and the effect design 70a of the central variable display area temporarily stopped as a result of the SP reach. Is changed again, and then a special change display is performed on the effect design 70a in the center change display area that has changed again, or a special character is displayed. In the present embodiment, only one type of SPSP reach is set, but a plurality of types may be set so that the degree of expectation of a jackpot is different.

  The “operation effect” of the variable effect content means that the effect button 17 (effect button detection switch 17a) is activated during a valid period (effective time) in which the effect button 17 (effect button detection switch 17a) is activated for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds). Means an effect that is executed when the operation is detected.

  More specifically, based on the operation of the effect button 17, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays an effect image indicating a degree of expectation of a big hit. An operation effect for operating the effect and / or the movable effect member 73 in a predetermined mode is executed. In the present embodiment, even when the operation of the effect button 17 is not detected during the valid period, the effect having the same contents as when the operation of the effect button 17 is detected is executed.

“Operation effect A” is an operation effect that is set so that the effect button 17 does not perform an upward jumping operation during the effective period of the effect button 17.
The “operation effect B” is an operation effect in which the effect button 17 is set to perform an upward jumping operation during the valid period of the effect button 17.
Note that the pop-out operation of the effect button 17 may be executed from before the occurrence of the effective period to during the effective period, or may be executed when the effective period occurs.

  In addition, the “promotion effect” is an effect (re-lottery effect) that stimulates whether or not the type of the jackpot game is promoted. Specifically, the combination of the temporarily stopped effect symbols 70a (the jackpot result mode) This is a production that fluctuates and promotes whether a jackpot game with a low value for the player is promoted to a jackpot game that is advantageous (high value) for the player, and a jackpot game with a low value for the player if the promotion is not performed. Is displayed in a stopped state, and when promoted, a combination of the effect symbols 70a (big hit result mode) for generating a jackpot game having a high value for the player is stopped and displayed.

“Promotion effect A” is a promotion effect in which the result of whether or not the type of the jackpot game is promoted without the valid period of the effect button 17 being generated.
In the “promotion effect B”, a valid period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the effect button 17 is generated, and whether the type of the big hit game is promoted in accordance with the operation timing of the effect button 17 or the end timing of the valid period is determined. This is a promotion effect from which the result is derived.
The “promotion effect C” derives a result indicating that the type of the jackpot game is not promoted without the validity period of the effect button 17 occurring (notification), and then suggests that the type of the jackpot is promoted (report). This is a promotion effect in which the result is derived.

  In addition, “cut-in” refers to a cut-in effect that causes the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display an effect image that indicates a degree of expectation to be a big hit. Say. Note that, in the cut-in effect of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is set to be executed immediately before the result of determining whether or not a big hit is to be derived (predetermined time).

  As a feature of the variable effect pattern determination table of the present embodiment, in the variable effect pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 52, the operation effects A to C and the promotion effect B using the effect buttons 17 are executed, whereas FIG. In the fluctuating effect pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. 7, the operation effects A to C using the effect button 17 and the promotion effect B are not executed. In this way, when the player operates the effect button 17 and selects the effect mode B, the variable effect pattern is determined from the variable effect pattern determination table 2, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol or the effect symbol 70a is determined. It is possible to respond to the request of the player who feels that the operation of the effect button 17 being displayed is troublesome or ashamed.

(Symbol pattern determination processing of the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 54, a description will be given of the symbol pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130m. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a symbol pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E627-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the effect symbol designating command stored in the variable effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E627-2, stores the effect symbol designating command in the variable effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 130c. The fluctuation effect pattern is confirmed, and in step E627-3, a symbol pattern determination random value is obtained. In step E627-4, a symbol pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55 is selected. The symbol pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 130a refers to the selected symbol pattern determination table in step E627-5, determines a symbol pattern (scenario) based on the effect symbol designation command and the symbol pattern determination random value, and in step E627-6, The determined symbol pattern is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

  In step E627-7, the sub CPU 130a sets a symbol pattern command corresponding to the determined symbol pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, it is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.

  In step E627-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined symbol pattern has a promotion effect during the round. If there is no promotion effect during the round (step E627-8: No), If the symbol pattern determination processing is finished and there is a promotion effect during the round (step E627-8: Yes), the promotion effect flag during the round is set in step E627-9, and the current symbol pattern determination process is performed. finish.

  In addition, the promotion effect during the round is a promotion effect (rank-up effect) executed during the jackpot game, from a disadvantageous (low value) jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player to an advantageous (high value) jackpot game. This is an effect that stimulates whether or not to be promoted, and is executed using, for example, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

(Symbol pattern decision table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a symbol pattern determination table referred to when determining a symbol pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the symbol pattern determination table, the effect symbol designating command, the type of the variable effect pattern, the selectivity by the random number for symbol pattern determination, the type of the symbol pattern (scenario), and the promotion during the round The presence / absence of the effect is associated, and a symbol stop example corresponding to the symbol pattern is described as a reference.

  The symbol pattern includes a symbol pattern corresponding to a variable effect pattern not including the promotion effect (a symbol pattern in which the symbol “→” is not included in the column of the symbol stop example) and a symbol pattern corresponding to the variable effect pattern including the promotion effect (design) In the column of the stop example, “→” is set), and a combination of the effect symbols 70a that are stopped and displayed in the process of the variable display is set in each symbol pattern.

  In addition, the symbol stop example will be specifically described. For example, for the case of “2, 2 ± 1, 2”, the effect symbol 70 a of “2” is stopped and displayed in the left and right variable display areas, and the center is displayed. Means that the effect symbol 70a of ± 1 of “2”, that is, the effect symbol 70a of “1” or “3” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as in the symbol pattern 2, “2, 2 ± 1, 2”, “4, 4 ± 1, 4”, “6, 6 ± 1, 6”, “8, 8 ± 1, 8”, etc. If a plurality of combinations of the effect symbols 70a are described without interposing "→", it means that one of the combinations of the effect symbols 70a is selected. Note that “→” means a re-change performed in the promotion effect.

  In the case of “3,3,3” → “7,7,7”, stop display is performed in a state where the effect design 70a of “3” is aligned in the left, center, and right variation display areas (temporary). After the stop), it fluctuates again, and as a result, the stop display (temporary stop or final stop) means that the effect symbol 70a of “7” is aligned in the left, center, and right change display areas. I have.

  As a first feature of the symbol pattern determination table according to the present embodiment, when a loss occurs as a result of the occurrence of the reach in the variable display (variable effect), an even number of the symbol patterns in which the reach by the odd effect symbols occurs is used. The point is that a symbol pattern in which the reach by the effect symbol occurs is more easily selected.

  Further, as a second feature of the symbol pattern determination table of the present embodiment, the symbol pattern in which the reach by the effect symbol of “7” occurs is more easily selected in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss. Point.

  Further, as a third feature of the symbol pattern determination table of the present embodiment, a jackpot game which is advantageous (high value) for the player (substantially changes 16 rounds in 16 rounds, and 16 rounds in 13R substantially) When a jackpot game) occurs, a symbol pattern in which the combination of the effect symbols 70a of “7, 7, 7” is stopped and displayed is selected, but when a jackpot game with a lower value is generated, , "7, 7, 7" are not stopped and displayed.

(Preliminary production decision process 1 of production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 56, the preview effect determination process 1 of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the notice effect determining process 1 in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E628-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the effect design specification command stored in the variable effect command storage area of the sub RAM 130c and the variable effect pattern stored in the variable effect pattern storage area. In E628-2, a random number value for determination of the fixed effect is acquired.

  In step E628-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state. If the current gaming state is not the time saving gaming state (step E628-3: No), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E628-4. If the decision table 1 for the fixed effect shown in FIG. 57 (a) is selected and the game is in the time saving game state (step E628-3: Yes), the fixed effect shown in FIG. 57 (b) is determined in step E628-5. Select Table 2. The determination table for the fixed effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step E628-6, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected determination table of the determined effect, and determines the determined effect pattern based on the effect design designation command, the variable effect pattern, and the random number for determining the determined effect. In addition, the pattern of the definite effect is an execution mode of a definite effect (corresponding to a notification effect) for steadily notifying (notifying) that a big hit will be made.

  In step E628-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined determined effect pattern is the determined effect execution pattern for executing the determined effect, and determines whether the determined effect pattern is not the determined effect pattern for executing the determined effect (step E628). In the case of (−7: No), the processing is shifted to step E628-9, and in the case of the determined effect pattern for executing the determined effect (step E628-7: Yes), the determined effect determined in step E628-8. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, the pattern command of the fixed effect is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.

  In step E628-9, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining a certainty-change-determined effect, and selects a certainty-change-determined effect determination table shown in FIG. 58 in step E628-10. The decision table for the certainty-change-determined effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step E628-11, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected probability change determination effect determination table and determines the probability change determination effect pattern based on the effect design designation command, the variation effect pattern, and the random number value for determining the probability change determination effect. I do. In addition, the pattern of the probability-change-determined effect is an execution mode of the probability-change-determined effect (corresponding to the notification effect) that definitively notifies (informs) that it will be a probability-change jackpot.

  In step E628-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined probability-determination effect pattern is a probability-determination effect effect that executes the probability-determination effect effect. If it is not (step E628-12: No), the present announcement effect determination process 1 is ended, and if the pattern is a sure-change confirmed effect pattern for executing the certain-change confirmation effect (step E628-12: Yes), the process is terminated. In E628-13, the pattern command of the determined change confirmed effect corresponding to the determined pattern of the determined change determined effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the present notice effect determination process 1 ends. As a result, the pattern command of the certain variation determination effect is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.

(Decision table for finalized production)
FIG. 57 (a) is a diagram showing the fixed effect determination table 1 which is referred to when determining the fixed effect pattern in the non-time saving game state, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination table 2 of the fixed effect referred to when determining the fixed effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a) and FIG. 57 (b), the fixed effect determination table contains the effect ratio of the fixed effect by the effect design specification command, the variable effect pattern, and the random number for determining the fixed effect. The selection rate of the execution location is associated with the execution location.

  The execution place of the fixed effect is the first frame of the change start, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed when the change display of the effect symbol 70a is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). When the reach effect is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first frame of the reach, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed, is SP reach on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The first frame of the SP reach start, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed when the effect is started, and the first frame when the SPSP reach effect is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The first frame at the start of SPSP reach, which is the timing at which the image is displayed, is set.

  The fixed effect pattern 0 is a fixed effect pattern in which the fixed effect is not executed, and the fixed effect pattern 1 is a fixed effect pattern in which the fixed effect is executed in the first frame of the change start. Reference numeral 2 denotes a fixed effect pattern in which a fixed effect is executed in the first frame of the reach start, and fixed effect pattern 3 is a fixed effect pattern in which a fixed effect is executed in the first frame of the SP reach start. The fixed effect pattern 4 is a fixed effect pattern in which the fixed effect is executed in the first frame of the SPSP reach start.

  Here, when the execution of the fixed effect is determined, the blower 21 is operated at the determined execution timing (execution location) and the wind (air) is directed from the air outlet 15d of the firing handle 15 toward the hand of the player. ) Is sent out to execute a fixed effect (blowing effect). An effect example of the fixed effect will be described later.

  As a first feature of the determination table of the definite effect of the present embodiment, the determination of the determination of the definite effect by referring to the determination table 2 of the determination of the definite effect is more difficult than the determination of the pattern of the determination of the demonstration by referring to the determination table 1 of the determination of the demonstration. The point is that the setting is made such that the execution rate of the fixed effect is higher when the pattern is determined.

  By doing in this way, the fixed effect is executed with a higher probability in the time saving game state (probability changing game state) than in the normal game state, and the game is performed while maintaining the scarcity of the fixed effect in the normal game state. It is possible to improve the interest in the time-saving gaming state in which the player wants to progress quickly. In addition, the execution probability of the fixed effect may be set to be the same between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, or may be set to the opposite relation.

  As a second feature of the fixed effect determination table of the present embodiment, the fixed effect determination table 2 is referred to the fixed effect determination table 2 rather than the case of determining the fixed effect pattern with reference to the fixed effect determination table 1. The point is that when the pattern is determined, it is set so that the fixed effect is more easily executed at an earlier stage (stage) of the variable display (variable effect).

  By doing in this way, in the normal game state, the confirmed effect is easily executed at a time when the variable display is late, and in the time saving game state (probability variable game state), the fixed effect is easily performed at an early time when the variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of delay in the time-saving gaming state (probability varying gaming state) while pulling the player's expectation of the jackpot game in the normal gaming state until the time when the variable display is late. Note that the execution timing of the fixed effect may be set in the normal game state and the time reduction game state in the same manner, or may be set to have the opposite relationship.

(Decision change decision table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a determination table for a certain-change-determined effect that is referred to when determining a certain-change-determined effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the decision table for the probability-change-determined effect includes an effect-designation command, a variable-effect pattern, and a random-value for determining the probability-change-determined effect, the execution rate of the probability-change-determined effect, and the selectivity of the execution location of the probability-change-determined effect Are associated with each other.

  The execution place of the certain change confirmation effect is the first frame of the change start, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed when the change display of the effect symbol 70a is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). When the reach effect is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first frame of the reach, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed, is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The first frame of the SP reach start, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed when the reach effect is started, and the first frame when the SPSP reach effect is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The first frame of the SPSP reach start, which is the timing at which the eye image is displayed, is set.

  As another execution place, when the effect symbol 70a variably displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) shifts to the full-rotation reach effect, an effect operation is performed that indicates that the movable effect member 73 has a big hit. The first frame of the character-acquisition correct operation, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed, and the first frame of the case where the movable effect member 73 performs a predetermined effect operation when the above-described operation effect is executed. The first frame of the character effect operation, which is the timing at which the image is displayed, and the first frame of the promotion confirmation, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed when notifying that the jackpot game is promoted in the above promotion effect Eyes are set.

  The probable change confirmed effect pattern 0 is a probable change confirmed effect pattern in which the probable change confirmed effect is not executed, and the probable change confirmed effect pattern 1 is a probable change confirmed effect pattern in which the probable change confirmed effect is executed in the first frame of the change start. Yes, the pattern 2 of the certainty change effect is a pattern of the certainty change effect in which the certainty change effect is executed at the first frame of the start of the reach, and the pattern 3 of the certainty change effect is a certainty change in the first frame of the character object accurate operation. This is a pattern of a probable-determination effect, in which a probabilistic effect is executed. The probable-variation-determining effect pattern 4 is a pattern of a probabilistic-determination effect, in which the probable-variation-determining effect is executed in the first frame of SP reach start. Reference numeral 5 denotes a pattern of a probable change confirmed effect in which the pattern of the probable change confirmed effect is executed in the first frame of the start of the SPSP reach. Reference numeral 6 denotes a pattern of a probable-change confirmation effect in which a probable-change confirmation effect is executed in the first frame of the character effect operation. It is a pattern of a fixed production.

  Here, when the execution of the certainty-determining effect is determined, the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel emits light in a predetermined manner at the determined execution timing (execution location), and a predetermined sound (from the sound output device 9). The output of “Cuin-Cuin”) executes a certain-change-determining effect (light-emitting effect). An example of a probable change effect will be described later.

  As a first feature of the determination table of the probability-change-determined effect of the present embodiment, it is set so that the later-stage (stage) of the variable display (variable effect) is easier to execute the stage-change-determination effect than the earlier period (stage). Point. Therefore, while pulling the player's expectation of the jackpot game to the later stage of the variable display, the enjoyment of the variable display is improved, and the pleasure of being a positive change jackpot rather than performing the positive change confirmation effect early in the variable display. And a sense of relief can be further felt.

(Processing during fluctuating production by the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 59, a description will be given of the processing during the fluctuation effect of the effect control unit 130m. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the processing during the variable effect in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E641, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a condition for generating an effective period in which the operation of the effect button 17 (effect button detection switch 17a) is valid is satisfied. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the variation effect pattern includes the operation effect and the promotion effect B, and whether the variation effect time is the time for executing the operation effect and the promotion effect B.

  When the condition for generating the valid period is not satisfied (step E641: No), the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step E646, and when the condition for generating the valid period is satisfied (step E641: Yes), In step E642, a valid period timer for measuring the valid period occurrence period and a valid period flag indicating that the valid period is generated are set.

  In step E643, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a valid period for executing the pop-out operation of the effect button 17. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the validity period for executing the operation effect B is present. If it is not the valid period for executing the jumping operation of the effect button 17 (step E643: No), in step E644, a normal operation promotion command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the current variable effect processing ends. If it is the valid period for executing the jumping-out operation of the effect button 17 (step E643: Yes), in step E645, a special operation promotion command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and during this variable effect The process ends.

  As a result, in the output control process of step E900, the command for promoting the operation is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. When the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 receive a normal operation promotion command, the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light is caused to emit light in a normal mode. When the lamp control unit 150 receives a special operation promotion command, the effect button LED is made to emit light in a special mode, and the effect button 17 is caused to perform a jumping-out operation.

  In step E646, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a validity period flag indicating that a validity period has occurred. If there is no validity period flag (step E646: No), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E655. If there is a validity period flag (step E646: Yes), the process moves to step E647.

  In step E647, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 17a has been input, and if the detection signal has been input (step E647: Yes), the sub CPU 130a sets the validity period timer in step E648. If it is cleared and no detection signal is input (step E647: No), it is determined in step E649 whether or not the valid period timer is 0. If the valid period timer is not 0 (step E649: No) ), The current fluctuation effect processing is terminated, and if the validity period timer is 0 (step E649: Yes), the process proceeds to step E650.

  The sub CPU 130a clears the validity period flag in step E650, and determines in step E651 whether the effect to be executed is the promotion effect B. If the effect is not the promotion effect B (step E651: No), In E652, the effect mode of the operation effect for executing the operation effect is determined, and in step E653, the operation effect command corresponding to the determined operation effect effect mode is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the current variation is set. If the process during the production is completed and it is the promotion production B (step E651: Yes), in step E654, a special operation production command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the current processing during the variable production is ended. I do.

  As a result, in the output control process of step E900, a command for an operation effect or a command for a special operation effect is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  When the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 receive a command for an operation effect, an effect that constitutes an operation effect on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and / or the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal). An image is displayed, and the movable effect member 73 is operated in a predetermined mode.

  When the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 receive a command for a special operation effect, the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is similarly illuminated in a predetermined mode, and a predetermined sound (“Queen”) is output from the audio output device 9. Quein "). That is, it can be said that the promotion effect B corresponds to the notification effect in the same manner as the above-described probable change confirmation effect.

  In step E655, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable effect time set in step E626-10 is 0. If the variable effect time is not 0 (step E655: No), the sub CPU 130a If the variable effect processing is completed and the variable effect time is 0 (step E655: Yes), "2" is set in the effect process data in step E656, and the process proceeds to the variable effect end process described above. Preparations are made, and the current fluctuation effect processing ends.

(Big hit production start processing of the production control unit)
The jackpot effect start process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect start process in effect controller 130m.

  First, in step E681, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the jackpot opening designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. If the command has not been received (step E681: No), If the current jackpot effect start processing has been completed and received (step E681: Yes), the received opening designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c in step E682.

  In step E683, the sub CPU 130a stores information on the number of final rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot specified by the received opening designation command in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E684, refers to the sub RAM 130c to The presence or absence of the promotion effect flag in the middle is confirmed, and in step E685, the special game effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61A is selected. The special game effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step E686, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected special game effect pattern determination table, determines the special game effect pattern based on the opening designation command and the presence or absence of the promotion effect flag during the round, and in step E687, The special game effect pattern is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. Note that the special game effect pattern is an execution mode of an effect executed during a big hit game or a small hit game.

  In step E688, the sub CPU 130a sets an opening effect command corresponding to the determined special game effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, in the output control processing in step E900, the command for the opening effect is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  The sub-CPU 130a acquires the random number value for determining the notification timing in Step E689, selects the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. 61B in Step E690, and determines the selected notification timing determination table in Step E691. , And based on the special game effect pattern and the random number for determining the notification timing, the jackpot game has a high value for the player (the type of jackpot game is promoted, (Continue) is determined determinatively. The notification timing determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step E692, the sub CPU 130a stores, in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c, information of the notification timing that can specify the determined notification timing, clears the promotion effect flag during the round in step E693, and sets the effect in step E694. The processing data is set to “4”, and preparations are made to shift the processing to the above-described jackpot effect processing, and the current jackpot effect start processing ends.

(Special game production pattern determination table)
FIG. 61 (a) is a diagram illustrating a special game effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special game effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, in the special game effect pattern determination table, the opening designation command, the presence / absence of a promotion effect flag during a round, and the special game effect pattern are associated with each other, and the effect contents are described as a reference. ing.

  The special game effect patterns 1, 3, 8, 10, and 14 are a promotion effect for directing whether the type of the jackpot game is promoted and a continuous effect for directing whether a round game capable of acquiring a prize ball is continued. Is a special game effect pattern for jackpots that is not executed.

In the special game effect pattern 2, the promotion effect was executed between the closing of the special winning opening 50 in the 7th round and the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the 8th round (during the interval), and as a result, the promotion was successful. Is a jackpot effect pattern for executing a promotion success effect of notifying (notifying) the user.
The special game effect pattern 4 is that the promotion effect was executed between the closing of the special winning opening 50 in round 7 and the opening of the special winning opening 50 in round 8 (during the interval), and as a result, the promotion failed. Is a special game effect pattern for a jackpot in which a promotion failure effect of notifying (notifying) is performed.

  In the special game effect patterns 5 and 11, the continuous effect is executed between the closing of the special winning opening 50 in the fourth round and the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the fifth round (during the interval), and as a result, the success is continued. In addition to executing a continuous success effect of notifying (notifying) that the game has been performed, a continuous effect is performed between the closing of the special winning opening 50 in the 8th round and the opening of the special winning opening in the 9th round (during the interval). This is a special game effect pattern for a big hit that executes a continuous success effect as a result.

  In the special game effect patterns 6 and 12, the continuous effect is executed between the closing of the special winning opening 50 in the fourth round and the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the fifth round (during the interval), and as a result, the success is continued. In addition to executing a continuous success effect of notifying (notifying) that the game has been performed, a continuous effect is performed between the closing of the special winning opening 50 in the 8th round and the opening of the special winning opening in the 9th round (during the interval). This is a special gaming effect pattern for a jackpot in which a continuation failure effect for notifying (notifying) that the continuation has failed as a result is performed.

  In the special game effect patterns 7 and 13, the continuous effect is executed between the closing of the special winning opening 50 in the fourth round and the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the fifth round (during the interval), and as a result, the continuous failure effect Is a special game effect pattern for a jackpot.

The special game effect pattern 9 is a jackpot special game effect pattern for executing a certain chance chance effect indicating that there is a possibility that the game has shifted to the probability fluctuation game state from the opening to the ending (during the special game).
The special game effect patterns 15 and 16 are small-hit special game effect patterns that execute a probable change chance effect indicating that there is a possibility that the game has shifted to the probability varying game state from the opening to the ending (during the special game). It is.

(Notification timing decision table)
FIG. 61 (b) shows that the jackpot game is advantageous (high value) for the player (the type of the jackpot game is promoted, and the round game in which the prize ball can be acquired continues). FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a notification timing determination table that is referred to when determining a notification timing to be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), in the notification timing determination table, the special game effect pattern, the selection rate based on the notification timing determination random value, and the notification timing are associated with each other.

  As a feature of the notification timing determination table of the present embodiment, except for the timing when the jackpot game is started, when the promotion success effect is executed, or when the continuous success effect is executed, that is, the last branch point and The notification timing is set only at the start of a certain round. By doing so, it is possible to effectively excite the promotion success production and the continuous success production while preventing the former from being a jackpot game having a high value for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. Becomes possible.

(Processing during the production of the jackpot at the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 62, the processing during the jackpot effect of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating the processing during the jackpot effect in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, at step E701, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the round designation command has been received. If the in-progress processing has been completed and received (step E701: Yes), in step E702, the number of jackpot rounds corresponding to the round designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

  In step E703, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notification timing information is stored in the sub RAM 130c. If the notification timing information is not stored (step E703: No), the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step E708 and stores the information. If yes (step E703: Yes), the process moves to step E704.

  In step E704, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of jackpot rounds matches the information of the notification timing. If the numbers match (step E704: Yes), the sub CPU 130a stores the information in the sub RAM 130c in step E705. The information of the announcement timing is cleared, and in step E706, the special game effect pattern and the command of the special round effect according to the number of jackpot rounds are set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if they do not match (step E704: In No), in step E707, a command for a special game effect pattern and a normal round effect according to the number of jackpot rounds is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

  As a result, a command for a special round effect or a command for a normal round effect is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900.

  The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of jackpot rounds is the last round number in step E708. If the number of jackpot rounds is not the last round number (step E708: No), the current big jackpot effect processing ends. If the number of jackpot rounds is the last round number (step E708: Yes), in step E709, the effect data is set to “5”, and preparation is made to shift to the above-described jackpot effect end processing. Finishes the jackpot production process.

(Information setting process of effect control unit)
The information setting process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing information setting processing in effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E850-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the adjustment mode notification command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 141 has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. In (Step E850-1: Yes), the process proceeds to Step E850-2, and if not received (Step E850-1: No), the current information setting process ends.

  In step E850-2, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the type of the adjustment mode specified by the received adjustment mode notification command is an adjustment mode that allows volume adjustment, and determines in the adjustment mode that allows volume adjustment. If there is (Step E850-2: Yes), the first step E850-3 is to indicate that the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Set the permission flag.

  On the other hand, if the adjustment mode is not the adjustment mode that allows the volume adjustment (step E850-2: No), the sub RAM 130c determines in step E850-4 that the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) is impossible. Is cleared. Note that the first permission flag is referred to in a first operation receiving process described later.

  In step E850-5, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the type of the adjustment mode specified by the received adjustment mode notification command is the adjustment mode that enables the brightness adjustment, and performs the adjustment that enables the brightness adjustment. If the mode is the mode (step E850-5: Yes), in step E850-6, a second permission flag indicating that the brightness can be adjusted in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 130c is set, and the current information is set. The setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the mode is not the adjustment mode that allows brightness adjustment (step E850-5: No), the sub RAM 130c determines in step E850-7 that brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) is impossible. Is cleared. The second permission flag is referred to in a later-described second operation receiving process.

(Customer wait processing of the production control unit)
The customer waiting process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating the customer waiting process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E860-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the customer waiting command has been received, and when the command has been received (step E860-1: Yes), Then, the process is shifted to step E860-2, and if the data is not received (step E860-1: No), the process is shifted to step E860-4.

  In step E860-2, the sub CPU 130a sets a waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) for the customer waiting effect, which is a time until the customer waiting effect starts, and in step E860-3, sets the customer waiting start command The value is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 130c, and the process moves to Step E860-13. As a result, a customer waiting start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  In step E860-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is on standby (step E860-4: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E860-5. The process is shifted to, if the customer is not waiting for the effect (step E860-4: No), the process is shifted to step E860-9. In addition, about whether it is waiting for the customer waiting effect, it is determined whether the waiting time of the customer waiting effect is set.

  In step E860-5, the sub CPU 130a performs an adjustment operation such as volume adjustment or luminance adjustment by the player (a notification image OG of a volume value and a notification image KG of a luminance value to be described later are displayed on the image display device). It is determined whether or not it is during the reception period of the adjustment operation. If it is during the reception period of the adjustment operation (step E860-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step E860-13 to receive the adjustment operation. If it is not during the period (step E860-5: No), the process moves to step E860-6.

  In step E860-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the waiting time for the already set customer waiting effect has elapsed, and when the waiting time for the customer waiting effect has elapsed (step E860-6: Yes). )), The process proceeds to step E860-7. If the waiting time for the customer waiting effect has not elapsed (step E860-6: No), the process proceeds to step E860-13.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an effect time (for example, 30 seconds) of the customer waiting effect in step E860-7, and sets a customer waiting effect start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in step E860-8. Move the process to -13. As a result, a customer waiting effect start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a customer waiting effect for promoting the player to play a game (appealing the gaming machine) is started. Is done.

  The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed in step E860-9. If the customer waiting effect is being performed (step E860-9: Yes), the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step E860-10. If the production is not waiting for a customer (step E860-9: No), the process proceeds to step E860-13. As to whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed, it is determined whether or not the effect time of the customer waiting effect is set.

  In step E860-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect time of the set customer waiting effect has elapsed. If the effect time of the customer waiting effect has elapsed (step E860-10: If “Yes”, the process proceeds to step E860-11, and if the effect time of the customer waiting effect has not elapsed (step E860-10: No), the process proceeds to step E860-13.

  In step E860-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) for the customer waiting effect in order to again wait for the customer waiting effect, and in step E860-12, sets the The value is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 130c, and the process moves to Step E860-13. As a result, the waiting for the customer waiting effect and the during the customer waiting effect are repeated. The waiting time of the customer waiting effect set here may be a time different from the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in E860-2, for example, a time longer or shorter than 60 seconds.

  In step E860-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect processing data referred to for branching the processing in the above-described first effect processing is “0”, and the effect processing data is “0”. Is satisfied (step E860-13: Yes), the current customer waiting process is terminated, and if the effect processing data is not “0” (step E860-13: No), the first starting port 45 or the first Assuming that the variable effect is started based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 47, in step E860-14, the information on the customer waiting effect stored in the sub RAM 130c (the waiting time of the customer waiting effect, (The production time of the customer waiting effect etc.) is cleared, and the current customer waiting process ends.

(First operation reception processing of effect control unit)
A first operation acceptance process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the first operation receiving process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E870-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the first determination table shown in FIG. 67 (a) and refers to the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) outputted from the sound output device 9 in the current state. It is determined whether or not it is a volume adjustment possible period in which the volume adjustment is possible. If it is the volume adjustment possible period (step E870-1: Yes), the process is moved to step E870-2. If it is not the period during which the volume adjustment is possible (step E870-1: No), the process proceeds to step E870-24. The first determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step E870-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the first processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”. If the first processing number is “0” (step E870) If the first process number is not “0” (step E870-2: No), the process proceeds to step E870-7. The “first processing number” is a processing number indicating the progress stage of the volume adjustment, and is set to “0” in the initialization processing in step E20 described above.

  In step E870-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is on standby (step E870-3: Yes), the sub CPU 130a returns to step E870-4. Then, the command 1 for guiding volume adjustment is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the command 1 for guiding the volume adjustment is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the guidance image for the volume adjustment is displayed on the image display device, and the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 are caused to emit light. Is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the waiting state of the customer waiting effect, that is, in the case of the variable effect or the big hit (No in step E870-3), in step E870-5, the command 2 for guiding the sound volume adjustment is transmitted to the sub RAM 130c. Is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the command 2 for guiding the sound volume adjustment is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for causing the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 to emit light is performed.

  In Step E870-6, the sub CPU 130a sets “1” to the first process number stored in the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current first operation accepting process.

  In step E870-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the first processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “1”. If the first processing number is “1” (step E870) If the first process number is not “1” (step E870-7: No), the process proceeds to step E870-12.

  In step E870-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there has been a volume adjustment start operation. If there has been a volume adjustment start operation (step E870-8: Yes), sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E870-9. If there is no start operation of the volume adjustment (step E870-8: No), the current first operation accepting process is ended. Here, the start operation of the volume adjustment means that the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, that is, the operation of the left button or the right button is detected by the cross key detection switch 19a. .

  In step E870-9, sub CPU 130a sets a volume adjustment start command in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 130c. As a result, a volume adjustment start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for displaying a notification image of the volume value indicating the current volume value on the image display device is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (left button, right button) in step E870-10, and in step E870-11, The first processing number stored in the RAM 130c is set to “2”, and the current first operation reception processing ends.

  In step E870-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the first processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “2”, and when the first processing number is “2” (step E870). If the first processing number is not “2” (step E870-12: No), the process proceeds to step E870-13, and the current first operation receiving process ends. .

  In step E870-13, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation of decreasing the volume has been performed. If an operation of decreasing the volume has been performed (step E870-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-14. If the operation has not been performed to decrease the volume (step E870-13: No), the process proceeds to step E870-16. Note that the operation of decreasing the volume here means that the left button of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the left button has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.

  In step E870-14, sub CPU 130a sets a command for decreasing the volume in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 130c. As a result, a command for decreasing the volume is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and a process of reducing the volume value of the effect sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the audio output device 9 is performed.

  In step E870-15, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (left button, right button), and accepts the first operation this time. The process ends.

  In step E870-16, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation for increasing the volume has been performed. If an operation for increasing the volume has been performed (step E870-16: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-17. If the operation has not been performed to increase the volume (step E870-16: No), the process proceeds to step E870-19. Here, the operation of increasing the volume means that the right button of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the right button has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.

  In step E870-17, sub CPU 130a sets a command for increasing the volume in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 130c. As a result, a command for increasing the volume is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and a process of increasing the volume value of the effect sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the audio output device 9 is performed.

  In step E870-18, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (left button, right button), and receives the first operation this time. The process ends.

  In step E870-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the monitoring time of the operation interval set in step E870-10, step E870-15, step E870-18, or the like has elapsed. If the elapsed time has elapsed (step E870-19: Yes), the process proceeds to step E870-20, and if the operation interval monitoring time has not elapsed (step E870-19: No), the current first time is set. The operation reception processing ends.

  In step E870-20, sub CPU 130a sets a volume adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 130c. As a result, a volume adjustment end command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for hiding the notification image of the volume value displayed on the image display device and the right and left buttons of the cross key 19 are performed. Processing for terminating light emission is performed.

  In other words, the operation interval monitoring is performed after the notification image of the volume value is displayed by the operation of the left or right button (start operation of the volume adjustment) of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) received after the volume adjustment possible period. If the operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) (operation of decreasing the volume, operation of increasing the volume) is not performed until the time (predetermined period) elapses, the notification image of the volume value is displayed. It is hidden. Also, when an operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (an operation of decreasing the volume or an operation of increasing the volume) is performed while the notification image of the volume value is displayed, the operation interval from the operation is not changed. A notification image of a sound volume value when the operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) (operation of decreasing the volume, operation of increasing the volume) is not performed until the monitoring time (predetermined period) elapses. Is hidden. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the visual recognition image of the volume value from hindering the visual recognition of other images (such as the effect design image, the background image, the volume adjustment guide image, and the brightness adjustment guide image).

  In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the volume value is actually decreased or increased by operating the left or right button of the cross key 19 while the notification image of the volume value is displayed. Since the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval is reset, the notification image of the volume value is immediately hidden even though the player has operated the left or right button. This eliminates the inconvenience of causing the player to be dissatisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation is invalid even if the operation of the up or down button of the cross key 19 is performed in a state in which the notification image of the volume value is displayed. Alternatively, even when the down button is operated, the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval may be reset. In this way, even if the player accidentally operates the up or down button of the four-way controller 19, the inconvenience that the notification image of the volume value immediately disappears is eliminated, and the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling.

  In Step E870-21, the sub CPU 130a sets “0” to the first processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the volume value of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9 cannot be immediately adjusted. In other words, the volume value of the effect sound is immediately adjusted (increased / decreased) by operating the cross key 19 during a period in which the volume value notification image is displayed, but in a period in which the volume value notification image is not displayed. Thus, even if the cross key 19 is operated, the volume value of the effect sound is not immediately adjusted (increased or decreased).

  In step E870-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is not on standby (step E870-22: No), the first operation of this time is performed. When the reception process is completed and the customer waiting effect is waiting (step E870-22: Yes), a waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) for the customer waiting effect is set in step E870-23, and the current time is set. The first operation accepting process ends.

  Thereby, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in the customer waiting process in step E860 is reset. That is, a time (63 seconds later) obtained by adding the monitoring time of the operation interval (3 seconds) and the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds) from the time when the operation of the cross key 19 is finally detected in the first operation receiving process. ) Later, the customer waiting effect will be executed. Note that the customer waiting effect may be executed 60 seconds after the last operation of the cross key 19 is detected.

  In step E870-24, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the first processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”, and determines that the first processing number is “0” (step E870). In the case of (−24: Yes), the current first operation accepting process is ended, and when the first process number is not “0” (step E870-24: No), the process is moved to a step E870-25. .

  In step E870-25, the sub CPU 130a clears the monitoring time of the operation interval, and in step E870-26, sets the volume adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a volume adjustment end command is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and processing for hiding the volume adjustment guidance image and the volume value notification image displayed on the image display device is performed.

  In Step E870-27, the sub CPU 130a sets “0” to the first processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current first operation reception processing. That is, in the state where the guidance image of the volume adjustment is displayed or the notification image of the volume value is displayed, there is a prize of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, and the fluctuation effect is performed. If it is determined that the volume adjustment has been shifted from the volume adjustment enabled period to the volume adjustment disabled period due to the start of the notification or the (error) notification of various occurrence events, the volume adjustment guidance image and the volume value are displayed. Will be hidden and the volume control operation will be disabled.

  Therefore, since the guidance image of the volume adjustment and the notification image of the volume value are displayed on the image display device, the visibility of the effect image of the variable effect and the notification image of the occurrence event displayed on the image display device is prevented. It becomes possible to suppress.

  It should be noted that even if the game ball is passed to the ordinary figure gate 44 while the volume adjustment operation is being performed and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is started, the volume adjustment is not stopped, but the volume adjustment is not stopped. Is not displayed or the volume is not controlled to be operated.

  When it is determined in step E870-8 that a volume adjustment start operation has been performed (step E870-8: Yes), the processing after step E870-9 is executed. The processing after step E870-9 may be executed without determining whether or not there has been an error. In this way, the volume value of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is changed (changed) by operating the first left or right button during the waiting state for the customer waiting effect. Becomes possible.

(Second operation reception processing of effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 66, a description will be given of the second operation accepting process of the effect control unit 130m. FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating the second operation receiving process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E880-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the second determination table shown in FIG. 67 (b) and determines whether the current state is the lamp of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74 ( It is determined whether or not it is a period in which the brightness adjustment of the LED (e.g., LED) and the like can be performed. If the period is not the brightness adjustment possible period (step E880-1: No), the process proceeds to step E880-24. The second determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step E880-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”, and when the second processing number is “0” (step E880). If the second process number is not “0” (step E880-2: No), the process proceeds to step E880-7. The “second processing number” is a processing number indicating a progress stage of the brightness adjustment, and is set to “0” in the initialization processing in step E20.

  In step E880-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is on standby (step E880-3: Yes), the sub CPU 130a returns to step E880-4. The command 1 for guiding brightness adjustment is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the command 1 for guiding the brightness adjustment is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the guide image for the brightness adjustment is displayed on the image display device, and the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are caused to emit light. Is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the customer waiting effect (step E880-3: No), in step E880-5, the command 2 for guiding brightness adjustment is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the command 2 for guiding the brightness adjustment is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for causing the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 to emit light is performed.

  In step E880-6, sub CPU 130a sets “1” to the second process number stored in sub RAM 130c, and ends the current second operation reception process.

  In step E880-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “1”, and when the second processing number is “1” (step E880). If the second process number is not “1” (step E880-7: No), the process proceeds to step E880-12.

  The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there has been a luminance adjustment start operation in step E880-8. If there has been a luminance adjustment start operation (step E880-8: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E880-9. If there is no operation for starting brightness adjustment (step E880-8: No), the second operation accepting process of this time is ended. The start operation of the brightness adjustment here means that the up button or the down button of the cross key 19 is operated, that is, the operation of the up button or the down button is detected by the cross key detection switch 19a. .

  In Step E880-9, the sub CPU 130a sets a luminance adjustment start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a luminance adjustment start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for displaying a notification image of the luminance value indicating the current luminance value on the image display device is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (up button, down button) in step E880-10, and in step E880-11, The second processing number stored in the RAM 130c is set to “2”, and the current second operation reception processing ends.

  In step E880-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “2”, and when the second processing number is “2” (step E880). If -12: Yes), the process proceeds to step E880-13. If the second process number is not "2" (step E880-12: No), the current second operation accepting process ends. .

  In step E880-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation of lowering the luminance has been performed. If an operation of lowering the luminance has been performed (step E880-13: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E880-14. If the operation has not been performed to lower the luminance (step E880-13: No), the process proceeds to step E880-16. The operation of lowering the brightness here means that the lower button of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the lower button has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.

  In Step E880-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a command for lowering the luminance in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the luminance reduction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the luminance value of the lamp (LED) of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 is reduced. Is performed.

  In step E880-15, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (up button, down button), and accepts the second operation this time. The process ends.

  In step E880-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation for increasing the luminance has been performed. If an operation for increasing the luminance has been performed (step E880-16: Yes), the process proceeds to step E880-17. If the operation has not been performed to increase the luminance (step E880-16: No), the process proceeds to step E880-19. Here, the operation of increasing the brightness here means that the upper button of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the upper button has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.

  In Step E880-17, the sub CPU 130a sets a command for increasing the luminance in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a command for increasing the brightness is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value of the lamp (LED) of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 is increased. Is performed.

  In step E880-18, the sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (up button, down button), and accepts the second operation this time. The process ends.

  In step E880-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the operation interval monitoring time set in step E880-10, step E880-15, step E880-18, or the like has elapsed. If it has elapsed (step E880-19: Yes), the process proceeds to step E880-20, and if the monitoring time of the operation interval has not elapsed (step E880-19: No), the current second The operation reception processing ends.

  In Step E880-20, the sub CPU 130a sets a luminance adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a luminance adjustment end command is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and the process of hiding the notification image of the luminance value displayed on the image display device and the process of terminating the emission of the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are performed. Done.

  In other words, the operation interval is monitored after the luminance value notification image is displayed by the operation of the up or down button (operation of starting the luminance adjustment) of the cross key 19 (input accepting unit) received after the luminance adjustment possible period. If the operation of the up or down button of the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) (the operation of decreasing the luminance or the operation of increasing the luminance) is not performed until the time (a predetermined period) elapses, the notification image of the luminance value is displayed. It is hidden. Also, when the operation of the up or down button of the cross key 19 (the operation of decreasing the luminance or the operation of increasing the luminance) is performed while the notification image of the luminance value is displayed, the operation interval from the operation is not changed. A notification image of a luminance value when the operation of the up or down button of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) (operation of decreasing the luminance, operation of increasing the luminance) is not performed until the monitoring time (predetermined period) elapses. Is hidden. This makes it possible to suppress the visibility of other images (such as effect design images, background images, volume adjustment guidance images, and brightness adjustment guidance images) from being disturbed by the brightness value notification image.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the brightness value has actually decreased or increased by operating the up or down button of the cross key 19 while the notification image of the brightness value is displayed. Since the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval is reset, the notification image of the luminance value is immediately hidden even though the player has operated the up or down button. This eliminates the inconvenience of causing the player to be dissatisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the operation is invalid even if the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated in a state in which the luminance value notification image is displayed. Alternatively, even when the right button is operated, the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval may be reset. In this way, even if the player accidentally operates the left or right button of the cross key 19, the inconvenience that the notification image of the luminance value is immediately hidden is eliminated, and the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling.

  In Step E880-21, the sub CPU 130a sets “0” to the second process number stored in the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the brightness value of the lamp (LED) of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 cannot be adjusted immediately. That is, the luminance value can be immediately adjusted (increase / decrease) during a period in which the luminance value notification image is displayed, but the luminance value is immediately adjusted (increase / decrease) in a period in which the luminance value notification image is not displayed. ) Will not be able to.

  In step E880-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is not on standby (step E880-22: No), the current second operation is performed. When the reception process is completed and the customer waiting effect is waiting (step E880-22: Yes), a waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) for the customer waiting effect is set in step E880-23, and the current time is set. The second operation receiving process ends.

  Thereby, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in the customer waiting process in step E860 is reset. That is, a time (63 seconds later) obtained by adding the monitoring time of the operation interval (3 seconds) and the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds) from the time when the operation of the cross key 19 is finally detected in the second operation receiving process. ) Later, the customer waiting effect will be executed. Note that the customer waiting effect may be executed 60 seconds after the last operation of the cross key 19 is detected.

  In step E880-24, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”, and when the second processing number is “0” (step E880- 24: Yes), the current second operation accepting process ends, and if the second process number is not “0” (step E880-24: No), the process proceeds to step E880-25.

  In step E880-25, the sub CPU 130a clears the monitoring time of the operation interval, and in step E880-26, sets a luminance adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a luminance adjustment end command is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and processing for hiding the luminance adjustment guidance image and the luminance value notification image displayed on the image display device is performed.

  In Step E880-27, the sub CPU 130a sets “0” to the second processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current second operation reception processing. That is, in the state where the guide image of the brightness adjustment is displayed or the notification image of the brightness value is displayed, there is a winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, and the fluctuation effect is performed. If it is determined that the period has shifted from the period in which the brightness adjustment is possible to the period in which the brightness adjustment is not possible due to the start of the process or notification of (error) of various occurrence events, the guidance image for brightness adjustment and the brightness value are displayed. Will be controlled so that the notification image is not displayed and the brightness adjustment operation cannot be performed.

  Therefore, the display of the guide image of the brightness adjustment and the notification image of the brightness value on the image display device prevent the visualization of the effect image of the variable effect and the notification image of the occurrence event displayed on the image display device. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Even if the game ball is passed to the ordinary figure gate 44 while the brightness adjustment operation is being performed and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is started, the brightness adjustment is not stopped but the brightness adjustment period is not over. Is not displayed or the brightness is not controlled to be operated.

  In step E880-8, when it is determined that the operation for starting the luminance adjustment has been performed (step E880-8: Yes), the processing after step E880-9 is executed. The processing after step E880-9 may be executed without determining whether or not there is any. In this case, the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device or the lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 is changed by operating the first upper button or lower button during the waiting for customer waiting effect. It is possible to do.

◇ (first judgment table)
FIG. 67A is a diagram illustrating a first determination table that is referred to when determining whether a period in which volume adjustment using the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) is possible is performed. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first determination table includes a first permission flag indicating whether volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible or not, and the effect control unit 130m. The effect state (status) controlled by the above is associated with the possibility (decision result) of volume adjustment for the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.

  As a first feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, when the first permission flag is “none”, volume adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed unconditionally, When the first permission flag is set to “Yes”, it is pointed out that the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19 in accordance with the effect state and the game state. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to adjust the volume of the effect sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) according to the presence or absence of the first permission flag, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  と し て As a second feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, even if the first permission flag is “present”, notification of various occurrence events (power-on notification, power-recovery notification, various error notifications) During (), the volume of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM or SE) cannot be adjusted by the player. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being distracted by adjusting the volume and not being aware of the occurrence of various events, and appropriately notifying the occurrence of the event to be notified. It becomes possible.

  と し て As a third feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, a customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed is divided into a customer waiting effect waiting and a customer waiting effect, and a customer waiting effect waiting Is a period in which the volume adjustment is possible, and the period during which the customer is waiting is a period in which the volume adjustment cannot be performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the customer waiting effect from being hindered by the volume adjustment using the cross key 19, and to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player. In addition, the waiting period of the customer waiting effect may be a period during which the volume adjustment cannot be performed, the waiting period for the customer may be the period during which the volume adjustment can be performed, or the waiting period of the customer waiting stage and during the waiting period of the customer may be the period during which the volume adjustment is possible. Good.

  As a fourth feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, during the waiting state of the customer waiting effect in which the customer waiting effect is not executed in the customer waiting state, the game is in the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the time-saving game. The point is that the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19 regardless of the state (low probability time reduction, high probability time reduction). By doing so, it is possible to extend the period in which the volume can be adjusted, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

  A fifth feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment is that volume adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed during luminance adjustment using the cross key 19. By doing so, the operation for adjusting the volume and the operation for adjusting the luminance do not have to be mixed, and the inconvenience that the player is confused can be avoided.

  第 A sixth characteristic of the first determination table of the present embodiment is that the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19 during high-speed fluctuation of the design symbol 70a (production sound output) during the fluctuation production. Is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to extend the period in which the volume can be adjusted, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the player. Further, since the volume can be adjusted without waiting for the customer waiting state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine 1 (the operation of the gaming machine 1 can be increased).

  As a seventh feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed during acceleration fluctuation, low speed fluctuation, or temporary stop of the effect symbol during the fluctuation effect. Points. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a part that is a key point in the variation of the effect symbols from being overlooked for the operation of adjusting the volume, and to improve the interest of the game.

  As an eighth feature of the first determination table of the present embodiment, during the big hit game set in the low-probability game state, the volume can be basically adjusted using the cross key 19 from the opening to the ending. However, there is a point that the volume cannot be adjusted during a pre-reading notice effect such as a jackpot notice. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect that is important for the player for the operation of adjusting the sound volume, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in a specific round (for example, 8 rounds and 15 rounds) during the jackpot game, based on the passing (winning) of a game ball to a specific area provided inside the special winning opening 50, the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the jackpot game. In the case of the gaming machine 1 that generates, the volume may be adjusted during a normal round (rounds other than the 8th and 15th rounds), and may not be adjusted during a specific round. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the specific area in the specific round important for the player to be overlooked for the sound volume adjustment, and to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced. Becomes possible. Also, in the first specific round (8 rounds), when it is determined that the game ball passes through the specific area (wins) to generate a probability-variable gaming state, during the subsequent specific round (15 rounds). The volume may be adjusted.

  Also, the volume adjustment may not be performed during the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect is performed during the jackpot game or the execution period of the continuous effect in which the continuous effect is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the volume of the sound is adjusted during a period in which the player is desired to pay attention and the interest of the game is reduced.

(Second determination table)
FIG. 67B is a diagram illustrating a second determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not a period in which luminance adjustment using the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) is possible. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the second determination table has a second permission flag indicating whether the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible or not, and the effect control unit 130m The effect state (status) controlled by the above is associated with the availability (determination result) of the brightness adjustment for the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.

  As a first feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, when the second permission flag is “none”, the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed unconditionally, When the second permission flag is “present”, it is pointed out that the brightness can be adjusted using the cross key 19 according to the effect state or the game state. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to adjust the brightness of the image display device and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) according to the presence or absence of the second permission flag. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  As a second feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, even when the second permission flag is “present”, various occurrence events are notified (power-on notification, power-recovery notification, various error notifications). The point is that the brightness of the image display device and various lighting devices cannot be adjusted by the player. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being distracted by adjusting the brightness and not being aware of the occurrence of various events, and appropriately notifying the occurrence of the event to be notified. It becomes possible.

  As a third feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, a customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed is divided into a customer waiting effect waiting and a customer waiting effect, and a customer waiting effect waiting is provided. It is a period during which the brightness adjustment is possible, and the period during which the customer waits for the performance is a period during which the brightness adjustment cannot be performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of waiting for the customer from being hindered by the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19, and to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player. In addition, the waiting period of the customer waiting effect may be a period during which the brightness adjustment cannot be performed, the waiting period of the customer may be the brightness adjustment possible period, or the waiting period of the customer waiting effect and the waiting period of the customer may be the brightness adjustment possible period. Good.

  As a fourth feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, a low-probability game state (a normal game state) or a time-saving game during a waiting state of a customer waiting effect in which the customer waiting effect is not executed in the customer waiting state. The point is that the brightness can be adjusted using the cross key 19 regardless of the state (low probability time reduction, high probability time reduction). By doing so, it is possible to extend the period during which the brightness can be adjusted, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

  A fifth feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment is that brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 cannot be performed during volume adjustment using the cross key 19. By doing so, the operation for adjusting the luminance and the operation for adjusting the volume do not need to be mixed, and the inconvenience of the player being confused can be avoided.

  A sixth feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment is that the brightness can be adjusted using the cross key 19 during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol (output of the effect sound) during the variable effect. Can be By doing so, it is possible to extend the period during which the brightness can be adjusted, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

  As a seventh feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 is disabled during the fluctuation of the effect symbol during the acceleration fluctuation, the low speed fluctuation, or the temporary stop during the fluctuation effect. Points. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a part that is a key point in the variation of the effect symbol from being overlooked for the operation of the brightness adjustment, and to improve the interest of the game.

  As an eighth feature of the second determination table of the present embodiment, during the jackpot game set in the low-probability gaming state, the brightness can be basically adjusted using the cross key 19 from the opening to the ending. However, it is pointed out that the brightness cannot be adjusted during a pre-reading notice effect such as a jackpot notice. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an important effect for the player from being overlooked for the operation of the brightness adjustment, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in a specific round (for example, 8 rounds and 15 rounds) during the jackpot game, based on the passing (winning) of a game ball to a specific area provided inside the special winning opening 50, the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the jackpot game. In the case of the gaming machine 1 that generates, the luminance adjustment may be performed during a normal round (rounds other than the 8th and 15th rounds), and may not be performed during a specific round. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the specific area in the specific round important for the player to be overlooked for the brightness adjustment, and to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced. Becomes possible. Also, in the first specific round (8 rounds), when it is determined that the game ball passes through the specific area (wins) to generate a probability-variable gaming state, during the subsequent specific round (15 rounds). The brightness may be adjusted.

  In addition, the luminance adjustment may not be performed during the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect is performed during the jackpot game or the execution period of the continuous effect in which the continuous effect is performed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the game from being reduced during the period in which the player is desired to pay attention, thereby preventing the interest of the game from being reduced.

  In the first determination table and the second determination table of the present embodiment, whether volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is possible during the fluctuation effect is set according to the state (status) of the fluctuation effect. Whether or not volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is possible may be set for each type of effect pattern (fluctuation pattern).

  For example, in the case of the variable effect pattern 2 (shortened variable effect), the volume and brightness can be adjusted over the entire period, and in the case of the variable effect pattern other than the variable effect pattern 2 (shortened variable effect), the speed of the effect symbol is high. It is conceivable to set the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 only during the fluctuation. By doing so, the period in which the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment are possible can be expanded, and the convenience for the player can be significantly improved.

  Conversely, in the case of the variable effect pattern 2 (shortened variable effect), the volume and luminance cannot be adjusted over the entire period, and in the case of the variable effect pattern other than the variable effect pattern 2 (shortened variable effect), the effect is produced. It is also conceivable to set the volume and brightness to be adjustable only during high-speed fluctuation of the symbol. By doing so, it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuating performance without making the player adjust the volume and brightness in a hurry, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 are uniformly disabled during the notification of the occurrence event, but may be set for each type of event to be notified. For example, in a case where a game store or a player does not suffer a disadvantage (does not cause a decrease in security) (for example, an abnormal payment or a dish is full), the volume control using the cross key 19 is performed. Brightness adjustment may be enabled, and in other cases, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment may be disabled. By doing so, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player while suppressing a disadvantage that the game store and the player suffer.

(Main processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141)
The main process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the centralized CPU 142, and the centralized CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

  First, the supervising CPU 142 sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting a timer interrupt in step T1, and performs an initialization process in step T2. In this processing, the central CPU 142 reads the main processing program from the central ROM 143, initializes flags and the like stored in the central RAM 144, and performs processing such as initialization.

  In step T3, the overall CPU 142 sets an interruption permission for permitting the timer interruption. In T3-1, the CPU 142 refers to the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 including the rotary switch and outputs the sound from the audio output device 9. A mode switching process for switching an adjustment mode related to adjustment of the volume (value) of the effect sound and the brightness (value) of the image display device and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The mode switching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T4, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not an effect instruction command has been received from the effect control unit 130m with reference to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144. If the effect instruction command has not been received (step T4: No), The process shifts to step T6-1. If the command has been received (step T4: Yes), in step T5, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received direction instruction command, and a predetermined animation pattern in the general RAM 144 is determined. Perform the setting process of the animation pattern to be set (set) in the area of. The setting process of the animation pattern will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The production instruction command includes a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a variable production pattern command, a design pattern command, a confirmed production pattern command, a positive change confirmed production pattern command, a preview production command, an operation promotion command, an operation production command. Command, a roulette effect command, an opening effect command, a round effect command, an ending effect command, and the like.

  The animation group includes the types of objects that make up the effect image, scenes (timing) and weight frames (display time) for displaying the effect image, target data (sprite image identification numbers, transfer source addresses, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are information that defines (specifies) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and information specifying an image display device for displaying a rendering image, are bundled. Is a group formed by

  The animation group types include, for example, a group of effect symbols for displaying animation of the effect symbol 70a, a group of icons for displaying the animation of the hold icon and the corresponding variable icon, and an animation of a variable effect such as a background and a character. There are a group of variable effects to display, a group of preliminary effects to display animations such as notices, a group of special game effects to display animations of special game effects, and the like.

  In step T6, the general CPU 142 performs a sound setting process of determining and setting a sound pattern from a group of sounds of the type corresponding to the received direction instruction command, and in step T6-1, transmitting the sound pattern from the effect control unit 130m. Based on the received notification start command and notification end command, the generated event notification processing for notifying the generated event by using the image display device and the audio output device 9 is performed. The notification process of the occurred event will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-2, the overall CPU 142 executes commands related to volume adjustment transmitted from the staging control unit 130m based on the operation of the cross key 19 (volume adjustment guidance command, volume adjustment start command, volume reduction command). For setting (adjusting) the volume (volume value) of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the audio output device 9 based on the volume increase command and the volume adjustment end command. Perform volume setting processing. The volume setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-3, the general CPU 142 transmits a command related to brightness adjustment transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the operation of the cross key 19 (a command for guiding brightness adjustment, a command for starting brightness adjustment, and a command for decreasing brightness). The luminance (luminance value) of the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of the various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) are set based on the luminance increase command and the luminance adjustment end command. A luminance setting process for (adjustment) is performed. The luminance setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-4, the general CPU 142 lowers the brightness (value) of the backlight of the image display device and the lamp (LED) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74) to reduce power consumption. A power saving mode control process for controlling the start and end of the power saving (eco) mode to be suppressed is performed. The control processing in the power saving mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T7, it is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating the update timing of a frame for updating an effect image or a notification image to be displayed on the image display device (drawing a new effect image or notification image). If it is determined that there is no frame switching flag (Step T7: No), the process proceeds to Step T3-1. If there is a frame switching flag (Step T7: Yes), the process proceeds to Step T8. Clear the switching flag.

  In step T9, the centralized CPU 142 performs a process of generating a display list including a group of commands for rendering control and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

  Here, the display list is image forming information for forming an effect image and a notification image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and one unit. Alternatively, the display list is generated for each of a plurality of frames (frame update timing). In the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

  Specifically, a display list set in the above-described occurrence event notification processing, volume setting processing, luminance setting processing, and the like, and animation scene information (address) for each animation pattern updated in animation control processing described later. By setting the drawing control command according to the contents of (1), a display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the lowest priority animation group to the animation pattern of the highest priority animation group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. , But vice versa.

  In step T10, the centralized CPU 142 performs a drawing instruction process for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output display list. By performing the drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws an effect image or a notification image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and converts the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer into the second image. A process for displaying the image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

  In step T11, the central CPU 142 performs a process of generating a sound list including a group of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the voice control unit 148.

  Here, the sound list is sound output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, notification sounds of occurrence events, etc.) such as sound data and music data to be output from the sound output device 9, and new sounds. Is generated on the basis of the drawing frame when the output is performed.

  In step T12, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound output command process to instruct the sound control unit 148 to output a sound based on the sound list output. By performing this sound output command processing, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output a sound based on the sound list.

  Therefore, the output of the various sounds is started from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and is also synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. Thus, the output from the audio output device 9 ends.

  The output of various sounds is started from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing, but various sounds are output from the audio output device 9 so as not to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. May be stopped, or vice versa.

  In step T13, the general CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list of the next frame, and then proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T3-1 to step T13 is repeatedly performed in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of liquid crystal control section 141)
The command reception interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. The command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

  In step T20, the central CPU 142 performs a command receiving process of receiving an effect instruction command or the like transmitted from the effect control unit 130m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144 is performed. When this processing ends, the current command reception interrupt processing ends.

(V blank interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141)
The V blank interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 (b) is a flowchart showing the V blank interruption process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. In the V blank interruption process, the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends ( The process is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every 1/30 second = about 33 ms is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

  In step T30, the central CPU 142 performs a counter update process of updating a predetermined number of counters (such as a scene switching counter, a weight frame counter, and a frame counter) (for example, adding “1”). 145 (VDP) performs a frame buffer switching instruction process for giving an instruction to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147.

  Thus, each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer”. And alternately.

  In step T32, the supervisor CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since the frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes in steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

◇ (mode switching process of liquid crystal control unit 141)
The mode switching process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the mode switching process of the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  First, in step T3-1-1, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not reference information on volume and brightness adjustment has been set in the general RAM 144. If the reference information has not been set (step T3-1-1). 1: No), the process proceeds to step T3-1-2, and if the reference information has been set (step T3-1-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-3. When this processing is first executed after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the adjustment mode, the reference information, and the power saving mode are cleared (initialized) in the initialization processing in step T2. It is determined that the information has not been set.

  In step T3-1-2, the centralized CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of a fixed volume value to the audio control unit 148, and shifts the processing to step T3-1-4. Thereby, a fixed sound volume value corresponding to the fixed sound volume value notification signal is output from the audio output device 9 at a fixed sound volume value of a specific sound (for example, a notification sound or a notification sound of an important event to be described later). The volume value is set in the voice control unit 148. Here, a notification signal of a fixed volume value corresponding to a volume value “6” corresponding to a volume of 120%, which is the maximum volume output from the gaming machine 1, is output to the audio control unit 148.

  The fixed volume value is set in the audio control unit 148 independently (separately) from a volume value described later, and after being set in the audio control unit 148, power supply to the gaming machine 1 is continued. It is not possible to change (adjust) while doing this. When outputting a specific sound such as a notification sound or a notification sound of an important event from the audio output device 9 based on the establishment of a predetermined notification condition, the sound output device 9 always depends (corresponds) to a fixed volume value. A notification sound or notification sound of an important event is output. Note that a fixed volume value (%) corresponding to the fixed volume value may be set instead of the fixed volume value being set in the audio control unit 148. In this case, the fixed volume value is set. Depending on (%), a notification sound or a notification sound of an important event may be output.

  The overall CPU 142 refers to the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 in step T3-1-3, and the state (switch position) of the previous changeover switch stored in the overall RAM 144 in step T3-1-19 described below. It is determined whether or not the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 has changed by comparing with .If the change has occurred (step T3-1-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-4. When there is no change (Step T3-1-3: No), the process is moved to Step T3-1-19.

  In step T3-1-4, the centralized CPU 142 selects the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 71 (b), and in step T3-1-5, it corresponds to the switch position of the changeover switch from the adjustment mode selection table. The adjustment mode (mode 1 to mode 16) is specified and set in a predetermined storage area of the overall RAM 144. The changeover switch 22 and the adjustment mode selection table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T3-1-6, the supervisor CPU 142 sets an adjustment mode notification command corresponding to the adjustment mode in the transmission buffer of the supervisor RAM 144. Thereby, the adjustment mode notification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130m, and information relating to volume adjustment and luminance adjustment is set in the information setting process of the effect control unit 130m described above.

  In step T3-1-7, the general CPU 142 specifies reference information corresponding to the adjustment mode from the adjustment mode selection table, and sets the reference information in a predetermined storage area of the general RAM 144. Note that the reference information includes whether or not volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible, an adjustment range of volume values of various sounds output from the audio output device 9, an initial value of volume of various sounds output from the audio output device 9, Whether the brightness can be adjusted using the cross key 19, the adjustment range of the brightness value of the backlight of the image display device and the lamp (LED) of various lighting devices, the backlight of the image display device and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, This is the initial value of the luminance of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74). Note that the reference information may include the settings of the adjustment mode and the power saving mode.

  In step T3-1-8, the overall CPU 142 sets the initial value (any of 0 to 5) of the volume specified in step T3-1-7 to a volume value indicating the current volume, and in step T3-1. At -9, a notification signal of a volume value corresponding to the set volume value is output to the voice control unit 148. As a result, the volume value corresponding to the volume value notification signal is set in the voice control unit 148 as the volume value of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the voice output device 9.

  The sound volume value is set in the audio control unit 148 independently (separately) from the fixed sound volume value described above. Even after the sound volume value is set in the sound control unit 148, the operation of the switch 22 and the adjustment of the sound volume can be performed. It can be changed (adjusted) by operating the cross key 19 during the possible period. When the sound output device 9 outputs a normal sound such as a production sound or a notification sound of a volume described later, the production sound or the notification sound of the volume depends on (corresponds to) the volume value. Become. Instead of setting the volume value in the audio control unit 148, a volume (%) corresponding to the volume value may be set. In this case, the volume depends on the volume (%). In this case, it is preferable to output an effect sound, a notification sound of the volume, or the like.

  In step T3-1-10, the central CPU 142 sets the initial value (any one of 0 to 5) of the luminance specified in step T3-1-7 to the luminance value indicating the current luminance, and in step T3-1. At -11, a notification signal of a brightness value corresponding to the set brightness value is output to the image control unit 145. As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.

  The brightness value set in the image control unit 145 can be changed (adjusted) by operating the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19 during the brightness adjustment enabled period. Then, the backlight of the image display device emits light depending on (corresponding to) this luminance value. Instead of setting a brightness value in the image control unit 145, a brightness (%) corresponding to the brightness value may be set. In this case, the brightness depends on the brightness (%). Then, the backlight of the image display device may emit light. Further, the luminance value of the backlight of the first image display device 70 and the luminance value of the backlight of the second image display device 71 may be set separately.

  The supervising CPU 142 sets a luminance value notification command corresponding to the set luminance value in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144 in step T3-1-12. Thereby, the notification command of the brightness value is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the notification command of the brightness value is set for the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The value is set in the lamp control unit 150 as a luminance value.

  The brightness value set in the lamp control unit 150 can be changed (adjusted) by operating the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19 during the brightness adjustment enabled period. Then, the backlight of the image display device emits light depending on (corresponding to) this luminance value. Instead of setting a brightness value in the lamp control unit 150, a brightness (%) corresponding to the brightness value may be set. In this case, the brightness depends on the brightness (%). Then, the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) may emit light.

  In step T3-1-13, the general CPU 142 specifies the setting (ON / OFF) of the power saving mode corresponding to the adjustment mode, and sets the setting in a predetermined storage area of the general RAM 144. The setting of the power saving mode set here is referred to in a power saving mode control process of the liquid crystal control unit described later.

  In step T3-1-14, the supervisor CPU 142 determines whether or not an important event (power-on, power-on, unauthorized winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality) is currently being reported. If the (occurrence) of the event is being notified (step T3-1-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-19, and the (occurrence) of the important event is not being notified (step T3-1). In (-14: No), the process moves to step T3-1-15.

  In step T3-1-15, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting for a customer. If the customer is waiting for a customer (step T3-1-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-15. The process shifts to 1-16, and if not in the customer waiting state (step T3-1-15: No), the process shifts to step T3-1-19.

  In step T3-1-16, the overall CPU 142 determines whether the volume adjustment (display of the notification image of the volume value) or the brightness adjustment (display of the notification image of the brightness value) is currently being performed. If the medium is not being adjusted or the luminance is not being adjusted (step T3-1-16: No), the process proceeds to step T3-1-17, and if the volume is being adjusted or the luminance is being adjusted (step T3-1-16: Yes). Then, the process is moved to Step T3-1-17.

  In step T3-1-17, the overall CPU 142 selects the adjustment mode notification sound determination table shown in FIG. 72, and in step T3-1-18, outputs the adjustment mode notification sound output information corresponding to the adjustment mode. Set to the list for output. Thereby, the sound list including the output information of the adjustment mode notification sound is output to the audio control unit 148, and the adjustment mode notification sound is output (notified) from the audio output device 9. The determination table for the notification sound in the adjustment mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T3-1-19, the overall CPU 142 sets the current state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 in the switch state storage area of the overall RAM 144, and ends the current mode switching process. The state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 set here is referred to in the above-described step T3-1-3.

  As described above, in the mode switching process according to the present embodiment, there is no restriction such as a possible volume adjustment period and a possible brightness adjustment period, and the entire period during which power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 is not adjusted. The possible period is set, and the adjustment mode is changed (switched) according to the change in the switch position of the volume adjustment changeover switch 22 under any circumstances.

  Therefore, by operating the changeover switch 22, it is possible to change the setting of the volume value, the brightness value, and the power saving mode desired by the gaming store, and the volume output from the audio output device 9 of the gaming machine 1, the image display device, and various illuminations It is possible to easily adjust the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the device (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74).

  In other words, even when the game in which the production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) is output is in progress (during a special symbol change display, during a big hit game, etc.), the changeover switch 22 is set to the power saving mode OFF position. By operating the power saving mode setting ON switch position (for example, “6”) from (for example, “5”), it is possible to switch the power saving mode setting to ON, and to produce effect sounds (game sounds such as BGM and SE). ) Is output (e.g., while a special symbol is being changed, a jackpot game is being played, etc.), the switch 22 is set to the power saving mode from the switch position where the power saving mode is set to ON (for example, “6”). By operating the switch position of OFF (for example, “5”), the setting of the power saving mode can be switched to OFF.

  In the mode switching process according to the present embodiment, the initial value of the volume corresponding to the changed adjustment mode is set to the volume value by changing (switching) the adjustment mode by operating the changeover switch 22, or the adjustment after the change is performed. Even when the initial luminance value corresponding to the mode is set to the luminance value, the display information of the volume value notification image OG and the luminance value notification image KG is not set in the display list. I have.

  For this reason, even if the switch position of the changeover switch 22 changes, the image display device does not newly display the notification image OG of the volume value or the notification image KG of the luminance value. Even if the adjustment mode is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22 due to maintenance of the gaming machine 1 installed in a rear-facing state, it is possible to prevent the player during the game from feeling suspicious. Becomes possible.

  In addition, when the adjustment mode is changed (switched) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the like, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode is output from the sound output device 9 to be notified. In addition, the adjustment mode set by the notification sound of the adjustment mode can be recognized.

  調整 Also, during the (occurrence) notification of an important event, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is not output from the audio output device 9, so that the notification sound of the important event is not disturbed by the notification sound of the adjustment mode. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as not being aware of occurrence of an important event. Note that the notification sound in the adjustment mode may not be output from the audio output device 9 during the notification of (generating) a normal event.

  In addition, when the customer is not in the waiting state (during a fluctuating effect or a jackpot effect, for example), the notification sound in the adjustment mode is not output from the audio output device 9, so that the effect sound output while the player is playing ( Game sounds such as BGM and SE) are not hindered, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by outputting a notification sound in the adjustment mode.

  In addition, when the volume is being adjusted or the brightness is being adjusted, the notification sound in the adjustment mode is not output from the audio output device 9, so that the player performing the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment by operating the cross key 19 is suspicious. Can be prevented from being felt.

  The adjustment mode notification sound output when the adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 is not output from the audio output device 9 at the timing when the adjustment mode is changed, but the adjustment mode is changed. A notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode may be output after a predetermined period of time (for example, after one second).

  With this configuration, when a plurality of switch positions (scales) of the changeover switch 22 are changed, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode that is being changed is not output, and the adjustment mode corresponding to the last set adjustment mode is not output. Only the notification sound of the adjustment mode is output. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode that is being changed from being output continuously, making it difficult to grasp the set adjustment mode.

  Further, after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed after the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 has changed, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is determined, and the switch position (scale) corresponding to the determined switch position (scale) is determined. The information of the adjustment mode to be performed, the reference information, and the setting of the power saving mode may be set.

  With this configuration, when a plurality of switch positions (scales) of the changeover switch 22 are changed, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode of the undetermined switch position is not output, and the fixed switch position is not output. Only the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode is output. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the undetermined switch position adjustment mode from being output continuously, making it difficult to grasp the set adjustment mode.

  During volume adjustment or brightness adjustment using the cross key 19, the adjustment mode is not changed (switched) even if the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 changes, and after the volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is completed. Even in this case, the adjustment mode may not be switched unless the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 changes.

  In this way, although the player performs an adjustment operation using the cross key 19 in order to change to an arbitrary volume (value) or brightness (value), the volume value that the player does not intend Inconvenience of setting the brightness and the brightness value can be avoided, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

◇ (selection table of changeover switch and adjustment mode)
The changeover switch 22 (input receiving unit) and the adjustment mode selection table will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b). FIG. 71A is a diagram illustrating an appearance of the changeover switch 22, and FIG. 71B is a diagram illustrating a selection table of the adjustment mode.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the changeover switch 22 is internally supported by a switch body 22a having a plurality of (for example, 16) selection terminals and rotatably (360 degrees) with respect to the switch body 22a. A non-shortening type rotary switch having an operating unit 22b, and a selection terminal connected to a common terminal of the operating unit 22b is changed by rotating the operating unit 22b, thereby switching the switch (switch position is changed). To).

  Further, 16 scales (0 to F) indicating the positions (contact points) of the selection terminals to be connected to the common terminal are provided on the upper surface of the switch body 22a, and the common terminal is connected to the operation unit 22b. Arrows indicating selection terminals are provided. Therefore, the state of the switch (switch position) can be grasped by the scale of the switch body 22a and the arrow of the operation unit 22b.

  The changeover switch 22 may be configured by a slide switch that opens and closes a contact by an operation unit sliding linearly, a dip switch that changes a contact by operating one of a plurality of operation units, or the like. May be used.

  In most cases, the changeover switch 22 described above is usually operated by a game clerk's hand before or after the game store is opened and the switch position is intentionally changed. The contact may change, and in the case of the gaming machine 1 installed on both islands, the gaming clerk touches the operation unit of the switch during maintenance of the gaming machine 1 installed in the back state. The contact may change. Further, a case in which the changeover switch 22 is operated during the game according to a request of the player may be considered.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the adjustment mode selection table, the switch positions (0 to F) of the changeover switch 22, the adjustment mode, the reference information, and the setting of the power saving mode are associated with each other. . Note that the reference information includes whether or not volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible, an adjustment range of various sounds output from the audio output device 9, an initial value of the volume of various sounds output from the audio output device 9, Of the brightness adjustment using the LCD, the adjustment range of the brightness value of the backlight of the image display device and the lamp (LED) of the various illumination devices, the backlight of the image display device and the various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10, the panel illumination) This is the initial value of the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the device 74).

  The first characteristic of the adjustment mode selection table according to the present embodiment is that the type (number) of the volume value (initial value of volume) and the type (number) of the luminance value (initial value of luminance) are different from the type of the adjustment mode. (The number of switch positions of the changeover switch 22) is large, and the reference information set in each adjustment mode and at least a part of the setting of the power saving mode are set to be different.

  By doing so, it is possible to easily set various pattern adjustment modes simply by operating the changeover switch 22. It should be noted that the reference information and the setting of the power saving mode set in some adjustment modes (small) are common, and at least a part of the reference information and the setting of the power saving mode set in other adjustment modes (many) are different. May be set as follows.

  As a second feature of the adjustment mode selection table according to the present embodiment, in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 in which the switch position of the changeover switch 22 falls within the range of 0 to 5, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment are set to be possible (variable). In the adjustment modes 7 to 11 in which the switch position is in the range of 6 to A, the volume can be adjusted (variable) but the brightness cannot be adjusted (fixed), and the adjustment modes 12 to 16 in which the switch position is in the range of BF. , The volume adjustment is not possible (fixed) but the brightness can be adjusted (variable).

  By doing so, it is possible to select (set) whether or not the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment can be performed by a rough operation of the changeover switch 22, and the convenience at the time of operation by the game store clerk is improved.

  As a third feature of the adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment, in adjustment modes 1 to 6, the initial value of the volume gradually increases by one step, and in adjustment modes 7 to 11, the initial value of the volume gradually increases by one step. In the adjustment modes 12 to 16, the initial value of the volume is set so that it increases like a stepping stone and then decreases like a stepping stone, and the initial value of the volume in each adjustment mode gradually changes so as to draw a waveform. (The difference between the initial values of adjacent sound volumes is the same or small).

  By doing so, even if the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22, the volume output from the audio output device 9 does not suddenly change, so that the volume suddenly increases when the changeover switch 22 is operated. This makes it possible to prevent the user from being surprised or from suddenly decreasing the volume to make it difficult to hear.

  The initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 is set as it is, and the initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 7 to 11 is set so as to gradually increase from 1 to 5 in increments of one. By setting the initial value of the volume to be gradually increased from 1 to 5 in steps of 1, the initial value of the volume in each adjustment mode may be changed so as to draw the shape of a saw blade.

  The initial value of the volume of the adjustment modes 1 to 6 is set as it is, and the initial value of the volume of the adjustment modes 7 to 11 is gradually increased from 1 to 5 in increments of one. By setting the initial value of the volume to gradually decrease in increments of 1 from 5 to 1, the initial value of the volume in each adjustment mode draws a waveform that changes like a saw blade and a waveform May be set so as to coexist with the part that changes to.

  As a fourth feature of the selection table of the adjustment mode of the present embodiment, the initial value of the luminance is gradually increased gradually in the adjustment modes 1 to 4, and the initial value of the luminance is the maximum value in the adjustment modes 5 to 13. It is unified, and the initial value of the luminance is set so as to be gradually reduced gradually in the adjustment modes 14 to 16, and the initial value of the luminance in each adjustment mode changes so as to draw a substantially mountain shape (trapezoid). Can be

  By doing so, when the changeover switch 22 is operated, the brightness of the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) can be rapidly changed. Therefore, the luminance does not suddenly increase or decrease when the changeover switch 22 is operated, so that it is possible to reduce the burden on the visual sense.

  The initial value of the luminance may be set so as to draw the shape of the saw blade in the same manner as the initial value of the volume. Also, the initial value of the luminance may be set so that a portion that changes so as to draw the shape of a saw blade and a portion that changes so as to draw a wavy shape coexist in the same manner as the initial value of the volume.

  As a fifth feature of the adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment, the setting of the power saving (eco) mode is set to OFF in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 and the adjustment modes 12 to 16, and the power saving (Eco) mode is set in the adjustment modes 7 to 11. The point is that the setting of the (eco) mode is set to ON, and it is possible to set ON / OFF of the power saving mode by operating the changeover switch 22.

  By doing so, it is possible to set whether the power saving mode is turned ON or OFF by the will of the gaming store, and it is possible to control the power consumption of the gaming machine 1 to some extent. Therefore, it is also possible to adjust the operating cost of the entire game store.

  Further, since the number of adjustment modes in which the setting of the power saving mode is OFF is larger than the number of adjustment modes in which the setting of the power saving mode is ON, the possibility that the setting of the power saving mode is OFF increases. This is convenient for a gaming machine manufacturer who wants to appeal the gaming machine 1.

  In the adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment, the target set by the adjustment mode includes the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9, the backlight of the image display device, and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, Although the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74) has been described, only one of them may be targeted. Even in such a case, the initial value of the volume, the initial value of the luminance, and the like may be set to be different for each adjustment mode.

  Although the adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment includes an adjustment mode (adjustment mode 1) in which the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance are set to “0”, the initial value and the luminance of the volume are included. May not include the adjustment mode whose initial value is set to “0”. In this case, the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the brightness in the adjustment mode 1 are set to “1”, and the initial values of the volume in the adjustment modes 1 to 12 are gradually changed so as to draw a waveform. It is preferable that the initial value of the luminance is gradually changed so as to draw a substantially mountain shape (trapezoid).

  Further, in the adjustment mode selection table of the present embodiment, whether the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is enabled (variable) or disabled (fixed) is set for each adjustment mode, but the volume adjustment is performed in all the adjustment modes. May be set (variable). Even in this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the reference information set in each adjustment mode and the setting of the power saving mode are set to be different.

  It should be noted that the gaming machine 1 executes a predetermined specific effect periodically (every hour or every 30 minutes) based on timing information of an RTC (real-time clock) provided in the effect control device 130A that measures the actual date and time. In this case, whether or not to execute the specific effect, the execution time of the specific effect, the type of the specific effect, and the like may be set by operating the changeover switch 22. In this case, it is possible to set reference information for executing a specific effect for each adjustment mode, or to set a specific adjustment mode for setting a specific effect. By doing so, the specific effect can be executed in an execution mode in accordance with the policy of the gaming store, so that it becomes an appeal point of the gaming machine 1 to the gaming store and it is possible to stimulate the purchase will.

  In addition, at least a part of the specific effect sound for producing a predetermined specific effect may be output at the maximum volume (120% volume) corresponding to the fixed volume value “6”. Further, when the specific effect to be executed is a simultaneous effect in which a plurality of gaming machines 1 of the same model simultaneously perform the same or almost the same effect, the simultaneous effect sound for performing the simultaneous effect is as follows. At least a part is output from the audio output device 9 at the maximum volume (volume: 120%) corresponding to the fixed volume value “6”, and the specific performance to be performed is a single performance in which a single gaming machine 1 performs a performance. In the case of, the independent effect sound for producing the independent effect may be output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the volume value. Further, the simultaneous production sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the volume value, and the single production sound is output from the audio output device 9 at the maximum volume (120%) corresponding to the fixed volume value “6”. It may be.

◇ (Determining table of adjustment mode notification sound)
FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an adjustment mode notification sound determination table that is referred to when determining (selecting) a notification sound in the adjustment mode corresponding to the adjustment mode.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the adjustment mode and the adjustment mode notification sound are associated with each other in the adjustment mode notification sound determination table, and the adjustment mode notification sound includes the power saving mode ON / OFF and the volume. (A volume value set when the adjustment mode is changed), and a sound indicating whether volume adjustment or brightness adjustment is possible or not are set. Therefore, when the notification sound of the adjustment mode is output from the audio output device 9, it is possible to grasp the outline of the set adjustment mode. Note that the notification sound in the adjustment mode may include a sound indicating the initial value of the luminance (the luminance value set when the adjustment mode is changed).

  In addition, as to whether or not the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment can be performed, only the sound indicating that the adjustment is possible is included so that the amount of information to be notified is not excessive, and the sound indicating that the adjustment is not possible is not included. However, a sound indicating that adjustment is not possible may be included.

  When a specific adjustment mode (for example, adjustment mode 1 in which the initial value of the volume is set to 0) is set, a notification sound of the adjustment mode is output, and an adjustment mode other than the specific adjustment mode is set. When the adjustment mode is set to (adjustment mode 2 to 16 in which the initial value of the volume is set to a value other than 0), the notification sound of the adjustment mode may not be output, or vice versa.

◇ (Modification of mode switching processing of liquid crystal control section 141)
A modification of the mode switching process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the mode switching process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. Here, only the portions different from the mode switching process of FIG. 70 will be described, and the corresponding portions will be denoted by the same step numbers and description thereof will be omitted.

  A first difference of the modification of the mode switching process shown in FIG. 73 is that a step T3-1-8 is performed between step T3-1-8 and step T3-1-9 in the mode switching process shown in FIG. -1 and Step T3-1-8-2.

  In step T3-1-8-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the volume is currently being adjusted (display of a notification image of the volume value). If the volume is not being adjusted (step T3-1-8-1) : No), the process proceeds to step T3-1-9. If the volume is being adjusted (step T3-1-8-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-8-2. In step T3-1-8-2, the display information of the notification image of the sound volume value corresponding to the current sound volume value is set in a display list.

  By doing so, the notification image of the volume value displayed on the image display device during the volume adjustment is changed (updated) to the notification image of the volume value according to the change of the adjustment mode, and the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed. It is possible to inform the player of the set volume value by changing, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the volume value recognized by the player and the actually set volume value are different from each other Become.

  A second difference of the modification of the mode switching process shown in FIG. 73 is that a step T3-1-10 between the step T3-1-10 and the step T3-1-11 in the mode switching process shown in FIG. -1 and step T3-1-10-2.

  In step T3-1-10-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the brightness is currently being adjusted (displaying a notification image of the brightness value). If the brightness is not being adjusted (step T3-1-10-). 1: No), the process proceeds to step T3-1-11, and if the luminance adjustment is being performed (step T3-1-10-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3-1-10-2. Then, in step T3-1-10-2, the display information of the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the current luminance value is set in the display list.

  By doing so, the notification image of the brightness value displayed on the image display device during the brightness adjustment is changed (updated) to the notification image of the brightness value according to the change of the adjustment mode, and the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed. It is possible to inform the player of the set brightness value by changing the value of the change, and it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the brightness value recognized by the player is different from the actually set brightness value Become.

◇ (Modified example of adjustment mode selection table)
A modification of the adjustment mode selection table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74B is a diagram illustrating a modification of the selection table for the adjustment mode. In this modification, the brightness of the backlight of the image display device using the cross key 19 and the lamp (LED) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) cannot be changed. Are different from the adjustment mode selection table in FIG. 71 in that the volume range set in the adjustment mode is different and there is a dedicated adjustment mode for setting the power saving mode.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the adjustment mode selection table of the modified example, the switch positions (0 to F) of the changeover switch, the adjustment mode, the availability of volume adjustment, the set volume range, and the volume The adjustment range of the value and the initial value of the volume are associated with each other.

  As a first feature of the adjustment mode selection table of this modification, the number of types of adjustment mode (the number of switch positions of the changeover switch 22) is larger than the number (type) of volume values (initial value of volume), and the adjustment mode 1 to 12 is that at least a part of the information set in each adjustment mode is different. By doing so, it is possible to easily set various pattern adjustment modes simply by operating the changeover switch 22.

  As a second feature of the adjustment mode selection table of this modification, in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 in which the switch position of the changeover switch 22 falls within the range of 0 to 5, the volume can be adjusted (variable), and the switch position is set. In the adjustment modes 7 to 12 corresponding to the range from 6 to B, the volume adjustment is set to be impossible (fixed). By doing so, it is possible to select (set) whether volume adjustment is possible or not by a rough operation of the changeover switch 22, thereby improving convenience.

  As a third feature of the adjustment mode selection table of this modification, the initial value of the volume gradually increases in increments of one in the adjustment modes 0 to 6, and the initial value of the volume gradually increases in increments of one in the adjustment modes 7 to 12. And the initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 1 to 12 gradually changes so as to draw a substantially mountain shape (trapezoid) (the difference between the initial values of the adjacent volumes is the same or smaller). Can be By doing so, even if the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22, the volume output from the audio output device 9 does not suddenly change. This makes it possible to prevent the user from being surprised or from suddenly decreasing the volume and becoming difficult to hear.

  A fourth feature of the adjustment mode selection table of the present modification is that the volume ranges are different in the adjustment modes 1 to 6, and the volume corresponding to each volume value is set to be different. . By doing so, the volume range (volume level: free, minimum, small, medium, large, maximum) of the sound output from the audio output device 9 by operating the changeover switch 22 can be set. It is possible to limit the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 on the side.

  As a fifth feature of the adjustment mode selection table of this modification, the adjustment modes 13 to 16 are dedicated adjustment modes for setting the power saving mode, and the changeover switch 22 is set to one of the switches C to F. The setting screen of the power saving mode is displayed by setting the position (state), and the backlight of the image display device and the lamp (LED) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) in the power saving mode. Can be set. By doing so, the selection terminal of the changeover switch 22 can be fully used, and further, the brightness of the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices in the power saving mode can be arbitrarily set. It becomes possible.

  In the adjustment mode selection table according to this modification, the target set by the adjustment mode is the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9, but the backlight of the image display device and various lighting devices (frames) May be replaced with the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74), and the volume range and the brightness range may be set to be different for each adjustment mode for both the volume and the brightness. .

  Further, in the present modification, it is preferable to operate the changeover switch 22 so that the setting (information) of the power saving mode set in the general RAM 144 (non-volatile memory) is not lost due to the power-off of the gaming machine 1. In this case, a backup power supply may be supplied to the overall RAM 144, or the setting (information) of the power saving mode may be stored in a nonvolatile memory such as an FERAM. Also in this case, the reference information may be lost when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off or cleared when the power is restored.

  Further, the adjustment mode selection table of this modification example includes an adjustment mode (adjustment mode 1) in which the initial value of the volume is set to “0”, but the initial value of the volume is set to “0”. May not be included. In that case, the initial value of the volume in the adjustment mode 1 is set to “1”, and the initial value of the volume in the adjustment modes 1 to 12 is configured to gradually change so as to draw a substantially mountain shape (trapezoid). Good.

(Modified example of determination table for notification sound in adjustment mode)
FIG. 75A shows an adjustment mode in which an adjustment mode notification sound corresponding to the modification of the adjustment mode selection table is set, and the adjustment mode reference sound is determined (selected) for the adjustment mode notification sound corresponding to the adjustment mode. It is a figure which shows the determination table of the notification sound of.

  As shown in FIG. 75A, the adjustment mode and the adjustment mode notification sound are associated with each other in the adjustment mode notification sound determination table, and the adjustment mode notification sound has an initial volume band ( (Volume level), whether or not volume adjustment is possible, and sound indicating that the power saving mode is set. Therefore, when the notification sound of the adjustment mode is output from the audio output device 9, it is possible to grasp the outline of the set adjustment mode.

  If the modification of the selection table of the adjustment mode is replaced so that the brightness is targeted, or if both the volume and the brightness are targeted, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is also a content targeted for the volume and the brightness. Will be changed.

(Setting screen of power saving mode)
FIG. 75B is a diagram illustrating a setting screen of the power saving mode corresponding to a modification of the selection table of the adjustment mode.

  On the setting screen of the power saving mode, the first item (luminance of the display device, 30%, 50%, 70%) for setting the luminance of the backlight of the image display device, and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10). , The second item (luminance of various LEDs, 30%, 50%, 70%) for setting the luminance of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74) and the third item for determining the treatment of the set contents. Items (cancel, decision, initialization) are displayed vertically, and a guidance image of “selection” indicating that an item or a setting (brightness or the like) is selected by the cross key 19 at the bottom of the screen and the effect button 17 are displayed. And a guide image of "determination" indicating that the determination is made.

  Here, the user selects the first item or the second item using the cross key 19 or the effect button 17, selects the luminance of the selected item, and then selects the “decision” or “initialization” option of the third item. Then, the setting of the power saving mode (the brightness of the display device and the brightness of various LEDs during the power saving mode) is completed. When the option of “cancel” is selected and determined, the original luminance setting is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to arbitrarily set the settings in the power saving mode, and it is possible to control the operating cost of the gaming machine 1 of the gaming store to some extent.

  In addition, when the changeover switch 22 is operated before the setting of the power saving mode is completed and the switch position becomes out of C to F, or when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the fluctuation effect is performed. When the setting is started, the setting of the power saving mode is terminated halfway, the original brightness setting is maintained, and the setting screen of the power saving mode displayed on the image display device is also hidden.

  Further, even if the changeover switch 22 is operated during the setting operation of the power saving mode, the setting operation of the power saving mode is continued and the setting screen of the power saving mode is not hidden if the switch positions are in the positions C to F. . For this reason, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 changes due to vibration, impact, or the like, or when the changeover switch 22 touches the changeover switch 22 during maintenance of the gaming machine 1 on which both sides of the island are turned, the switch position changes. Even in such a case, the inconvenience that the setting operation of the power saving mode is terminated halfway is less likely to occur.

(Setting processing of the animation pattern of the liquid crystal control unit 141)
The animation pattern setting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the setting processing of the animation pattern by the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  First, in step T5-1, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not the received production instruction command is a customer waiting production command. If the received production instruction command is not a customer waiting production command (step T5-1: No), step T5 is performed. If the command is a customer waiting effect command (step T5-1: Yes), in step T5-2, a customer waiting animation is displayed from a customer waiting group for displaying a customer waiting animation. A pattern for determining an animation pattern waiting for a customer to be determined and set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.

  In step T5-3, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a command for displaying an icon. If the command is not a command for displaying an icon (step T5-3: No), the general CPU 142 proceeds to step T5-5. If the command is an icon display command (step T5-3: Yes), in step T5-4, an icon of an icon from a group of icons for displaying the animation of the pending icon and the animation of the variable icon is displayed. An animation pattern is determined and an animation pattern of an icon to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is set.

  In step T5-5, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a variable effect pattern command. If the received command is not a variable effect pattern command (step T5-5: No), step T5-7. If the command is a fluctuating effect pattern command (step T5-5: Yes), in step T5-6, the fluctuating effect animation from the fluctuating effect group for displaying background animation or character animation is performed. A pattern for deciding a pattern and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is set for a variation effect animation pattern.

  In step T5-7, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a symbol pattern command. If the command is not a symbol pattern command (step T5-7: No), the process proceeds to step T5-9. If it is a symbol pattern command (step T5-7: Yes), in step T5-8, the animation pattern of the design is displayed from the group of effect symbols for displaying the animation of the effect symbol and the animation of the fourth symbol. Is determined, and a setting process of an animation pattern of a symbol to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.

  In step T5-9, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a command for an announcement effect. If the command is not a command for an effect effect (step T5-9: No), the general CPU 142 proceeds to step T5-11. If the command is an announcement effect (step T5-9: Yes), in step T5-10, an announcement effect for displaying an announcement effect for announcing a possibility of a big hit is displayed. The animation pattern of the announcement effect is determined from the group, and the animation pattern of the announcement effect to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.

  In step T5-11, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation promotion command. If not, the process proceeds to step T5-13. If the command is an operation promotion command (step T5-11: Yes), in step T5-12, the operation from the operation promotion group for displaying the operation promotion effect prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is performed. An animation pattern for operation promotion which determines an animation pattern for promotion and sets (sets) it in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.

  In step T5-13, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation effect command. If the command is not an operation effect command (step T5-13: No), the control CPU 142 proceeds to step T5-15. If the command is an operation effect command (step T5-13: Yes), an animation pattern of the operation effect is determined from a group of operation effects for displaying the operation effect in step T5-14. An animation pattern for an operation effect to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is set.

  In step T5-15, the supervisory CPU 142 determines whether or not the received instruction command is a roulette effect command. If the received instruction command is not a roulette effect command (step T5-15: No), step T5-17. If the command is a roulette effect command (step T5-15: Yes), in step T5-16, a roulette effect is displayed from a roulette effect group for displaying a roulette effect for announcing the progress of the variable effect. Is determined and an animation pattern for a roulette effect to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is set.

  In step T5-17, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a command for an opening effect. If the command is not an opening effect command (step T5-17: No), step T5-19. If the command is an opening effect command (step T5-17: Yes), in step T5-18, an opening effect animation pattern is determined from the opening effect group for displaying the opening effect. A setting process of an animation pattern of an opening effect to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.

  In step T5-19, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a command for a round effect. If the command is not a command for a round effect (step T5-19: No), the overall CPU 142 proceeds to step T5-21. If the command is a round effect command (step T5-19: Yes), in step T5-20, an animation pattern of the round effect is determined from a group of round effects for displaying the round effect. A round effect animation pattern setting process to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed.

  In step T5-21, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an ending effect command. If the command is not an ending effect command (step T5-21: No), the current animation pattern Is completed and if the command is an ending effect command (step T5-21: Yes), in step T5-22, an ending effect animation pattern is determined from the ending effect group for displaying the ending effect. Then, an ending effect animation pattern to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is determined, and the current animation pattern setting process ends.

  A description will be given, with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the process of notifying the liquid crystal control unit 141 of an occurrence event.

  First, in Step T6-1-1, the supervisor CPU 142 determines whether or not the notification start command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m has been received, and when the notification start command has been received (Step T6-1). If the packet has not been received (step T6-1-1: No), the process proceeds to step T6-1-12.

  In step T6-1-2, the overall CPU 142 specifies the type of event that has occurred from the received notification start command, and in step T6-1-3, displays the display information of the notification image corresponding to the generated event for display. Set in the list. As a result, a display list including display information of a notification image corresponding to the occurred event is output to the image control unit 145, and a notification image of the generated event is displayed on the image display device. The event notification image will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-1-4, the supervisory CPU 142 determines whether or not the output list has the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event having the higher priority (see FIG. 48). In step T6-1-4: Yes, the process proceeds to step T6-1-5, and when there is no output information (step T6-1-4: No), the process proceeds to step T6-1-6. Transfer. The event notification sound will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-1-5, the central CPU 142 determines that an event with a lower priority has occurred at the same time as the event with a higher priority, and waits for the output information of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the event that has occurred this time. And the process moves to step T6-1-12.

  Accordingly, when a plurality of events occur at the same time, the output of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the lower priority event is awaited, and only the notification sound of the event corresponding to the higher priority event is performed. Will be output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is not possible to grasp what kind of event has occurred due to the mixture of the notification sounds of a plurality of events.

  In step T6-1-6, the supervisory CPU 142 outputs no notification sound of the event corresponding to the occurred event or outputs a notification sound of the event corresponding to the event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time. As a result, the output information of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the event that has occurred this time is set in the output list. As a result, a sound list including the output information of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the event that has occurred this time is output to the audio control unit 148, and the notification sound of the event that has occurred this time is output from the audio output device 9.

  In step T6-1-7, the supervisory CPU 142 determines whether or not the output list includes the output information of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time in the output list. If there is no output (step T6-1-7: No), the process proceeds to step T6-1-9, and if there is output information (step T6-1-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-1-1. In step 8, the output information of the notification sound of the event corresponding to the event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time from the output list is moved to the standby list. As a result, the notification sound of the event corresponding to the event with the higher priority is output with priority, and it becomes possible for the game store to take appropriate measures.

  In step T6-1-9, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the output information of the notification sound of the event set in the output list is for an important event, and determines whether or not the important event (power on, power recovery). In the case of an illegal prize, an abnormal prize, a magnetic abnormality, or a radio wave abnormality (step T6-1-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-1-10, and if the event is not an important event ( In Step T6-1-9: No), the process is transferred to Step T6-1-11.

  In step T6-1-10, the overall CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of a volume value corresponding to the volume value 0 (mute, mute) to the voice control unit 148. As a result, 0 (mute, mute) is set to the sound control unit 148 as the volume (value) of the production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9 and corresponds to the important event that has occurred. It becomes possible to emphasize (conspicuous) the notification sound of an important event to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game clerk to accurately recognize the occurrence of an important event.

  In step T6-1-11, the overall CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of a sound volume value corresponding to の of the current sound volume value to the audio control unit 148. As a result, the volume (value) of the production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is １ ／ of the current volume value (a value depending on the current adjustment mode and the volume value). ) Is set in the voice control unit 148, so that the notification sound of the event corresponding to the normal event can be more emphasized (conspicuous) than the effect sound. Therefore, it becomes possible for a player or a game clerk to accurately recognize the occurrence of a normal event.

  In step T6-1-12, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the notification end command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m has been received, and when the notification end command has been received (step T6-1-12). : Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-1-13, and if not received (step T6-1-12: No), the notification process of the current occurrence event ends.

  In step T6-1-13, the centralized CPU 142 specifies the type of the event whose notification period has ended from the received notification end command, and in step T6-1-14, the control image of the notification image corresponding to the event whose notification period has ended. Clear the display information from the display list. As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the notification image corresponding to the event whose notification period has ended is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the event whose notification period has ended does not appear on the image display device.

  In step T6-1-15, the supervisory CPU 142 determines whether or not the output list includes the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event in which the notification period has ended, and if there is the output information (step T6-1). If -15: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-1-16, and if there is no output information (step T6-1-15: No), the process proceeds to step T6-1-17.

  In step T6-1-16, the supervisor CPU 142 clears the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event in which the notification period has ended from the output list. As a result, a sound list that does not include the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event whose notification period has ended is output to the sound control unit 148, and the notification sound of the event whose notification period has ended is not output from the sound output device 9.

  In step T6-1-17, the supervisor CPU 142 clears the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event in which the notification period has ended from the standby list. Thereby, the state in which the output of the notification sound corresponding to the event in which the notification period has ended is awaited is released.

  In step T6-1-18, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not there is output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event in the standby list, and when there is no output information (step T6-1-18: No). In step T6-1-19, the process proceeds to step T6-1-19. If there is output information (step T6-1-18: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-1-20.

  In step T6-1-19, the supervisor CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of the sound volume value corresponding to the current sound volume value to the sound control unit 148, and ends the process of notifying the current occurrence event. Thereby, the sound volume (value) corresponding to the notification signal of the sound volume value is set to the sound control unit 148 as the sound volume (value) of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9.

  By doing so, the volume (value) of 0 or 1/4 set in the voice control unit 148 at the start of the notification of the occurred event is changed to the start of the notification of the occurred event at the end of the notification of the occurred event. It will return to the previous volume (value). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the volume (value) of the effect sound from being kept low despite the end of the notification of the occurred event, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. .

  In step T6-1-20, the supervisor CPU 142 sets the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event having the highest priority in the standby list in the output list. As a result, a sound list including the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event set in the list for current output is output to the audio control unit 148, and the sound output device 9 outputs the event to the event set in the list for current output. A corresponding notification sound is output.

  In step T6-1-21, the supervising CPU 142 determines whether or not the output information of the notification sound corresponding to the event set in the output list is for an important event, and is for an important event. In this case (Step T6-1-21: Yes), the process proceeds to Step T6-1-22, and if the event is not an important event (Step T6-1-21: No), the process proceeds to Step T6-1-1. The process is shifted to 23.

  In step T6-1-22, the supervisor CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of the volume value corresponding to the volume value 0 (mute, mute) to the voice control unit, and ends the notification process of the current event. As a result, 0 (mute, mute) is set as the volume (value) of the production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9 in the sound control unit 148, and the notification corresponding to the important event is made. The sound can be emphasized (conspicuous).

  In step T6-1-23, the supervisor CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of a sound volume value corresponding to の of the current sound volume value to the sound control unit, and ends the process of notifying the current event. As a result, the volume (value) of the production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is １ ／ of the current volume value (a value depending on the current adjustment mode and the volume value). ) Is set in the voice control unit 148, so that the notification sound corresponding to a normal event can be more emphasized (conspicuous) than the effect sound.

  At the end of the notification of the event that has occurred, the volume (value) of the production sound (game sound such as BGM or SE) is returned to the state (current volume value) before the output of the notification sound corresponding to the event was started. Instead, the sound volume may be returned to the initial value of the volume specified by the current adjustment mode. When one of the notification of the important event and the notification of the normal event ends, the state is returned to the state (current volume value) before the notification of the occurred event starts, and the other ends. May be returned to the initial value of the volume specified by the current adjustment mode.

  Further, in the case of outputting a notification sound of an event that has occurred by setting the production sound (games such as BGM and SE) to a volume corresponding to a volume value of 0 or a volume corresponding to a quarter of the current volume value, Alternatively, a notification sound of an event that has occurred after the sound volume of the effect sound has been gradually lowered (fade out) may be output, or an event that has occurred after the sound volume of the effect sound has been gradually lowered (fade out). The volume of the sound may be gradually increased (fade-in), or the volume of the notification sound of the event that has occurred while gradually decreasing (fade-out) the volume of the effect sound may be gradually increased (fade-in). (So-called crossfade). In addition, even when the sound volume of the effect sound is returned to the original volume based on the end of the notification sound of the occurred event, the fade-out, fade-in, and cross-fade processing is performed between the sound effect of the notification sound of the generated event. Good to do.

(Event notification image)
FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a notification image of an event displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) when an event to be notified occurs. Specifically, FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing a notification image notifying that power-on has occurred, and FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram showing a notification image notifying that power-on has occurred. FIG. 78 (c) shows a notification image for notifying that an illegal prize has occurred, a notification image for notifying that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, a notification image for notifying that an abnormal prize has occurred, and an open frame. It is a figure which shows the alerting image which alert | reports that it performed, the alerting image which alert | reports that the dish full occurred, and the alerting image which alert | reports that the right-handing error occurred.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), a power-on notification image for notifying that power-on has occurred includes a character image G1 including a character string of “Initializing Please wait for a moment” superimposed on a monochrome background image, And a gauge image G2 composed of a time gauge indicating the remaining notification period (hours) after the power is turned on. The remaining notification period (time) is notified by the width of the black band portion of the gauge image G2 increasing with time. It is supposed to be.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), a power restoration notification image notifying that the power restoration has occurred includes a character image G3 including a character "Please wait for a while during power restoration" to be superimposed on a single-color background image, And a gauge image G2 composed of a time gauge indicating the remaining notification period (hours) of the power restoration. The remaining notification period (hour) is notified by the width of the black band portion of the gauge image G2 increasing with time. It is supposed to be.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the notification image of the fraud prize notifying that the fraud prize has occurred is an icon image G4 including the characters “fraud prize” and an exclamation mark, and the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the notification image of the abnormal prize for notifying that the abnormal prize has occurred is the icon image G5 including the characters “abnormal prize” and an exclamation mark, and the first image display device. The icon image G4 is displayed at the lower right of the screen of 70 (main liquid crystal) and immediately above the display position of the icon image G4.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the notification image of the magnetic anomaly for notifying that the magnetic anomaly has occurred is an icon image G6 including the characters “magnetic anomaly” and an exclamation mark, and the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the notification image of the radio wave abnormality notifying that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is an icon image G7 composed of the characters “radio wave abnormality” and an exclamation mark, and the first image display device. The icon image G6 is displayed at the lower left of the screen of 70 (main liquid crystal) and immediately above the display position of the icon image G6.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the frame opening notification image for notifying that the frame opening has occurred is an icon image G8 composed of the characters “door opening” and an exclamation mark, and the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the notification image of the plate full notifying that the plate full has occurred is an icon image G9 composed of characters "Please remove the ball full of the plate" and an exclamation mark. The image is displayed at the lower center of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the notification image of the right-handed error for notifying that the right-handed error has occurred is an icon image G10 including the characters "Please left-handed" and an exclamation mark. Are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

  The icon images G4 to G10 are displayed on an effective line set so as to traverse the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the vertical direction to the left and right, at a position that does not overlap the stopped design symbol 70a. The effect image and the like displayed behind are displayed translucently (or opaquely) so that they can be visually recognized. When a plurality of events notified by the icon images G4 to G10 occur simultaneously, the icon images G4 to G10 are also displayed at the same time.

  Note that the icon images G4 to G10 are enlarged and displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) so as to be superimposed on a single-color background image, similarly to the power-on notification image and the power restoration notification image. Is also good. In this case, like the notification sound of the event, the icon image corresponding to the event with the higher priority is displayed with priority, and the display of the icon image corresponding to the event with the lower priority is made to wait. Is preferred.

  In addition, the first image display device displays an icon image in the case of a normal event, and superimposes on a single-color background image in the case of an important event in the same manner as the power-on notification image or the power restoration notification image. It may be displayed enlarged to 70 (main liquid crystal). In this way, it is possible to increase the appeal of important events, and it becomes easier for game clerks to notice the occurrence of important events.

(Determining table of notification sound of occurrence event)
FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a table for determining a notification sound of an occurrence event for explaining a notification sound of the generation event output from the audio output device 9 when an event to be notified occurs. As shown in FIG. 79, in the determination table of the notification sound of the generated event, the type of the generated event and the notification sound of the generated event for notifying the generated event are associated.

When the power is turned on, a notification sound of an occurrence event is output which is composed of a combination of a voice of "power is turned on" and a siren (warning sound, warning sound).
When the power is restored, a notification sound of an occurrence event is output which is composed of a combination of a voice of "Power is restored" and a siren (warning sound, warning sound).
When an illegal prize is generated, a notification sound of an occurrence event composed of a combination of a voice of "Illegal prize" and a siren (warning sound, warning sound) is output.

When an abnormal prize is generated, a notification sound of an occurrence event which is a combination of a voice of "abnormal prize" and a siren (warning sound, warning sound) is output.
When a magnetic abnormality occurs, a notification sound of an occurrence event, which is a combination of a sound of “magnetic abnormality” and a siren (warning sound, warning sound), is output.
When a radio wave abnormality occurs, a notification sound of an occurrence event is output, which is composed of a combination of a sound of "radio wave abnormality" and a siren (warning sound, warning sound).

When the frame is opened, a notification sound of an occurrence event including a sound of "the door is open" is output.
When the dish is full, a notification sound of an occurrence event consisting of a voice of "Please remove the ball" is output.
When a right-handed error occurs, a notification sound of an occurrence event including a voice of "Please left-handed" is output.

  As described above, in the determination table of the notification sound of the occurrence event, the notification sound of the occurrence event of the important event (power supply, power restoration, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality) includes the siren (warning sound, warning Sound), and the notification sound of the occurrence of a normal event (open frame, full plate, right-handed error) does not include a siren (warning sound, warning sound). The notification level (warning level, alert level) of an important event is higher than the notification level.

◇ (Setting processing of the volume of the liquid crystal control unit 141)
With reference to FIG. 80, the process of setting the sound volume of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the volume setting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  First, in Step T6-2-1, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the volume control guidance command 1 transmitted from the effect control unit 130m at the start of the customer waiting state (waiting for a customer waiting effect) is received. If it is determined that the command 1 for guiding the sound volume adjustment has been received (step T6-2-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-2, where the command for guiding the sound volume adjustment is received. If 1 has not been received (step T6-2-1: No), the process proceeds to step T6-2-3.

  In step T6-2-2, the supervisor CPU 142 sets the display information of the volume adjustment guidance image for guiding the volume adjustment in the display list, and ends the current volume setting process. As a result, a display list including the display information of the volume adjustment guidance image is output to the image control unit 145, and the volume adjustment guidance image is displayed on the image display device. The guidance image for adjusting the volume will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-2-3, the overall CPU 142 receives a volume adjustment start command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated during the volume adjustment enabled period. It is determined whether or not a volume adjustment start command has been received (step T6-2-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-4, and a volume adjustment start command is received. If not (step T6-2-3: No), the process moves to step T6-2-6.

  In step T6-2-4, the overall CPU 142 clears the display information of the volume adjustment guide image from the display list, and in step T6-2-5, displays the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value. The display information is set in the display list, and the current volume setting process ends. As a result, a display list including the display information of the volume value notification image is output to the image control unit 145 in place of the display information of the volume adjustment guidance image, and the volume value notification image is displayed instead of the volume adjustment guidance image. It will be displayed on the display device. The notification image of the volume value will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-2-6, the supervisor CPU 142 determines whether the operation interval monitoring time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation of the cross key 19 during the volume adjustment, or the time during which the volume adjustment is no longer possible during the volume adjustment. It is determined whether or not the volume adjustment end command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is received. If the volume adjustment end command has been received (step T6-2-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step The process shifts to T6-2-7, and in a case where the volume adjustment end command is not received (step T6-2-6: No), the process shifts to step T6-2-8.

  In step T6-2-7, the overall CPU 142 clears the display information of the volume value notification image from the display list, and ends the current volume setting process. As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the volume value notification image is output to the image control unit 145, and the volume value notification image is not displayed on the image display device.

  In step T6-2-8, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not a volume value notification image is being displayed, and when the volume value notification image is being displayed (step T6-2-8: Yes). In step T6-2-9, the process proceeds to step T6-2-9. If the notification image of the volume value is not being displayed (step T6-2-8: No), the process proceeds to step T6-2-13.

  In step T6-2-9, the overall CPU 142 performs a volume setting process for increasing or decreasing the volume value of the effect sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) using the cross key 19, and in step T6-2. At -10, the display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value is set in the display list. As a result, a display list including display information of a volume value notification image reflecting an increase or decrease in the volume value is output to the image control unit 145, and the volume value notification image is displayed on the image display device. The processing for changing the volume will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-2-11, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting for a customer. If the customer is waiting for a customer (step T6-2-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-11. The process shifts to 2-12, and if it is not in the customer waiting state (step T6-2-11: No), the current volume setting process ends.

  In step T6-2-12, the supervisor CPU 142 sets the output information of the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the current volume value in the output list, and ends the current volume setting process. As a result, a sound list including the output information of the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the current volume value is output to the sound control unit 148, and the notification sound of the volume is output from the sound output device 9. The notification sound of the volume will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-2-13, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer waiting effect has been started. If the customer waiting effect has been started (step T6-2-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2. The process proceeds to -14, and if the customer waiting effect has not been started (step T6-2-13: No), the current volume setting process ends.

  In step T <b> 6-2-14, the overall CPU 142 performs a volume value reset process for resetting the current volume value to the initial value of the volume corresponding to the current adjustment mode, and ends the current volume setting process. . The volume value reset processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the volume setting process according to the present embodiment, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 (increase or decrease of the volume value) is performed only during the display of the volume value notification image even during the volume adjustment possible period. ) Can be performed, and the notification image of the volume value reflecting the result of the volume adjustment is displayed, so that the player can be notified of the current volume value. Therefore, the volume can be adjusted while checking the current volume value, and the volume (value) intended by the player can be set.

  Further, in the case of a customer waiting state (customer waiting production standby in which a production sound is not output), a notification sound of a volume corresponding to the current volume value is output from the audio output device 9, so that, for example, the volume during the fluctuation production While avoiding the inconvenience that the sound of the variable effect is output and the sound of the variable effect is disturbed, or the sound of the sound is output during the big hit game and the sound of the big hit game is disturbed. It is possible to notify the player of the volume value at an appropriate timing.

  音量 Also, immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect that is executed when the state in which the cross key 19 is not operated during the waiting time for the customer waiting operation continues for the waiting time (60 seconds) of the customer waiting effect, the current volume value is set to the current volume value. Is reset to the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode, so that the production sound (BGM, SE, etc.) of the customer waiting effect is performed at a volume value smaller than the volume value intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode. The game sound is no longer output, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player in the customer waiting effect.

(Guidance image for volume adjustment)
FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram showing a volume adjustment guidance image displayed on the image display device at the start of the customer waiting state during the volume adjustment possible period. The volume adjustment guide image is an image of a cross key imitating the cross key 19 indicating that the left button and the right button are emitting light, and a character image indicating that the volume adjustment is started by operating the left button or the right button. It is composed of

(Information image of volume value)
FIG. 81B is a diagram showing a notification image of a sound volume value displayed on the image display device when the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to start sound volume adjustment during the sound volume adjustment possible period. is there. The notification image of the sound volume value is for notifying the sound volume value by an image of a cross key imitating the cross key 19 indicating that the left button and the right button are emitting light and the number of illuminated (white) square gauges. And a speaker image for numerically notifying the volume value. It should be noted that minus and plus identifiers are displayed on the left and right buttons of the image of the cross key, respectively.

The notification image of the sound volume value corresponding to the sound volume value 0 has a display mode in which the image of the speaker includes “0” in a state where the gauge of the gauge image is completely turned off (blacked out).
The notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value 1 has a display mode in which the image of the speaker includes “1” in a state where only one gauge of the gauge image is turned on (painted white).
The notification image of the sound volume value corresponding to the sound volume value 2 has a display mode including “2” in the speaker image in a state where the two gauges of the gauge image are turned on (painted white).

The notification image of the sound volume value corresponding to the sound volume value 3 has a display mode including “3” in the speaker image in a state where the three gauges of the gauge image are turned on (painted white).
The notification image of the sound volume value corresponding to the sound volume value 4 has a display mode in which the image of the speaker includes “4” in a state where the four gauges of the gauge image are turned on (painted white).
The notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value 5 has a display mode including “5” in the speaker image in a state where all the gauges of the gauge image are turned on (painted white).

(Volume notification sound)
FIG. 81 (c) shows a volume notification sound output from the audio output device 9 when the volume value is changed by operating the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 while displaying the volume value notification image. FIG.

The notification sound with the volume value 0 is silent.
The notification sound of the volume of the volume value 1 is “do” indicating the first interval of the scale.
The notification sound of the volume of the volume value 2 is “と な っ” indicating the second interval of the scale.
The notification sound of the volume of the volume value 3 is “mi” indicating the third interval of the musical scale.
The notification sound of the volume of the volume value 4 is “F” indicating the fourth interval of the musical scale.
The notification sound of the volume of the volume value 5 is “G” indicating the fifth interval of the musical scale.

  In this way, when the volume value is continuously increased or decreased, the pitch of the volume notification sound gradually changes, so that the change in the volume value can be immediately grasped, and the player is kind to the player. Information can be obtained.

◇ (Change processing of the volume of the liquid crystal control unit 141)
With reference to FIG. 82, the process of changing the volume of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a process of changing the volume of the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  First, in Step T6-2-9-1, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not a command for decreasing the volume transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated during volume adjustment is received. Is determined, and if the command for decreasing the volume has been received (step T6-2-9-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-9-2, and the command for decreasing the volume is received. Is received (step T6-2-9-1: No), the process moves to step T6-2-9-5.

  In step T6-2-9-2, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the current volume value is larger than the lower limit value of the adjustment range of the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode. In T6-2-9-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-9-3, and when it is not larger than the lower limit (step T6-2-9-2: No), step T6 The process moves to -2-9-5.

  In step T6-2-9-3, the central CPU 142 subtracts one from the volume value, and in step T6-2-9-4, sends a notification signal of the volume value corresponding to the subtracted volume value to the audio control unit 148. Output. As a result, the volume value corresponding to the volume value notification signal is set in the voice control unit 148 as the volume value of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the voice output device 9.

  In step T6-2-9-5, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a command for increasing the volume transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated during volume adjustment is received. If the command for increasing the volume is received (step T6-2-9-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-9-6 to receive the command for increasing the volume. If not (step T6-2-9-5: No), the current volume change process ends.

  In step T6-2-9-6, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the current volume value is smaller than the upper limit value of the adjustment range of the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode. In T6-2-9-6: Yes), the processing shifts to Step T6-2-9-7, and when it is not smaller than the upper limit (Step T6-2-9-6: No), the current The volume change process ends.

  The general CPU 142 adds 1 to the volume value in step T6-2-9-7, and in step T6-2-9-8, sends a notification signal of the volume value corresponding to the volume value after the addition to the audio control unit 148. Output, and the current volume change process ends. As a result, the volume value corresponding to the volume value notification signal is set in the voice control unit 148 as the volume value of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the voice output device 9.

  When the adjustment mode 1 is set by the changeover switch 22 and the initial value of the volume is set to “0”, the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19. When the value is changed from the initial value “0”, control may be performed so that the value does not return to “0” again. By doing so, it is possible to set the volume to 0% corresponding to the volume value “0” only during the maintenance work of the gaming machine 1 at the amusement store side, and the maintenance sound is produced by the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE). Work is not hindered.

  The volume values that can be set by adjusting the volume of the cross key 19 are the same as the initial values of the volume set by operating the changeover switch 22, namely, “0” to “5”. May be set to a value other than the six types of “0” to “5”, for example, three types of “1”, “3”, and “5” that can be set by operating the changeover switch 22. , "0.5", "1.5", "2.5", "3.5", "4.5" that cannot be set by operating the changeover switch 22, or the operation of the changeover switch 22. May be set to eleven types from “0” to “5”, which are settable volume values and non-settable volume values.

◇ (reset processing of volume value of liquid crystal control unit 141)
The reset process of the volume value of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83A is a flowchart illustrating a reset process of the volume value of the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  First, in step T6-2-14-1, the general CPU 142 determines whether the volume adjustment set in the general RAM 144 is "possible", and the volume adjustment is "possible". In this case (step T6-2-14-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-14-2, and if the volume adjustment is not possible or not (step T6-2-14-1: No) In), the current volume value reset processing ends.

  In step T6-2-14-2, the overall CPU 142 checks the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode and the current volume value, and in step T6-2-14-3, sets the current volume value to the initial value of the volume. It is determined whether or not the volume is smaller than the initial value. If the volume is smaller than the initial value (step T6-2-14-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-14-4, and the initial If it is not smaller than the value (step T6-2-14-3: No), the current volume value reset processing ends.

  In step T6-2-14-4, the overall CPU 142 resets the volume value by setting the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode to the volume value, and resets the volume in step T6-2-14-5. A notification signal of the volume value corresponding to the value is output to the voice control unit 148, and the current volume value reset processing is terminated. As a result, the volume value corresponding to the volume value notification signal is set in the voice control unit 148 as the volume value of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the voice output device 9.

  ◇ In this way, if the current volume value is lower than the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode, the volume value is reset, and if the current volume value is higher than the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode, By not resetting the sound volume value, the sound effect (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) of the customer waiting effect is output at a sound volume value that is equal to or higher than the sound volume value intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the appealing power to the player in the customer waiting effect, and to improve the appealing power in the customer waiting effect in response to the result of the volume adjustment of the player.

◇ (Modified example of volume value reset processing of liquid crystal control section 141)
With reference to FIG. 83B, a modified example of the volume value reset processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described. FIG. 83 (b) is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the volume value reset process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. Note that the present modified example is different from the above-described volume value reset processing in that the volume value is reset without comparing the initial volume value and the current volume value.

  First, in Step T6-2-14-11, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not the volume adjustment set in the general RAM 144 is "possible", and the volume adjustment is "possible". In this case (step T6-2-14-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-2-14-12, and if the volume adjustment is not possible or not (step T6-2-14-11: No) In), the current volume value reset processing ends.

  The overall CPU 142 resets the volume value by setting the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode to the volume value in step T6-2-14-12, and resets the volume in step T6-2-14-13. A notification signal of the volume value corresponding to the value is output to the voice control unit 148, and the current volume value reset processing is terminated. As a result, the volume value corresponding to the volume value notification signal is set in the voice control unit 148 as the volume value of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the voice output device 9.

  こ と In this way, by resetting the volume value without comparing the initial value of the volume with the current volume value, the effect sound (BGM) of the customer waiting effect is produced according to the volume value intended by the game shop that has set the adjustment mode. , SE, etc.), it is possible to prevent sparse appealing power to a player of the same type of customer waiting effect installed in a game store.

  If the current volume value is higher than the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode, the volume value is reset. If the current volume value is lower than the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode, the volume value is reset. May not be reset. By doing so, the sound effect of the customer waiting effect (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) is not output with a sound volume value larger than the sound volume value intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode. This eliminates the case where only the gaming machine 1 stands out.

(Setting processing of luminance of liquid crystal control section 141)
With reference to FIG. 84, the process of setting the luminance of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the luminance setting processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  First, in Step T6-3-1, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the command 1 for guiding brightness adjustment transmitted from the effect control unit 130m at the start of the customer waiting state (during the customer waiting effect). If it is determined that the command 1 for guiding brightness adjustment has been received (step T6-3-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-2, and the command for guiding brightness adjustment is received. If 1 has not been received (step T6-3-1: No), the process moves to step T6-3-3.

  In step T6-3-2, the supervisor CPU 142 sets the display information of the brightness adjustment guide image for guiding the brightness adjustment in the display list, and ends the current brightness setting process. As a result, a display list including the display information of the brightness adjustment guidance image is output to the image control unit 145, and the brightness adjustment guidance image is displayed on the image display device. The guide image for luminance adjustment will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-3-3, the central CPU 142 receives the brightness adjustment start command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m by operating the down button or the up button of the cross key 19 during the brightness adjustment enabled period. It is determined whether or not the processing has been performed, and if the luminance adjustment start command has been received (step T6-3-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-4, and the luminance adjustment start command is received. If not (step T6-3-3: No), the process moves to step T6-3-6.

  In step T6-3-4, the general CPU 142 clears the display information of the guide image for the brightness adjustment from the display list, and in step T6-3-5, displays the notification image of the brightness value corresponding to the current brightness value. The display information is set in the display list, and the current brightness setting process ends. As a result, a display list including display information of the brightness value notification image is output to the image control unit 145 instead of the display information of the brightness adjustment guidance image, and the brightness value notification image is replaced with the brightness adjustment notification image. It will be displayed on the display device. The notification image of the luminance value will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-3-6, the general CPU 142 determines whether the operation interval monitoring time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation of the cross key 19 during the brightness adjustment, or the time during which the brightness adjustment is no longer possible during the brightness adjustment. It is determined whether or not the luminance adjustment end command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m has been received. If the luminance adjustment end command has been received (step T6-3-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S6-3-6. The process shifts to T6-3-7, and in a case where the end command of the brightness adjustment has not been received (Step T6-3-6: No), the process shifts to Step T6-3-8.

  In step T6-3-7, the supervisor CPU 142 clears the display information of the notification image of the luminance value from the display list, and ends the current luminance setting process. As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the brightness value notification image is output to the image control unit 145, and the brightness value notification image is not displayed on the image display device.

  In step T6-3-8, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the notification image of the luminance value is being displayed, and when the notification image of the luminance value is being displayed (step T6-3-8: Yes). In step T6-3-9, the process proceeds to step T6-3-9. If the brightness value notification image is not being displayed (step T6-3-8: No), the process proceeds to step T6-3-12.

  In step T6-3-9, the overall CPU 142 sets the luminance (value) of the backlight of the image display device using the cross key 19 and the lamp (LED) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). ) Is changed to increase or decrease the luminance. The processing for changing the luminance will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T6-3-10, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the luminance value has changed. If the luminance value has changed (step T6-3-10: Yes), the general CPU 142 proceeds to step T6-3-10. The process proceeds to step S11, and if the brightness value has changed (step T6-3-10: No), the current brightness setting process ends.

  In step T6-3-11, the supervisor CPU 142 sets the display information of the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the current luminance value in the display list, and ends the current luminance setting process. As a result, a display list including display information of a luminance value notification image reflecting an increase or decrease in luminance (value) is output to the image control unit 145, and the luminance value notification image is displayed on the image display device. .

  In step T6-3-12, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer waiting effect has been started. If the customer waiting effect has been started (step T6-3-12: Yes), step T6-3. The process proceeds to -13, and if the customer waiting effect has not been started (step T6-3-12: No), the current brightness setting process ends.

  In step T6-3-13, the overall CPU 142 performs a brightness value reset process for resetting the current brightness value to the initial brightness value corresponding to the current adjustment mode, and ends the current brightness setting process. . Note that the brightness value reset processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the luminance setting process according to the present embodiment, the luminance adjustment (increase or decrease in luminance value) using the cross key 19 only during the display of the luminance value notification image even during the luminance adjustment possible period. Is displayed, and a notification image of the luminance value reflecting the result of the luminance adjustment is displayed, so that the player can be notified of the current luminance value. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the luminance while checking the current luminance value, and it is possible to set the luminance (value) intended by the player.

  Further, immediately before the start of the customer-waiting effect that is executed when the state in which the cross key 19 is not operated during the waiting time for the customer-waiting effect continues for the waiting time (60 seconds) of the customer-waiting effect, the current luminance value is changed to the current brightness value. A process of resetting the brightness to the initial value corresponding to the adjustment mode is performed. For this reason, the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) have a brightness value lower than the intended brightness value of the game store that has set the adjustment mode. No light is emitted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to a player in a customer waiting effect.

(Guidance image for brightness adjustment)
FIG. 85A is a diagram showing a brightness adjustment guide image displayed on the image display device at the start of the customer waiting state during the brightness adjustment possible period. The brightness adjustment guide image is an image of a cross key imitating the cross key 19 indicating that the lower button and the upper button are emitting light, and a character image indicating that the brightness adjustment is started by operating the lower button or the upper button. It is composed of

  FIG. 85B is a diagram illustrating a notification image of a brightness value displayed on the image display device when the lower button or the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to start the brightness adjustment during the brightness adjustment possible period. is there. The brightness value notification image is for notifying the brightness value by an image of a cross key imitating the cross key 19 representing a state in which the lower button and the upper button emit light and the number of lit (white) rhombic gauges. And a lamp image for notifying the luminance value numerically. The lower and upper buttons of the image of the cross key display minus and plus identifiers, respectively.

The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 0 has a display mode in which “0” is included in the lamp image in a state where the gauge of the gauge image is completely turned off (blacked out).
The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 1 has a display mode in which only one gauge of the gauge image is turned on (painted white) and the lamp image includes “1”.
The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 2 has a display mode in which the lamp image includes “2” in a state where the two gauges of the gauge image are turned on (painted white).

The notification image of the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value 3 has a display mode in which the lamp image includes “3” in a state where the three gauges of the gauge image are turned on (painted white).
The notification image of the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value 4 has a display mode in which the lamp image includes “4” in a state where the four gauges of the gauge image are turned on (painted white).
The notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value 5 has a display mode in which “5” is included in the lamp image in a state where all the gauges of the gauge image are turned on (painted white).

(Change processing of luminance of liquid crystal control section 141)
With reference to FIG. 86, the process of changing the luminance of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the luminance changing process of the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  First, in Step T6-3-9-1, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not a luminance reduction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the down button of the cross key 19 during luminance adjustment is operated. Is determined, and if the command for lowering the luminance has been received (step T6-3-9-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-9-2, and the command for lowering the luminance is received. Is received (step T6-3-9-1: No), the process moves to step T6-3-9-6.

  In step T6-3-9-2, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the current luminance value is larger than the lower limit value of the adjustment range of the luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode. In T6-3-9-2: Yes), the processing shifts to Step T6-3-9-3, and when it is not larger than the lower limit (Step T6-3-9-2: No), Step T6 The process moves to -2-9-6.

  In step T6-3-9-3, the central CPU 142 subtracts one from the luminance value, and in step T6-3-9-4, sends a notification signal of a luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the subtraction to the image control unit 145. Output. As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.

  In step T6-3-9-5, the general CPU 142 sets a notification command of a luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the subtraction in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. As a result, the brightness value notification command is transmitted to the lamp control unit, and the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value notification command is the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The value is set in the lamp control unit 150 as a value.

  In step T6-3-9-6, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a command for increasing the brightness transmitted from the effect control unit 130m when the upper button of the cross key 19 during the brightness adjustment is operated is received. If the command for increasing the brightness has been received (step T6-3-9-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-9-7 to receive the command for increasing the brightness. If not (step T6-3-9-6: No), the current brightness change processing ends.

  In step T6-3-9-7, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the current luminance value is smaller than the upper limit of the adjustment range of the luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode. In T6-3-9-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-9-8, and if not smaller than the upper limit (step T6-3-9-7: No), the process proceeds to step T6-3-9-7. The processing for changing the luminance is completed.

  In step T6-3-9-8, the central CPU 142 adds one to the luminance value, and in step T6-3-9-9, sends a notification signal of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value to the image control unit 145 in step T6-3-9-9. Output. As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.

  In step T6-3-9-10, the general CPU 142 sets a notification command of a luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the addition in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. Thereby, the notification command of the brightness value is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the notification command of the brightness value is set for the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74). The value is set in the lamp control unit 150 as a luminance value.

  When the adjustment mode 1 is set by the changeover switch 22 and the initial value of the brightness is set to “0”, the brightness can be adjusted using the cross key 19. When the value is changed from the initial value “0”, control may be performed so that the value does not return to “0” again. In this way, the volume can be set to 0% corresponding to the luminance value “0” only during the maintenance work of the gaming machine 1 at the gaming store, and the maintenance work is hindered by light emitted from various lighting devices. No more.

(Reset processing of the brightness value of the liquid crystal control unit 141)
With reference to FIG. 87A, a description will be given of a process of resetting the brightness value of the liquid crystal control unit 141. FIG. 87A is a flowchart illustrating a reset process of the brightness value of the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  First, in step T6-3-13-1, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not the brightness adjustment set in the general RAM 144 is "possible", and the brightness adjustment is "possible". In this case (step T6-3-13-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-13-2, and if the brightness adjustment is not “possible” (step T6-3-13-1: No) In), the current brightness value reset processing ends.

  In step T6-3-13-2, the overall CPU 142 checks the initial luminance value and the current luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode. In step T6-3-13-3, the current luminance value is set to the initial luminance value. It is determined whether or not the brightness is smaller than the initial value. If the brightness is smaller than the initial value (step T6-3-13-3: Yes), the processing is shifted to step T6-3-13-4, and the brightness is initialized. If it is not smaller than the value (step T6-3-13-3: No), the current brightness value reset processing ends.

  In step T6-3-13-4, the overall CPU 142 resets the luminance value by setting an initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode to the luminance value, and in step T6-3-13-5, resets the luminance value. A notification signal of the luminance value corresponding to the value is output to the image control unit 145, and the current reset processing of the luminance value ends. As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.

  In step T6-3-13-6, the supervisor CPU 142 sets a luminance value notification command corresponding to the post-reset luminance value in the transmission buffer of the supervisory RAM 144, and ends the current luminance value reset process. Thereby, the notification command of the brightness value is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the notification command of the brightness value is set for the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The value is set in the lamp control unit 150 as a luminance value.

  As described above, when the current brightness value is smaller than the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the adjustment mode, the brightness value is reset, and when the current brightness value is larger than the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the adjustment mode, By not resetting the brightness value, the backlight of the image display device or various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the panel, etc.) can be set to a brightness value that is equal to or higher than the brightness value intended by the game store that has set the adjustment mode during the execution of the customer waiting effect. The lamp (LED) of the lighting device 74) emits light. For this reason, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the appealing power for the player in the customer waiting effect, and to improve the appealing power in the customer waiting effect based on the result of the brightness adjustment of the player.

(Modification of the brightness value reset process of the liquid crystal control unit 141)
With reference to FIG. 87B, a modified example of the brightness value reset process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described. FIG. 87 (b) is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the brightness value reset process of the liquid crystal control unit 141. Note that the present modified example is different from the above-described luminance value reset processing in that the luminance value is reset without comparing the initial luminance value with the current luminance value.

  First, in Step T6-3-13-11, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not the brightness adjustment set in the general RAM 144 is "possible", and the brightness adjustment is "possible". In this case (step T6-3-13-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-3-13-12, and if the brightness adjustment is not set in the general RAM 144 (step T6-3-13) In (-11: No), the current brightness value reset processing ends.

  In step T6-3-13-12, the centralized CPU 142 resets the luminance value by setting the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the adjustment mode to the luminance value, and in step T6-3-13-13, resets the luminance value. A notification signal of a luminance value corresponding to the value is output to the image control unit 145. As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.

  In step T6-3-13-14, the central control CPU 142 sets a luminance value notification command corresponding to the reset luminance value in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144, and ends the current luminance value reset processing. Thereby, the notification command of the brightness value is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the notification command of the brightness value is set for the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The value is set in the lamp control unit 150 as a luminance value.

  In this way, by resetting the brightness value without comparing the initial brightness value and the current brightness value, the image display is performed according to the brightness value intended by the game store that has set the adjustment mode during the execution of the customer waiting effect. The backlight of the device and lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) emit light. Therefore, it is possible to prevent sparse appealing power for a player of the same type of customer waiting effect installed in a game store.

  If the current luminance value is larger than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the luminance value is reset. If the current luminance value is smaller than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the luminance value is reset. May not be reset. In this way, the backlight of the image display device and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device) are set to have a brightness value equal to or higher than the brightness value intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode during the execution of the customer waiting effect. The lamp (LED) of the lighting device 74) does not emit light, so that only the specific gaming machine 1 does not stand out.

(Power saving mode control processing of liquid crystal control section 141)
With reference to FIG. 88, the control processing of the power saving mode of the liquid crystal control unit 141 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the control processing of the power saving mode by the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  First, in Step T6-4-1, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is started. If the customer waiting effect is started (Step T6-4-1: Yes), the process proceeds to Step T6-4-1. The process proceeds to T6-4-2, and if the customer waiting effect has not been started (step T6-4-1: No), the process proceeds to step T6-4-6.

  In step T6-4-2, the supervisor CPU 142 determines whether or not the power saving mode setting stored in the supervisory RAM 144 is ON. If the power saving mode setting is ON (step T6-4-2). : Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-4-3, and if the power saving mode is not ON (step T6-4-2: No), the process proceeds to step T6-4-6.

  In step T6-4-3, the overall CPU 142 stores power saving mode execution information indicating that the power saving mode is being executed in a predetermined storage area of the overall RAM 144, and in step T6-4-4, Is output to the image control unit 145 (here, a luminance value of 50% = luminance value 0). As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device. That is, low-luminance light emission (light emission in the power saving mode) of the backlight of the image display device is started.

  In step T6-4-5, the general CPU 142 sets a notification command of a luminance value for the power saving mode in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. As a result, a power saving mode brightness value notification command (here, brightness 50% = brightness value 0) is transmitted to lamp control unit 150, and a brightness value corresponding to the power saving mode brightness value notification command is output to various lighting devices. The luminance value of the lamp (LED) of the (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) is set in the lamp control unit 150. That is, low-luminance light emission (light emission in the power saving mode) of the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices is started.

  In step T6-4-6, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer waiting effect ends, and if the customer waiting effect ends (step T6-4-6: Yes), step T6-4-. The process proceeds to 7, and if the customer waiting effect has not ended (step T6-4-6: No), the current power saving mode control process ends.

  In step T6-4-7, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the power saving mode execution information is set in a predetermined storage area of the overall RAM 144, and if the power saving mode execution information is set (step T6). In (4-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step T6-4-8. If the execution information of the power saving mode is not set (step T6-4-7: No), the process proceeds to step T6-4-7. The control processing ends.

  In step T6-4-8, the overall CPU 142 clears the power saving mode execution information set in the overall RAM 144, and in step T6-4-9, transmits a notification signal of the luminance value corresponding to the current luminance value to the image. Output to the control unit 145. As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device. That is, the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device returns to the luminance value at the start of the customer waiting effect (after the luminance value reset processing).

  In step T6-4-10, the general CPU 142 sets a luminance value command corresponding to the current luminance value in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144, and ends the current power saving mode control process. As a result, the brightness value notification command is transmitted to the lamp control unit, and the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value notification command is the brightness of the lamp (LED) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). The value is set in the lamp control unit 150 as a value. In other words, the luminance values of the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices return to the luminance values at the start of the customer waiting effect (after the luminance value reset processing).

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated during the power saving mode, the adjustment mode is changed by the above-described mode switching processing, and the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150 correspond to the initial brightness values of the adjustment mode after the change. Since the brightness value is set (rewritten), the power saving mode is substantially ended.

  However, when the adjustment mode is changed from the mode 2 to the mode 1, the initial value of the brightness in the mode 1 is the same value (0) as the brightness value in the power saving mode. Will continue.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated during the power saving mode, the adjustment mode is changed by the above-described mode switching process, and the sound control unit 148 is set to a sound volume value corresponding to the initial sound volume of the changed adjustment mode. Therefore, the sound volume (BGM, SE, etc.) of the effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) of the customer waiting effect output from the audio output device 9 also changes.

  However, when the adjustment mode is changed from the mode 6 to the mode 7, the initial value of the volume of the mode 6 and the mode 7 is the same value (5). The volume of the production sound (BGM, SE, etc.) does not change.

  Note that the customer waiting effect does not end halfway with the end of the power saving mode due to the operation of the changeover switch 22, but the customer waiting effect may be ended by operating the changeover switch 22.

◇ (Example of output volume by voice control unit 148)
An example of the output sound volume by the audio control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of an output sound volume by the audio control unit 148. In the output volume example table, the type of sound output from the audio output device 9 is associated with the output volume in a non-reporting period of an event, a reporting period of an important event, or a reporting period of a normal event. .

"Notification sound of important events"
Notification sound of an important event output from the audio output device 9 when an important event occurs (a notification sound of power-on, a notification sound of power restoration, a notification sound of an illegal prize, a notification sound of an abnormal prize, and a notification sound of a magnetic abnormality. , The notification sound of the radio wave abnormality) is a fixed volume value set by the voice control unit 148 in response to the reception of the fixed volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 (in this embodiment, the volume value “ 6 ", which corresponds to the maximum volume output from the gaming machine 1).

  Specifically, when a fixed volume value “6” is set in the voice control unit 148, an important event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 reports the important event. When the sound list including the sound output information is received, the notification sound of the important event corresponding to the generated important event is output from the audio output device 9 at the maximum volume (volume 120%) corresponding to the fixed volume value “6”. Is output. In other words, regardless of the volume value set in the voice control unit 148 in any of “0” to “5”, the maximum volume corresponding to the fixed volume value “6” without depending on this volume value (Volume 120%) from the audio output device 9.

"Notification sound of normal events"
A notification sound of a normal event (a notification sound of opening a frame, a notification sound of a full tray, a notification sound of a right-handed error) output from the audio output device 9 when a normal event occurs is output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. The sound volume is output depending on (corresponding to) the sound volume value (“0” to “5” in this embodiment) set by the sound control unit 148 in response to the reception of the sound volume value notification signal.

  Specifically, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event in a state where the sound volume value “0” is set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 outputs the notification sound of the normal event. When a sound list including information is received, a notification sound of a normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 0% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “0” (or No output).

  Further, in the state where the sound volume value “1” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, a notification sound of a normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 20% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “1”.

  In a state where the sound volume value “2” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, a notification sound of a normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”.

  Further, in a state where the volume value “3” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, a notification sound of a normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3”.

  In a state where the volume value “4” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, a notification sound of a normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output at a volume of 80% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “4”.

  In a state where the volume value “5” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, a notification sound of a normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 100% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “5”.

  When the sound value of the normal event is output (or not output) at a volume of 0% when the volume value “0” is set in the voice control unit 148, the occurrence of the normal event is determined by the player. For example, a notification sound of a normal event may be output at a sound volume of 20% corresponding to the sound volume value “1” because it is difficult for a game clerk to recognize the sound. In this way, even when the volume value is set to “0”, it becomes possible for the player or the game clerk to recognize the occurrence of a normal event. The sound volume may be dependent on (corresponding to) another sound volume value.

"Adjustment mode notification sound"
The adjustment mode notification sound output from the audio output device 9 when the adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 corresponds to the reception of the fixed volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 in response to the reception of the notification signal. 148 is output at the maximum volume output from the gaming machine 1 depending on the fixed volume value (volume value “6”) set.

  Specifically, in a state where the fixed volume value “6” is set in the audio control unit 148, the changeover switch 22 is operated during the non-reporting period of the occurrence event or the reporting period of the normal event, and the adjustment mode is set. When the voice control unit 148 receives the sound list including the output information of the adjustment mode notification sound, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode has the maximum volume corresponding to the fixed volume value “6”. (Volume 120%) is output from the audio output device 9.

"Volume alert sound"
The sound of the volume output from the audio output device 9 when the volume value is changed by operating the cross key 19 is set by the audio control unit 148 in response to the reception of the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. It is output depending on the volume value (“0” to “5” in the present embodiment).

  Specifically, when the volume value is changed to “0” by operating the cross key 19 during the non-reporting period of the event, the voice control unit 148 is notified by the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. When the volume value “0” is set, and thereafter, the sound control unit 148 receives a sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound corresponding to the volume value “0” is output. It is output at a volume of 0% corresponding to the value “0”. In the case of the volume value “0”, the volume notification sound is silent, so that the volume notification sound is not actually output at an audible volume.

  Further, when the volume value is changed to “1” by operating the cross key 19 during the non-reporting period of the occurrence event, the volume value is transmitted to the voice control unit 148 by the volume level notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. 1 ”is set, and thereafter, when the sound control unit 148 receives a sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound“ do ”corresponding to the volume value“ 1 ”is output. It is output at a volume of 20% corresponding to the value “1”.

  When the volume value is changed to “2” by operating the cross key 19 during the non-reporting period of the event, the volume value “2” is transmitted to the voice control unit 148 by the volume level notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. Is set, and thereafter, when the sound control unit 148 receives a sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound “「 ”corresponding to the volume value“ 2 ”is output. It is output at a volume of 40% corresponding to “2”.

  When the volume value is changed to “3” by operating the cross key 19 during the non-reporting period of the event, the volume value “3” is transmitted to the voice control unit 148 by the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. Is set, and thereafter, when the sound control unit 148 receives a sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound “mi” corresponding to the volume value “3” is output. It is output at a volume of 60% corresponding to “3”.

  When the volume value is changed to “4” by operating the cross key 19 during the non-reporting period of the event, the volume value “4” is transmitted to the voice control unit 148 by the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. Is set, and after that, when the sound control unit 148 receives the sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound “F” corresponding to the volume value “4” is output. It is output at a volume of 80% corresponding to “4”.

  When the volume value is changed to “5” by operating the cross key 19 during the non-reporting period of the event, the volume value “5” is transmitted to the voice control unit 148 by the volume level notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. Is set, and thereafter, when the sound control unit 148 receives the sound list including the output information of the volume notification sound from the liquid crystal control unit 141, the volume notification sound “so” corresponding to the volume value “5” becomes the volume value. It is output at a volume of 100% corresponding to “5”.

"Direction sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE)"
The production sound (game sound such as BGM or SE) output from the audio output device 9 in a scene other than the waiting state of the customer waiting performance corresponds to the reception of the volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. The output is performed depending on the volume value (“0” to “5” in this embodiment) set by the audio control unit 148.

  Specifically, if the volume value “0” is set in the voice control unit 148, it may be any of a non-reporting period of an event, a reporting period of an important event, and a reporting period of a normal event. However, the effect sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 0% corresponding to the volume value “0”. In other words, the sound is output as a non-audible sound, but the sound itself may not be output.

  Further, if the volume value “1” is set in the voice control unit 148, the volume is 20% corresponding to the volume value “1” during the non-reporting period of the event, and during the reporting period of the important event. Is a sound volume of 0%, and an effect sound is output from the sound output device 9 at a volume of 5% which is ４ of the volume value “1” during the notification period of the normal event.

  If the volume value “2” is set in the voice control unit 148, during the non-reporting period of the occurring event, the notification period of the important event is set to 40% corresponding to the volume value “2”. The effect sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 0% in the middle and at a volume of 10% which is ４ of the volume value “2” during the notification period of the normal event.

  If the volume value “3” is set in the voice control unit 148, during the non-reporting period of the occurrence event, the volume of 60% corresponding to the volume value “3” and the reporting period of the important event The effect sound is output from the sound output device 9 at a volume of 0% during the notification period and at a volume of 15% that is １ ／ of the volume value “3” during the notification period of the normal event.

  If the volume value “4” is set in the voice control unit 148, during the non-report period of the occurrence event, the volume of 80% corresponding to the volume value “4” is used, The effect sound is output from the sound output device 9 at a volume of 0% during the notification period and at a volume of 20% which is １ ／ of the volume value “4” during the notification period of the normal event.

  If the volume value “5” is set in the voice control unit 148, during the non-reporting period of the occurrence event, the notification period of the important event is set to 100% corresponding to the volume value “5”. The effect sound is output from the sound output device 9 at a volume of 0% in the middle and at a volume of 25% which is １ ／ of the volume value “5” during the notification period of the normal event.

"Notification sound (one-shot sound, promotion sound, continuation sound)"
The notification sound (notification sound, promotion notification sound, continuation notification sound) output from the audio output device 9 during the fluctuation performance or the jackpot game is a notification of a fixed volume value output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. The sound is output at the maximum volume output from the gaming machine 1 depending on (corresponding to) the fixed volume value (volume value “6”) set by the voice control unit 148 in response to the reception of the signal.

  Specifically, in a state where a fixed volume value “6” is set in the voice control unit 148, one notification is issued during a non-reporting period of an event, a reporting period of an important event, and a reporting period of a normal event. When any one of the condition, the condition of the promotion notification, and the condition of the continuous notification is satisfied, and the voice control unit 148 receives the sound list including the output information of the notification sound, the notification sound corresponding to the realized notification condition is a fixed volume value. It is output from the audio output device 9 at the maximum volume (volume 120%) corresponding to “6”.

  By outputting the notification sound at the maximum volume (volume 120%) output from the gaming machine 1 depending on the fixed volume value (volume value “6”), an event (state) advantageous to the player ) Can be surely recognized by the player as the output of the notification sound that informs the player that the game is in progress, and it is possible to efficiently arouse the arousal of the player and improve the interest of the game.

  During the notification period of the important event, the volume of the notification sound may be set to 0%, or may be set to a volume dependent on the volume value set in the voice control unit 148. When the volume value set in the voice control unit 148 is “0”, the notification sound may be output at a volume of 0% or the notification sound may not be output. Further, the notification sound is output at a volume of ４ of the volume corresponding to the volume value set in the voice control unit 148 (for example, when the volume value is “3” and the volume is 60%, the volume is 15%). May be output.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound is output depending on the fixed volume value. However, during the jackpot game, a big hit that prompts the user to fire a game ball toward the right game area where the big winning opening 50 is provided. A fixed right sound value (notification sound) that prompts the user to fire a game ball toward the right game area where the general-purpose gate 44 is provided during the time-short game state, The output may be at the maximum volume (volume 120%) output from the gaming machine 1 depending on the volume value "6").

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 generates a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot game based on the passage (winning) of a game ball to a specific area provided inside the special winning opening 50. A predetermined passage notification (notification) sound is output from the sound output device 9 when the vehicle passes the predetermined period, and the predetermined notification sound is output from the gaming machine 1 depending on a fixed volume value (volume value “6”). The maximum volume (volume 120%) may be output. In addition, even when the game ball passes through the specific area, a predetermined notification sound is output when the game ball that will generate the probability variation game state passes through the specific area, but the other game balls are output. A predetermined notification sound may not be output when passing through a specific area.

  Further, the gaming machine 1 shifts the small hit game to the big hit game based on the passage (winning) of the game ball to the specific area provided inside the big winning opening 50 during the small hit game. A predetermined notification sound (notification sound of passing) is output from the sound output device 9 when the game ball passes, and the predetermined notification sound depends on a fixed volume value (volume value “6”). 1 may be output at the maximum volume (volume 120%). In addition, even when the game ball passes through the specific area, a sound of notification (notification) of passing is output when the game ball to be shifted to the jackpot game passes through the specific area. When passing through a specific area, a notification sound of passage may not be output.

(Modification of Output Volume by Voice Control Unit 148)
A modification of the output sound volume by the audio control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the output sound volume by the audio control unit 148. In the table of the modified example of the output volume, the type of the sound output from the audio output device 9 is associated with the output volume in the non-reporting period of the event, the reporting period of the important event, and the reporting period of the normal event. ing. Here, only the parts different from the example of the output sound volume by the sound control unit 148 shown in FIG. 89 will be described.

"Notification sound of normal events"
A notification sound of a normal event (a notification sound of opening a frame, a notification sound of a full tray, and a notification sound of a right-handed error) output from the audio output device 9 when a normal event occurs is output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. The volume of 80% of the volume that depends on the volume value (“0” to “5” in this embodiment) set by the voice control unit 148 in response to the reception of the volume value notification signal, that is, the effect sound (BGM, (A game sound such as SE).

  Specifically, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event in a state where the sound volume value “0” is set in the voice control unit 148, and the voice control unit 148 outputs the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list including the information is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event has a volume of 80% of the volume (0%) dependent on (corresponding to) the volume value “0”, that is, 0% Is output (or not output) from the audio output device 9 at the volume of.

  Further, in the state where the sound volume value “1” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event has a volume of 80% of the volume (20%) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “1”, that is, 16%. Output from the audio output device 9.

  In a state where the sound volume value “2” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event has a volume of 80% of the volume (40%) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”, that is, a volume of 32%. Output from the audio output device 9.

  Further, in a state where the volume value “3” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the normal event notification sound corresponding to the generated normal event is sounded at a volume of 80% of the volume (60%) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3”, that is, at a volume of 48%. Output from the output device 9.

  In a state where the volume value “4” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event is at a volume of 80% of the volume (80%) dependent (corresponding) to the volume value “4”, that is, at a volume of 64%. Is output.

  In a state where the volume value “5” is set in the voice control unit 148, a normal event occurs during the non-reporting period of the event, and the voice control unit 148 includes the output information of the notification sound of the normal event. When the sound list is received, the notification sound of the normal event corresponding to the generated normal event has a volume of 80% of the volume (100%) dependent on (corresponding to) the volume value “5”, that is, a sound at a volume of 80%. Output from the output device 9.

  Since this is done, the notification sound and the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) of the volume output depending on (corresponding to) the volume value set in the voice control unit 148 are changed from the notification sound of the normal event. Can also be emphasized (conspicuous), and it is possible to prevent the entertainment sound of the game from being extremely lowered by the notification sound of the normal event.

  When the sound value of the normal event is output (or not output) at a volume of 0% when the volume value “0” is set in the voice control unit 148, the occurrence of the normal event is determined by the player. For example, a notification sound of a normal event is output at a volume of 80% of a volume (20%) dependent on (corresponding to) the volume value “1”, ie, 16%. May be performed. In this way, even when the volume value is set to “0”, it becomes possible for the player or the game clerk to recognize the occurrence of a normal event. The volume may be set to 80% of the volume depending on (corresponding to) another volume value.

  In the present embodiment, the fixed volume value is set in the voice control unit 148 by outputting a fixed volume value notification signal from the liquid crystal control unit 141 to the voice control unit 148 only once immediately after the power is turned on. Output information such as notification sound of important events, notification sound of adjustment mode, notification sound, etc., which is a sound to be output at a fixed volume value (list for output) (notification) Each time the output information includes the fixed volume value “6”, and when the output information (output list) is notified to the audio control unit 148, the fixed volume value included in the output information is included. By referring to the value, a sound corresponding to the output information may be output depending on (corresponding to) the fixed volume value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fixed volume value is set in the audio control unit 148 by the fixed volume value notification signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 141. 148 may not be set to a fixed volume value. More specifically, the fixed sound volume value “6” is set in advance by linking the sound sound of an important event, the sound sound of the adjustment mode, the sound sound, etc., which is a sound output at a fixed sound volume value to the voice control unit 148, and the fixed sound volume value “6”. In addition, when output information (output list) such as a notification sound of an important event, a notification sound of an adjustment mode, and a notification sound is notified from the liquid crystal control unit 141, a fixed volume associated with the output information. By referring to the value, a sound corresponding to the output information may be output depending on (corresponding to) the fixed volume value.

(Main processing of the lamp control unit 150)
The main process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the lamp control unit 150.

  First, the lamp CPU 150a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting a timer interrupt in step R1, and performs an initialization process in step R2. In this processing, the lamp CPU 150a reads the main processing program from the lamp ROM 150b, initializes flags and the like stored in the lamp RAM 150c, and performs processing such as initialization.

  In step R3, the lamp CPU 150a sets interruption permission for permitting a timer interruption, and in step R3-1, performs processing for setting the luminance of the LED. Specifically, a process of setting the brightness of the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) based on the brightness value notification command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 141 is performed. . The setting process of the LED brightness will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step R4, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not an effect instruction command has been received from the effect control unit 130m with reference to the reception buffer of the lamp RAM 150c, and if not received (step R4: No), The process shifts to step R6-1, and if it is received (step R4: Yes), in step R5, setting processing of the light emission information of the LED is performed.

  Specifically, a light emission pattern (light emission mode) and light emission timing (light emission mode) for causing LEDs provided in the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the board lighting device 74, and the like to emit light based on the received effect instruction command. A process for determining and setting the timing) is performed. One or a plurality of light emission patterns are set in correspondence with the production instruction command, and a light emission pattern to be executed is determined from the set.

  In step R6, the lamp CPU 150a performs a process of setting motor drive information. Specifically, a driving pattern (driving mode) and a driving pattern for driving a motor and a solenoid provided in the button driving device 17b, the blower device 21, the panel driving device 75, and the like based on the received effect instruction command. A process for determining and setting the timing (time) is performed. One or a plurality of drive patterns are set corresponding to the effect instruction command, and the drive pattern to be executed is determined from the set one or more drive patterns.

  In Step R6-1, the lamp CPU 150a performs a setting process of the emission information of the notification LED. Specifically, a process of setting or clearing the emission information of the notification LED 10a based on a notification start command and a notification end command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 141 is performed. The process of setting the emission information of the notification LED will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step R6-2, the lamp CPU 150a performs a setting process of light emission information of the cross key. Specifically, various commands transmitted from the effect control unit 130m during the possible period of the volume adjustment and the possible period of the brightness adjustment (a command for guiding the volume adjustment, a start command for the volume adjustment, a command for ending the volume adjustment, A process for setting or clearing the light emission information of the LED for the cross key 19 is performed based on a luminance adjustment guide command, a luminance adjustment start command, and a luminance adjustment end command.

  In step R7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a frame switching flag, and updates the effect image displayed on the image display device at a frame switching timing at which a new effect image is drawn. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that there is a frame switching flag. If there is no frame switching flag (step R7: No), the process proceeds to step R3-1, and if there is a frame switching flag ( In Step R7: Yes), the frame switching flag is cleared in Step R8.

  In step R9, the lamp CPU 150a controls the light emission of the handle to turn on and off the LED provided on the light emitting device 15c of the handle based on the light emission pattern of the handle set in the process of setting the light emission information of the LED in step R5. Perform processing.

  In step R9-1, the lamp CPU 150a turns on or off the notification LED 10a based on the notification LED emission information set in the notification LED emission information setting process in step R6-1. Perform processing.

  In step R10, the lamp CPU 150a drives the blower that drives or stops the motor provided in the blower 21 based on the drive pattern of the blower set in the motor drive information setting process in step R6. After performing the processing, the processing is shifted to step R4, and thereafter, the processing from step R4 to R10 is repeatedly performed in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of lamp control unit 150)
The command reception interrupt processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92A is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the lamp control unit 150. The command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

  In step R20, the lamp CPU 150a performs a command receiving process of receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the lamp RAM 150c is performed. When this processing ends, the current command reception interrupt processing ends.

(V blank interrupt processing of the lamp control unit 150)
The V blank interrupt processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 (b) is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the lamp control unit 150. In the V blank interrupt processing, the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends ( The process is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every 1/30 second = about 33 ms is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

  In step R30, the lamp CPU 150a performs a counter update process of updating a predetermined number of various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) (for example, adding “1”). 3.) Set the frame switching flag indicating that the frame has been switched, and end the current V blank interrupt processing. Since the switching flag of this frame is referred to in step R7, the processing in steps R8 to R10 is executed by the V blank interrupt processing (the processing of the effect image displayed on the image display device is updated). (Update timing).

  For this reason, a V blank interrupt process is executed in the handle light emission control process in step R8, the notification LED light emission control process in step R9-1, and the blower driving process in step R10 (frame update timing). ).

  This allows the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel to start a light emission effect (a certain change confirmation effect which is a kind of notification effect) so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. As a result, the light emission effect (probable change confirmation effect, which is a kind of notification effect) can be ended on the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel so as to perform the synchronization.

  For this reason, it is possible to execute a certain-change-determination effect (notification effect) in accordance with the frame update timing at which a predetermined effect image is displayed on the image display device (the effect image is updated). In comparison with the case where the certainty-change confirmed effect (notification effect) is executed in the state in which the player is in a state where the certainty change effect is performed, it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player with respect to the certainty change effect (notification effect), and to improve the interest of the game. .

  In addition, it is possible to start notification light emission of an event that has occurred in the notification LED 10a so as to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing, and to generate an event that has occurred in the notification LED 10a so as to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing. Can be terminated.

  For this reason, it becomes possible to execute the notification light emission of the event that occurred in synchronization with the update timing of the frame in which the notification image corresponding to the occurred event is displayed on the image display device (the notification image is updated), and the frame is updated. As compared with the case where the notification light emission of the event that occurred at the timing deviated is executed, the appeal of the notification of the generated event can be increased.

  In addition, it is possible to cause the blower device 21 to start a blowing effect (a fixed effect that is a kind of notification effect) so as to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing, and to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing. Then, the blowing effect (fixed effect, which is a kind of notification effect) can be ended by the blowing device 21.

  Therefore, it is possible to execute a fixed effect (notification effect) in accordance with the update timing of the frame in which the predetermined effect image is displayed on the image display device (the effect image is updated). Compared with the case where the fixed effect (notification effect) is executed in the state, it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player regarding the fixed effect (notification effect) and to enhance the interest of the game.

(Timer interrupt processing of lamp control unit 150)
The timer interrupt processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92C is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the lamp control unit 150.
The clock pulse is generated at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 130, so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed. In the present embodiment, the V blank interrupt processing is given priority over the timer interrupt processing for the convenience of executing the notification effect in synchronization (synchronization) with the frame update timing, but may be reversed. .

  First, in step R41, the lamp CPU 150a performs a timer update process for updating various timer counters. In step R42, input is made to various switches such as a position detection switch (not shown) for detecting the position of the movable effect member 73. It is determined whether or not there has been input, and when there is an input, an input process for setting predetermined data is performed.

  In step R43, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the LED provided for the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74, the LED for the effect button 17, or the LED for the effect button 17 based on the light emission pattern of the LED set in step R5 or step R6-2. The light emission processing of the LED for setting the lighting data for dynamically lighting the LED for the cross key 19 is performed.

  In step R44, the lamp CPU 150a uses the motor driving pattern (the driving motor for the effect button, the driving motor for the panel, etc.) set in step R6 to control the board driving device 75. A motor drive process for setting drive data for dynamically driving the drive motor provided for the camera and the drive motor for the effect button is performed.

  In step R45, the lamp CPU 150a performs an output process of outputting lighting data set in the LED light emission process in step R43, drive data set in the motor drive process in step R44, and the like. The interrupt processing ends.

  Thereby, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the board driving device 75, and the effect button are more than the light emitting device 15c, the notification LED 10a, and the blowing device 21 of the handle, which are controlled in 1/30 second (about 33 ms). Is controlled in a shorter cycle (4 ms), and fine control can be performed, so that a more interesting effect can be performed.

(Setting process of LED brightness of lamp control unit 150)
With reference to FIG. 93, the process of setting the luminance of the LED of the lamp control unit 150 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating a process of setting the luminance of the LED by the lamp control unit 150.

  First, in step R3-1-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether a fixed luminance (value) has been set in a predetermined storage area of the lamp RAM 150c, and the fixed luminance (value) has not been set. In this case (step R3-1-1: No), the process proceeds to step R3-1-2, and when a fixed luminance (value) has been set (step R3-1-1: Yes), Move the process to step R3-1-3. When this processing is executed first after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the fixed luminance (value) is cleared (initialized) in the initialization processing of step R2, and thus the fixed luminance (value) is set. ) Is not set.

  In step R3-1-2, the lamp CPU 150a sets a predetermined luminance (100% which is the maximum luminance in the present embodiment) as a luminance of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the notification LED 10a in a predetermined storage area of the lamp RAM 150c. Then, the current setting process of the LED brightness is completed.

  In step R3-1-3, the lamp CPU 150a receives the luminance value notification command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 141 when the luminance value changes due to the above-described luminance change processing, luminance value reset processing, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is a brightness value notification command (step R3-1-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step R3-1-4, and the brightness value notification command is received. If not (step R3-1-3: No), the process of setting the brightness of the LED this time is ended.

  In step R3-1-4, the lamp CPU 150a sets the luminance corresponding to the luminance value notification command to the frame lighting device 10 (including the LED for the effect button 17 and the LED for the cross key 19) and the board lighting device 74. Is set in a predetermined storage area of the lamp RAM 150c, and the process of setting the LED brightness this time is ended.

(Example of light emission luminance by lamp control unit 150)
An example of light emission luminance by the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a table of an example of light emission luminance by the lamp control unit 150. In the table of the example of the light emission luminance, the light emission target is associated with the luminance during the fluctuation effect or the waiting effect of the customer waiting effect or in the customer waiting effect.

"Image display device"
The backlight of the image display device has a brightness value (“0” to “0” in this embodiment) set by the lamp control unit 150 in response to the reception of the brightness value notification command output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 when the brightness value changes. Light is emitted depending on (corresponding to) “5”).

  Specifically, when the brightness value “0” is set in the lamp control unit 150, during the fluctuation effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, during the customer waiting effect with the power saving mode OFF, and when the customer with the power saving mode ON. During the waiting effect, the backlight of the image display device emits light at 50% luminance.

  Further, in a state where the brightness value “1” is set in the lamp control unit 150, the power saving mode is set to 60% if the variable effect is being performed, the customer waiting effect is waiting, and if the power saving mode is in the customer waiting effect. If the mode is a customer waiting effect in which the mode is ON (that is, a power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light at 50% luminance.

  Further, in a state where the brightness value “2” is set in the lamp control unit 150, the power saving mode is set to 70% when the fluctuation effect is being performed, the customer waiting effect is being waited for, and if the customer is in the customer waiting effect in which the power saving mode is OFF. If the mode is a customer waiting effect in which the mode is ON (that is, a power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light at 50% luminance.

  In addition, in the state where the brightness value “3” is set in the lamp control unit 150, the power saving mode is set to 80% if the fluctuation effect is being performed, the customer waiting effect is waiting, and if the power saving mode is in the customer waiting effect. If the mode is a customer waiting effect in which the mode is ON (that is, a power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light at 50% luminance.

  When the lamp control unit 150 is set to a luminance value of “4”, the power is saved at 90% during a fluctuation effect, during a customer waiting effect, and during a customer waiting effect when the power saving mode is OFF. If the mode is a customer waiting effect in which the mode is ON (that is, a power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light at 50% luminance.

  Further, in the state where the brightness value “5” is set in the lamp control unit 150, the power saving is performed at 100% brightness during the fluctuation effect, while waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the customer waiting effect when the power saving mode is OFF. If the mode is a customer waiting effect in which the mode is ON (that is, a power saving mode), the backlight of the image display device emits light at 50% luminance.

"Frame lighting system"
The lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 10 has a luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150 in response to the reception of the luminance value notification command output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 when the luminance value changes (in this embodiment, Light is emitted depending on (corresponding to) “0” to “5”).

  Note that the relationship between the luminance value set in the lamp control unit 150 and the luminance of the lamp (LED) of the frame lighting device 10 is the same as that of the backlight of the image display device, and a description thereof will be omitted. I do.

`` Panel lighting device ''
The lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74 has a luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150 in response to the reception of the luminance value notification command output from the liquid crystal control unit 141 when the luminance value changes (in this embodiment, Light is emitted depending on (corresponding to) “0” to “5”).

  Note that the relationship between the luminance value set in the lamp control unit 150 and the luminance of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74 is the same as that of the backlight of the image display device, and a description thereof will be omitted. I do.

"Lighting device for steering wheel"
The LED of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel emits light depending on (corresponding to) a fixed luminance (100% in the present embodiment) set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel emits light at 100% luminance during the fluctuation effect.

"Notification LED"
The notification LED 10a emits light depending on (corresponding to) a fixed luminance (100% in the present embodiment) set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the notification LED 10a emits light at 100% luminance during the fluctuation effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the customer waiting effect.

`` Special symbol display ''
The plurality of LEDs of the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 emit light without depending on the fixed luminance or luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LEDs of the special symbol indicators 60 and 61 are illuminated at 100% luminance during the fluctuation effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the customer waiting effect. Therefore, even if the brightness value changes by operating the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs of the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 does not change.

`` Special symbol hold display ''
The plurality of LEDs of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 emit light without depending on the fixed luminance or luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LEDs of the special symbol holding indicators 63 and 64 are illuminated at 100% luminance during the fluctuation effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the customer waiting effect. Therefore, even when the brightness value changes due to the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs of the first special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64 may change. Absent.

`` Normal symbol display ''
The LED of the ordinary symbol display 62 emits light without depending on the fixed luminance or the luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the ordinary symbol display 62 is illuminated at 100% luminance during the fluctuation effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the customer waiting effect. Therefore, even when the brightness value changes by the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the brightness of the LED of the ordinary symbol display 62 does not change.

`` Normal symbol hold display ''
The plurality of LEDs of the ordinary symbol hold display 65 emit light without depending on the fixed brightness or the brightness value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the ordinary symbol hold display 65 is illuminated at 100% luminance during the fluctuation effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the customer waiting effect. Therefore, even when the brightness value changes due to the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs of the symbol holding display 65 does not usually change.

"Round number display"
The LED of the round number display 66 emits light without depending on the fixed luminance or the luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the round number display 66 is illuminated at 100% luminance during the fluctuation effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the customer waiting effect. Therefore, even when the brightness value changes due to the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the brightness of the LED of the round number display 66 does not change.

"Right-hand display"
The LED of the right-handed indicator 67 emits light without depending on the fixed luminance or the luminance value set by the lamp control unit 150. Specifically, the LED of the right-hand display 67 is illuminated at 100% luminance during the fluctuation effect, during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and during the customer waiting effect. Therefore, even when the brightness value changes due to the operation of the changeover switch 22 or the cross key 19, the brightness of the LED of the right-hand display 67 does not change.

(Setting process of light emission information of notification LED of lamp control unit 150)
The process of setting the light emission information of the notification LED of the lamp controller 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process of the light emission information of the notification LED of the lamp control unit 150.

  First, in step R6-1-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the notification start command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m at the time of occurrence of various events has been received, and has received the notification start command. In this case (step R6-1-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-2, and if the notification start command has not been received (step R6-1-1: No), the process proceeds to step R6-1-1. The process moves to 1-9.

  In step R6-1-2, the lamp CPU 150a specifies the type of event that has occurred from the received notification start command, and in step R6-1-3, the event that has occurred is an event to be notified by the notification LED 10a (an illegal winning, It is determined whether or not there is an abnormal winning, a magnetic abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, a door opening, a dispensing abnormality), and if the event is a notification target event (Step R6-1-3: Yes), Step R6-1-4. If the event is not an event to be notified (step R6-1-3: No), the process proceeds to step R6-1-9.

  In step R6-1-4, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the light emission list includes light emission information of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event having the higher priority, and if there is light emission information (step R6-1). If the light emission information does not exist (Step R6-1-4: No), the process proceeds to Step R6-1-6.

  In step R6-1-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines that a lower priority event has occurred at the same time as the higher priority event, and waits for the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event that has occurred this time. And the process moves to step R6-1-9. Accordingly, when a plurality of events occur at the same time, the emission of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the lower priority event is suspended, and the emission of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the higher priority event is performed. become.

  In step R6-1-6, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether light emission of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event has not been executed or light emission of the notification LED 10a corresponding to an event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time. The flashing pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event that has occurred this time is set in the light emission list. Thus, the notification LED 10a emits light corresponding to the event that has occurred this time.

  In step R6-1-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to an event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time in the light emission list. If there is a pattern (step R6-1-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-8, and if there is no blinking light emission pattern (step R6-1-7: No), the process proceeds to step R6-1-7. Move the process to R6-1-9.

  In step R6-1-8, the lamp CPU 150a moves the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event having a lower priority than the event that has occurred this time from the light emission list to the standby list. As a result, the notification LED 10a emits light according to the blinking light emission pattern corresponding to the event having the higher priority.

  In step R6-1-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the notification end command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m has been received at the end of the notification period of the event, and has received the notification end command. In this case (step R6-1-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-10, and if the notification end command has not been received (step R6-1-9: No), the current notification The process of setting the light emission information of the LED is completed.

  In Step R6-1-10, the lamp CPU 150a specifies the type of the event in which the notification period has ended from the received notification end command, and in Step R6-1-11, the event in which the notification period has ended is indicated by the notification LED 10a. It is determined whether or not the event is an event to be notified. If the event is an event to be notified (step R6-1-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-12, and if the event is not an event to be notified (step R6-1-1). In R6-1-1: No), the current setting process of the emission information of the notification LED ends.

  In step R6-1-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event in which the notification period has ended in the light emission list. In step R6-1-12: Yes, the process proceeds to step R6-1-13. If there is no blinking light emission pattern (step R6-1-12: No), the process proceeds to step R6-1-14. Transfer processing.

  In step R6-1-13, the lamp CPU 150a clears the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event in which the notification period has ended from the light emission list, and shifts the processing to step R6-1-15. Thereby, the emission of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event in which the notification period has ended is ended.

  In step R6-1-14, the lamp CPU 150a clears the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event in which the notification period has ended from the standby list, and shifts the processing to step R6-1-15. As a result, the state in which the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event in which the notification period has ended is in a standby state is released.

  In step R6-1-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the occurrence event in the standby list, and if there is a blinking light emission pattern (step R6-1). If -15: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-1-16, and if there is no blinking light emission pattern (step R6-1-15: No), the process of setting the emission information of the current notification LED is performed. finish.

  In step R6-1-16, the lamp CPU 150a sets the blinking light emission pattern of the notification LED 10a corresponding to the event with the highest priority in the standby list in the light emission list, and sets the light emission of the current notification LED. The information setting process ends. As a result, the notification LED 10a emits light according to the blinking light emission pattern set in the emission list this time.

(Setting process of light emission information of handle LED of lamp control unit 150)
The process of setting the light emission information of the handle LED of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a process of setting the light emission information of the handle LED of the lamp control unit 150. This process is performed in the process of setting the light emission information of the LED in step R5.

  First, in step R5-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a pattern command of a certainty-determining effect, and if it is not a pattern command of a certainty-determining effect (step R5-1: No). Shifts the process to step R5-8, and if the command is a certainty-change-determination effect pattern command (step R5-1: Yes), shifts the process to step R5-2.

  In Step R5-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the variable effect pattern command for specifying the execution timing of the certain-variable confirmation effect has been received. If the command has not been received (Step R5-2: No), Shifts the processing to step R5-8, and if the reception has been received (step R5-2: Yes), in step R5-3, the probable change determination in the variable effect defined by the variable effect pattern from the probable change determination effect pattern Identify (calculate) the number of start frames for the effect.

  In step R5-4, the lamp CPU 150a sets a value obtained by adding the adjustment value (2) for synchronization to the specified number of frames to the start counter of the certain change determination effect. Here, the adjustment value for synchronization means that the effect image corresponding to the effect instruction command after the liquid crystal control unit 141 receives an effect instruction command (for example, a variable effect pattern command or the like) from the effect control unit 130m. Since two frames are required to be displayed, it is an adjustment value for absorbing the delay of the two frames and executing the certain-variation confirmation effect at an appropriate timing corresponding to the pattern of the certain-change confirmation effect.

  In step R5-5, the ramp CPU 150a specifies (calculates) the number of frames in which the symbol is determined in the variable effect defined by the variable effect pattern, and in step R5-6, the adjustment value for synchronization with the specified number of frames ( The value obtained by adding 2) is set in the probability-change-determined effect end counter, and in step R5-7, the light emission pattern 1 of the handle LED is set.

  By doing so, in the steering wheel light emission control process of step R9, which is executed every time the frame update timing arrives (1/30 second), the certain-variation-determining effect start counter is decremented by one, and When the start counter becomes 0, lighting control of the steering wheel LED (execution of a certain change confirmation effect) is started. After the probability-change-determined effect start counter has become 0, the probability-change-determined effect end counter is decremented by 1. When the value-change-determined effect end counter has become 0, the lighting control of the steering wheel LED (execution of the variable-change effect) ends (stops). ) Is done.

  In step R5-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a command for a special operation effect. If the command is not a special operation effect command (step R5-8: No), The process moves to step R5-12. If the command is a special operation effect command (step R5-8: Yes), the process moves to step R5-9.

  In step R5-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets the adjustment value (2) for synchronization in the start counter of the certain-change-determining effect, and in step R5-10, the execution value of the certain-change-determining effect (90 = about 3 seconds). Is set to the end counter of the certain change confirmation effect, and the light emission pattern 1 of the handle LED is set.

  By doing so, in the light emission control process of the steering wheel in step R9, which is executed every time the frame update timing arrives (1/30 second), the start counter of the certain change determination effect is decremented by one, and the certain change determination is performed. When the effect start counter becomes 0, lighting control of the steering wheel LED (execution of a certain change confirmation effect) is started. In addition, after the start counter of the probability-change-determined effect has become 0, the end counter of the probability-change-determination effect is decremented by one. The lighting control of the LED (execution of the certain-change confirmation effect) is ended (stopped).

  In step R5-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a command for a special round effect. If the command is not a special round effect command (step R5-12: No), The current setting process of the light emission information of the handle LED is completed, and if the command is a special round effect command (step R5-12: Yes), the process proceeds to step R5-13.

  In Step R5-13, the ramp CPU 150a sets the adjustment value (2) for synchronization in the start counter of the rank-up effect, and in Step R5-14, the execution value of the rank-up effect (150 = about 5 seconds) Is set to the end counter of the rank-up effect, and in step R5-15, the light emission pattern 2 of the handle LED is set, and the current setting process of the light emission information of the handle LED is finished.

  In this manner, in the handle light emission control process of step R9, which is executed every time the frame update timing arrives (1/30 second), the start-up counter of the rank-up effect is decremented by one, and the rank-up effect is performed. When the effect start counter becomes 0, lighting control of the handle LED (promotion notification effect, continuation notification effect) is started. Also, after the start counter of the rank-up effect becomes 0, the end counter of the rank-up effect is decremented by 1. When the end counter of the rank-up effect becomes 0, the lighting control of the handle LED (promotion notification effect, continuation notification effect) ) Is terminated (stopped).

(Setting process of drive information of blower of lamp control unit 150)
With reference to FIG. 97, a description will be given of a process of setting the drive information of the blower of the lamp control unit 150. FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process of drive information of the blower in the lamp control unit 150. This process is performed in the process of setting the motor drive information in step R6.

  First, in step R6-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a pattern command for a fixed effect. If the command is not a pattern command for a fixed effect (step R6-1: No), the lamp CPU 150a determines The process of setting the drive information of the blower of this time is completed, and if the command is a pattern command for a fixed effect (step R6-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step R6-2.

  In step R6-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the variable effect pattern command for specifying the execution timing of the fixed effect has been received, and if not received (step R6-2: No). When the processing for setting the drive information of the blower of this time has been completed and received (step R6-2: Yes), in step R6-3, in the variable effect defined by the variable effect pattern from the fixed effect pattern. Identify (calculate) the number of start frames of the fixed effect.

  In step R6-4, the ramp CPU 150a sets a value obtained by adding the adjustment value (2) for synchronization to the specified number of frames to the fixed effect start counter, and in step R6-5, executes the fixed effect execution value ( 300 = about 10 seconds) is set in the end counter of the definite effect, the drive pattern of the blower is set, and the process of setting the drive information of the blower this time is ended.

  By doing so, in the driving process of the blower in step R10, which is executed every time the frame update timing arrives (1/30 seconds), the fixed effect start counter is decremented by one, and the fixed effect of the fixed effect is reduced. When the start counter becomes 0, drive control of the blower 21 (execution of a certain-change-determining effect) is started. Further, after the start counter of the fixed effect becomes 0, the end counter of the fixed effect is decremented by 1, and when the end counter of the fixed effect becomes 0 (about 10 seconds after the start of the fixed effect), the driving of the blower 21 is started. The control (execution of the fixed effect) is ended (stopped).

(Timing chart before and after the start of the fixed production)
FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the start of the fixed effect when the fixed effect is started in the first frame of the reach start of the variable effect pattern 24.
In this figure, the update cycle of the effect image (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control section 141 (image control section 145) and the control cycle of the blower 21 controlled by the lamp control section 150 are synchronized at 1/30 seconds. (Tuned).

  The timing of T1 is the timing of the 149th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of a frame in the middle of the execution period (about 5 seconds) of the normal fluctuation in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, the blowing device 21 is not operating (driving), and drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, The display of the image data a drawn on the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen a of the normal fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T2 is the 150th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of the last frame of the normal fluctuation execution period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, the blower 21 is not operating (driving), and drawing of the image data c (background image, reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, The display of the image data b drawn on the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen b of the normal fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 151st frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of the frame that is switched to the execution period of the reach fluctuation in which the reach effect is performed (the first frame of the reach start). At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is started, and the drawing of the image data d (background image, reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, The display of the image data c drawn on the two-frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen c of the reach fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 152nd frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the reach fluctuation in which the reach effect is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is continued, and drawing of the image data e (background image, reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the second frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen d of the reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T5 is the 153rd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of a frame in the middle of the execution period of the reach fluctuation in which the reach effect is performed. At this timing, the operation (driving) of the blower 21 is continued, and drawing of the image data f (background image, reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen e of the reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  As described above, the fixed effect using the blower 21 is started in synchronization (in synchronization) with the update timing of the frame in which the predetermined effect image (image data c for starting the reach effect) is displayed on the image display device. As compared with the case where the fixed effect (notification effect) is started in a state where the timing is different from the frame update timing, the appeal to the player regarding the fixed effect (notification effect) can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. Becomes possible.

(Timing chart before and after the final stage)
FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the end of the confirmed effect started in the first frame of the reach start of the variable effect pattern 24.
In this figure, the update cycle of the effect image (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control section 141 (image control section 145) and the control cycle of the blower 21 controlled by the lamp control section 150 are synchronized at 1/30 seconds. (Tuned).

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 448th frame from the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of a frame in the middle of the execution period (about 15 seconds) of the SP reach variation in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is continued, and the drawing of the image data h (background image, SP reach image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen g of the SP reach fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T8 is the timing of the 449th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the SP reach fluctuation in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (driving) of the blower 21 is continued, and drawing of the image data i (background image, effect image of SP reach, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data h drawn on the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen h of the SP reach fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 450th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and the update timing of the frame during the execution period of the SP reach fluctuation in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (driving) of the blower 21 is continued, and drawing of the image data j (background image, SP reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen i of the SP reach fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T10 is the 451th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is a timing in the middle of the execution period of the SP reach fluctuation in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 that has been driven for about 10 seconds (300 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, SP reach image, various images, Drawing of a symbol image, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen d of the SP reach fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device. Is displayed.

  The timing of T11 is the timing of the 452th frame from the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the execution period of the SP reach variation in which the SP reach effect A is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the blower 21 is stopped, and the drawing of the image data l (background image, SP reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started. Then, the display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen k of the SP reach fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  As described above, the fixed effect using the blower 21 ends in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the update timing of the frame in which the predetermined effect image (image data j for performing the SP reach effect) is displayed on the image display device. This makes it possible to reduce a player's discomfort compared to the case where the finalized production (informational production) ends with a deviation from the frame update timing, and also makes the finalized production (informational production) sharper. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of a directed production)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the case where a fixed effect is started in the first frame of the reach start of the variable effect pattern 24. Specifically, FIG. 100 (a) shows an effect in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. FIG. 100 (b) is an example of an effect at the start of the execution period of the reach variation (timing at T3 in FIG. 98), and FIG. 100 (c) is an effect at the beginning of the execution period of the SP reach variation. FIG. 100 (d) is an effect example in the middle of the execution period of the SP reach fluctuation (timing of T10 in FIG. 99).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (a), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a background image HG, an effect design 70a which is an effect design image ZG, and the like, and “7” is displayed in the variable display area on the left side. While the effect design 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped), the effect design 70a is moved up and down in the center and right variation display areas to perform a normal variation effect (variable effect before reach). At this time, since the operation (driving) of the blower 21 is stopped, the finalized effect is not executed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (b), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays characters such as a background image HG, an effect design 70a that is an effect design image ZG, a reach effect image EG1, and the like. The effect design 70a of "7" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the change display area of the display, and the effect design 70a is moved and displayed in the center change display area, and the action display is performed so as to enlarge or reduce the character of "reach!" By doing so, the reach fluctuation effect is executed. At this time, the blower 21 is operated (driven), and the wind (air) is sent out from the blower opening 15d of the firing handle 15 to the player, thereby starting a definite effect.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (c), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the background image HG, the effect design image ZG, the effect image EG2 of the SP reach, and the like, and moves to the lower right of the screen. The effect design 70a of "7" is stopped and displayed in the left and right change display regions of the change display region, and the effect design 70a is moved and displayed in the center change display region, or the character is displayed so as to face each other. The SP reach fluctuation effect is being executed. At this time, the fixed effect is continuously executed while maintaining the state in which the blower 21 is operated (driven).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (d), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a character such as the background image HG, the effect design image ZG, or the effect image EG2 of the SP reach, and moves to the lower right of the screen. The effect pattern 70a of "7" is stopped and displayed in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the fluctuation display area, and the effect pattern 70a is moved and displayed in the center fluctuation display area, or the action is displayed as if the character is facing. Thus, the SP reach fluctuation effect is executed. At this time, the operation (driving) of the blower 21 is stopped, and the execution of the fixed effect ends.

(Timing chart 1 before and after the start of the probable change confirmation effect)
FIG. 101 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the start of the probable change confirmation effect when the probable change confirmation effect is started in the promotion confirmation first frame, which is the case where the production button 17 is operated in the promotion effect B of the fluctuation effect pattern 43. It is.
In this figure, the effect image update cycle (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145), and the light emitting device 15c of the handle and the board for the movable effect member 73 controlled by the lamp control unit 150 The control cycle of the driving device 75 is synchronized (tuned) at 1/30 second.

  The timing of T1 is the 1557th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the update timing of a frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, an effective period for validating the effect button 17 (effect button detection switch 17a) has been generated, but the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the board driving device 75 for the movable effect member 73 operate. Not.

  At the timing of T1, drawing of the image data 1 (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, operation promotion image, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and is drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the displayed image data k on the image display device is started, and the display screen k of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 1558th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the update timing of the frame during the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the valid period has been generated, but the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the panel driving device 75 for the movable effecting member 73 are not operating.

  At the timing of T2, drawing of the image data m (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, operation promotion image, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data l that has been performed on the image display device is started, and the display screen l of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T3 is a timing in the middle of the 1558th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is a timing at which the operation of the effect button 17 is detected by the effect button detection switch 17a. At this timing, the validity period ends and the special operation effect command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130m to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 1559th frame from the start of the variable production, and is the update timing of a frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion production in which the promotion production B is performed. At this timing, the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 have received a command for a special operation effect, but the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 are not started.

  At the timing of T4, drawing of the image data n (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing is performed to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data m on the image display device is started, and the display screen m of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T5 is the 1560th frame from the start of the variable production, and is the update timing of a frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion production in which the promotion production B is performed. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the driving device 75 for the board for the movable effect member 73 is started.

  At the timing of T5, drawing of the image data o (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the drawing is performed to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data n on the image display device is started, the display screen n of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the one-shot notification sound.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the 1561th frame from the start of the variable production, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion production in which the promotion production B is performed. At this timing, the operation of the steering wheel light emitting device 15c and the operation of the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 are continued.

  At the timing of T6, drawing of the image data p (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of o on the image display device is started, the display screen o of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the one-shot notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

  In this way, the timing of updating the frame in which the image data n for starting the successful promotion effect, which is two frames (adjustment value for synchronization described above) after the number of frames receiving the command of the special operation effect, is displayed. Since the probable change confirmation effect using the audio output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started, the probabilistic change confirmation effect (notification effect) is started compared to the case where the probabilistic change confirmation effect (notification effect) is started in a state of being shifted from the frame update timing. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player for (notification and presentation), and to improve the interest of the game.

(Timing chart 2 before and after the start of the probable change confirmation effect)
FIG. 102 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the start of the certain variation determination effect when the effect button 17 is not operated in the promotion effect B of the fluctuation effect pattern 43.
In this figure, the effect image update cycle (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145), and the light emitting device 15c of the handle and the board for the movable effect member 73 controlled by the lamp control unit 150 The control cycle of the driving device 75 is synchronized (tuned) at 1/30 second.

  The timing of T1 is the timing of the 1574th frame from the start of the variable effect, and the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, an effective period for validating the effect button 17 (effect button detection switch 17a) has been generated, but the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the board driving device 75 for the movable effect member 73 operate. Not.

  At the timing of T1, drawing of the image data n (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, operation promotion images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and is drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the displayed image data m on the image display device is started, and the display screen m of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 1575th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the update timing of the frame during the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the valid period has been generated, but the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the panel driving device 75 for the movable effecting member 73 are not operating.

  At the timing of T2, drawing of the image data o (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, operation promotion images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data n which has been performed on the image display device is started, and the display screen n of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T3 is a timing in the middle of the 1575th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is a timing at which the valid period generated for a predetermined time (about 1.5 seconds) ends. At this timing, a command for a special operation effect is transmitted from the effect control unit 130m to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 1576th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the update timing of the frame during the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 have received a special operation effect command, but the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 are not started.

  At the timing of T4, drawing of the image data p (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and is drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data o on the image display device is started, and the display screen o of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 1577th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the update timing of the frame during the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the driving device 75 for the board for the movable effect member 73 is started.

  At the timing of T5, drawing of the image data q (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the drawing is performed to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data p on the image display device is started, the display screen p of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the one-shot notification sound.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the 1578th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the update timing of the frame during the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the operation of the steering wheel light emitting device 15c and the operation of the panel drive device 75 for the movable effect member 73 are continued.

  At the timing of T6, drawing of the image data r (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, and the image data drawn on the second frame buffer is started. The display of q on the image display device is started, the display screen o of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the one-shot notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

  As described above, the audio output is performed in accordance with the update timing of the frame in which the image data p for starting the successful promotion effect, which is two frames (the above-described synchronization adjustment value) after the number of frames receiving the special operation effect command, is displayed. Since the certain-change-determining effect using the device 9 or the light-emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started, the certain-change-determining effect (notifying effect) is started as compared with the case where the certain-change-determining effect (information effect) is started in a state of being out of sync with the frame update timing. ), The appeal to the player can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if there is no operation of the production button 17 by the player during the validity period, the certain change confirmation effect (notification production) is executed at the end of the validity period, so that the operation of the production button 17 is forgotten or the operation of the production button 17 is performed. It is possible for a player who is embarrassed to experience a certainty-change-determination effect (notification effect), thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, the probable change confirmation effect when the operation of the effect button 17 is performed during the valid period, and the probable change confirmation effect when the operation of the effect button is not performed during the valid period, the execution period of the probable change confirmation effect The effect form of the certain-change-determination effect may be different, for example, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel, or by changing the one-shot notification sound output from the audio output device 9.

  Further, when the operation of the effect button 17 is performed during the valid period, the command of the special operation effect from the effect control unit 130m cannot be normally received due to the liquid crystal control unit 141 or the lamp control unit 150 missing the command ( In the case of bit omission, etc., the certain-variable confirmation effect (notification effect) may not be executed.

  Also, for example, the time from the occurrence of the valid period (valid time) is measured, and the command of the special operation effect is normally performed at the time when the valid period (valid time) ends or after a predetermined number of frames (predetermined period elapses). If it is determined that the signal has not been received, the certain-change-determination effect (reporting effect) may be executed in accordance with the update timing of the next frame or the update timing of a frame several frames later. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from being stopped due to the failure to normally receive the command, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Timing chart before and after the end of the probable change confirmation effect)
FIG. 103 is a timing chart showing various timings before and after the end of the certain variation determination effect started during the execution period of the promotion effect of the fluctuation effect pattern 43.
In this figure, the update cycle of the effect image (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control section 141 (image control section 145) and the control cycle of the blower 21 controlled by the lamp control section 150 are synchronized at 1/30 seconds. (Tuned).

  The timing of T7 is the 1590th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the update timing of the last frame of the execution period of the promotion effect in which the promotion effect B is performed. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the board driving device 75 for the movable effecting member 73 continues, and the image data s (background image, promoted effect image, various The drawing of the symbol image and various icon images) is started, the display of the image data r drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the display screen r of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device. State.

  The timing of T8 is the timing of the 1620th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of the first frame in the execution period of the fluctuation fluctuation in which the fluctuation effect (temporary stop) is performed on the effect symbol 70a. At this timing, the operation (drive) of the board driving device 75 for the movable effecting member 73 is stopped, and the image data u (background image, swing effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer are stopped. ) Is started, and the image data t (background image, swing effect image, various design images, various icon images) drawn in the second frame buffer is displayed on the image display device, and the image display device is started. Is in a state where the display screen t of the swing fluctuation effect is displayed. That is, the operation (drive) of the board driving device 75 for the movable effect member 73 stops at the update timing of the frame on which the display screen t of the swing fluctuation effect is displayed.

  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 1621th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation to cause the effect symbol 70a to perform the fluctuation. At this timing, drawing of the image data v (background image, swing effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data u drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the display screen u of the swing fluctuation effect is displayed.

  The timing of T10 is the timing of the 1635th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the update timing of the first frame of the execution period of the variable stop in which the effect symbol 70a performs the final stop. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is stopped, and the drawing of the image data x (background image, stop effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the first data is drawn. Display of the image data w (background image, stop effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) drawn on the frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays a fluctuating stop effect display screen. w is displayed.

  As described above, the certain change using the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is synchronized (synchronized) with the update timing of the frame in which the predetermined effect image (image data w for performing the fluctuation stop effect) is displayed on the image display device. Since the effect ends, the player can be less likely to feel uncomfortable compared to the case in which the certainty-changed effect (notification effect) ends when the frame is out of sync with the update timing of the frame, and the certainty-changed effect (notification Direction) can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the effect design 70a is completely stopped (the fluctuation stop effect is being performed), the positive change confirmation effect (notification effect) is not executed, so that the player's sense of excitement for the occurrence of the jackpot game is positive change change effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

(Example of a probable change production)
FIG. 104 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in the case of starting a certain-variable confirmation effect when the effect button is operated during the execution period of the promotion effect of the variable effect pattern 43. Specifically, FIG. FIG. 104 (b) is an example of an effect in the middle stage of the execution of the promotion effect, and FIG. 104 (c) is an example of an effect in the execution period of the swing fluctuation. Yes, FIG. 104 (d) is an example of the effect in the execution period of the fluctuation stop.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 104 (a), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has a combination of effect images 70a that are the background image HG and the effect symbol image ZG (four types of “555” to “888”) and An operation promotion image SG (an effect button image indicating the effect button 17, a time gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period, and a character image urging the operation of the effect button 17) and the like are displayed, and the operation prompt displayed in the center of the screen is displayed. The promotion effect is executed by moving and displaying the effect design 70a in an annular shape around the image SG. Further, an operation promoting effect is executed by displaying an action so as to reduce the gauge width of the time gauge image. At this time, since the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is not operating, the certain change confirmation effect is not executed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (b), a combination (“777”) of the effect image 70a which is the effect image ZG after promotion and the background image HG on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and an effect of success in promotion. The image EG3 is displayed, and the successful promotion effect is executed by moving (falling) the movable presentation member 73 in front of the successful promotion effect image EG3 displayed at the center of the screen. In addition, the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is illuminated in the light emitting pattern 1 of the steering wheel LED, and the sound output device 9 outputs a single notification sound, thereby executing a certain change confirmation effect.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (c), a combination (“777”) of the effect image 70a, which is the effect image ZG after promotion, is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The swing variation effect is executed by causing the combination of the effect symbols 70a (“777”) to swing at the center. Further, the output of the one-shot notification sound from the sound output device 9 is stopped, but the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is illuminated by the light emitting pattern 1 of the steering wheel LED, thereby executing the certain change confirmation effect.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (d), a combination (“777”) of the effect image 70a which is the effect image ZG after promotion is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the screen is displayed. The variable stop effect is executed by stopping and displaying the combination of the effect symbols 70a (“777”) at the center. At this time, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is stopped, and the probable change confirmation effect has been completed. In other words, the certain-change confirmation effect ends at the timing of the main stop of the effect symbol 70a.

(Timing chart before and after the start of promotion announcement production)
FIG. 105 shows various timings before and after the start of the promotion notification effect when the promotion notification effect (corresponding to the notification effect) is started at the timing when the eighth round is started from the promotion effect during the 16 round probability change jackpot game of 13 rounds. FIG.
In this figure, the update cycle of the effect image (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control section 141 (image control section 145) and the control cycle of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel controlled by the lamp control section 150 are 1/30 seconds. Are synchronized (tuned).

  The timing of T1 is the timing of the 484th frame from the start of the seventh round of the jackpot game, and is the update timing of a frame in the middle of the closing time (interval) of the seventh round. At this timing, the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is not operating.

  At the timing of T1, drawing of the image data d (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display of c (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the image display device is started, and the display screen c of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device. That is, the promotion effect is being executed.

  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 485th frame from the start of the seventh round of the jackpot game, that is, the update timing of a frame in the middle of the closing time (interval) of the seventh round. At this timing, the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is not operating.

  At the timing of T2, drawing of the image data e (background image, promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data drawn to the first frame buffer is started. The display of d on the image display apparatus is started, and the display screen d of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display apparatus. That is, the promotion effect is being executed.

  The timing of T3 is a timing in the middle of the 485th frame from the start of the seventh round of the jackpot game, and the main control board 110 ends the seventh round closing time (interval) and starts the eighth round. It is timing. At this timing, a round designation command for the eighth opening (eight rounds) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (effect control unit 130m).

  The timing of T4 is a timing in the middle of the 485th frame from the start of the seventh round of the jackpot game, and the closing time (interval) of the seventh round is specified by the round designation command received by the effect control unit 130m from the main control board 110. This is the timing to recognize the end of ()) and start the production of the eighth round. At this timing, a special round effect command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130m to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 486th frame from the start of the seventh round of the jackpot game, and is the timing of updating the last frame of the closing time (interval) of the seventh round. At this timing, the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 have received a special round effect command, but the operation of the steering wheel light emitting device 15c is not started.

  At the timing of T5, drawing of the image data f (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing is performed to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the display screen e of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the first frame of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and is the update timing of the frame that switches from the closing time (interval) of the seventh round to the production of the eighth round. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started.

  At the timing of T6, drawing of the image data g (background image, effect image of successful promotion, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the drawing is performed to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, the display screen f of the successful promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the notification sound of the promotion.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the second frame from the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, that is, the update timing of the frame during the execution of the successful promotion effect. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is continued.

  At the timing of T7, drawing of the image data h (background image, successful promotion effect image, various design images, various icon images) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data g on the image display device is started, the display screen g of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the promotion notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

  As described above, a frame in which a predetermined effect image (image data f for starting a successful promotion effect) is displayed on the image display device two frames (the above-described synchronization adjustment value) from the number of frames receiving the special round effect command. Since the promotion notification effect using the audio output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started in synchronization with the update timing of the frame, the promotion notification effect (reporting effect) is started in a state of being shifted from the frame update timing. In addition, it is possible to enhance the appeal of the promotion announcement effect to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, at the start of a round game that is a boundary between a jackpot game that is advantageous (high value) for the player and a jackpot game that is disadvantageous (low value) for the player, that is, the promotion is notified at a timing according to the progress of the game. Since the effect (notification effect) is performed, the effect of the promotion notification effect can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Note that the round control command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received due to the effect control unit 130m missing (eg, dropping bits), or a special round effect transmitted from the effect control unit 130m. If the command (1) cannot be received normally due to the liquid crystal control unit 141 or the lamp control unit 150 dropping out (eg, dropping bits), the promotion notification effect (notification effect) may not be executed.

  In addition, for example, an interval time from the end of the round game is measured, and the command can be normally received when the interval time elapses (the promotion effect or the continuous effect ends) or after a predetermined number of frames (a predetermined period elapses). If it is determined that there is no such event, the promotion notification effect (notification effect) may be executed in accordance with the update timing of the next frame or the update timing of a frame several frames later. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from being stopped due to the failure to normally receive the command, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of a promotion announcement)
FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in the case of starting a promotion notification effect (corresponding to an information effect) at the start of the eighth round of the 16 round probability jackpot game of 13 rounds, specifically, FIG. Fig. 106 (b) is an example of the production in the latter half of the promotion effect, and Fig. 106 (c) is an example of the production at the start of the eighth round production. FIG. 106 (d) is an example of an effect in the middle of the eighth round effect.

  In the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a background image HG, a promotion rendering image (a “BIG” image EG4 indicating successful promotion, and a promotion failure). A “MIDLE” image EG5) and the like are displayed, and a promotion effect (round) is performed by displaying an action so that a “BIG” image EG4 displayed on the left side of the screen and a “MIDLE” image EG5 displayed on the right side of the screen are pressed against each other. Medium promotion effect) is being executed. At this time, since the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is not operated, the promotion notification effect is not executed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 106C, the background image HG, the “BIG” image EG4, the confetti image EG6, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the “BIG” image EG4 is displayed at the center of the screen. The promotion success effect is performed by displaying the action such that the confetti image EG6 falls while being enlarged and displayed. In addition, the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is illuminated in the light emitting pattern 2 of the handle LED, and the sound of the promotion is output from the audio output device 9, whereby the promotion notification effect is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 106 (d), the background image HG, the “BIG” image EG4, the character image EG7, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the character image EG7 is replaced with the “BIG” image EG4. The eighth round effect is executed by being displayed as if pierced with a spear. In addition, when the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is illuminated by the light emitting pattern 2 of the steering wheel LED, the promotion notification effect is executed.

(Timing chart before and after the start of the continuous announcement production)
FIG. 107 shows various timings before and after the start of the continuous notification effect when the continuation notification effect (corresponding to the notification effect) is started at the timing when the ninth round is started from the continuous effect during the 16 round probability jackpot game of 16 rounds. FIG.
In this figure, the update period of the effect image (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and the control period of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are 1/30. Synchronized in seconds.

  The timing of T1 is the timing of the 478th frame after the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and is the timing of updating the frame in the middle of the closing time (interval) of the eight rounds. At this timing, the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is not operating.

  At the timing of T1, drawing of the image data e (background image, continuous effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, and the image data drawn on the second frame buffer is started. The display of d (background image, continuous effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the continuous effect display screen d. That is, it is in a state where a continuous effect is being executed.

  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 479th frame from the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and is the timing of updating a frame in the middle of the closing time (interval) of the eight rounds. At this timing, the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is not operating.

  At the timing of T2, drawing of the image data f (background image, continuous effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the second frame buffer is started, and the image data drawn on the first frame buffer is started. The display of e on the image display device is started, and the display screen e of the promotion effect is displayed on the image display device. That is, it is in a state where a continuous effect is being executed.

  The timing of T3 is a timing in the middle of the 479th frame after the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and the main control board 110 ends the closing time (interval) of the eighth round and starts the ninth round. It is timing. At this timing, a round designation command for the ninth release (9 rounds) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 (effect control unit 130m).

  The timing of T4 is a timing in the middle of the 479th frame from the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and the closing time (interval) of the eighth round is determined by the round designation command received by the effect control unit 130m from the main control board 110. ) Is recognized, and the production of the ninth round is started. At this timing, a special round effect command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130m to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 480th frame from the start of the eighth round of the jackpot game, and is the timing of updating the last frame of the closing time (interval) of the eighth round. At this timing, the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 have received a special round effect command, but the operation of the steering wheel light emitting device 15c is not started.

  At the timing of T5, drawing of the image data g (background image, effect image of continuation success, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing is performed to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the display screen f of the continuous effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the first frame of the ninth round of the jackpot game, and is the update timing of the frame that switches from the closing time (interval) of the eighth round to the ninth round effect. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started.

  At the timing of T6, drawing of the image data h (background image, effect image of continuation success, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the continuous success effect display screen g is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the continuation notification sound. That is, the setting is made so that the continuous notification effect using the audio output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started at the update timing of the frame in which the image data g for starting the continuous success effect is displayed.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the second frame from the start of the ninth round of the jackpot game, that is, the timing of updating the frame during the execution of the continuous success effect. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is continued.

  At the timing of T7, drawing of the image data i (background image, effect image of success, various design images, various icon images) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data h on the image display device is started, the display screen h of the continuous success effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the notification sound of the promotion from the audio output device 9 is continued.

  As described above, a frame in which a predetermined effect image (image data g for starting a successful promotion effect) is displayed on the image display device two frames (the above-described synchronization adjustment value) from the number of frames receiving the special round effect command. The continuous notification effect using the audio output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started in synchronization with the update timing of the frame, so that the continuous notification effect (reporting effect) is started in a state of being out of sync with the frame update timing. In addition, it is possible to increase the appeal of the player for the continuous notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, at the start of a round game that is a boundary between a jackpot game that is advantageous (high value) for the player and a jackpot game that is disadvantageous (low value) for the player, that is, continuous notification is performed at a timing according to the progress of the game. Since the effect (notification effect) is executed, the effect of the continuous notification effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the round control command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received due to the effect control unit 130m missing (eg, dropping bits), or a special round effect transmitted from the effect control unit 130m. If the command cannot be received normally due to the liquid crystal control unit 141 or the lamp control unit 150 missing the command (eg, missing bits), the continuous notification effect (notification effect) may not be executed.

  In addition, the interval time from the end of the round game is measured, and if the interval time has elapsed (the promotion effect or the continuous effect has ended) or a predetermined number of frames (the predetermined period has elapsed), the command has not been normally received. When it is determined, the continuous notification effect (notification effect) may be executed in accordance with the update timing of the next frame or the update timing of a frame several frames later. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from being stopped due to the failure to normally receive the command, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of production of continuous announcement)
FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in the case where the continuous notification effect is started at the start of the ninth round of the 16-round odd-hit jackpot game of 16 rounds. Specifically, FIG. 108 (b) is an example of an effect in the latter half of the continuous effect, and FIG. 108 (c) is an example of an effect at the start of the ninth round effect. d) is an effect example in the middle of the ninth round effect.

  In the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 108A and 108B, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a background image HG and a continuous rendering image (“continuation” image EG8 indicating success and continuation failure). A “failure” image EG9) and the like are displayed, and an action display is performed so that the “continuation” image EG8 displayed on the left side of the screen and the “failure” image EG9 displayed on the right side of the screen are pressed against each other to perform a continuous effect (round). (Continuous production). At this time, since the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is not operated, the continuous notification effect is not executed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 108 (c), the background image HG, the “continuation” image EG8, the confetti image EG6, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the “continuation” image EG8 is displayed at the center of the screen. The action display is performed such that the confetti image EG6 falls while being displayed in an enlarged manner, so that a continuous success effect is executed. The light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel emits light in the light emitting pattern 2 of the steering wheel LED, and a continuous notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, whereby a continuous notification effect is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 108 (d), the background image HG, the “continuation” image EG8, the character image EG10, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the character image EG10 changes to the “continuation” image EG8. The ninth round effect is executed by being displayed as if pierced with a spear. In addition, when the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is illuminated by the light emitting pattern 2 of the steering wheel LED, the promotion notification effect is executed.

(Modification of one-shot announcement production)
FIG. 109 is a timing chart showing a modification of the one-notification effect (confirmed effect, probable change confirmed effect). In the modification shown in FIG. 109, when the execution timing of the confirmed effect and the execution timing of the sure-change confirmed effect are determined to be the same execution timing, the execution timing of the certain-change confirmed effect is changed to the timing at which the execution of the confirmed effect is completed ( This is different from the above-described embodiment in that the above-described embodiment is delayed.

In FIG. 109, an example will be described in which the confirmed effect and the execution timing of the certain variation confirmed effect are determined in the first frame of the fluctuation start in the fluctuation effect pattern 24.
In this figure, the update period of the effect image (frame update timing) controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141 (image control unit 145) and the control period of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are 1/30. Synchronized in seconds.

  The timing of T7 is the 299th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of a frame in the middle of the execution period of the reach fluctuation in which the reach effect is performed. At this timing, the blower 21 is activated to execute the finalized effect, but the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is not operated, so that the certain change finalizing effect is not executed.

  At the timing of T7, drawing of the image data i (background image, reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn on the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data h on the image display device is started, and the display screen h of the reach variation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T8 is the 300th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of the last frame of the execution period of the reach fluctuation. At this timing, the blower 21 is activated to execute the finalized effect, but the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is not operated, so that the certain change finalizing effect is not executed.

  At the timing of T8, drawing of the image data j (background image, SP reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the drawing is performed to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data i on the image display apparatus is started, and the display screen i of the reach variation effect is displayed on the image display apparatus.

  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 301st frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the update timing of the frame that switches from the execution period of the reach fluctuation to the execution period of the SP reach fluctuation in which the SP reach effect is performed. At this timing, the operation of the air blower 21 is stopped and the confirmed effect is finished, and the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is operated to start the certain change confirmed effect.

  At the timing of T9, drawing of the image data k (background image, SP reach effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing is performed to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data j on the image display device is started, the display screen j of the SP reach fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the one notification sound.

  The timing of T10 is the timing of the 302nd frame from the start of the variation effect, and is the update timing of the frame in the middle of the execution period of the SP reach variation. At this timing, the operation of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is continued.

  At the timing of T10, drawing of the image data 1 (background image, effect image of SP reach, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data k on the image display device is started, the display screen k of the SP reach fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the one-shot notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. .

  In this way, the determined effect using the blower 21 ends in accordance with the update timing of the frame in which the image data j for starting the SP reach effect, which is about 10 seconds after the start of the variable effect, is completed. The setting is made so that the certain change confirmation effect using the audio output device 9 and the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel is started so as to be switched. Therefore, the determined effect and the definite change determined effect are executed without interfering with each other, and the effect of the effect is improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above modification, when the execution timing of the definite effect and the execution timing of the probable change determination effect are determined to be the same execution timing, the execution timing of the definite change confirmation effect is changed to the timing (the number of frames) at which the execution of the definite effect ends However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the execution of the definite effect has been completed (as an opportunity), and the execution of the definite change definite effect may be started.

  Further, instead of starting the execution of the probable change confirmed effect at the timing when the confirmed effect ends, the probable change confirmed effect may be executed after a predetermined period (several frames) has elapsed after the completion of the confirmed effect. May be determined by lottery. Even in the case of performing the probable change confirmation effect in such a form, it is desirable to start the probabilistic change confirmation effect in accordance with the frame update timing and end the probabilistic change confirmation effect in accordance with the frame update timing.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the probability-change-determined effect is definitely notified (notified) that the probability-change-determined effect is a probability-change-win, but the probability-change-hit is the most advantageous for the player (for example, a 16-round probability-change-hit). May be notified (notified) definitely. In this way, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's sense of excitement when the certain-change-determination effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probable change confirmation effect is constituted by the light emission of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the one-shot notification sound from the sound output device 9, but the display of the probabilistic change confirmation effect image on the image display device may be combined. Then, the operation of the movable effect member 73 may be combined, any one of them may be executed, or any combination thereof may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probable change confirmation effect is executed only once during one change display. However, the effect may be executed a plurality of times by shifting the execution timing. May be limited to a range that does not exceed a predetermined number. In this way, it is possible to enhance the production effect without extremely impairing the rarity of the probability-change-determined production.

  In the present embodiment, when the operation of the effect button 17 is detected by the effect button detection switch 17a during the validity period of the promotion effect B, the rendering of the effect image of the successful promotion is started at the next frame update timing, and the image display device The effect of confirming the change is confirmed at the update timing of the frame in which the effect image of the successful promotion is displayed. However, separately from the effect, the operation of the effect button 17 is detected by the effect button detection switch 17a, and then several frames. (For example, 10 frames) The rendering of the effect image of success promotion is started at a later frame update timing, and the certain change confirmation effect is executed at the update timing of the frame where the success promotion image is displayed on the image display device. A delay probability change effect may be executed. In this way, the variation of the certain variation determination effect increases, and the player's sense of expectation and frustration at the time of operating the effect button 17 can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the validity period based on the promotion effect B occurs, the promotion succeeds even if the effect button 17 is operated or the effect button 17 is not operated. Although the effect and the certainty-determining effect were to be executed, when the validity period based on the operation effects A to C occurred, the operation effect was executed only when the operation button 17 was operated. You may.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not to execute a fixed effect or a fixed-change fixed effect is determined by a lottery separate from the determination of the variable effect pattern. However, the variable effect pattern and the fixed effect or the fixed-change fixed effect are executed. Alternatively, whether or not to execute the fixed effect without lottery and the execution timing may be determined in advance by associating whether or not to execute the determined effect. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the effect control unit.

  In the present embodiment, the firing handle 15 is twisted to the right to the maximum during the time-saving game state to fire a game ball toward the right game area and play a game. In, there is a case where the player does not properly hold the firing handle 15, so that it is possible to prevent the blower device 21 from executing the certain-change confirmation effect. Instead, the certain variation determination effect may be executed using the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the player does not notice that the certain change confirmation effect has been executed in the time-saving gaming state.

  Also, in the present embodiment, as a notification effect, a confirmed effect, a certain change confirming effect, a promotion notification effect, and a continuous notification effect are executed.However, a preliminary determination of the hold memory is performed during the jackpot game, and the hold memory is used for the jackpot game. A jackpot notice may be executed to definitively notify (notify) the occurrence of the reserved in-consecutive chan after the end until the end of the jackpot game. In addition, when executing the jackpot notice, the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel may be operated, the notification sound may be output from the audio output device 9, or the blower 21 may be operated. Alternatively, any combination thereof may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the promotion effect and the continuous effect are performed during the closing time (interval) of the predetermined round, but may be performed from the opening time to the closing time of the predetermined round. By doing so, it is possible to secure a long execution time of the promotion effect and the continuous effect, and it is possible to execute a highly entertaining effect.

  In the present embodiment, the processing of steps T7 to T13 is performed in the main processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141. However, instead of the processing of step T32 of the V blank interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141, the processing of steps T7 to T13 is performed. The process of step T13 may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of steps R7 to R10 is performed in the main processing of the lamp control unit 150. However, instead of step R31 of the V blank interrupt processing of the lamp control unit 150, steps R7 to R10 are performed. May be executed.

  In the present embodiment, a frame rate (frame image) at which image data (effect images) are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) by the image control unit 145 (VDP). The V blank signal output from the image controller 145 (VDP) is synchronized with the liquid crystal controller 141 in order to synchronize (tune) the control cycle of the light emitting device 15c of the steering wheel and the blower 21 with the update timing and the frame update cycle. The lamp control unit 150 is provided with a timer counter that is updated at, for example, 1 ms, and the timer counter measures 33 ms, which is the same as the frame rate, so that the light emitting device 15 c of the steering wheel and the air blowing The operation control of the device 21 may be synchronized (tuned).

  In the present embodiment, the frame rate at which image data (effect images) are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) by the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps ( Although 1/30 second = about 33 ms), the frame rate at which the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays image data (effect image) is 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms). The frame rate at which the image data (presentation image) is displayed on the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms), or vice versa. In this case, at the update timing of the frame corresponding to the frame rate of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the start and the end of the notification effect (confirmed effect, probable change effect, promotion notification effect, continuation effect) are controlled. Good to do.

  Further, the frame rate of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms), and image data (effect image) is displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). When the frame rate is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays the same image data (effect image) for two frames, thereby substantially reducing the number of frames. The image data may be displayed at the same frame rate as that of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

  Further, the frame rates of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are both set to 60 fps (1/60 sec = 16.6 ms), and the same image data (two frames) is used. By displaying the effect image), a frame rate of substantially 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) may be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the image control unit 145 (VDP) and the audio control unit 148 are controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 141. However, the control function of the liquid crystal control unit 141 is provided to the effect control unit 130m, and the effect control is performed. The image control unit 145 (VDP) and the audio control unit 148 may be controlled by the unit 130m.

  In this embodiment, the lamp control unit 150 controls the frame lighting device 10, the steering wheel light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the blower device 21, the panel lighting device 74, and the panel driving device 75. However, the effect control unit 130m has the control function of the lamp control unit 150, and the effect control unit 130m controls the frame lighting device 10, the steering wheel light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the blower device 21, the panel lighting device 74, The panel driving device 75 may be controlled.

  In the present embodiment, as a notification effect, a one-shot notification effect or a rank-up effect that steadily notifies (suggests) the progress or result of the game (variable display, big hit) to the player, or the like is described. It may be a normal notice effect that informs (indicates) the progress of the display or the jackpot) or the result in advance.

  For example, a dialogue announcement effect in which an image indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed and / or a sound (sound) indicating the jackpot expectation is output, and the operation of the movable effect member 73 in a mode suggesting the jackpot expectation And / or a frame illuminating device 10 and / or an illuminating device 10 in a mode that suggests a jackpot expectation effect that emits light from the panel illumination device 74 for the movable effect member 73 in a manner that suggests a jackpot expectation. Alternatively, a light emission notice effect in which the panel lighting device 74 emits light may be set as the notification effect, and the notification effect may be started at an update timing of a frame corresponding to operation detection or non-operation detection of the effect button 17 during the effective period during the variable display. .

  In addition, one or a plurality of composite effects obtained by arbitrarily combining any of a speech notice effect, a character notice effect effect, and a light emission effect effect are set as an alert effect, and operation detection or non-operation detection of the effect button 17 during the effective period during the variable display. May be started at the timing of updating the frame corresponding to. In addition, a frame corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command (special symbol storage designation command, starting opening winning designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc.) from the main control board 110 is used for the speech announcement effect, the accessory announcement effect, and the light emission announcement effect. May be started at the update timing.

  In addition, a look-ahead notice such as a continuous notice effect or a pending change notice effect performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the movable effect member 73. A frame corresponding to the operation detection or non-operation detection of the effect button 17 in the effective time over one or a plurality of variable displays before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening winning designation command is started, with the effect being a notification effect. May be started at the update timing. In this case, during the valid period, the hold icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command is displayed as a special hold icon including a button image that resembles the effect button 17 to notify the effective time while prompting the operation of the effect button 17. Good to do. Further, an image of a dedicated operation promotion may be displayed in the pre-read notice effect, and the effective time may be notified while prompting the operation of the effect button 17.

  Note that the effective time of the effect button 17 in the notice effect such as the above-described one-notice effect, the speech notice effect, the accessory notice effect, the light emission notice effect, and the like, and the effective time of the effect button 17 in the look-ahead notice effect are simultaneously generated. Alternatively, the restriction may be made so that only one of the valid times occurs. In addition, when the valid time is generated at the same time, the remaining time of the valid time is started first at the update timing of the frame corresponding to the operation detection or non-operation detection of the effect button 17 with priority given to the shorter remaining time. May be started later at a frame update timing corresponding to operation detection or non-operation detection of the effect button 17.

  Further, when a plurality of effect buttons are provided and the normal notice effect and the effective time of the prefetch notice effect occur simultaneously, in the normal notice effect, the first effect button is enabled to promote the operation for the normal notice effect. An image (first effect button image or the like) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in the prefetch notice effect, the second effect button is enabled to facilitate operation (second effect button image or the like). May be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) or vice versa.

  Further, when only one valid time of the normal notice effect and the pre-read notice effect is generated, both the first effect button and the second effect button may be effective, and in that case, the first image display is performed. One or both of the first effect button image and the second effect button image may be displayed on the device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or the first image display device 70 ( One of the first effect button image and the second effect button image may be displayed on the main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button detection switch 17a constitutes "input detection means", but is not limited to this. For example, an infrared sensor for detecting an operation of holding the player's hand or the like, A detection element, such as a touch panel for detecting a predetermined operation, which can detect an input such as an operation or operation of a player may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the "effective period" in which the effect button 17 (effect button detection switch 17a) is valid during the variable effect is generated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An effective period may be generated, and an operation effect corresponding to the state of the game (during a floating effect, in a waiting state for a customer, during a jackpot game, etc.) may be executed based on the operation of the effect button 17.

  In the present embodiment, a blowing device that sends out wind (air) to a player in a predetermined manner or a light emitting device of a handle for causing a firing handle to emit light in a predetermined manner constitutes “producing means”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a frame lighting device 10 provided on a glass frame and emitting light in a predetermined manner, a board lighting device 74 provided on a game board and emitting light in a predetermined manner, a predetermined effect image A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying, a movable effect member 73 provided on the game board and operating in a predetermined mode, a frame provided on the glass frame and operating the frame movable member in a predetermined mode Mobile device (not shown).

  Also, in the present embodiment, an event advantageous to the player may occur during the progress of the game (during a variable display, during a big hit, or the like), or an event advantageous to the player may occur during the progress of the game. An effect that definitively or preliminarily notifies (suggests) that there is a “predetermined notification effect”, for example, a definite effect or a variably changing jackpot that definitively notifies (notifies) that a big hit has occurred. One-shot announcement such as a definite change confirmation effect that definitively informs (informs), a promotion effect that directs whether or not the type of jackpot game is promoted, and whether a round game that can acquire award balls continues or not Rank-up productions such as continuous productions.

  In the present embodiment, the update timing of the frame at which the execution of the notification effect (confirmation effect, probable change effect, promotion notification effect, continuation notification effect) is started is determined on the image display device by a predetermined effect image (for example, 1st change start time). Although the update timing of the frame in which the image data corresponding to the frame or the first frame of the reach start) is displayed is set as the update timing of the frame at which the execution of the notification effect is started, the predetermined effect image is stored in the drawing frame buffer. The update timing of the drawn frame (that is, one frame before the image data corresponding to the first frame at the start of fluctuation, the first frame at the start of reach, and the like) is displayed on the image display device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the image data (effect image) drawn in the frame buffer at the update timing of the frame next to the number of frames in which the predetermined operation (operation of the effect button 17) is detected is displayed on the image display device. The frame update timing (the second frame update timing after the detection of the predetermined operation) is the “frame update timing corresponding to the detection of the predetermined operation”, but is not limited thereto. The timing of updating a frame for displaying an effect image (image data) drawn in the frame buffer at the time of detecting the above-mentioned operation on the image display device, or drawing one or more frames after the detection of the predetermined operation in the frame buffer. The effect image (image data) to be displayed may be the update timing of the frame for displaying on the image display device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the image data (effect image) drawn in the frame buffer at the update timing of the frame next to the number of frames whose validity period has ended is updated on the frame displayed on the image display device (validity period is valid). The update timing of the second frame after the end is “the update timing of the frame corresponding to the non-detection of the predetermined operation”, but is not limited to this, and is not stored in the frame buffer when the valid period ends. Timing of updating a frame for displaying the rendered effect image (image data) on the image display device, and displaying the effect image (image data) drawn on the frame buffer one or more frames after the end of the validity period Update timing of the frame to be displayed on the device (first or multiple frames after the validity period ends) Absence of update timing) may be used.

  In this embodiment, the image data (effect image) drawn in the frame buffer at the update timing of the frame following the number of frames for which the round designation command has been received from the main control board is updated in the frame displayed on the image display device. The timing (the second frame update timing after receiving the round designation command) is “the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command transmitted from the main control unit”, but is not limited thereto. When the round designation command is received from the main control board, the timing of updating the frame for displaying the effect image (image data) drawn in the frame buffer on the image display device, or the round designation command is received from the main control board Direction image drawn in the frame buffer one or more frames after the time point (Image data) may be a frame update timing to be displayed on the image display device (update timing of the first or multiple th frame after receiving the round specifying command).

  In the above embodiment, the notification effect is executed in synchronization with the update timing of the frame. However, the error designation command for the magnetic abnormality transmitted from the main control board 110, the error designation command for the radio wave abnormality, the illegal winning Effect control board 130 displays a notification (error) image corresponding to the type of error on the image display device based on the reception of an error designation command such as an error designation command for an error, an error designation command for an abnormal prize, and voice output. When an error sound is output from the device 9 to output a notification sound of radio wave abnormality, a notification sound of magnetic abnormality, a notification sound of illegal winning, and a notification sound of abnormal winning, a notification (error) image is displayed. The notification sound may be output in synchronization with the frame update timing.

(Example of display of adjustment guidance image)
A display example of a volume adjustment guide image and a brightness adjustment guide image will be described with reference to FIG. 110. Specifically, FIG. 110A is a diagram illustrating a display example when the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is within a setting range of 0 to 5, and FIG. FIG. 110C is a diagram illustrating a display example when the switch position (scale) of the switch 22 is within the setting range of 6 to A. FIG. It is a figure showing the example of a display when it is in a setting range.

  In FIG. 110A, the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is “0” belonging to a setting range of 0 to 5, and the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment are set to be possible (variable). Further, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a standby screen of a customer waiting effect in a state where the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

  At this time, at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are arranged side by side, and overlap with the background image, but in the effect design 70a. Are displayed without overlapping. Although not shown, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19, which are effective for volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, are in a state of emitting light.

  Therefore, the player who sees the volume adjustment guidance image OAG, the brightness adjustment guidance image KAG, and the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 emit light recognizes that volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are possible. be able to. When the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is 1 to 5, the same display as that in FIG. 110A is made.

  In FIG. 110B, the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is “6” belonging to the setting range of 6 to A, and the volume adjustment is set to be possible (variable), while the brightness adjustment is not possible (fixed). Is set to The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a standby screen of a customer waiting effect.

  At this time, at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), only the volume adjustment guide image OAG is displayed so as to overlap the background image but not to the effect design 70a. Also, although not shown, the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 that are enabled for volume adjustment are in a state of emitting light.

  Therefore, the player who sees the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the state where the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 emit light can recognize that the volume can be adjusted. In addition, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is 7 to A, the same display as that in FIG. 110B is made.

  In FIG. 110 (c), the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is “B” belonging to the setting range of BF, and the volume adjustment is set to impossible (fixed), while the brightness adjustment is possible (variable). Is set to The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a standby screen of a customer waiting effect.

  At this time, at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), only the brightness adjustment guide image KAG is displayed so as to overlap the background image but not to the effect design 70a. Also, although not shown, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 that are enabled for brightness adjustment are in a state of emitting light.

  Therefore, the player who sees the brightness adjustment guide image KAG and the state in which the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 emit light can recognize that the brightness can be adjusted. In addition, when the switch positions of the changeover switch 22 are C to F, the same display as that in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 belongs to the setting range of 0 to 5, it is displayed that the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 are possible ( When the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 belongs to the setting range of 6 to A, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is possible, and the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 is not possible. When there is a display (notification) and the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 belongs to the setting range of BF, the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is impossible and the cross key 19 is used. It is displayed (notified) that the brightness can be adjusted.

  By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp whether the object that can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 is the volume, the luminance, or both the volume and the luminance. It will be easier to understand if adjustments can be made.

  When only one of the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the displayed adjustment guide image is displayed on the first image display device 70 ( The center may be centered at the lower center of the screen of the main liquid crystal). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the adjustment guidance image displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal).

(Specific example when adjustment mode is changed while waiting for customer waiting effect)
A specific example in the case where the adjustment mode is changed during the standby for the customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112.

  Specifically, FIG. 111 is a timing chart in the case where the adjustment mode is changed during the waiting of the customer waiting effect, and FIG. 112 (a) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T1 in FIG. FIG. 112 (b) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T2 in FIG. 111, and FIG. 112 (c) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T3 in FIG. (D) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 111, and FIG. 112 (e) shows an operation example of the gaming machine at the timing of T5 in FIG.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 111, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and the general RAM 144 has information (mode 3) of the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “2” and reference information (mode 3). Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 2, brightness adjustment: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 3) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, in the image display device in which the backlight emits light at the luminance of 80%, the variable effect is being executed, and the sound effect of the variable effect depends on the volume value “2” from the sound output device 9. It is output at 40%.

  At the timing of T1 in FIG. 111, when the variable effect performed on the image display device ends, a transition to a customer waiting state (during a customer waiting effect) is accompanied by the effect of the variable effect from the audio output device 9. The output of the sound is stopped, and the valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid for the start operation of the volume adjustment and the start operation of the luminance adjustment is started.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), a guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and a guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are displayed at the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation becomes effective. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the arrow key 19 are now in a state of emitting light.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated to change the switch position (scale) to “3” at the timing of T2 in FIG. 111, the general RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “3” (mode 4). , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 3, brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness The initial value 5) and the setting of the power saving mode (OFF of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to "3 (volume 60%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (changed) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 changes the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 4) to a fixed volume value (volume value “6”) so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. It is output at the maximum volume (volume 120%) output from the gaming machine 1 in a dependent (corresponding) manner. Note that the output of the effect sound from the audio output device 9 is in a stopped state.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the brightness of the backlight becomes 100% and becomes two-step brighter, and the guide image OAG for volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment The display of the guide image KAG is continued. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is effective continue to emit light. Since the current change in the volume value and the brightness value is due to the change in the adjustment mode, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) does not display the volume value notification image or the brightness value notification image.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed to “4” at the timing of T3 in FIG. 111, information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “4” is stored in the general RAM 144 (mode 5). , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 4; brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness The initial value 5) and the setting of the power saving mode (OFF of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to "4 (volume 80%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. From the audio output device 9, the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 5) depends on the fixed volume value (volume value 6) so as to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing (the volume value 6). Corresponding) and output at a volume of 120%. Note that the output of the effect sound from the audio output device 9 is in a stopped state.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the backlight brightness is maintained at 100%, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image are displayed. The display of KAG is continued. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is effective continue to emit light.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated to change the switch position (scale) to “5” at the timing of T4 in FIG. 111, the general RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “5” (mode 6). , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 5; brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness The initial value 5) and the setting of the power saving mode (OFF of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to "5 (volume 100%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 changes the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 6) to a fixed volume value (volume value “6”) so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. It is output at a volume of 120% depending on (corresponding). Note that the output of the effect sound from the audio output device 9 is in a stopped state.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the backlight brightness is maintained at 100%, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image are displayed. The display of KAG is continued. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is effective continue to emit light. Since the current change in the volume value and the brightness value is due to the change in the adjustment mode, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) does not display the volume value notification image or the brightness value notification image.

  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 111, when 60 seconds, which is the waiting time of the customer waiting effect, has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect), the volume adjustment of the volume is started in order to start the execution of the customer waiting effect. The operation and the brightness adjustment operation are disabled, and the operation of the cross key 19 is invalidated.

  Then, a comparison is made between the current volume value and the initial value of the volume set in the general RAM 144, and the current luminance value is compared with the initial value of the luminance set in the general RAM 144. Is determined, but since the current volume value and the initial value of the volume and the current luminance value and the initial value of the luminance are the same, neither the volume value nor the luminance value is reset.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (e), a predetermined customer waiting effect display is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the sound output corresponding to the customer waiting effect is output from the audio output device 9 to the volume value. The output waiting for (dependent on) "5" executes the customer waiting effect. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the adjustment mode (volume value, luminance value, etc.) is changed (switched) by operating the changeover switch 22 during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, the image display device is changed. A notification image (for example, a volume value notification image, a brightness value notification image, a dedicated adjustment mode notification image, or the like) for notifying the subsequent adjustment mode is not displayed, and the adjustment for notifying the changed adjustment mode is not displayed. Since the notification sound of the mode is output from the sound output device 9, even if the changeover switch 22 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 is operated, the adjustment mode set by the notification sound of the adjustment mode can be recognized. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the adjustment mode is changed (switched) by operating the changeover switch 22, a notification image (for example, a notification image for notifying the image display device of the changed adjustment mode to the image display device if a customer waiting effect is on standby) A notification image of a volume value, a notification image of a brightness value, a dedicated adjustment mode notification image, and the like are displayed. In other cases (during a fluctuation effect or a big hit effect, etc.), the image display device is notified of the changed adjustment mode. The notification image may not be displayed. This makes it possible to instantly recognize the changed adjustment mode without having to hear the adjustment mode notification sound until the end.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification sound in the adjustment mode is output from the audio output device 9 at a sound volume of 120% depending on (corresponding to) a fixed volume value (volume value “6”) instead of an adjustable volume value. For example, even when the effect sound is output during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is not missed, and the set adjustment mode can be reliably recognized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the operation that last changed the volume value or the luminance value is not the operation of the cross key 19 but the operation of the changeover switch 22, the operation of the cross key 19 is not performed during the standby for the customer waiting effect. Immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect that is executed when the operation state continues for the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds), the volume value and the brightness value are not reset (re-set) immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect with the appealing power (volume value, luminance value) intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode.

  In the case of the modification of the volume value reset processing shown in FIG. 83B, the comparison between the current volume value and the initial volume value set in the general RAM 144 is not performed at the timing of T5. The volume value is unconditionally reset (reset) to the initial value of the volume, and in the case of the modified example of the brightness value reset process shown in FIG. 87B, the current brightness value and the current brightness value are changed at the timing of T5. The luminance value is unconditionally reset (reset) to the luminance initial value without comparison with the luminance initial value set in the general RAM 144.

  Therefore, during the execution of the customer waiting effect, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect with the appeal power (volume value, luminance value) intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode. In this case, it is possible to prevent sparse appeal among players of the same model with respect to a player waiting for a customer.

  When the customer waiting effect is started during the output of the adjustment mode notification sound from the audio output device 9, the adjustment mode notification sound is continuously output from the adjustment mode notification sound from the audio output device 9. When the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) is started based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 during the output of, the output of the adjustment mode notification sound at that time May be interrupted (finished) in the middle or switched to a non-audible sound with a volume of 0%.

  In this way, it is possible to accurately notify the adjustment mode in a situation in which the player is not likely to be playing a game, while in a situation in which the player is likely to be playing a game. The notification sound in the adjustment mode does not hinder the game, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

  Further, when the changeover switch 22 is operated during the standby for the customer waiting effect and the adjustment mode is changed, the standby time (60 seconds) of the customer waiting effect may be reset at that time. . In this case, the customer waiting effect is started while the adjustment mode notification sound is being output, and the adjustment mode notification sound becomes difficult to hear due to the customer waiting effect sound, or the adjustment mode notification sound is output as the customer waiting effect. It does not hinder the sound of the production.

  Note that during the standby for the customer waiting effect, the sound output device 9 may output a sound effect corresponding to the standby for the customer waiting effect. In this way, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced when the player is playing a game in a state where the variable effect is not being executed on the image display device.

(Specific example when the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed during the waiting for the customer waiting effect)
A specific example in which the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed during the waiting for the customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114.

  Specifically, FIG. 113 is a timing chart in a case where the volume value is changed during the waiting of the customer waiting effect, and FIG. 114 (a) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T1 in FIG. FIG. 114 (b) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T2 in FIG. 113, and FIG. 114 (c) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 113. (D) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG. 113, and FIG. 114 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T6 in FIG. 113.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 113, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and information of the adjustment mode (mode 3) and reference information (mode 3) corresponding to the switch position “2” are stored in the general RAM 144. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 2, brightness adjustment: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 3) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, it is in the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect), and the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is an effective period.

  At this time, a volume adjustment image OAG and a brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is enabled emit light. It is in a state of having been done.

  At the timing T1 in FIG. 113, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on to detect the operation of the right button, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are invalidated and the volume can be adjusted (volume). Adjustment).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 114A, a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is invalidated. The light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the four-way controller 19 is stopped, and the light emission of the left and right buttons of the four-way controller 19 whose operation is enabled is continued.

  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 113, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the volume value is incremented by 1 to “3”, and the volume value is output from the audio output device 9. The notification sound "mi" of the volume corresponding to "3" is output at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "3".

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the changed volume value “3” is displayed at the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. Light emission of the left and right buttons of the enabled cross key 19 is continued. The output of the notification sound “mi” of the volume is started in synchronization with (synchronization with) the update timing of the frame in which the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “3” is displayed.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated to change the switch position (scale) from “2” to “7” from the timing T3 to the timing T4 in FIG. 113, the switch position is finally stored in the general RAM 144. Adjustment mode information corresponding to "7" (mode 8), reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 4, brightness adjustment availability: impossible ( The fixed value of the brightness value adjustment range “−”, the initial value of the brightness 5), and the setting of the power saving mode (ON of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to “4 (volume 80%)” which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (changed) to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the initial value of the luminance. However, since the volume is currently being adjusted, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 4).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the brightness of the backlight becomes 100% and becomes two-stage brighter. ), The notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “3” displayed at the bottom of the screen changes to the notification image OG of the volume value “4” that is the initial value of the volume in the adjusted mode after the change. It will not be (updated). Also, the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is enabled continue to emit light.

  At the timing T5 in FIG. 113, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the volume value is incremented by 1 to “5”, and the volume value is output from the audio output device 9. The notification sound "SO" of the volume corresponding to "5" is output at a volume of 100% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "5".

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the volume value after the change taking into account the change (switching) of the adjustment mode and the current volume value is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The notification image OG of the volume value indicating “5” is displayed, and the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled continue to emit light. The output of the notification sound “so” of the sound volume is started in synchronization (synchronization) with the update timing of the frame in which the notification image OG of the sound value indicating the sound value “5” is displayed.

  At the timing of T6 in FIG. 113, if 3 seconds, which is the monitoring time of the operation interval, has elapsed since the operation of the right button at the timing of T5, the period during which the volume adjustment is possible (during volume adjustment) ends, and the volume adjustment operation and The operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the operation of brightness adjustment is a valid period.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 114 (e), a volume adjustment image OAG and a brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) instead of the volume value notification image OG. Then, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled are in a state of emitting light.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the period in which the volume value notification image OG is displayed is set as the period in which the volume adjustment is possible, and the period key 19 is used in the period in which the volume value notification image OG is displayed. Is possible, the player can set a desired volume value while confirming the current volume value by the notification image OG of the volume value. Function.

  The same applies to the luminance adjustment. The period in which the luminance value notification image KG is displayed is set as a period in which the luminance adjustment is possible, and in the period in which the luminance value notification image KG is displayed, the cross key 19 is used. Is possible, the player can set a desired brightness value while checking the current brightness value by the brightness value notification image KG, and the brightness adjustment is kind to the player. Function.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting of the adjustment mode, the reference information, and the power saving mode is changed when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 changes during a period in which the volume can be adjusted, that is, during the volume adjustment, Since the displayed notification image of the volume value does not change (update) to the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value set according to the adjusted adjustment mode, the player can adjust the volume value. Even if the switch position of the changeover switch 22 changes during the game, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling suspicious.

  Note that the same applies to the brightness adjustment. When the switch position of the changeover switch 22 changes during a period in which the brightness adjustment is possible, that is, during the brightness adjustment, the settings of the adjustment mode, the reference information, and the power saving mode are changed. Since the notification image of the brightness value displayed on the display device does not change (update) to the notification image of the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value set according to the adjusted adjustment mode after the change, the player Even if the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed during the brightness adjustment and the adjustment mode is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling suspicious.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the volume adjustment during which the notification image of the volume value is displayed, the volume value is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22, and then the volume is changed by operating the cross key 19. When the value is changed, the notification image of the unupdated volume value displayed on the image display device is updated to the notification image of the correct volume value corresponding to the changed volume value, so that the player is aware. It is possible to eliminate the difference between the volume value and the volume value actually set.

  During the brightness adjustment in which the notification image of the brightness value is displayed, the brightness value is changed by operating the cross key 19 after the brightness value is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22. Since the notification image of the incorrect luminance value displayed on the image display device is changed to the notification image of the correct luminance value corresponding to the changed luminance value, the luminance value recognized by the player is It is possible to eliminate the deviation of the set luminance value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the volume adjustment in which the notification image of the volume value is displayed, the volume value changes by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22, and thereafter the operation of the cross key 19 is performed. If the volume value notification image is not displayed without being displayed, the correct volume value notification image corresponding to the changed volume value is displayed at the start of the next volume adjustment operation. It is possible to eliminate the difference between the recognized volume value and the actually set volume value.

  During the brightness adjustment in which the notification image of the brightness value is displayed, the volume value changes by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22, and thereafter, the volume value is changed without operating the cross key 19. When the notification image of is not displayed, the notification image of the correct volume value corresponding to the changed volume value is displayed at the start operation of the next volume adjustment, so that the player is aware at this time. It is possible to eliminate the difference between the volume value and the volume value actually set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, each time the volume value is changed in the volume adjustment using the cross key 19, the volume depends on (corresponds to) the changed volume value and the pitch (scale) corresponding to the changed volume value. Since the notification sound of the volume is output from the audio output device 9, the pitch of the notification sound of the volume gradually changes when the volume value is continuously increased or decreased. Is possible, and it is possible to make a kind notification to the player.

  In addition, when it is set so that the customer waiting effect is started when a predetermined time fixedly set has elapsed from the transition to the customer waiting state, the sound output device 9 outputs the notification sound of the volume during the output. When the customer waiting effect is started, the output of the volume notification sound is continued, and when the variable effect is started during the output of the volume notification sound from the audio output device 9, the volume notification sound is output. The output may be interrupted (finished) or output at a volume of 0%.

  In this way, it is possible to accurately report the volume (value) in a situation where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game, while there is a high possibility that the player is playing a game. Below, the notification sound of the volume does not obstruct the game, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from lowering.

(Specific example when the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed during the waiting for the customer waiting effect)
With reference to FIGS. 115 and 116, a specific example in which the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed during the waiting for the customer waiting effect in the modification of the mode switching process illustrated in FIG. 73 will be described.

  Specifically, FIG. 115 is a timing chart in the case where the volume value and the adjustment mode are changed during the standby for the customer waiting effect. FIG. 116 (a) shows the timing of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T1 in FIG. FIG. 116 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T2 in FIG. 115, and FIG. 116 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T3 in FIG. 115. 116 (d) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 115, and FIG. 116 (e) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG. 115.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 115, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “9”, and information of the adjustment mode (mode 10) and reference information (mode 10) corresponding to the switch position “9” are stored in the general RAM 144. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 2, brightness adjustment availability: impossible (fixed) brightness value adjustment range "-", luminance initial value 5) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode ON) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, it is in the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect), and the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation is valid.

  At this time, the guidance image OAG for volume adjustment is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but the guidance image KAG for brightness adjustment is not displayed, and the operation of the cross key 19 for which the operation is valid is performed. The left and right buttons emit light (light), and the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled are turned off.

  When the left button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the left button is detected at the timing of T1 in FIG. 115, the process proceeds to a period in which the volume can be adjusted (during volume adjustment).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is enabled. The left and right buttons of the four-way controller 19 continue to emit light.

  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 115, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the volume value is incremented by 1 to “3”, and the volume value is output from the audio output device 9. The notification sound "mi" of the volume corresponding to "3" is output at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "3".

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the changed volume value “3” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. Light emission of the left and right buttons of the enabled cross key 19 is continued. The output of the notification sound “mi” of the volume is started in synchronization with (synchronization with) the update timing of the frame in which the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “3” is displayed.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated to change the switch position (scale) from “9” to “A” at the timing of T3 in FIG. 115, the general RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “A”. (Mode 11), reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 1, brightness adjustment availability: impossible (fixed) brightness value adjustment range "-" ", The initial value 5) of the luminance, and the setting of the power saving mode (ON of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to "1 (volume 20%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. However, since the sound volume is being adjusted, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 11).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the brightness of the backlight is maintained at 100%, and the changed volume value “1” is displayed at the bottom of the screen. A notification image OG of a sound volume value indicating is displayed. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for which the operation is effective continue to emit light.

  At the timing of T4 in FIG. 115, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the volume value is incremented by 1 to “2”, and the volume value is output from the audio output device 9. The notification sound "Re" of the volume corresponding to "2" is output at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "2".

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the changed volume value “2” is displayed at the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. Light emission of the left and right buttons of the enabled cross key 19 is continued. The output of the notification sound “RE” of the volume is started in synchronization (synchronization) with the update timing of the frame in which the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “2” is displayed.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated to change the switch position (scale) from “A” to “B” at the timing of T5 in FIG. 115, the information of the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “B” is stored in the general RAM 144. (Mode 12), reference information (volume adjustment possibility: impossible (fixed) volume value adjustment range "-", volume initial value 2, brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 1 5, the initial value of the luminance 5) and the setting of the power saving mode (OFF of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (maintained) to "2 (volume 40%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the period in which the volume can be adjusted (during volume adjustment) ends. Note that the period in which the volume adjustment is possible (during volume adjustment) ends, but since the immediately preceding state was during volume adjustment, the audio output device 9 notifies the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 11). No sound is output.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (e), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the brightness of the backlight is maintained at 100%, and the lower part of the screen is replaced with the notification image OG of the volume value. The brightness adjustment guide image KAG is displayed. Also, the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been disabled are turned off, and the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been enabled are lighted (lit).

  It should be noted that the sound output device 9 may output a notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode when the sound volume adjustment is fixed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 and the sound volume adjustment is released. Good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the changeover switch 22 is operated during the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 and the adjustment mode is changed, the adjustment mode notification sound is not output. It is possible to suppress the player from being surprised by the sound or from being suspicious that an unauthorized operation (remote operation or the like) has been performed.

  The same applies to the luminance adjustment. Even if the changeover switch 22 is operated during the luminance adjustment using the cross key 19 and the adjustment mode is changed, the adjustment mode notification sound is not output. It is possible to suppress the player from being surprised by the sound or from being suspicious that an illegal operation has been performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 during the volume adjustment using the cross key 19, the volume value is changed to the initial value of the volume corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. (Reset), but in this case, the notification sound of the volume is not output, so that the notification sound of the volume is output even though the cross key 19 is not operated, and the player may be surprised or illegal. It is possible to suppress suspicion that an operation (remote operation or the like) has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, the adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 during the volume adjustment using the cross key 19, and the volume value is changed to the initial value of the volume corresponding to the changed adjustment mode ( When the reset is performed, the notification image of the volume value displayed on the image display device changes to the one corresponding to the changed volume value, so that it is difficult for the player to know that the changeover switch 22 has been operated. Also, it is possible to grasp the volume value actually set.

  The same applies to the luminance adjustment. If the adjustment mode is changed by the operation of the changeover switch 22 during the luminance adjustment using the cross key 19, the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the adjusted adjustment mode is changed. The value is changed (reset). In this case, the notification image of the brightness value displayed on the image display device changes to the one corresponding to the changed brightness value. Even if it is not known that the luminance value has been set, it is possible to grasp the luminance value actually set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the changeover switch 22 is operated during the volume adjustment in the adjustment mode in which the volume adjustment is variable or not, and the volume adjustment is changed to the impossible (fixed) adjustment mode (switched). Since the notification image of the volume value displayed on the image display device is not displayed, it is possible to make a player or a game clerk recognize (notify) that the volume cannot be adjusted. .

  The same is true during the brightness adjustment, and the changeover switch 22 is operated during the brightness adjustment in the adjustment mode in which the brightness adjustment is possible is changed to the adjustment mode in which the brightness adjustment is disabled (fixed). In this case, since the notification image of the brightness value displayed on the image display device is not displayed, it is possible to make a player or a game clerk recognize (notify) that the brightness cannot be adjusted. Becomes

  If the adjustment mode is changed based on the operation of the changeover switch 22 and the volume value is changed while the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value changed based on the operation of the cross key 19 is output, the volume is changed. The output of the notification sound may be terminated halfway. Further, if the volume value does not change even when the adjustment mode is changed, it is preferable not to end the output of the notification sound of the volume halfway.

◇ (Specific example in which the customer waiting effect is executed after the volume value is changed while the customer waiting effect is on standby)
With reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, a specific example in the case where the customer waiting effect is executed after the volume value is changed during the standby of the customer waiting effect will be described.

  Specifically, FIG. 117 is a timing chart in the case where the customer waiting effect is executed after the volume value is changed during the waiting of the customer waiting effect, and FIG. 118 (a) is the timing of T1 in FIG. 117. 118 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T2 in FIG. 117, and FIG. 118 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T3 in FIG. 117. 118 (d) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 117, and FIG. 118 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG. 117. is there.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 117, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “5”, and information of the adjustment mode (mode 6) and reference information (mode 6) corresponding to the switch position “5” are stored in the general RAM 144. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 5, brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 5) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)”. At this time, in the image display device in which the backlight emits light at the luminance of 80%, the variable effect is being performed, and the sound effect of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9 at the volume of 40%.

  At the timing T1 in FIG. 117, when the variable effect performed on the image display device ends, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound in accordance with the transition to the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect). Is stopped, and a valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid for the operation of volume adjustment and the operation of brightness adjustment is started.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), a guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and a guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation becomes effective. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the arrow key 19 are now in a state of emitting light.

  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 117, when the left button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on to detect the operation of the left button, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are disabled and the volume can be adjusted (volume). Adjustment).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is invalidated. The light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the four-way controller 19 is stopped, and the light emission of the left and right buttons of the four-way controller 19 whose operation is enabled is continued.

  At the timing of T3 in FIG. 117, when the left button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the left button is detected, the volume value is decremented by 1 to “1”, and the volume value is output from the audio output device 9. The notification sound "do" of the volume corresponding to "1" is output at a volume of 20% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "1".

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the changed volume value “1” is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. Light emission of the left and right buttons of the enabled cross key 19 is continued. The output of the notification sound “do” of the volume is synchronized with (updated with) the update timing of the frame in which the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “1” is displayed.

  At the timing of T4 in FIG. 117, when 3 seconds, which is the monitoring time of the operation interval, has elapsed since the operation of the left button at the timing of T3, the period during which the volume adjustment is possible (during volume adjustment) ends, and the volume adjustment operation and The operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the operation of brightness adjustment is a valid period.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), instead of the volume value notification image OG, a volume adjustment guide image OAG and a brightness adjustment guide image KAG are provided at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Is displayed, and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is valid are in a state of emitting light.

  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 117, when 60 seconds, which is the waiting time of the customer waiting effect, has elapsed from the timing of T4, the operation of the volume adjustment and the operation of the brightness adjustment are disabled to start the execution of the customer waiting effect. The operation of the cross key 19 is invalidated.

  Since the current volume value “1” is smaller than the initial volume value “5” set in the general RAM 144, the volume value “1” set in the general RAM 144 becomes the initial volume value “5”. Since the luminance value is reset and the current luminance value “3” is smaller than the initial luminance value “5” set in the general RAM 144, the luminance value “3” set in the general RAM 144 is changed to the initial luminance value “5”. Reset (reset).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (e), a predetermined customer waiting effect display is started on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the effect sound corresponding to the customer waiting effect is output from the audio output device 9 to the volume value. The output waiting for (dependent on) "5" executes the customer waiting effect. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation that last changed the volume value is the operation of the cross key 19, the state in which the cross key 19 is not operated during the waiting for the customer waiting effect is changed to the state of the customer waiting effect. Immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect that has continued for the standby time (63 seconds), if the current volume value is smaller than the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode, the volume value is reset (reset) to the initial value of the volume. If the current volume value is not smaller than the initial volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the volume value is not reset (reset) to the initial volume value.

  Therefore, during the waiting-for-customer effect, the sound effect of the waiting-for-customer effect (game sound of BGM, SE, etc.) is output with a sound volume value that is equal to or higher than the sound volume value intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the appealing power to the player, and to improve the appealing power of the customer waiting effect in response to the result of the volume adjustment of the player.

  Note that the same applies to the case of the brightness adjustment. If the last operation of changing the brightness value is the operation of the cross key 19, the state in which the cross key 19 is not operated during the waiting for the customer waiting effect indicates the customer waiting effect. If the current luminance value is smaller than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode immediately before the start of the customer waiting effect that has continued for the standby time (60 seconds), the luminance value is reset to the initial luminance value (reset). If the current luminance value is not smaller than the initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, the luminance value is not reset (reset) to the initial luminance value.

  For this reason, the backlight of the image display device and the lamps of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) are set to have a brightness value equal to or higher than the brightness value intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode during the customer waiting effect. LED) emits light, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the appealing power to the player in the customer waiting effect, or to improve the appeal power in the customer waiting effect in response to the result of the volume adjustment of the player. It becomes possible.

  In addition, a time point before the waiting time of the customer waiting effect elapses (for example, 10 seconds before the customer waiting effect starts), or a time point after the waiting time of the customer waiting effect elapses (for example, the customer waiting effect) The volume value may be reset (re-set) to the initial value of the volume at 10 seconds (after the start of the effect), and the brightness value may be reset (re-set) to the initial value of the brightness. Further, the timing of resetting the volume value to the initial value of the volume and the timing of resetting the luminance value to the initial value of the luminance may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed is the adjustment possible period in which the volume value and the brightness value can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 (while the customer waiting effect is on standby), and the cross key 19. The operation is divided into a period in which the volume value and the luminance value cannot be adjusted (in a customer waiting effect).

  As a result, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment performed during the customer waiting effect do not hinder the customer waiting effect, and suppress a decrease in the appealing power (appealing power) to the player in the customer waiting effect. Becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the adjustment possible period and the adjustment impossible period may be set during the customer waiting state in the customer waiting state, or the adjustment possible period and the adjustment impossible period may be set during the customer waiting state. You may. For example, if a customer waiting effect is on standby, it is possible to adjust the period during which the general-purpose roulette effect is not being executed, in which the image display device informs (suggests) the result of the general-purpose variable display during the general-purpose variable display. The period during which the regular roulette production is being performed is considered to be the period during which adjustment is not possible, and the period during which the production related to the maker name or model name of the gaming machine 1 is not performed is considered to be the adjustment possible period if the production is waiting for customers. For example, the period in which the effects related to the manufacturer name or the model name of the gaming machine 1 are being performed is set to a period in which adjustment is impossible.

  Further, when the adjustment mode is changed due to a change in the switch position of the changeover switch 22 during the customer waiting effect, it depends on the volume value set (maintained / changed) according to the changed adjustment mode (correspondence). A sound effect corresponding to the customer waiting effect is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume that changes, and the image display device has a luminance that depends on (corresponds to) a luminance value that is set (maintained / changed) according to the changed adjustment mode. The lamps (LEDs) of the backlight and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) emit light.

  In the case of the modification of the volume value reset processing shown in FIG. 83B, the comparison between the current volume value and the initial volume value set in the general RAM 144 is not performed at the timing of T5. The volume value is unconditionally reset (reset) to the initial value of the volume, and in the case of the modified example of the brightness value reset process shown in FIG. 87B, the current brightness value and the current brightness value are changed at the timing of T5. The brightness value is unconditionally reset (reset) to the brightness initial value without comparison with the brightness initial value set in the general RAM 144.

  Therefore, during the execution of the customer waiting effect, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect with the appeal power (volume value, luminance value) intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode. In this case, it is possible to prevent sparse appeal among players of the same model with respect to a player waiting for a customer.

◇ (Specific example when a power failure occurs after the volume value is changed while waiting for the customer waiting effect)
With reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, a specific example in which a power failure occurs after the volume value is changed during the standby for the customer waiting effect will be described.

  Specifically, FIG. 119 is a timing chart in the case where a power failure (power cutoff) occurs after the volume value is changed during the waiting for the customer waiting effect, and FIG. 120 (a) is a timing chart of T1 of FIG. 119. FIG. 120 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T2 in FIG. 119, and FIG. 120 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T3 in FIG. 119. 120 (d) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG. 119, and FIG. 120 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T6 in FIG. 119. It is.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 119, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and information of the adjustment mode (mode 3) and reference information (mode 3) corresponding to the switch position “2” are stored in the general RAM 144. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 2, brightness adjustment: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 3) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, it is in the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect), and the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is an effective period.

  At this time, a guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and a guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the up, down, left, right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is enabled Is in a state of emitting light.

  At the timing of T1 in FIG. 119, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are invalidated and the volume can be adjusted (volume). Adjustment).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is invalidated. The light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the four-way controller 19 is stopped, and the light emission of the left and right buttons of the four-way controller 19 whose operation is enabled is continued.

  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 119, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on to detect the operation of the right button, the volume value is incremented by 1 to "3", and the volume value is output from the audio output device 9. The notification sound "mi" of the volume corresponding to "3" is output at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "3".

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the changed volume value “3” is displayed at the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. Light emission of the left and right buttons of the enabled cross key 19 is continued. The output of the notification sound “mi” of the volume is started in synchronization with (synchronization with) the update timing of the frame in which the notification image OG of the volume value indicating the volume value “3” is displayed.

  If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and a power failure occurs at the timing of T3 in FIG. 119, the general RAM 144 to which the backup power is not supplied from the power supply board 160 cannot hold the stored contents, and the adjustment mode , The reference information, the setting of the power saving mode, the volume value, the brightness value, and the like are lost (cleared) (there may be indefinite values).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120C, the backlight of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is turned off and nothing is displayed on the screen, and the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 are turned off. State. Although not shown, the backlight of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is also turned off, and nothing is displayed on the screen.

  At the timing of T4 in FIG. 119, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power is restored from a power failure (power interruption) (recovery), the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is referred to, and the general RAM 144 stores the switch position “ 2 ”(mode 3), reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 2, brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable) ), Brightness value adjustment ranges 1 to 5, brightness initial value 3), and power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) are set (reset).

  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are in a state where a color bar, which is an initial screen when the power is turned on, is displayed.

  At timing T5 in FIG. 119, when the effect control unit 130m receives the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the process shifts to a period for notifying the power restoration and the volume value is temporarily set to “0 (mute). )), The luminance value is temporarily set to “5 (100%)”, and the sound output device 9 is unable (fixed) to provide a notification sound of power restoration (volume value “6”). ) Is output at a sound volume of 120% depending on (corresponding to). At this point, since no effect sound is output, the volume value need not be set to “0 (mute)”.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the backlight emits light at a luminance of 100%, and the power restoration information image (gauge image G2, character image G3) is displayed. The displayed state is maintained, and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are kept off.

  At the timing of T6 in FIG. 119, when 30 seconds, which is the notification time, has elapsed from the start of the notification of the power restoration and the notification period of the power restoration has ended, the output of the notification sound of the power restoration from the audio output device 9 is stopped. The volume value returns to “2” before the notification of the power restoration, and the brightness value returns to “3” before the notification of the power restoration. A valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid for the operation is started.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 120 (e), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) becomes a waiting screen of the customer waiting effect, and a guidance image OAG for brightness adjustment and a guidance image for brightness adjustment are provided at the bottom of the screen. KAG is displayed, and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled are in a state of emitting light.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after the volume value is changed from the initial value of the volume during the volume adjustment, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped (power cutoff, power outage), and then the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the supply is resumed, the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode set according to the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is set (reset) as the volume value. That is, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 has not changed before and after the power is turned off, the volume value is reset (reset) to the initial value of the volume before the power is turned off.

  Therefore, when the supply of power to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and the business day of the gaming shop changes, the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode (switch position of the changeover switch 22) set by the gaming shop is restored. In addition, it is possible to save the trouble of changing the volume value to the volume value intended by the gaming shop every business day, thereby reducing the work load of the gaming shop staff.

  When the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed before and after the power is turned off, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted, the volume value is set according to the switch position of the changeover switch 22. Since the initial value of the volume corresponding to the adjustment mode is newly set, the volume value set before and after the power is turned off changes.

  The same applies to the luminance value. After the luminance value is changed from the initial luminance value during the luminance adjustment, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped (power cutoff, power outage), and then the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the supply is resumed, an initial luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode set according to the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is set as the luminance value. That is, if the switch position of the changeover switch 22 has not changed before and after the power is turned off, the luminance value is reset (reset) to the initial value of the luminance before the power is turned off.

  Therefore, when the supply of power to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and the business day of the gaming shop changes, the brightness value corresponding to the adjustment mode (switch position of the changeover switch 22) set by the gaming shop is restored. In addition, it is possible to reduce the burden of changing the luminance value to the luminance value intended by the game store every business day, thereby reducing the work load on the game store staff.

  If the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed before and after the power is turned off, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted, the luminance value is set according to the switch position of the changeover switch 22. Since the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the adjustment mode is newly set, the luminance value set before and after the power is turned off changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification sound of an occurrence event that notifies the occurrence of an important event when an important event such as power restoration occurs is not a volume value that can be adjusted by the player, but a fixed volume that is set in advance. Since the sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 120% depending on (corresponding to) the value (volume value “6”), the occurrence of an important event that may threaten the security of the gaming machine 1 for the gaming shop Can be surely recognized.

  Although the description has been given of the case where the power failure is restored during the volume adjustment, the basic flow is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c during the volume adjustment. May be read as power-on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the notification of an important event such as the power restoration notification or the power-on notification, since the adjustment possible period in which the volume value and the brightness value can be adjusted is not set, the volume adjustment guidance image is displayed. The OAG, the brightness adjustment guide image KAG, the volume value notification image OG, the brightness value notification image KG, and the like are not displayed, and the volume value and the brightness value cannot be changed using the cross key 19. .

  For this reason, the guidance image OAG for volume adjustment, the guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment, the notification image OG for the volume value, the notification image KG for the luminance value, and the like are displayed, and the notification image for power restoration displayed on the image display device and the like. This makes it possible to avoid inconvenience in which the visual recognition of the power-on notification image or the like is obstructed and the game clerk cannot recognize the occurrence of an important event or the type of the important event.

◇ (Specific example when the adjustment mode is changed during the fluctuation effect)
A specific example when the adjustment mode is changed during the fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122.

  Specifically, FIG. 121 is a timing chart when the adjustment mode is changed during the fluctuation effect, and FIG. 122 (a) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T1 in FIG. 122 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T2 in FIG. 121, and FIG. 122 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 121, and FIG. 122 (d). FIG. 122 shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG. 121, and FIG. 122 (e) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T6 in FIG.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 121, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and information (mode 3) of the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “2” and reference information ( Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 2, brightness adjustment: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 3) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this point, the customer waiting effect is on standby, and the operation period of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is valid.

  At this time, the image display device in which the backlight emits light at the luminance of 80% displays a screen in which the customer is waiting for the presentation effect, and a guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and a guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are displayed at the bottom of the screen. , The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled are in a state of emitting light.

  At the timing of T1 in FIG. 121, when the first starting port detection switch 45a is turned on and the first special symbol display unit 60 starts to display the variable display of the special symbol, the image display device displays the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. The accompanying variable effect is started, and the process shifts during the acceleration fluctuation of the effect symbol, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the effect sound of the variable effect at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”. In addition, the transition of the effect symbol during the acceleration fluctuation causes the non-adjustable period, and the valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid ends.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (a), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG displayed at the bottom of the screen are not displayed. The symbol 70a starts the variable display in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated to change the switch position (scale) to “3” at the timing of T2 in FIG. 121, the general RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “3” (mode 4). , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 3, brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness The initial value 5) and the setting of the power saving mode (OFF of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to "3 (volume 60%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (changed) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the variable effect at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the changed volume value “3”. However, since the fluctuation effect is currently being performed, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 4).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), since the change in the current volume value and luminance value is due to the change in the adjustment mode, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a notification image of the volume value. The notification image of the brightness value and the brightness value is not displayed, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a (during the effect symbol acceleration change) is continued. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  At the timing of T3 in FIG. 121, when the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a is accelerated during the fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a, the effect shifts to the high speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a in which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed. The adjustable period is the effective period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is effective.

  At this time, since the fluctuation effect is being performed, the guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and the guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are not displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but the operation is effective. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are emitting light.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated to change the switch position (scale) to "4" at the timing of T4 in FIG. 121, the general RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position "4" (mode 5). , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 4; brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness The initial value 5) and the setting of the power saving mode (OFF of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to "4 (volume 80%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the variable effect at a volume of 80% depending on (corresponding to) the changed volume value “4”. However, since the variable effect is being performed, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 5).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (c), since the change in the current volume value or luminance value is due to the change in the adjustment mode, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a notification image of the volume value. The notification image of the effect symbol 70a is not displayed, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a (during the effect symbol acceleration fluctuation) is continued, and the notice image corresponding to the dialogue notice indicating (expected) the expectation of the big hit is displayed. At the same time, a preview sound corresponding to the dialogue notice is output. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled continue to emit light.

  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 121, when the effect of the effect symbol 70a during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol at which the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a is constant ends, the process shifts to during the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a at which the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a becomes low. Accordingly, the adjustment is disabled, and the valid period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is ended.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), the speech notice image displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is not displayed, and the variation speed of the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a becomes low. The type of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated to change the switch position (scale) to “5” at the timing of T6 in FIG. 121, the general RAM 144 stores information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “5” (mode 6). , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 5; brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness The initial value 5) and the setting of the power saving mode (OFF of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to "5 (volume 100%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the variable effect at a volume of 100% depending on (corresponding to) the changed volume value “5”. However, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 6) because the fluctuation effect is being performed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 122 (e), since the change in the current volume value and luminance value is due to the change in the adjustment mode, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a notification image of the volume value. The notification image of the brightness value or the brightness value is not displayed, and the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops on the activated line. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 during the fluctuation effect, the volume value and the brightness value are changed from the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. And the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 also has a volume dependent (corresponding) to the volume value changed to the initial value of the volume, and the backlight of the image display device and various lighting devices (frames) The illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74) also have a luminance that depends (corresponds) to the luminance value changed to the initial luminance value.

  Therefore, when it becomes necessary to change the volume value or the luminance value during the fluctuation effect due to the convenience of the game store or the player's request, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the volume value and the luminance value cannot be changed. Thus, it is possible to provide a kind adjustment function for the game store. In addition, there is no need to temporarily stop the game, and the operation of the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the changeover switch 22 is operated to change (change) the adjustment mode in a situation where the customer waiting effect is not on standby (for example, during a variable effect or a big hit effect), the adjustment mode is changed. Is not output from the audio output device 9.

  Therefore, the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) outputted while the player is playing the game is not hindered, and the interest of the game is reduced by outputting the notification sound in the adjustment mode. Can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the output of the notification sound in the adjustment mode, and from being suspicious that an improper operation has been performed.

  The adjustment mode is changed by operating the changeover switch 22 in a situation where the customer waiting effect is not waiting (for example, during a variable effect or a big hit effect), but immediately after the customer waiting effect is waiting. Even if there is, the notification sound of the adjustment mode is not output, but the notification sound of the adjustment mode is output when the customer waits for the production effect within a predetermined period (for example, one second) from the change of the adjustment mode. You may do so.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the adjustment mode is changed (switched) by operating the changeover switch 22 in a situation where a customer waiting effect is not being performed (for example, during a fluctuation effect or a big hit effect), the volume value and the brightness value are not changed. Is changed (reset) to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. At that timing, a notification image OG of the volume value and a notification image KG of the luminance value are newly added to the image display device. Since it is not displayed, the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value are not displayed on the image display device at a timing that does not match the player's intention, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced. Becomes

  Here, a case where the adjustment mode is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22 during the jackpot game in which the effect sound is output from the audio output device 9 in the same manner as during the fluctuation effect will be described.

  When the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is changed during the jackpot game and the adjustment mode is changed, the volume value and the brightness value are changed to the initial volume value and the initial brightness value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and The performance sound of the jackpot game output from the output device 9 also has a volume dependent (corresponding to) the changed volume value, and the backlight of the image display device and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74). ) Also have a luminance that depends (corresponds) to the changed luminance value.

  Further, when the adjustment mode is changed during the jackpot game, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device supports the changed adjustment mode. Since the notification image OG of the sound volume value and the notification image KG of the brightness value are not displayed, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  More specifically, when the adjustment mode is changed during the opening of the jackpot game, the volume value and the brightness value are changed to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. The sound produced during the opening which is output during the opening also has a volume dependent on (corresponding to) the changed volume value, and the backlight of the image display device and the lamps of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74). (LED) also has a luminance that depends (corresponds) to the changed luminance value.

  Even in this case, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device displays the sound volume value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. The notification image OG and the brightness value notification image KG are not displayed.

  Further, when the adjustment mode is changed during the round of the jackpot game, the volume value and the brightness value are changed to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the adjusted mode after the change, and output from the audio output device 9. The effect sound during the round being performed also has a volume that depends (corresponds) to the changed volume value, and the backlight (LED for the frame display device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) of the backlight of the image display device and the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74). ) Also has a luminance that depends (corresponds) to the changed luminance value.

  Even in this case, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device displays the sound volume value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. The notification image OG and the brightness value notification image KG are not displayed.

  In addition, when the adjustment mode is changed during the jackpot game interval, the volume value and the brightness value are changed to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and output from the audio output device 9. The effect sound during the given interval also depends on (corresponds to) the changed volume value, and the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) are used. ) Also has a luminance that depends (corresponds) to the changed luminance value.

  Even in this case, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device displays the sound volume value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. The notification image OG and the brightness value notification image KG are not displayed.

  Further, when the adjustment mode is changed during the ending of the jackpot game, the volume value and the brightness value are changed to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the brightness corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and output from the audio output device 9. The effect sound during the ending also depends on (corresponds to) the volume value after the change, and the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) are used. ) Also has a luminance that depends (corresponds) to the changed luminance value.

  Even in this case, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode, and the image display device displays the sound volume value corresponding to the changed adjustment mode. The notification image OG and the brightness value notification image KG are not displayed.

◇ (Specific example when the volume value is changed during the period during which the adjustment is possible during the fluctuation effect)
With reference to FIGS. 123 and 124, a specific example in the case where the volume value is changed during the possible adjustment period during the fluctuation effect will be described.

  Specifically, FIG. 123 is a timing chart in the case where the volume value is changed during the period during which the adjustment is possible during the fluctuation effect. FIG. 124 (a) shows the operation of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T0 in FIG. FIG. 124 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T1 in FIG. 123, and FIG. 124 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing T3 in FIG. 123. FIG. 124 (d) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 123, and FIG. 124 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T6 in FIG. 123.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 123, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and information (mode 3) of the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “2” and reference information ( Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 2, brightness adjustment: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 3) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this point, the customer waiting effect is on standby, and the operation period of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is valid.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), the image display device in which the backlight emits light at a luminance of 80% displays a screen in which a customer waiting effect is on standby, and a volume adjustment guide image OAG is displayed at the bottom of the screen. In addition, a guidance image KAG for brightness adjustment is displayed, and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation is enabled are in a state of emitting light.

  At the timing of T1 in FIG. 123, when the first starting port detection switch 45a is turned on and the first special symbol display unit 60 starts to display the variable display of the special symbol, the image display device displays the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. The accompanying variable effect is started, and the process shifts during the acceleration fluctuation of the effect symbol, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the effect sound of the variable effect at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”. In addition, with the start of the fluctuation effect, the adjustment is disabled, and the valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid ends.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG displayed at the bottom of the screen are not displayed, and the effect is produced. The symbol 70a starts the variable display in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 123, when the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a is accelerated during the fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a, the effect shifts to the high speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a in which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed. The adjustable period is the effective period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is effective.

  At this time, since the fluctuation effect is being performed, the guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and the guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are not displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but the operation is effective. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are emitting light.

  At the timing of T3 in FIG. 123, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are disabled and the volume can be adjusted (volume). Adjustment).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 124 (c), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is invalidated. The light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the four-way controller 19 is stopped, and the light emission of the left and right buttons of the four-way controller 19 whose operation is enabled is continued.

  At the timing of T4 in FIG. 123, when the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected, the volume value is incremented by 1 to “3”, and the sound output device 9 outputs a volume of 40. The effect sound of the variable effect that has been output at% is output at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the changed volume value “3”. However, since the fluctuation effect is currently being performed, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the changed volume value “3”.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 124 (d), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the changed volume value “3” is displayed at the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is performed. Light emission of the left and right buttons of the enabled cross key 19 is continued.

  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 123, when the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a at which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed ends, the process shifts to the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a where the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a becomes low speed. Accordingly, the adjustment is disabled, and the valid period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is ended.

  At this time, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the notification image OG of the sound volume value indicating the sound volume value “3” is not displayed, and the fluctuation speed of the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a becomes low, so that the effect symbol 70a Can be recognized. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  At the timing of T6 in FIG. 123, the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, but since the adjustment is not possible at present, the operation of the right button of the cross key 19 is invalid, and the volume value is changed. Never.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 124 (e), the notification image of the volume value is not displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a is temporarily displayed on the active line. Stop. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the possible period of the adjustment in which the volume value and the luminance value can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 (during the high-speed change of the effect symbol). The operation is divided into non-adjustable periods in which the volume value and the luminance value cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 (during an effect design during an acceleration change, during a effect design at a low speed change, during a reach change, etc.).

  Therefore, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment are not performed during the period in which the player wants to pay attention in the variable effect, and the effect of the variable effect is extremely reduced and the interest of the game is reduced. This can be prevented.

  In addition, during the effect design acceleration fluctuation may be included in the possible period of adjustment, or even during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect design, the period during which the normal notice effect or the look-ahead notice effect is executed is set as the adjustment impossible period. May be set. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the important announcement effect cannot be confirmed (visually recognized) even for the player, while extending the period in which the adjustment operation is possible. In addition, when the volume value and the luminance value cannot be adjusted during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol, the player can recognize that the normal notice effect and the pre-read notice effect are executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the volume value is changed by operating the cross key 19 during the adjustable period during the variable effect, the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 changes to the changed volume value. Is changed to a volume dependent (corresponding to).

  Therefore, when the player changes the volume value during the variable effect, the volume of the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is immediately changed, and the player's request is immediately satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The same applies to the case of the luminance value. When the luminance value is changed by operating the cross key 19 during the adjustable period during the fluctuation effect, the backlight of the image display device and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10) are used. The luminance of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74) is changed to a luminance depending on (corresponding to) the changed luminance value.

  Therefore, when the player changes the luminance value during the fluctuation effect, the luminance of the backlight of the image display device or the lamp (LED) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74) is immediately changed. , It is possible to immediately satisfy the player's request, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, when the cross key 19 is operated during the adjustment possible period during the fluctuation effect, a period during which the volume can be adjusted (during the volume adjustment) and a period during which the brightness can be adjusted (during the brightness adjustment). Since the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value are displayed, it is possible to set a desired volume value and a luminance value while checking the volume value and the luminance value. It is possible to do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a period in which adjustment is not possible during execution of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 during the period in which adjustment is possible, a notification image OG of the displayed volume value or Since the notification image KG of the luminance value is not displayed, it is possible to make a player or a game clerk recognize (notify) that the volume adjustment and the luminance adjustment cannot be performed. Note that the notification image OG of the sound volume value and the notification image KG of the brightness value may not be displayed during the adjustment possible period during the fluctuation effect. In this way, the visual effect image of the variable effect is not hindered by the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is performed during the period during which the adjustment is possible during the fluctuation effect, the sound output device 9 does not output the volume notification sound. It is possible to prevent the effect sound of the fluctuating effect from being hindered, thereby reducing the interest in the game.

  If the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is performed during the adjustable period and the volume adjustment is disabled during the output of the volume notification sound from the audio output device 9, the volume adjustment is disabled. The output of the notification sound may be stopped (finished) in the middle or switched to a non-audible sound with a volume of 0%.

  Here, also in the case where the volume value or the brightness value is changed by operating the cross key 19 during the adjustment possible period during the jackpot game in which the effect sound is output from the audio output device 9 in the same manner as during the fluctuation effect. Let me explain.

  When the cross key 19 is operated during the jackpot game and the volume value is changed, the effect sound of the jackpot game output from the audio output device 9 also has a volume dependent (corresponding) to the changed volume value, When the brightness value is changed, the brightness of the backlight of the image display device and the lamp (LED) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) also depend on the changed brightness value (corresponding to ).

  Further, when the volume value or the brightness value is changed, the notification image of the volume value or the notification image of the brightness value displayed on the image display device is changed (updated) to an image corresponding to the changed volume value or the brightness value. However, since the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the changed volume value, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  More specifically, when the cross key 19 is operated and the volume value is changed during the opening of the jackpot game, the effect sound during the opening outputted from the audio output device 9 is also changed to the initial volume value. When the sound volume is dependent on (corresponding to) the value and the luminance value is changed, the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) also emit light. The brightness depends on (corresponds to) the brightness value changed to the initial value.

  Even in this case, the image display device displays the notification image OG of the sound volume value and the notification image KG of the brightness value corresponding to the changed sound volume value and the brightness value. Can be grasped, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the changed volume value.

  Further, when the cross key 19 is operated during the round of the jackpot game and the volume value is changed, the effect sound during the round output from the audio output device 9 also has the volume value changed to the initial value of the volume. When the brightness level is changed (corresponding) and the brightness value is changed, the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) also have an initial brightness. The luminance becomes (depends on) the luminance value changed to the value.

  Even in this case, the image display device displays the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value corresponding to the volume value and the luminance value after the change. Can be grasped, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the changed volume value.

  When the cross key 19 is operated during the interval of the jackpot game and the volume value is changed, the effect sound during the interval output from the audio output device 9 is also changed to the volume value changed to the initial value of the volume. When the brightness level is changed (corresponding) and the brightness value is changed, the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) also have an initial brightness. The luminance becomes (depends on) the luminance value changed to the value.

  Even in this case, the image display apparatus displays the notification image OG of the sound volume value and the notification image KG of the brightness value corresponding to the changed sound volume value and brightness value. Can be grasped, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the changed volume value.

  In addition, when the cross key 19 is operated during the ending of the jackpot game and the volume value is changed, the ending production sound output from the audio output device 9 also has the volume value changed to the initial value of the volume. When the brightness level is changed (corresponding) and the brightness value is changed, the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) also have an initial brightness. The luminance becomes (depends on) the luminance value changed to the value.

  Even in this case, the image display device displays the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value corresponding to the volume value and the luminance value after the change. Can be grasped, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the changed volume value. Note that the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value may not be displayed during the adjustment possible period during the jackpot game. In this way, the visual notification image of the big hit game is not hindered by the notification image OG of the volume value and the notification image KG of the luminance value.

(Specific example of the case where the adjustment mode is changed during the variable production in which the pseudo continuous production is performed)
A specific example in which the adjustment mode is changed during the variable effect in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126.

  Specifically, FIG. 125 is a timing chart in the case where the adjustment mode is changed during the variable production in which the pseudo continuous production is executed. FIG. 126 (a) shows the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T1 in FIG. 126 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T3 in FIG. 125, and FIG. 126 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG. 125. FIG. 126 (d) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T8 in FIG. 125, and FIG. 126 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine at the timing of T10 in FIG. 125.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 125, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, and information (mode 3) of the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “2” and reference information ( Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 2, brightness adjustment: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 3) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “2 (volume 40%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “3 (luminance 80%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this point, the customer waiting effect is on standby, and the operation period of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is valid.

  At this time, the image display device in which the backlight emits light at the luminance of 80% displays a screen in which the customer is waiting for the presentation effect, and a guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and a guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are displayed at the bottom of the screen. , The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled are in a state of emitting light.

  At the timing of T1 in FIG. 125, when the first starting port detection switch 45a is turned on and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variable display of the special symbol, the image display device displays the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. The accompanying variable effect is started, and the process shifts during the acceleration fluctuation of the effect symbol, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the effect sound of the variable effect at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “2”. In addition, the transition of the effect symbol during the acceleration fluctuation causes the non-adjustable period, and the valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid ends.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG displayed at the bottom of the screen are not displayed, and the effect is produced. The symbol 70a starts the variable display in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 125, when the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a is accelerated during the fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a, the effect is shifted to the high speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a in which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed. The adjustable period is the effective period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is effective.

  At this time, since the fluctuation effect is being performed, the guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and the guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are not displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but the operation is effective. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are emitting light.

  When the right button detection sensor of the cross key detection switch 19a is turned on and the operation of the right button is detected at the timing of T3 in FIG. 125, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are disabled and the volume can be adjusted (volume). Adjustment).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), a notification image OG of a volume value indicating the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation is invalidated. The light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the four-way controller 19 is stopped, and the light emission of the left and right buttons of the four-way controller 19 whose operation is enabled is continued.

  At the timing of T4 in FIG. 125, when the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a at which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed ends, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a becomes low-speed and then temporarily stops, and the low-speed fluctuation & temporary change of the effect symbol 70a. The operation shifts to the stop state, and accordingly, the adjustment is disabled, and the effective period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is ended.

  At this time, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) temporarily stops after the variation speed of the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a becomes low and the type of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized, and thereafter, Temporarily stop after the fluctuation speed becomes low in the order of right symbol and middle symbol. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 125, when the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a becomes low and the temporary stop of the effect symbol temporarily stopped after the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a ends, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a accelerates the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a. Migrate inside. Further, a period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 is invalid continues.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the left symbol and the right symbol of the effect symbol 70a are temporarily stopped at a symbol that does not form a reach state, and the middle symbol is The pseudo-sequence symbol (“one more time” symbol) indicating that the pseudo-sequence effect is to be executed is temporarily stopped, and the effect symbol 70a starts changing display again in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remain off.

  At the timing of T6 in FIG. 125, when the effect symbol 70a changes during the acceleration fluctuation of the effect symbol in which the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a accelerates, the process shifts to the effect symbol 70a during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a in which the fluctuation speed is constant. However, since the pseudo continuous production is being performed, the adjustment cannot be performed, and the period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 is invalid continues.

  At this time, since the variable effect is being performed, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are not displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the adjustment is not possible. Therefore, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are kept off.

  Although the right button of the cross key 19 is operated at the timing of T7 in FIG. 125, the operation of the right button of the cross key 19 is invalid because the adjustment is currently impossible, and the volume value is changed. Never.

  At this time, the notification image of the volume value is not displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops on the active line. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  When the changeover switch 22 is operated and the switch position (scale) is changed to “3” at the timing of T8 in FIG. 125, information on the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “3” is stored in the general RAM 144 (mode 4). , Reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 3, brightness adjustment availability: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness The initial value 5) and the setting of the power saving mode (OFF of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to "3 (volume 60%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (changed) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the variable effect at a volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the changed volume value “3”. However, the sound effect of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 4) is not output from the audio output device 9 because the fluctuation effect is being performed.

  At this time, since the current change in the volume value and the brightness value is due to the change in the adjustment mode, a notification image of the volume value and a notification image of the brightness value are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Instead, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a (during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol) is continued. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  At the timing of T9 in FIG. 125, when the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a at which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed ends, the process shifts to the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a where the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a becomes low. At the timing, only the middle symbol out of the effect symbols 70a shifts during the reach fluctuation in which the fluctuation display is continued.

  Further, at the timing of T9, when the last operation of the changeover switch 22 is completed and the switch position (scale) is changed to “7”, the general RAM 144 stores information of the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “7” ( Mode 8), reference information (volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 4, brightness adjustment availability: impossible (fixed) brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5) , The initial value of the luminance 5), and the setting of the power saving mode (ON of the power saving mode) are set.

  Then, the volume value is set (changed) to "4 (volume 80%)" which is the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set (maintained) to "5 (luminance 100%)" which is the initial value of the luminance. Then, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the variable effect at a volume of 80% depending on (corresponding to) the changed volume value “4”. However, the sound output device 9 does not output the notification sound of the adjustment mode corresponding to the changed adjustment mode (mode 8) because the fluctuation effect is being performed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 126 (e), since the change in the current volume value and luminance value is due to the change in the adjustment mode, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a notification image of the volume value. And the notification image of the brightness value is not displayed, and the left symbol and the right symbol of the effect symbol 70a are temporarily stopped at the same symbol “3” on the activated line, and the middle symbol changes at a low speed. Become. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol during the fluctuation effect, the pseudo-sequence effect (reach-flicking effect) is being performed, and the volume value and the luminance value cannot be adjusted. Period.

  Therefore, the volume effect and the brightness adjustment are not performed during the period in which the effect of the variable effect is high and the player wants to see the effect, and the effect of the variable effect is extremely reduced and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the volume value and the brightness value cannot be adjusted (changed) using the cross key 19 during the period in which the adjustment is not possible during the fluctuation effect. Values and brightness values can be changed.

  Therefore, when it is necessary to change the volume value or the luminance value during the fluctuation effect due to the convenience of the game store, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being unable to change the volume value or the brightness value, and to be kind to the game store. It is possible to provide a simple adjustment function.

◇ (Specific example when magnetic anomaly and dish full occur after big hit game)
With reference to FIGS. 127 and 128, a specific example in which a magnetic abnormality and a dish full occur after the jackpot game will be described.

  Specifically, FIG. 127 is a timing chart in the case where a magnetic abnormality and a dish full occur after the jackpot game, and FIG. 128 (a) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T1 in FIG. 127. 128 (b) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T3 in FIG. 127, and FIG. 128 (c) shows an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 127. FIG. 128D is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG. 127, and FIG. 128E is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T6 in FIG.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 127, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “3”, and information (mode 4) and reference information (adjustment mode) corresponding to the switch position “3” are stored in the general RAM 144. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 3, brightness adjustment: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 5) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “3 (volume 60%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this point, a jackpot game (ending) is being performed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a production sound corresponding to the volume value “3” at a volume of 60% corresponding to the volume value “3”. In addition, the valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 for the operation of volume adjustment and the operation of luminance adjustment is valid.

  At this time, since the ending is in progress, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) does not display the volume value notification image or the brightness value notification image, but displays the ending effect image. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled are in a state of emitting light.

  At the timing of T1 in FIG. 127, when the big hit game ends and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold memory, the image display device accompanies the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. The shift effect is started, and the process shifts during the acceleration change of the effect symbol.

  Further, at this timing, when the lower tray 12 is detected by the full detection switch 32a to be full of game balls, the process proceeds to the notification of the full tray and the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is output. The volume is reduced to 15%, which is 1/4 of the volume value "3", and the notification sound of the dish is output at a volume of 60% (a volume that is more conspicuous than the production sound) depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "3". You. Further, with the transition to the notification of the full tray, the adjustment is disabled, and the effective period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is effective ends.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the effect symbol 70a starts to fluctuate in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and is displayed in the lower center of the screen. A notification image (icon image G9) indicating that the plate is full is displayed. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 127, when the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a accelerates during the fluctuation of the effect symbol, the effect shifts to the high speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a in which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed. Normally, when the adjustment is possible, the information indicating that the plate is full is now being issued, so that the adjustment impossible period is continued, and the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 is also disabled.

  At this time, since the adjustment cannot be performed, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are not displayed at the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and the plate is displayed at the center of the lower portion of the screen. The display of the full notification image (icon image G9) is continued. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 53a detects abnormal magnetism at the timing of T3 in FIG. 127, the process proceeds during the notification of the magnetic abnormality and the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 corresponds to the volume value "0". When the volume becomes 0%, the notification sound of magnetic anomaly depends on (corresponds to) the fixed volume value (volume value “6”) instead of the notification sound of the plate full, and the volume becomes 120% (production sound or fullness of the plate). It is output at a volume that is more noticeable than the notification sound. Further, with the transition to the notification of the magnetic abnormality, the period during which the adjustment is disabled continues, and the operation of the cross key 19 is also disabled.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the effect pattern 70a continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the screen on the left side of the notification image (icon image G9) of the full plate. A notification image (icon image G7) of the magnetic abnormality is displayed on the lower left side. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  At the timing of T4 in FIG. 127, when the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a at which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed ends, the process shifts to the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a where the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a is low, but still. Since the notification of the magnetic abnormality is being performed, the output of the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality from the audio output device 9 is continued, and the state in which the operation of the cross key 19 is invalid continues. Here, during the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol, a reach-inducing period in which a reach-inducing effect for inducing whether or not a reach state occurs is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (c), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the variation speed of the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a becomes low, and the type of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized, and the lower portion of the screen can be recognized. , The display of the notification image of the magnetic abnormality (icon image G7) and the notification image of the full tray (icon image G9) are continued. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 127, when the notification period of the magnetic abnormality ends, the output of the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality output from the audio output device 9 ends. Since it is detected that the plate is full, the process shifts to the notification of the plate full, and the sound output device 9 outputs the notification sound of the plate full with the volume of 60% and the production sound of the fluctuation effect with the volume of 15%. Output resumes. The state in which the operation of the cross key 19 is invalid continues.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (d), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is in a state in which the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the right symbol is in a low-speed state to perform the reach-pumping effect. At the center of the lower part of the screen, the notification image of the magnetic abnormality (icon image G7) is not displayed, while the notification image of the full tray (icon image G9) is continuously displayed. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  At the timing of T6 in FIG. 127, when the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is no longer full of game balls, the notification of the fullness of the tray is finished, and the notification of the magnetic abnormality output from the audio output device 9 is ended. When the output of the sound is completed, the effect sound of the variable effect is output at a volume of 60% corresponding to the volume value “3”. The state in which the operation of the cross key 19 is invalid continues.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (e), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a state in which the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the right symbol is in a state where the reach symbol is performed at a low speed is performed. The notification image (icon image G9) indicating that the dish is full displayed at the center of the lower portion of the screen is not displayed. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  At the timing of T7 in FIG. 127, when the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol for which the reach-pumping effect has been executed ends, only the middle symbol of the effect symbol 70a shifts to the reach fluctuation in which the fluctuation display is continued.

  At this time, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the left symbol and the right symbol of the effect symbol 70a are temporarily stopped at the same symbol “3” on the active line, and the middle symbol changes at a low speed. Become. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a normal event (dish full, open frame, etc.) occurs during the fluctuation effect, the effect sound of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is changed to the current volume value. A sound is output at a volume of 1/4 (a volume determined depending on the current volume value), and a notification sound of a normal event output from the audio output device 9 (a notification sound of a full tray, a notification sound of a frame opening, etc.) ) Is output at a volume that depends on (corresponds to) the current volume value.

  Therefore, the notification sound of the normal event can be emphasized (conspicuous) more than the effect sound of the variable effect, and the player or the game clerk can accurately recognize that the normal event has occurred. .

  Note that it is sufficient that the notification sound of the normal event can be emphasized (conspicuous) rather than the fluctuating effect sound, and the fluctuating effect sound output from the audio output device 9 depends on the current volume value (correspondence). Alternatively, the notification sound of the normal event output from the audio output device 9 may be output at a volume dependent (corresponding to) a volume value larger than the current volume value.

  Also, instead of outputting the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of １ ／ of the current volume value, the volume value is one or more smaller than the current volume value (for example, the current volume value). When the volume value is “5”, the effect sound of the variable effect is output at a volume that depends (corresponds) to “4” or “3”, and the notification sound of the normal event depends on the current volume value ( The corresponding volume may be output.

  If the adjustment mode is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22 while outputting the notification sound of the normal event, the notification sound of the normal event corresponds to the adjustment mode after the change. The sound is output at a volume that depends on (corresponds to) the set volume value, and the effect sound of the fluctuating effect is one-fourth of the volume value set according to the changed adjustment mode, or the set volume value The sound is output at a sound volume that is dependent on (corresponds to) a sound volume value smaller than.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an important event (magnetic anomaly, illegal winning, etc.) occurs during the fluctuation effect, the effect sound of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 depends on the volume value 0 (corresponding to ) Is output at a sound volume of 0% (non-audible sound), and a notification sound of an important event (a notification sound of a magnetic anomaly, a notification sound of an illegal winning) output from the audio output device 9 is fixed at a fixed volume value (a volume value “ 6 ") is output at a sound volume of 120% (dependent).

  Therefore, it becomes possible to emphasize (conspicuously) output the notification sound of an important event, and to make it possible for a game clerk to accurately recognize that an important event has occurred.

  Although the fixed volume value is set to the maximum volume value “6” that cannot be set by the operation of the player using the cross key 19, the fixed volume value is set by the operation of the player using the cross key 19. Is set to the maximum volume value (volume value “5”, etc.) that can be set by the maximum sound volume of the notification sound of the normal event, the notification sound of the volume, and the production sound output from the audio output device 9 of the gaming machine 1. A notification sound of an important event may be output at a certain volume of 100%.

  Further, the effect sound of the fluctuation effect during the notification of the important event may not be set to the volume of 0%, but may be reduced to a volume dependent on (corresponding to) a volume value smaller than the current volume value. When the normal event and the normal event overlap, the alarm sound of the normal event may be output at a volume of 0% while the alarm sound of the important event is output.

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the end of the notification of the normal event or the important event, the effect of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is set to a volume dependent (corresponding) to the current volume value. It is returning.

  Therefore, the volume of the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 due to the occurrence of a normal event or an important event does not remain reduced, thereby preventing the interest of the game from being reduced. Becomes possible.

  When the adjustment mode is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22 while outputting the notification sound of the important event, the important sound output is dependent on (corresponds to) a fixed volume value. When the output of the notification sound of an important event is terminated and the output of the notification sound of a normal event is restarted although the volume of the notification sound of an important event does not change, it is set according to the adjusted adjustment mode after the change. If the notification sound of the normal event is output at a volume that depends on (corresponds to) the changed volume value, and the output at the audible volume of the fluctuating effect is resumed, the The effect sound of the fluctuating effect is output at a volume that depends (corresponds) to 1/4 of the set volume value or a volume value smaller than the set volume value.

  Further, when the effect sound of the fluctuating effect outputted from the audio output device 9 is reduced more than before due to the occurrence of a normal event or an important event, or when the notification of the normal event or the important event ends, the current volume is changed. In the case where the sound volume is restored so that the sound volume depends on (corresponds to) the value, the sound may be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the notification of a normal event or an important event, since the adjustment possible period in which the volume value and the brightness value can be adjusted is not set, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment The guide image KAG, the volume value notification image OG, the brightness value notification image KG, and the like are not displayed, and the volume value and brightness value cannot be changed using the cross key 19.

  Therefore, by displaying the guidance image OAG for volume adjustment, the guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment, the notification image OG for the volume value, the notification image KG for the luminance value, and the like, the notification image of the occurrence event displayed on the image display device is displayed. It is possible to avoid inconvenience in which the visual recognition is hindered and the game store clerk cannot grasp the occurrence of the event or the type of the event.

  During notification of a normal event or an important event, the brightness of the backlight of the image display device is set to a maximum brightness of 100%, and depends on the current brightness value based on the end of the notification of the normal event or the important event ( The corresponding brightness may be restored.

  This makes it easier to visually recognize the notification image of the occurrence event displayed on the image display device, and makes it easier for the game clerk to grasp the occurrence of the event and the type of the event.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, when the changeover switch 22 is operated and the adjustment mode is changed (switched) when a normal event occurs, the volume of the notification sound of the normal event is changed. Is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume dependent on (corresponding to) the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, and when the adjustment mode is changed (switched) by operating the changeover switch 22 when an important event occurs. The volume of the notification sound of an important event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume that depends (corresponds) to a fixed volume value.

  Therefore, it is possible to change the notification sound of the normal event according to the change of the adjustment mode, while avoiding the inconvenience that the game clerk does not notice the occurrence of the important event.

  Although not shown, even when a magnetic abnormality and a dish full occur during the jackpot game, the sound of the jackpot game output from the audio output device 9 is output from the sound output device 9 during the notification of the dish full, Since the volume value becomes 1/4 or smaller than the current volume value, and the sound of the jackpot game output from the audio output device 9 becomes 0% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value 0 during the notification of the magnetic abnormality. Thus, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

◇ (Specific example when magnetic anomaly and dish full occur during fluctuating performance)
With reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, a description will be given of a specific example of a case where a magnetic abnormality and a dish full occur during a fluctuation effect in the output volume modification example of the audio control unit 148 shown in FIG.

  129 is a timing chart in the case where a magnetic abnormality and a dish full occur during the fluctuation effect, and FIG. 130 (a) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T1 in FIG. FIG. 130 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T3 in FIG. 129, FIG. 130 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 129, and FIG. 129 is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG. 129, and FIG. 130 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T6 in FIG. 129.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 129, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “3”, and information of the adjustment mode (mode 4) and reference information (mode 4) corresponding to the switch position “3” are stored in the general RAM 144. Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 3, brightness adjustment: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 5) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “3 (volume 60%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this point, a jackpot game (ending) is being performed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a production sound corresponding to the volume value “3” at a volume of 60% corresponding to the volume value “3”. In addition, the valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 for the operation of volume adjustment and the operation of luminance adjustment is valid.

  At this time, since the ending is in progress, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) does not display the volume value notification image or the brightness value notification image, but displays the ending effect image. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is enabled are in a state of emitting light.

  At the timing of T1 in FIG. 129, when the big hit game ends and the first special symbol display unit 60 starts the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold storage, the image display device accompanies the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. The shift effect is started, and the process shifts during the acceleration change of the effect symbol.

  Further, at this timing, when the lower tray 12 is detected by the full detection switch 32a to be full of game balls, the process proceeds to the notification of the full tray and the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is output. Maintains a sound volume of 60%, which depends on (corresponds to) the sound volume value "3", and outputs a notification sound when the tray is full at a volume of 48%, which is 4/5 of the sound volume value "3" (a volume less noticeable than the production sound) Is done. Further, with the transition to the notification of the full tray, the adjustment is disabled, and the effective period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is effective ends.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the effect symbol 70a starts to fluctuate in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and is displayed in the lower center of the screen. A notification image (icon image G9) indicating that the plate is full is displayed. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 129, when the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a is accelerated and the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a ends, the effect shifts to the high speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a where the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed. Normally, when the adjustment is possible, the information indicating that the plate is full is now being issued, so that the adjustment impossible period is continued, and the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 is also disabled.

  At this time, since the adjustment cannot be performed, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are not displayed at the lower portion of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and the plate is displayed at the center of the lower portion of the screen. The display of the full notification image (icon image G9) is continued. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 53a detects abnormal magnetism at the timing of T3 in FIG. 129, the process proceeds to the notification of the magnetic abnormality and the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 becomes the volume value "0". When the volume becomes 0%, the notification sound of the magnetic anomaly depends on (corresponds to) a fixed volume value (volume value "6") instead of the notification sound of the plate full, and the volume 120% (the notification of the production sound and the plate full) Output at a volume that is more noticeable than the sound). Further, with the transition to the notification of the magnetic abnormality, the period during which the adjustment is disabled continues, and the operation of the cross key 19 is also disabled.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the effect pattern 70a continues to fluctuate at high speed, and a screen on the left side of the notification image (icon image G9) of the full plate. A notification image (icon image G7) of the magnetic abnormality is displayed on the lower left side. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  At the timing of T4 in FIG. 129, when the effect of the effect symbol 70a during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol at which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed ends, the process shifts to the effect symbol 70a during the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol where the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a becomes low. Since the notification of the magnetic abnormality is being performed, the output of the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality from the audio output device 9 is continued, and the state in which the operation of the cross key 19 is invalid continues. Note that, during the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol, a reach-inducing period for inducing whether or not the reach state occurs occurs.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the fluctuation speed of the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a becomes low, and the type of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized, and the lower portion of the screen can be recognized. , The display of the notification image of the magnetic abnormality (icon image G7) and the notification image of the full tray (icon image G9) are continued. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  At the timing of T5 in FIG. 129, when the notification period of the magnetic abnormality ends, the output of the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality output from the audio output device 9 ends. Since it is detected that the plate is full, the process shifts to the notification of the plate full, and the sound output device 9 outputs the notification sound of the plate full with the volume of 48% and the sound of the fluctuation effect with the volume of 60%. Output resumes. The state in which the operation of the cross key 19 is invalid continues.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 130 (d), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a state is reached in which the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the right symbol is at a low speed in a state where the reach design is performed. At the center of the lower part of the screen, the notification image of the magnetic abnormality (icon image G7) is not displayed, while the notification image of the full tray (icon image G9) is continuously displayed. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  At timing T6 in FIG. 129, when the full tray detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is no longer full of game balls, the notification of the tray full is terminated, and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality output from the audio output device 9 is output. Is finished, and the output of the effect sound of the fluctuation effect with the volume of 60% is continued. The state in which the operation of the cross key 19 is invalid continues.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 130 (e), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a state in which the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the right symbol is in a low speed state in which the reach design is performed. The notification image (icon image G9) indicating that the dish is full displayed at the center of the lower portion of the screen is not displayed. In addition, the state in which the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled remains off.

  At the timing of T7 in FIG. 129, when the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol in which the reach-pumping effect has been executed ends, only the middle symbol of the effect symbol 70a shifts to the reach fluctuation in which the fluctuation display is continued.

  At this time, in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the left symbol and the right symbol of the effect symbol 70a are temporarily stopped at the same symbol “3” on the active line, and the middle symbol changes at a low speed. Become. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a normal event (dish full, open frame, etc.) occurs during the fluctuation effect, the effect sound of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is changed to the current volume value. The sound is output at a dependent (corresponding) volume, and the notification sound of a normal event output from the audio output device 9 (a notification sound of a full tray, a notification sound of a frame opening, etc.) is output at a volume of 4/5 of the current volume value ( The output is performed at a volume determined depending on the current volume value.

  Therefore, it is possible to emphasize (conspicuous) the sound effect of the fluctuation effect more than the notification sound of the normal event, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the fluctuation effect from being extremely reduced by the notification sound of the normal event. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  It is sufficient that the effect sound of the fluctuation effect can be emphasized (conspicuous) rather than the notification sound of the normal event, and the notification sound of the normal event output from the audio output device 9 has a volume lower than the current volume value. The sound may be output at a volume that depends on (corresponds to) the value.

  In addition, the notification sound of the normal event output from the audio output device 9 is not output at a volume of 4/5 of the current volume value, but at least one or several volume values smaller than the current volume value (for example, When the volume value of “5” is “5”, a notification sound of a normal event is output at a volume that depends on (corresponds to) “4” or “3”, and the effect sound of the variable effect depends on the current volume value (Corresponding) You may make it output with the corresponding volume.

  When the adjustment mode is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22 while outputting the notification sound of the normal event, the effect sound of the variable effect is set in accordance with the adjusted mode after the change. Is output at a volume that depends on (corresponds to) the set volume value, and the notification sound of the normal event is a volume of 80% of the volume value set in accordance with the changed adjustment mode, or Is also output at a volume that depends (corresponds) to a small volume value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an important event (magnetic anomaly, illegal winning, etc.) occurs during the fluctuation effect, the effect sound of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 depends on the volume value 0 (corresponding to ) Is output at a sound volume of 0% (non-audible sound), and a notification sound of an important event (a notification sound of a magnetic anomaly, a notification sound of an illegal winning) output from the audio output device 9 is fixed at a fixed volume value (a volume value “ 6 ") is output at a sound volume of 120% (dependent).

  Therefore, it becomes possible to emphasize (conspicuously) output the notification sound corresponding to the important event, and to make it possible for the game clerk to accurately recognize that the important event has occurred.

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the end of the notification of the important event, the effect of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 is returned so as to have a volume dependent (corresponding) to the current volume value. .

  Therefore, the volume of the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 due to the occurrence of an important event does not remain reduced, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced. .

  When the adjustment mode is changed by changing the switch position of the changeover switch 22 while outputting the notification sound of the important event, the important sound output is dependent on (corresponds to) a fixed volume value. When the output of the notification sound of an important event is terminated and the output of the notification sound of a normal event is restarted although the volume of the notification sound of an important event does not change, it is set according to the adjusted adjustment mode after the change. A notification sound of a normal event is output at a volume that depends (corresponds) to 4/5 of the set volume value or a volume value smaller than the set volume value. When the output is restarted, the effect sound of the variable effect is output at a volume dependent (corresponding) to the volume value set corresponding to the changed adjustment mode.

  In addition, depending on the occurrence of an important event, the volume of the effect sound of the variable effect output from the audio output device 9 may be lower than before, or depending on the end of the notification of the important event, depending on the current volume value (correspondence). When the sound volume is restored so as to be a sound volume to be performed, the sound may be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the notification of a normal event or an important event, since the adjustment possible period in which the volume value and the brightness value can be adjusted is not set, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment The guide image KAG, the volume value notification image OG, the brightness value notification image KG, and the like are not displayed, and the volume value and brightness value cannot be changed using the cross key 19.

  Therefore, by displaying the guidance image OAG for volume adjustment, the guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment, the notification image OG for the volume value, the notification image KG for the luminance value, and the like, the notification image of the occurrence event displayed on the image display device is displayed. It is possible to avoid inconvenience in which the visual recognition is hindered and the game store clerk cannot grasp the occurrence of the event or the type of the event.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, when the changeover switch 22 is operated and the adjustment mode is changed (switched) when a normal event occurs, the volume of the notification sound of the normal event is changed. Is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume dependent on (corresponding to) the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, and when the adjustment mode is changed (switched) by operating the changeover switch 22 when an important event occurs. The volume of the notification sound of an important event is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume of 120% depending on (corresponding to) a fixed volume value (volume value “6”).

  Therefore, it is possible to change the notification sound of the normal event according to the change of the adjustment mode, while avoiding the inconvenience that the game clerk does not notice the occurrence of the important event.

  Although not shown, even when a magnetic abnormality and a dish full occur during the jackpot game, the dish full notification sound output from the audio output device 9 is output from the audio output device 9 while the dish full is informed. Since the volume value is 4/5 or smaller than the current volume value, the sound of the jackpot game output from the audio output device 9 becomes 0% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value 0 during the notification of the magnetic abnormality. Thus, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

◇ (Specific example when the notification sound that determines the jackpot during the fluctuation effect is output)
With reference to FIG. 131 and FIG. 132, a specific example in which a notification sound that becomes a jackpot determination during a fluctuation effect is output will be described.

  Specifically, FIG. 131 is a timing chart in the case where a notification sound that determines a jackpot is output during the fluctuation effect, and FIG. 132 (a) illustrates an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T0 in FIG. FIG. 132 (b) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T1 in FIG. 131, and FIG. 132 (c) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T3 in FIG. 132 (d) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 131, and FIG. 132 (e) is an operation example of the gaming machine 1 at the timing of T5 in FIG.

  At the timing of T0 in FIG. 131, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “3”, and the general RAM 144 stores information (adjustment mode) corresponding to the switch position “3” (mode 4) and reference information (mode 4). Volume adjustment possibility: possible (variable), volume value adjustment range 1 to 5, volume initial value 3, brightness adjustment: possible (variable), brightness value adjustment range 1 to 5, brightness initial value 5) , Power saving mode setting (power saving mode OFF) is set.

  Further, the volume value is set to “3 (volume 60%)” which is the same as the initial value of the volume, and the luminance value is set to “5 (luminance 100%)” which is the same as the initial value of the luminance. At this time, it is in the customer waiting state (waiting for the customer waiting effect), and the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is an effective period.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), a guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and a guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the operation becomes effective. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are emitting light.

  At the timing of T1 in FIG. 131, when the first starting port detection switch 45a is turned on and the first special symbol display unit 60 starts to display the variable display of the special symbol, the image display device displays the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. The accompanying variable effect is started, and the process shifts during the acceleration fluctuation of the effect symbol, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the effect sound of the variable effect at a sound volume of 60% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3”. In addition, the transition of the effect symbol during the acceleration fluctuation causes the non-adjustable period, and the valid period in which the operation of the cross key 19 is valid ends.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG displayed at the bottom of the screen are not displayed, and the effect is produced. The symbol 70a starts the variable display in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  At the timing of T2 in FIG. 131, when the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a is accelerated during the fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a, the effect shifts to the high speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a in which the effect symbol 70a has a constant fluctuation speed. The adjustable period is the effective period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is effective.

  At this time, since the fluctuation effect is being performed, the guidance image OAG for volume adjustment and the guidance image KAG for luminance adjustment are not displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but the operation is effective. The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are emitting light.

  At the timing of T3 in FIG. 131, when the effect of the effect symbol 70a during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol at which the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a is constant ends, the process shifts to during the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a at which the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a becomes low. Accordingly, the adjustment is disabled, and the valid period in which the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 for the volume adjustment operation and the brightness adjustment operation is ended. Here, during the low-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol, a reach-inducing period in which a reach-inducing effect for inducing whether or not a reach state occurs is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the variation speed of the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a is low, and the type of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized. Also, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 whose operation has been invalidated are turned off.

  At the timing of T4 in FIG. 131, when the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol 70a is low during the low speed fluctuation of the effect symbol, only the middle symbol in the effect symbol 70a is shifted to the reach fluctuation in which the fluctuation display is continued, and the sound is changed. The one-shot notification sound is output from the output device 9 at a volume of 120% depending on (corresponding to) a fixed volume value (volume value “6”).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 132 (d), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) does not display the notification image of the volume value or the notification image of the luminance value, and the left symbol of the effect symbol 70a. And the right symbol temporarily stop at the same symbol "3" on the activated line, and the middle symbol changes to a low speed. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  At the timing T5 in FIG. 131, the output of the one-shot notification sound output from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period ends.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 132 (e), in the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a state where it has reached the lower right corner of the screen with the reach state formed, and the center of the screen is displayed. SP reach effect is displayed as the center. Further, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 in which the operation is disabled continue to be turned off.

  Here, the one-shot notification sound has been described. However, even in the case of outputting the promotion notification sound, the continuation notification sound, the passing notification sound, and the right-hand notification sound, the sound output device 9 may be used. , Output at a sound volume of 120% depending on (corresponding to) a fixed volume value (volume value “6”).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the output condition of the notification sound such as the one-shot notification sound (including the notification sound of the promotion, the notification sound of the continuation, the notification sound of the passing, and the notification sound of the right-handed sound) is established during the fluctuation effect. In this case, the sound output device 9 outputs a notification sound such as a single notification sound at a sound volume of 120% depending on (corresponding to) a fixed volume value (volume value “6”).

  Therefore, no matter what value the volume value is set to, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the notification sound such as the one-shot notification sound is overwritten by the effect sound of the variable effect and cannot be heard by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, even if the output condition of the notification sound such as the one-shot notification sound (including the notification sound of the promotion, the notification sound of the continuation, the notification sound of the passage, and the notification sound of the right-handed sound) is established during the fluctuation effect, When the notification sound of an important event is output from the audio output device 9, the notification sound is output at a sound volume of 120% depending on (corresponding to) a fixed volume value (volume value “6”), and the notification sound is output. The output may be performed at a volume that depends (corresponds) to a volume value (for example, volume value “5”) smaller than the fixed volume value (volume value “6”).

  In this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the notification sound of an important event is drowned out by a notification sound such as a one-shot notification sound so that a game clerk cannot hear it and does not notice the occurrence of the important event. it can.

(2nd Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  In the second embodiment, in relation to the first embodiment, a menu screen is displayed by operating the cross key 19, and an item of volume adjustment and an item of brightness adjustment are selected (via) via the menu screen. In that volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are performed. Therefore, the description of the same portions as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control unit in the second embodiment)
FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating the timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m in the second embodiment. In this flowchart, since the processing of steps E850 to E880 in the timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m shown in FIG. 46 is simply replaced with the operation receiving processing (step E875), the description of the other steps will be omitted.

(Operation accepting process of the effect control unit in the second embodiment)
It is a flow chart which shows operation acceptance processing of production control part 130m in a 2nd embodiment using Drawing 134 and Drawing 135.

  First, in step E875-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the third determination table shown in FIG. 136 and determines whether or not the current state is a period during which operation reception for enabling the menu screen to be displayed on the image display device is possible. Is determined, and if it is the period during which the operation can be accepted (step E875-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step E875-2. If it is not the period during which the operation can be accepted (step E8755-1: No), The process moves to Step E875-42. The third determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step E875-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”. If the third processing number is “0” (step E875) If the third process number is not “0” (step E875-2: No), the process proceeds to step E875-8. The “third processing number” is a processing number indicating the progress stage of the menu operation, and is reset to “0” in the initialization processing in step E20 described above.

  In step E875-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a command for guiding a menu operation in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a menu operation guide command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, a menu operation guide image is displayed on the image display device, and the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are caused to emit light. Is performed.

  In step E875-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a menu display operation has been performed. If a menu display operation has been performed (step E875-4: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E875-5. If there is no menu display operation (step E875-4: No), the current operation accepting process ends. The menu display operation here means that one of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the cross key 19 has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a. In addition to the operation of the cross key 19, the operation of the effect button 17 may be a menu display operation, or only the operation of the effect button 17 may be a menu display operation.

  In step E875-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a menu screen display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c according to whether volume adjustment is possible (possible or impossible) and whether luminance adjustment is possible (possible or impossible). Thereby, the display command of the menu screen is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the menu screen according to whether or not the volume adjustment is possible (possible or impossible) and whether or not the brightness adjustment is possible (possible or impossible) is performed on the image display device. Processing for displaying (menu image) is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 in step E875-6, and in step E875-7, stores the operation time stored in the sub RAM 130c. “1” is set to the process number of No. 3 and the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step E875-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “1”. If the third processing number is “1” (step E875) To (−8: Yes), the process proceeds to step E875-9. If the third process number is not “1” (step E875-8: No), the process proceeds to step E875-24.

  In step E875-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there has been a volume adjustment start operation. If there has been a volume adjustment start operation (step E875-9: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E875-10. If the operation has not been started (No in step E875-9), the process proceeds to step E875-13. Here, the operation of starting the volume adjustment means that the item of the volume adjustment is selected on the menu screen displayed on the image display device by operating the cross key 19 and the effect button 17.

  In Step E875-10, the sub CPU 130a sets a volume adjustment start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a volume adjustment start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for displaying a volume value notification image (volume adjustment screen) indicating the current volume value on the image display device is performed. Done.

  In step E875-11, the sub CPU 130a clears the operation interval monitoring time for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19, and in step E875-12, sets the third processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c to " "2" is set, and the current operation accepting process ends. Thus, the operation interval of the cross key 19 is not monitored during the volume adjustment.

  In step E875-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a luminance adjustment start operation has been performed. If the luminance adjustment start operation has been performed (step E875-13: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E875-14. If the operation has not been started (step E875-13: No), the process proceeds to step E875-17. Here, the operation of starting the brightness adjustment means that the item of the brightness adjustment is selected on the menu screen displayed on the image display device by operating the cross key 19 and the effect button 17.

  In Step E875-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a luminance adjustment start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the luminance adjustment start command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for displaying the luminance value notification image (the luminance adjustment screen) indicating the current luminance value on the image display device is performed. Done.

  In step E875-15, the sub CPU 130a clears the operation interval monitoring time for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19, and in step E875-16, sets the third processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c to " "3" is set, and the current operation accepting process ends. Thus, the operation interval of the cross key 19 is not monitored during the brightness adjustment.

  In step E875-17, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the operation interval monitoring time has elapsed. If the operation interval monitoring time has elapsed (step E875-17: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E875-20. The process moves to a step E875-18 if the monitoring time of the operation interval has not elapsed (step E875-17: No).

  In step E875-18, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a menu ending operation has been performed. If a menu ending operation has been performed (step E875-18: Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step E875-19. If no menu ending operation has been performed (step E875-18: No), the current operation accepting process ends. The terminating operation of the menu here means that the item of the end is selected on the menu screen displayed on the image display device by operating the cross key 19 and the effect button 17.

  In step E875-19, the sub CPU 130a clears the monitoring time of the operation interval, and in step E875-20, sets the menu screen end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, the end command of the menu screen is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for hiding the menu screen and displaying the normal screen in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a sets “0” to the third process number stored in the sub RAM 130c in step E875-21, and in step E875-22, determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting for a customer waiting effect. If it is determined that the customer waiting effect is waiting (step E875-22: Yes), the process proceeds to step E875-23, and if the customer waiting effect is not waiting (step E875-22: No), Then, the current operation receiving process ends.

  In Step E875-23, the sub CPU 130a sets a waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) for the customer waiting effect, and ends the current operation accepting process. As a result, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in the customer waiting process of step E860 is reset. In other words, the customer waiting effect is executed after a waiting time (60 seconds) for the customer waiting effect from the time when the menu is terminated in the operation accepting process.

  In step E875-24, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “2”. If the third processing number is “2” (step E875) To (−24: Yes), the process proceeds to step E875-25, and if the third process number is not “2” (step E875-24: No), the process proceeds to step E875-33.

  In step E875-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation of decreasing the volume has been performed. If an operation of decreasing the volume has been performed (step E875-25: Yes), the process proceeds to step E875-26. If the operation has not been performed to decrease the volume (step E875-25: No), the process proceeds to step E875-27. Note that the operation of decreasing the volume here means that the left button of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the left button has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.

  In Step E875-26, the sub CPU 130a sets a command for decreasing the volume in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current operation accepting process. As a result, a command for decreasing the volume is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and a process of reducing the volume value of the effect sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the audio output device 9 is performed.

  In step E875-27, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation for increasing the volume has been performed. If an operation for increasing the volume has been performed (step E875-27: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E875-28. If the operation has not been performed to increase the volume (step E875-27: No), the process proceeds to step E875-29.

  In Step E875-28, the sub CPU 130a sets a command for increasing the volume in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current operation accepting process. As a result, a command for increasing the volume is transmitted to the display control unit 140, and a process of increasing the volume value of the effect sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the audio output device 9 is performed.

  In step E875-29, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a return operation has been performed. If a return operation has been performed (step E875-29: Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step E875-30 and returns. If there is no operation (step E875-29: No), the current operation accepting process ends. The return operation here means that the return item is selected in the volume adjustment screen displayed on the image display device.

  In Step E875-30, the sub CPU 130a sets a menu screen display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the menu screen display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for displaying the menu screen (menu image) on the image display device is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a sets a monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) of the operation interval for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 in a step E875-31, and in a step E875-32, stores the operation time stored in the sub RAM 130c. “1” is set to the process number of No. 3 and the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step E875-33, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “3”. When the third processing number is “3” (step E875) If the third process number is not “3” (step E875-33: No), the process moves to step E875-34, and the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step E875-34, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation for lowering the luminance has been performed. If an operation for lowering the luminance has been performed (step E875-34: Yes), the sub CPU 130a proceeds to step E875-35. If the operation has not been performed to lower the luminance (step E875-34: No), the process proceeds to step E875-36. The operation of lowering the brightness here means that the lower button of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the lower button has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.

  In Step E875-35, the sub CPU 130a sets a command for lowering the luminance in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current operation accepting process. As a result, the luminance reduction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the luminance value of the lamp (LED) of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 is reduced. Is performed.

  In step E875-36, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an operation for increasing the luminance has been performed. If the operation for increasing the luminance has been performed (step E875-36: Yes), the process proceeds to step E875-37. If the operation has not been performed to increase the luminance (step E875-36: No), the process proceeds to step E875-38. Here, the operation of increasing the brightness here means that the upper button of the cross key 19 has been operated, that is, the operation of the upper button has been detected by the cross key detection switch 19a.

  In Step E875-37, the sub CPU 130a sets a command for increasing the luminance in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current operation accepting process. As a result, a command for increasing the brightness is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value of the lamp (LED) of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 is increased. Is performed.

  In step E875-38, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a return operation has been performed. If the return operation has been performed (step E875-38: Yes), the sub CPU 130a shifts the processing to step E875-39 and returns to step E875-39. If there is no operation (step E875-38: No), the current operation accepting process ends. The return operation here means that the return item is selected in the brightness adjustment screen displayed on the image display device.

  In step E875-39, the sub CPU 130a sets a menu screen display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the menu screen display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for displaying the menu screen (menu image) on the image display device is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a sets the operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 in step E875-40, and in step E875-41, stores the operation time stored in the sub RAM 130c. “1” is set to the process number of No. 3 and the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step E875-42, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c is “0”, and when the third processing number is not “0” (step E875-42). (42: No), the process proceeds to step E875-43, and if the third process number is “0” (step E875-42: Yes), the current operation accepting process is terminated.

  In Step E875-43, the sub CPU 130a sets the menu screen end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, the end command of the menu screen is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for hiding the menu screen and displaying the normal screen in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a clears the operation interval monitoring time in step E875-44, sets the third processing number stored in the sub RAM 130c to "0" in step E875-45, and executes the current operation reception processing. To end. As a result, the volume value of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the audio output device 9 and the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device and the lamp (LED) of various lighting devices cannot be immediately adjusted. State. That is, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment cannot be performed unless the item of the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is selected after the menu screen is displayed.

(Third determination table in the second embodiment)
FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating a third determination table in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 136, the third determination table is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not it is a period during which a menu operation can be performed, and is an effect state (status) controlled by the effect control unit 130m. ) Is associated with the availability (determination result) of a menu operation corresponding to the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.

  A first feature of the third determination table in the second embodiment is that menu operations cannot be performed during notification of various occurrence events (power-on notification, power-recovery notification, and various error notifications). By doing so, it is possible to avoid such inconvenience that the user is distracted by the menu operation and does not notice the occurrence of various events, and it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of the event.

  As a second feature of the third determination table in the second embodiment, a customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed is divided into a customer waiting effect waiting and a customer waiting effect, and a customer waiting effect waiting Is the period during which the menu operation can be accepted, and the period during which the customer is waiting is the period during which the menu operation cannot be accepted. By doing so, the customer waiting effect is not hindered by the menu operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to the player. In addition, the waiting period of the customer waiting effect may be a period during which the menu operation operation cannot be received, the waiting time period of the customer operation may be the period during which the menu operation operation can be received, or the waiting time of the customer waiting effect and the time during the customer waiting effect may be set as the menu. It is good also as a possible period of operation reception of operation.

  As a third feature of the third determination table in the second embodiment, in the waiting state of the customer waiting effect in which the customer waiting effect is not executed in the customer waiting state, it is the low-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Menu operation is possible irrespective of this. By doing so, the period during which the menu operation can be performed can be expanded, and the convenience for the player can be improved.

  A fourth feature of the third determination table in the second embodiment is that a menu operation cannot be performed during a fluctuation effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a key part in the fluctuation of the effect symbols from being overlooked for the operation of volume adjustment by the menu operation, and to improve the interest of the game.

  When a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and the like are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal display), the menu is not displayed during notification of various occurrence events or during a pre-reading notice effect. The operation may be enabled, and in this case, the period during which the menu operation is enabled can be expanded without hindering the effect display performed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the player's It is possible to improve convenience.

(Operation example of gaming machine before and after menu operation in second embodiment)
FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of a gaming machine before and after a menu operation in the second embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 137 (a) is a diagram showing an operation during a standby for a customer waiting effect, and FIG. 137 (b) is a diagram showing an operation during a menu display operation, and FIG. 137 (c). ) Is a diagram showing an operation at the time of the selection operation during the display of the menu screen, FIG. 137 (d) is a diagram showing an operation at the time of the selection operation while the menu screen is displayed, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an operation at the time of an operation for volume adjustment.

  Hereinafter, the operation at the time of menu operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (e). First, while waiting for a customer waiting effect, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) displays a background image HG, an effect design 70a, a menu operation guide image MAG, and the like. , The up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are emitting light. The menu operation guide image MAG is a composite image in which a character image is added to an image imitating the cross key 19, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect design 70a (the lower center of the screen). When the operation of the effect button 17 is a menu display operation, a position where a composite image in which a character image is added to an image simulating the effect button 17 as a menu operation guide image MAG does not overlap with the effect design 70a (screen (Lower center).

  When the cross key 19 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), the operation sound “push” of the cross key 19 is output from the audio output device 9 and the first image display device 70 ( A menu screen (image) having selection item images of “volume adjustment”, “brightness adjustment”, and “end” on the main liquid crystal), a selection guide image imitating the cross key 19, and a decision guide image imitating the effect button 17 ) Is displayed.

  In the menu screen, when the volume adjustment is "possible (variable)", the image of the selection item of "volume adjustment" is displayed, but when the volume adjustment is "impossible (fixed)" Indicates that the image of the selection item of “volume adjustment” is not displayed or cannot be selected. When the brightness adjustment is “possible (variable)”, the image of the selection item “brightness adjustment” is displayed. When the brightness adjustment is “impossible (fixed)”, the “brightness adjustment” is displayed. Is not displayed or is displayed in an unselectable manner.

  In addition, while the state in which the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 emits light is maintained, the effect button 17 becomes in the state of emitting light, and the corresponding BGM is output from the audio output device 9 while the menu screen is being displayed. At the start of the menu screen display, the item "volume adjustment" is selected and displayed brightly, and the items "brightness adjustment" and "end" are displayed darkly.

  When the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 137 (c), the operation sound “push” of the cross key 19 is output from the audio output device and the first image display device The item of “volume adjustment” on the menu screen displayed at 70 changes to a state in which the item is darkly displayed, and the item of “brightness adjustment” is selected and displayed in a bright state. Note that the up and down buttons of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 keep emitting light, and the output of the BGM from the audio output device 9 is also continued.

  When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the operation sound “push” of the cross key 19 is output from the audio output device and the first image display device The item of “volume adjustment” on the menu screen displayed at 70 changes to a state where it is displayed brightly, and the item of “brightness adjustment” is selected and displayed darkly. Note that the up and down buttons of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 keep emitting light, and the output of the BGM from the audio output device 9 is also continued.

  When the effect button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), the operation sound “Tiron” of the effect button 17 is output from the sound output device 9, and the first image display device 70 ( A volume adjustment screen including a volume value notification image and an image of a selection item of “return” is displayed on the main liquid crystal). In addition, the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 are turned off and the left and right buttons emit light, and the BGM output from the audio output device 9 is continued.

  By operating the cross key 19 and the effect button 17 in such an order, the volume can be adjusted, and the player can adjust the volume to an arbitrary level. In the case of the brightness adjustment, when the effect button 17 is operated in a state where the item of the brightness adjustment is selected, the information image of the brightness value and the “return” are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A screen for luminance adjustment having the image of the selection item is displayed, and the luminance adjustment can be performed.

  Therefore, even if the player intends to change the volume value and the brightness value of a plurality of gaming machines 1 because they are mischievous or annoyed, the volume value must be changed without going through a menu screen or the like. And the brightness value cannot be changed, it is possible to reduce the willingness of the player to change the volume value and the brightness value of the plurality of gaming machines 1, and to suppress annoying other players. It becomes possible.

  The menu screen is displayed when a menu display operation is performed during a period during which menu operation operations can be received. The menu screen may be displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the menu operation guidance image was displayed during the standby, even if the menu display operation was not performed.

  In addition, in the customer waiting state, the menu screen is displayed by operating the cross key 19 and the effect button 17 to enable the volume and brightness to be adjusted. In the customer waiting state, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed. The display may be performed, and a volume value notification image OG or a brightness value notification image KG may be displayed by operating the cross key 19 to adjust the volume and brightness.

  Also, on the menu screen, a volume reset item for resetting (re-setting) the volume value changed by operating the cross key 19 to the initial value of the volume set by the changeover switch 22 and a brightness value are set by the changeover switch 22. , A brightness reset item to be reset (reset) to the initial value of the brightness set by the user may be displayed, and the volume value or the brightness value may be reset by operating the cross key 19 or the effect button 17.

  Further, different menu screens may be displayed depending on whether the glass frame 4 is opened and when the glass frame 4 is not opened. For example, when the glass frame 4 is not opened, the volume adjustment may be performed. When only the item and the item of luminance adjustment are displayed and the glass frame 4 is opened, the item of volume reset and the item of luminance reset may be displayed. In addition, only when the glass frame 4 is opened, a power saving mode setting item for changing the power saving mode setting may be displayed.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the volume control and the brightness adjustment cannot be performed during a period other than the period during which the menu operation can be accepted (during a fluctuating effect, etc.). The operation is the same as in the first embodiment. For this reason, the operation of the gaming machine at the time of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment using the changeover switch 22 and the cross key 19 is slightly different from the image displayed on the image display device in relation to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Despite the differences, it goes without saying that they operate in the same way as in FIGS.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  In the third embodiment, in relation to the first embodiment, the storage contents (information of the adjustment mode, reference information, setting of the power saving mode, volume value, luminance value, etc.) in the general RAM 144 of the liquid crystal control unit 141 are stored in the RAM. This is different in that it is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on with operation of the clear switch 55a, and is not cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on without operation of the RAM clear switch 55a. Therefore, the description of the same portions as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

  First, as a premise, when the effect control unit 130m receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the time of power-on due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 55a, the power-on notification command is sent to the liquid crystal control unit 141. Is to be sent.

(Main Processing of Liquid Crystal Control Unit in Third Embodiment)
FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating main processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 according to the fourth embodiment. This flowchart is different from the main process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 shown in FIG. 68 only in that the content of the process in step T2 is changed and steps T3B and T3B are added between step T3 and step T3-1. The description of the step is omitted.

  The supervising CPU 142 performs an initialization process in step T2. In this process, the central CPU 142 reads the main processing program from the central ROM, and also controls the adjustment mode information, the reference information, the power saving mode setting, the volume adjustment such as the volume value, the luminance value, and the brightness adjustment stored in the overall RAM 144. The storage information is not initialized (cleared), but other storage information, flags, and the like are initialized (cleared), and processing such as initialization is performed.

  In step T3A, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the power-on notification command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m has been received, and if the power-on notification command has been received (step T3A: Yes), the process proceeds to step T3A. The process proceeds to T3B, and if the power-on notification command is not received (step T3A: No), the process proceeds to step T3-1.

  In step T3B, the overall CPU 142 clears the adjustment mode information, reference information, volume value, luminance value, and power saving mode settings stored in the overall RAM 144. Thus, in the mode switching process in step T3-1, the adjustment mode, reference information, volume value, luminance value, and power saving mode setting corresponding to the switch position of the changeover switch 22 are set in the general RAM 144, and the volume value and the luminance value are set. Is reset (re-set) to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the adjustment mode.

  Therefore, when the power is turned on with the operation of the RAM clear switch 55a of the gaming machine 1, the volume value and the luminance value are reset (reset) to the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the adjustment mode. When the store is closed or opened, it is not necessary to operate the cross key 19 to return the volume value to the initial value of the volume or to return the luminance value to the initial value of the luminance.

  In step T3B, the adjustment mode information, reference information, power saving mode settings, and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are not cleared, and only the sound volume value and the brightness value are set to the initial value of the sound volume corresponding to the adjustment mode information. The brightness may be reset (re-set) to the initial value. By doing so, it is possible to reset (reset) the volume value and the luminance value by inheriting the information of the adjustment mode before the power is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the basic control and operation of the gaming machine 1 are the same as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Therefore, even in the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the operation of the gaming machine at the time of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment using the changeover switch 22 and the cross key 19 operates in the same manner as in FIGS. Needless to say. The contents of the third embodiment may be applied to the second embodiment.

(Fourth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  In the fourth embodiment, in relation to the first embodiment, the effect control unit 130m does not determine the contents of various effects and controls the progress of the various effects, but is determined by the effect control unit 130m. The difference is that the liquid crystal controller 141 controls the progress of various effects. In addition, the difference is that the effect control unit 130m and the liquid crystal control unit 141 do not cooperate with each other to perform the processing related to the adjustment of the volume and the luminance, but the liquid crystal control unit 141 performs the processing. In addition, the difference is that detection signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are relayed (through) through the effect control unit 130m and input to the liquid crystal control unit 141. Therefore, the description of the same portions as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control unit 130m in the fourth embodiment)
FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating the timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m according to the fourth embodiment.

  The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs a timer update process in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in Step E130. In this input control process, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there has been an input from an input device that inputs a signal to the effect control unit 130m, and performs a process of setting predetermined data when the input has been made.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process in Step E150. In this command analysis processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, determines whether there is a command to be transferred to the liquid crystal control unit 141 among the commands received from the main control board 110, and transfers the command. If there is a command, a process of transferring the command to the liquid crystal control unit 141 is performed.

  Specifically, when a command such as a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, a customer waiting command, and an error designation command is received, the command is transferred to the liquid crystal control unit 141.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in Step E200. In this game state update processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a game state designation command has been received, and if so, the game stored in the sub RAM 130c. A process for updating the status information is performed. This process is a process corresponding to the game status update process (step E350) shown in FIG.

  Sub CPU 130a performs an update process of the hold information in step E250. In the process of updating the hold information, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command has been received. The first special symbol hold number, the second special symbol hold number, the normal symbol hold number, etc. stored in the RAM 130c are updated, and the updated first special symbol hold number, the second special symbol hold number, the normal symbol hold are updated. A process of setting an icon display command corresponding to the number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed.

  In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect determination process. In this prefetch effect determination processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the start opening winning designation command has been received. Whether or not to execute a look-ahead notice effect that gives a notice (suggestion) that a jackpot (game) will occur or a jackpot (game) may occur before the special symbol change display (change effect) is started. To determine the effect of the look-ahead notice effect to be executed (type, etc.), and to set the notice effect command corresponding to the decided look-ahead effect effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. I do.

  As the pre-reading notice effect, a predetermined notice effect (display of notice image) is performed over one or a plurality of change displays executed before the change display (variation effect) of the special symbol corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command is started. , A change in the background image, etc.), a hold change notice effect in which the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command is changed to a special mode different from the normal mode, during a jackpot game (specific round game) There is a jackpot notice or the like in which a predetermined notice effect (display of notice image, change of background image, etc.) is performed during middle, ending, etc.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a variable effect pattern determination process in Step E350. In this variation effect pattern determination processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the variation pattern designation command for the special symbol has been received. To perform a process of determining a variable effect pattern (effect mode of the variable effect) when variable display is performed, and setting a variable effect pattern command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. The content of the variable effect pattern determination process is the same as the content of the variable effect pattern determination process (step E626) of the effect control unit 130m shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a symbol pattern determination process in Step E400. In this symbol pattern determination processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the effect symbol designating command has been received. Is determined, and a symbol pattern command corresponding to the determined symbol pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. This symbol pattern determination processing is the same as the symbol pattern determination processing (step E627) of the effect control unit 130m shown in FIGS. 50 and 54, and therefore, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The sub CPU 130a performs the notice effect determination processing 1 in step E450. In this announcement effect determination processing 1, the sub CPU 130a becomes a finalized effect or a positive variation big hit that definitely notifies (informs) a big hit based on the received effect design designation command, the determined variable effect pattern, and the like. It is determined whether or not to execute a one-shot notification effect (corresponding to a notification effect) such as a definite change determination effect of notifying (notifying) the fact in a certain manner, and to determine the type (effect mode) of the one-notification effect to be performed. In addition, a process of setting a command of an announcement effect corresponding to the determined type of the announcement effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. Note that the content of the notice effect determination process 1 is the same as the content of the notice effect determination process 1 (step E628) of the effect control unit 130m shown in FIGS. 50 and 56, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The sub CPU 130a performs the notice effect determination processing 2 in step E500. In this announcement effect determination processing 2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute an announcement effect for announcing that there is a possibility of a jackpot or an expected degree of the jackpot based on the determined variable effect pattern, symbol pattern, or the like. Is determined, the effect mode (type, etc.) of the notice effect to be executed is determined, and the command of the notice effect corresponding to the decided effect condition of the notice effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. .

  In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs the announcement effect determination process 3. In the preview effect determination process 3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute an operation effect for notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit and a degree of expectation of a big hit based on the determined variable effect pattern, symbol pattern, or the like. To determine the effect of the operation effect to be executed (type, etc.), and set an operation effect command corresponding to the determined operation effect effect mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. .

  The sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot effect determination process in Step E600. In this jackpot effect determination processing, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether an opening designation command, a round designation command, and an ending designation command for the jackpot have been received, and if the command has been received. In addition, the special game production pattern to be executed during the jackpot, the pattern of the round production, the pattern of the ending production, or the determined special game production pattern, the pattern of the round production, the opening production command corresponding to the pattern of the ending production, A process of setting a round effect command and an ending effect command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in Step E650. In the output control process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Do.

  In step E700, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Main Processing of Liquid Crystal Controller in Fourth Embodiment)
FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating main processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 according to the fourth embodiment. When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the centralized CPU 142, and the centralized CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

  First, the supervising CPU 142 sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting a timer interrupt in step T1, and performs an initialization process in step T2. In this processing, the central CPU 142 reads the main processing program from the central ROM 143, initializes flags and the like stored in the central RAM 144, and performs processing such as initialization.

  In step T3, the overall CPU 142 sets an interruption permission for permitting the timer interruption, and thereafter repeats a loop until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped.

(V Blank Interruption Process of Liquid Crystal Controller in Fourth Embodiment)
FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating the V blank interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 according to the fourth embodiment.

  In step T30, the central CPU 142 performs a counter update process of updating a predetermined number of counters (such as a scene switching counter, a weight frame counter, and a frame counter) (for example, adding “1”). 145 (VDP) is subjected to a frame buffer switching instruction process for giving an instruction to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147.

  Thus, each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer”. And alternately.

  In step T32, the overall CPU 142 refers to the state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 composed of the rotary switch, and refers to the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9, the image display device, and various lighting devices (frames). Switching processing for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the luminance (value) of the lighting device for lighting 10 and the lighting device for board 74). The mode switching process is the same as the mode switching process (step T3-1) of the liquid crystal control unit 141 shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In step T33, the overall CPU 142 generates an effect sound (such as BGM or SE) output from the audio output device 9 based on a detection signal (operation signal) input from the cross key detection switch 19a based on the operation of the cross key 19. A volume setting process for adjusting the volume (volume value) of the game sound is performed. The processing for setting the volume will be described later with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143.

  In step T34, the centralized CPU 142 uses the detection signal (operation signal) input from the cross key detection switch 19a based on the operation of the cross key 19 to control the backlight of the image display device and various illumination devices (the frame illumination device 10). And a luminance setting process for adjusting the luminance (luminance value) of the lamp (LED) of the panel lighting device 74). The processing for setting the luminance will be described later with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145.

  In step T35, the general CPU 142 promotes the player to play a game when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without performing the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol (of the gaming machine). A customer waiting process for executing a customer waiting effect for performing an appeal) is performed. The customer waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T36, the general CPU 142 reduces the brightness (value) of the backlight of the image display device and the lamp (LED) of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74) to save power. A power saving mode control process for controlling start and end of the (eco) mode is performed. Since the control processing in the power saving mode is the same as the control processing in the power saving mode (step T6-4) of the liquid crystal control unit 141 shown in FIGS. 68 and 88, the description thereof is omitted. I do.

  In step T37, the overall CPU 142 determines an animation pattern for controlling an effect image to be displayed on the image display device from an animation group of a type corresponding to the effect instruction command from the effect control unit 130m, and determines a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144. Perform the setting process of the animation pattern to set (set) to. This animation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T38, the overall CPU 142 controls the sound for controlling the effect sound (game sound such as BGM or SE) to be output from the sound output device 9 from the group of sounds corresponding to the effect instruction command from the effect control unit 130m. The sound setting process for determining and setting the pattern is performed.

  In step T39, the general CPU 142 generates an effective period for the operation effect during the variable effect, and performs an operation effect process for executing the operation effect based on the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period. The operation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step T40, the overall CPU 142 generates an effective period for switching the effect mode during the customer waiting state or the variable effect, and sets the effect mode for switching the effect mode based on the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period. Perform change processing.

  In step T41, the overall CPU 142 receives various events from the effect control unit 130m (power-on, power-on, power-on, illegal prize, abnormal prize, magnetic anomaly, radio wave anomaly, open frame, tray full, payout anomaly, right-handed error, etc.). Based on the reception of the command indicating the occurrence or termination of the event, a process for starting the notification of the occurrence event is performed, and a notification process of the occurrence event for performing the process for ending the notification of the occurrence event is performed. The process of notifying the generated event is the same as the process of notifying the generated event (step T6-1) of the liquid crystal control unit 141 shown in FIGS. 68 and 77, and thus the description thereof is omitted. I do.

  In step T42, the general CPU 142 performs an animation control process for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list of the next frame. A display list including a group of drawing control commands is generated, and the generated display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

  In step T44, the centralized CPU 142 performs a drawing instruction process for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output display list. As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws an effect image or a notification image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). ) And a process of displaying the image on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

  In step T45, the centralized CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of sound control commands, and outputs the generated sound list to the audio control unit 148. The sound output command processing for instructing the output of the sound based on the output sound list is performed, and the current V blank interrupt processing ends. As a result, the sound control unit 148 performs a process of causing the sound output device 9 to output a sound based on the sound list.

(Setting processing of the volume of the liquid crystal control unit in the fourth embodiment)
FIGS. 142 and 143 are flowcharts showing the volume setting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 in the fourth embodiment.

  First, in step T33-1, the general CPU 142 refers to the first determination table shown in FIG. 67 (a), and presents the production sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9 in the current state. It is determined whether or not it is a volume adjustment possible period in which the volume adjustment is possible. If it is the volume adjustment possible period (step T33-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33-2. If it is not the period in which the volume adjustment is possible (step T33-1: No), the process proceeds to step T33-32.

  In step T33-2, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the first processing number stored in the overall RAM 144 is “0”, and determines that the first processing number is “0” (step T33). -2: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33-3, and if the first process number is not "0" (step T33-2: No), the process proceeds to step T33-8. The “first processing number” is a processing number indicating the progress stage of the volume adjustment, and is set to “0” in the above-described initialization processing in step T2 of FIG. 140.

  In step T33-3, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is on standby (step T33-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33-4. The process is shifted to a process in a case where it is not waiting for the customer waiting effect, that is, in a case where a variable effect is being performed or a jackpot is being performed (Step T33-3: No), the process proceeds to Step T33-6.

  In step T33-4, the central CPU 142 sets display information of a volume adjustment guidance image for guiding volume adjustment in a display list. As a result, a display list including display information of the volume adjustment guidance image is output to the image control unit 145, and a process for displaying the volume adjustment guidance image on the image display device is performed.

  In step T33-5, the central control CPU 142 sets the volume control guide command 1 in the transmission buffer of the central RAM 144, and shifts the processing to step T33-7. As a result, the command 1 for guiding volume adjustment is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and a process for causing the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 to emit light is performed.

  In step T33-6, the central control CPU 142 sets the command 2 for guiding volume adjustment in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. As a result, the command 2 for guiding the sound volume adjustment is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and a process for causing the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 to emit light is performed.

  In step T33-7, the supervisor CPU 142 sets “1” to the first process number stored in the supervisor RAM 144, and ends the current volume setting process.

  In step T33-8, the overall CPU 142 determines whether the first processing number stored in the overall RAM 144 is “1”, and when the first processing number is “1” (step T33). If the first processing number is not “1” (step T33-8: No), the process proceeds to step T33-14.

  In step T33-9, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a volume adjustment start operation has been performed based on whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the left or right button has been input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If a start operation has been performed (step T33-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33-10, and if no volume adjustment start operation has been performed (step T33-9: No), the current volume is not adjusted. The setting process ends.

  In step T33-10, the overall CPU 142 clears the display information of the volume adjustment guide image from the display list, and displays the display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value in step T33-11. To the list for Thereby, the display list including the display information of the volume value notification image is output to the image control unit 145, and processing for displaying the volume value notification image on the image display device instead of the volume adjustment guide image is performed. Will be.

  In step T33-12, the supervisor CPU 142 sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (the left button and the right button). The first processing number stored in the RAM 144 is set to “2”, and the current volume setting processing ends.

  In step T33-14, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the first processing number stored in the overall RAM 144 is “2”, and determines that the first processing number is “2” (step T33). If the first processing number is not “2” (step T33-14: No), the process proceeds to step T33-15, and the current volume setting process ends.

  In step T33-15, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not a volume reduction operation has been performed based on whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the left button has been input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If there is (step T33-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33-16, and if there is no operation of decreasing the volume (step T33-15: No), the process proceeds to step T33-18. Transfer.

  In step T33-16, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether the current volume value is larger than the lower limit value of the adjustment range of the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, and if it is larger than the lower limit value (step T33-16: In Yes), the volume value is decremented by 1 in step T33-17. On the other hand, when it is not larger than the lower limit (Step T33-16: No), the process moves to Step T33-21.

  In step T33-18, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not an operation for increasing the volume has been performed based on whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the right button has been input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If there is (step T33-18: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33-19, and if there is no operation for increasing the volume (step T33-18: No), the process proceeds to step T33-26. Transfer.

  In step T33-19, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether the current volume value is smaller than the upper limit value of the adjustment range of the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, and if it is smaller than the upper limit value (step T33-19: In Yes), in step T33-20, the sound volume value is incremented by one. On the other hand, if it is not smaller than the upper limit (step T33-19: No), the process moves to step T33-21.

  In step T33-21, the central CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of a volume value corresponding to the updated volume value to the audio control unit 148. As a result, the sound volume value corresponding to the sound volume value notification signal is set in the audio control unit 148 as the sound volume value of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the audio output device 9.

  In step T33-22, the supervisor CPU 142 sets display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the updated volume value in the display list. Thereby, a display list including display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the updated volume value is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value is displayed on the image display device. Will be done.

  In step T33-23, the supervisor CPU 142 sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (left button, right button).

  In step T33-24, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting for a customer. If the customer is waiting for a customer (step T33-24: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33-25. If it is not in the customer waiting state (step T33-24: No), the current volume setting process ends.

  In step T33-25, the supervisor CPU 142 sets the output information of the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the updated volume value in the output list, and ends the current volume setting process. As a result, a sound list including the output information of the notification sound of the volume corresponding to the current volume value is output to the sound control unit 148, and the notification sound of the volume is output from the sound output device 9.

  In step T33-26, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the monitoring time of the operation interval set in the above-described steps T33-12, T33-23 and the like has elapsed, and when the monitoring time of the operation interval has elapsed ( In Step T33-26: Yes), the process proceeds to Step T33-27. If the monitoring time of the operation interval has not elapsed (Step T33-26: No), the current volume setting process ends. .

  In step T33-27, the central control CPU 142 clears the display information of the notification image of the sound volume value from the display list. As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the volume value notification image is output to the image control unit 145, and the volume value notification image is not displayed on the image display device.

  In other words, the operation interval monitoring is performed after the notification image of the volume value is displayed by the operation of the left or right button (start operation of the volume adjustment) of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) received after the volume adjustment possible period. If the operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) (operation of decreasing the volume, operation of increasing the volume) is not performed until the time (predetermined period) elapses, the notification image of the volume value is displayed. It is hidden. Also, when an operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (an operation of decreasing the volume or an operation of increasing the volume) is performed while the notification image of the volume value is displayed, the operation interval from the operation is not changed. A notification image of a sound volume value when the operation of the left or right button of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) (operation of decreasing the volume, operation of increasing the volume) is not performed until the monitoring time (predetermined period) elapses. Is hidden. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the visual recognition image of the volume value from hindering the visual recognition of other images (such as the effect design image, the background image, the volume adjustment guide image, and the brightness adjustment guide image).

  In the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the volume value has actually decreased or increased by operating the left or right button of the cross key 19 while the notification image of the volume value is displayed. In spite of the fact that the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval is reset regardless of the operation interval, the notification image of the volume value is immediately hidden even though the player has operated the left or right button. This eliminates the inconvenience of causing the player to be dissatisfied, and makes it possible to avoid causing the player to feel dissatisfied.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the operation is invalid even if the operation of the up or down button of the cross key 19 is performed while the notification image of the volume value is displayed. Even when the up or down button is operated, the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval may be reset. In this way, even if the player accidentally operates the up or down button of the four-way controller 19, the inconvenience that the notification image of the volume value immediately disappears is eliminated, and the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling.

  In step T33-28, the overall CPU 142 sets a volume adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the overall RAM 144. As a result, a volume adjustment end command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and processing for stopping light emission of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 is performed.

  In step T33-29, the supervisor CPU 142 sets “0” to the first process number stored in the supervisor RAM 142. As a result, the volume value of the effect sound (game sound such as BGM, SE, etc.) output from the sound output device 9 cannot be immediately adjusted. In other words, the volume value of the effect sound is immediately adjusted (increased / decreased) by operating the cross key 19 during a period in which the volume value notification image is displayed, but in a period in which the volume value notification image is not displayed. Thus, even if the cross key 19 is operated, the volume value of the effect sound is not immediately adjusted (increased or decreased).

  In step T33-30, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is not on standby (step T33-30: No), the current volume setting process is performed. Is ended and the customer waiting effect is waiting (step T33-30: Yes), a waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) for the customer waiting effect is set in step T33-31, and the volume of the current volume is set. The setting process ends.

  Thereby, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in the customer waiting process of step T3-2 is reset. In other words, a time (after 63 seconds) obtained by adding the monitoring time of the operation interval (3 seconds) and the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds) from the time point when the operation of the cross key 19 is finally detected in the volume setting process. A customer waiting effect will be executed. Note that the customer waiting effect may be executed 60 seconds after the last operation of the cross key 19 is detected.

  In step T33-32, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the first processing number stored in the overall RAM 144 is “0”, and when the first processing number is not “0” (step T33-32). 32: No), the process proceeds to step T33-33, and if the first process number is “0” (step T33-32: Yes), the current volume setting process ends.

  In step T33-33, the supervisor CPU 142 clears the display information of the notification image of the sound volume value from the display list. As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the volume value notification image is output to the image control unit 145, and the volume value notification image is not displayed on the image display device.

  In step T33-34, the general control CPU 142 sets a volume adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. As a result, a volume adjustment end command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and processing for stopping light emission of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 is performed.

  In step T33-35, the overall CPU 142 clears the monitoring time of the operation interval, and in step T33-36, sets the first processing number stored in the overall RAM 144 to “0” and sets the current volume. The process ends. That is, in the state where the guidance image of the volume adjustment is displayed or the notification image of the volume value is displayed, there is a prize of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, and the fluctuation effect is performed. If it is determined that the volume adjustment has been shifted from the volume adjustment enabled period to the volume adjustment disabled period due to the start of the notification or the (error) notification of various occurrence events, the volume adjustment guidance image and the volume value are displayed. Is not displayed, and the volume is not adjusted.

(Process of Setting Brightness of Liquid Crystal Controller in Fourth Embodiment)
FIGS. 144 and 145 are flowcharts illustrating the luminance setting processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 in the fourth embodiment.

  First, in step T34-1, the general CPU 142 refers to the second determination table shown in FIG. 67 (b), and determines whether the current state is the lamp of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74. It is determined whether or not it is a period in which the brightness adjustment of the LED (e.g., LED) and the like can be performed. If the period is not the period in which the brightness adjustment is possible (step T34-1: No), the process proceeds to step T34-31.

  In step T34-2, the central processing CPU 142 determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the general RAM 144 is "0", and when the second processing number is "0" (step T34). -2: Yes), the process proceeds to step T34-3, and if the second process number is not "0" (step T34-2: No), the process proceeds to step T34-8. This “second processing number” is a processing number indicating the progress stage of the luminance adjustment, and is set to “0” in the above-described initialization processing in step T2 of FIG. 140.

  In step T34-3, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is on standby (step T34-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T34-4. The process is shifted to a process in a case where it is not waiting for the customer waiting effect (Step T34-3: No), to Step T34-6.

  In step T34-4, the centralized CPU 142 sets display information of a brightness adjustment guide image for guiding brightness adjustment in a display list. As a result, a display list including display information of the brightness adjustment guide image is output to the image control unit 145, and a process for displaying the brightness adjustment guide image on the image display device is performed.

  In step T34-5, the supervisor CPU 142 sets the command 1 for guiding volume adjustment in the transmission buffer of the supervisory RAM 144, and shifts the processing to step T34-7. As a result, the command 1 for guiding brightness adjustment is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and a process for causing the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 to emit light is performed.

  The supervising CPU 142 sets the command 2 for guiding brightness adjustment in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144 in step T34-6. As a result, the command 2 for guiding brightness adjustment is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and a process for causing the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 to emit light is performed.

  In step T34-7, the supervisor CPU 142 sets “1” to the second process number stored in the supervisor RAM 144, and ends the current brightness setting process.

  In step T34-8, the central processing CPU 142 determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the general RAM 144 is "1", and when the second processing number is "1" (step T34). To (−8: Yes), the process proceeds to step T34-9. If the second process number is not “1” (step T34-8: No), the process proceeds to step T34-14.

  In step T34-9, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not a luminance adjustment start operation has been performed based on whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the down or up button has been input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If there is a start operation (step T34-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step T34-10, and if there is no luminance adjustment start operation (step T34-9: No), the current luminance The setting process ends.

  In step T34-10, the central CPU 142 clears the display information of the brightness adjustment guidance image from the display list, and displays the display information of the brightness value notification image corresponding to the current brightness value in step T34-11. To the list for As a result, a display list including the display information of the brightness value notification image is output to the image control unit 145, and processing for displaying the brightness value notification image on the image display device instead of the brightness adjustment guide image is performed. Will be.

  In step T34-12, the supervisor CPU 142 sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (the lower button and the upper button). The second processing number stored in the RAM 144 is set to “2”, and the current luminance setting processing ends.

  In step T34-14, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the overall RAM 144 is “2”, and when the second processing number is “2” (step T34). If the second processing number is not “2” (step T34-14: No), the process proceeds to step T34-15, and the current brightness setting process ends.

  In step T34-15, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not there has been an operation for lowering the luminance based on whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the lower button has been input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If there is (step T34-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step T34-16, and if there is no operation for lowering the luminance (step T34-15: No), the process proceeds to step T34-18. Transfer.

  In step T34-16, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the current luminance value is larger than the lower limit value of the adjustment range of the luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, and if it is larger than the lower limit value (step T34-16: In Yes), in step T34-17, the luminance value is decremented by one. On the other hand, if it is not larger than the lower limit (step T34-16: No), the process moves to step T34-21.

  In step T34-18, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not an operation for increasing the luminance has been performed based on whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the up button has been input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If there is (step T34-18: Yes), the process proceeds to step T34-19, and if there is no operation for increasing the luminance (step T34-18: No), the process proceeds to step T34-25. Transfer.

  In step T34-19, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether the current luminance value is smaller than the upper limit value of the adjustment range of the luminance value corresponding to the adjustment mode, and if it is smaller than the upper limit value (step T34-19: In Yes), in step T34-20, the luminance value is incremented by one. On the other hand, if it is not smaller than the upper limit (step T34-19: No), the process moves to step T34-21.

  In step T34-21, the central CPU 142 outputs a notification signal of a luminance value corresponding to the updated luminance value to the image control unit 145. As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.

  In step T34-22, the general CPU 142 sets a notification command of a luminance value corresponding to the updated luminance value in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. Thereby, the notification command of the brightness value is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the notification command of the brightness value is set for the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74). The luminance value is set in the lamp control unit 150.

  In step T34-23, the supervisor CPU 142 sets display information of the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the updated luminance value in the display list. As a result, a display list including display information of the notification image of the brightness value corresponding to the updated brightness value is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the brightness value corresponding to the current brightness value is displayed on the image display device. Will be done.

  In step T34-24, the supervisor CPU 142 sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19 (the lower button and the upper button), and sets the current luminance setting process. finish.

  In step R6-3A-25, the supervisor CPU 142 determines whether or not the monitoring time of the operation interval set in steps T34-12 and T34-24 has elapsed, and the monitoring time of the operation interval has elapsed. In this case (step T34-25: Yes), the process proceeds to step T34-26, and if the operation interval monitoring time has not elapsed (step T34-25: No), the current brightness setting process is performed. finish.

  In step T34-26, the supervisor CPU 142 clears the display information of the notification image of the luminance value from the display list. As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the brightness value notification image is output to the image control unit 145, and the brightness value notification image is not displayed on the image display device.

  That is, the operation interval is monitored after the notification image of the luminance value is displayed by the operation of the down or up button (operation of starting the luminance adjustment) of the cross key 19 (input reception unit) received after the luminance adjustment possible period. When the operation of the down or up button (the operation of decreasing the luminance or the operation of increasing the luminance) of the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) is not performed until the time (predetermined period) elapses, the notification image of the luminance value is displayed. It is hidden. Also, when an operation of the lower or upper button of the cross key 19 (operation of lowering the brightness, operation of increasing the brightness) is performed in a state in which the notification image of the brightness value is displayed, the operation interval from the operation is not changed. A notification image of the luminance value when the operation of the down or up button (operation of decreasing the luminance, operation of increasing the luminance) of the cross key 19 (input receiving unit) is not performed until the monitoring time (predetermined period) elapses. Is hidden. This makes it possible to suppress the visibility of other images (such as effect design images, background images, volume adjustment guidance images, and brightness adjustment guidance images) from being disturbed by the brightness value notification image.

  In the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the luminance value has actually decreased or increased by operating the lower or upper button of the cross key 19 while the notification image of the luminance value is displayed. In spite of the fact that the monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval is reset regardless of the operation, the notification image of the brightness value is immediately hidden even if the player operates the down or up button. This eliminates the inconvenience of causing the player to be dissatisfied, and makes it possible to avoid causing the player to feel dissatisfied.

  In the fourth embodiment, the operation is invalid even if the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated while the notification image of the luminance value is displayed. The monitoring time (predetermined time) of the operation interval may be reset even when the left or right button is operated. In this way, even if the player accidentally operates the left or right button of the cross key 19, the inconvenience that the notification image of the luminance value is immediately hidden is eliminated, and the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling.

  In step T34-27, the supervisor CPU 142 sets a luminance adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the supervisor RAM 144. As a result, a luminance adjustment end command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and a process for stopping light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 is performed.

  The supervising CPU 142 sets “0” to the second processing number stored in the general RAM 142 in step T34-28. As a result, the brightness value of the lamp (LED) of the image display device, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 cannot be adjusted immediately. That is, the luminance value can be immediately adjusted (increase / decrease) during a period in which the luminance value notification image is displayed, but the luminance value is immediately adjusted (increase / decrease) in a period in which the luminance value notification image is not displayed. ) Will not be able to.

  In step T34-29, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is not on standby (step T34-29: No), the current brightness setting process is performed. Is ended and the customer waiting effect is waiting (step T34-29: Yes), the waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) of the customer waiting effect is set in step T34-30, and the second time Ends the operation reception processing of.

  Thereby, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in the customer waiting process of step T3-2 is reset. In other words, a time (63 seconds later) obtained by adding the monitoring time of the operation interval (3 seconds) and the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds) from the time point when the operation of the cross key 19 is finally detected in the brightness setting process. A customer waiting effect will be executed. Note that the customer waiting effect may be executed 60 seconds after the last operation of the cross key 19 is detected.

  In step T34-31, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the second processing number stored in the overall RAM 144 is "0". If the second processing number is not "0" (step T34-31). At 31: No), the process proceeds to step T34-32. If the second process number is "0" (step T34-31: Yes), the current brightness setting process ends.

  In step T34-32, the general CPU 142 clears the display information of the notification image of the luminance value from the display list. As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the brightness value notification image is output to the image control unit 145, and the brightness value notification image is not displayed on the image display device.

  In step T34-33, the supervisor CPU 142 sets a luminance adjustment end command in the transmission buffer of the supervisor RAM 144. As a result, a luminance adjustment end command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and a process for stopping light emission of the upper and lower buttons of the cross key 19 is performed.

  In step T34-34, the general CPU 142 clears the monitoring time of the operation interval, and in step T34-35, sets the second processing number stored in the general RAM 144 to “0” and sets the current brightness. The process ends. That is, in the state where the guidance image of the brightness adjustment is displayed or the notification image of the volume value is displayed, there is a prize of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, and the fluctuation effect is performed. If it is determined that the period has shifted from the period in which the brightness adjustment is possible to the period in which the brightness adjustment is not possible due to the start of the process or notification of (error) of various occurrence events, the guidance image for brightness adjustment and the brightness value are displayed. Is not displayed, and control is performed so that the brightness adjustment operation cannot be performed.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the control function of the effect control unit 130m can be reduced by transferring the adjustment function related to the volume and brightness provided in the effect control unit 130m to the liquid crystal control unit 141. Further, since the processing relating to the adjustment of the volume and the luminance is executed only by the liquid crystal control section 141, the control contents relating to the adjustment of the volume and the luminance are simplified as compared with the effect control section 130m and the liquid crystal control section 141 cooperating ( Simple).

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the basic control and operation of the gaming machine 1 are the same as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Therefore, even in the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the operation of the gaming machine at the time of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment using the changeover switch 22 and the cross key 19 operates in the same manner as in FIGS. Needless to say. Further, the contents of the third embodiment may be applied to the fourth embodiment.

(Customer Waiting Process of Liquid Crystal Controller in Fourth Embodiment)
FIG. 146 is a flowchart illustrating the customer waiting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 in the fourth embodiment.

  First, in step T35-1, the general CPU 142 refers to the reception buffer of the general RAM 144 to determine whether or not a customer waiting command has been received, and if not, (step T35-1: No). Then, the process is shifted to step T35-3, and when the reception is being received (step T35-1: Yes), in step T35-2, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect which is the waiting time until the customer waiting effect is started. (For example, 60 seconds), and the process moves to step T35-16.

  In step T35-3, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is on standby. If the customer waiting effect is on standby (step T35-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step T35-4. The process is shifted to, if the customer waiting effect is not waiting (Step T35-3: No), the process is shifted to Step T35-11. In addition, regarding whether or not the customer waiting effect is on standby, it may be determined whether or not the waiting time for the customer waiting effect is set.

  In step T35-4, the overall CPU 142 performs an adjustment operation such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment by the player (a volume value notification image OG and a brightness value notification image KG described later are displayed on the image display device). It is determined whether or not the adjustment operation is in the acceptance period. If the adjustment operation is in the acceptance period (step T35-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step T35-16 to accept the adjustment operation. If it is not during the period (Step T34-4: No), the process proceeds to Step T35-5.

  In step T35-5, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the set waiting time for the customer waiting effect has elapsed. If the waiting time for the customer waiting effect has elapsed (step T35-5: Yes) )), The process proceeds to step T35-6, and if the waiting time for the customer waiting effect has not elapsed (step T35-5: No), the process proceeds to step T35-16.

  In step T35-6, the general CPU 142 sets the customer waiting effect production time (for example, 30 seconds), which is the customer waiting effect execution time, and in step T35-7, displays the customer waiting effect animation. The animation pattern information for the customer waiting effect is set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144. Thereby, the display list including the animation scene information of the animation pattern for the customer waiting effect is output to the image control unit 145, and the customer waiting effect (image) is displayed on the image display device.

  In step T35-8, the general CPU 142 sets a customer waiting effect start command in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. Thereby, the start command of the customer waiting effect is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) emit light in a mode corresponding to the customer waiting effect. Will be.

  In step T35-9, the supervisor CPU 142 performs a volume value reset process for resetting the current volume value to the initial value of the volume corresponding to the current adjustment mode. The process of resetting the volume value is the same as the process of resetting the volume value (step T6-2-14) of the liquid crystal control unit 141 shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. Is omitted.

  In step T3-2-10, the central CPU 142 performs a brightness value reset process for resetting the current brightness value to the initial brightness value corresponding to the current adjustment mode. Note that the brightness value reset processing is the same as the brightness value reset processing (step T6-3-13) of the liquid crystal control unit 141 shown in FIG. 84 and FIG. Is omitted.

  In step T35-11, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed, and if the customer waiting effect is being performed (step T35-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step T35-12. When it is not during the customer waiting effect (step T35-11: No), the process proceeds to step T35-16. As to whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed, it may be determined whether or not the effect time of the customer waiting effect is set.

  In step T35-12, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the effect time of the already-set customer waiting effect has elapsed. If the effect time of the customer waiting effect has elapsed (step T35-12: In Yes), the process is moved to step T35-13, and when the effect time of the customer waiting effect has not elapsed (step T35-12: No), the process is moved to step T35-16.

  In step T35-13, the general CPU 142 sets the standby time (for example, 60 seconds) of the customer waiting effect so as to again wait for the customer waiting effect. In step T35-14, the general CPU 142 sets the standby time in the general RAM 144. Clear animation pattern information for customer waiting production. As a result, a display list that does not include the animation scene information of the animation pattern waiting for the customer is output to the image control unit 145, and the effect (image) waiting for the customer is not displayed on the image display device.

  In step T35-15, the general CPU 142 sets a customer wait effect end command in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. As a result, the end command of the customer waiting effect is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and light emission in a mode corresponding to the customer waiting effect of the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74) is performed. Will end.

  In step T35-16, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the fluctuating effect has been started. If the fluctuating effect has been started (step T35-16: Yes), the overall CPU 142 shifts the processing to step T35-17, where the fluctuating effect is started. If the effect has not been started (step T35-16: No), the current customer waiting process ends.

  In step T35-17, the general CPU 142 stores the variable effect in the general RAM 144 assuming that the fluctuation effect is started based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 during the customer waiting state. The information relating to the customer waiting effect (standby time of the customer waiting effect, presentation time of the customer waiting effect, display information of the customer waiting effect, etc.) is cleared, and the current customer waiting process ends.

  As described above, when the state in which the cross key 19 is not operated during the waiting for the customer waiting effect continues for the waiting time (60 seconds) of the customer waiting effect, at the start of the customer waiting effect (immediately before), the current state is set. Since the process of resetting the volume value to the initial value of the volume corresponding to the current adjustment mode is performed, the effect sound (BGM) of the customer waiting effect is produced at a volume value smaller than the volume value intended by the gaming shop that has set the adjustment mode. , SE, etc.) are not output, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to a player waiting for a customer.

  Further, at the start of the customer waiting effect (immediately before), which is executed when the non-operation state of the cross key 19 continues during the waiting time of the customer waiting effect (60 seconds) during the waiting of the customer waiting effect, the current brightness value is set. Is reset to the initial value of the luminance corresponding to the current adjustment mode. For this reason, the backlight of the image display device and the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) have a brightness value lower than the intended brightness value of the game store that has set the adjustment mode. No light is emitted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in appealing power to a player in a customer waiting effect.

(Animation pattern setting processing of the liquid crystal control unit in the fourth embodiment)
FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating the animation pattern setting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 in the fourth embodiment.

  In step T37-1, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not an icon display command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144. If the command has been received (step T37-1: Yes), The process moves to step T37-2, and if not received (step T37-1: No), the process moves to step T37-3.

  In step T37-2, the overall CPU 142 determines an icon animation pattern from a group of icons for displaying the animation of the pending icon and the animation of the variable icon, and sets (sets) the icon in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144. Of animation pattern setting. Thereby, the display list including the animation scene information of the animation pattern of the icon is output to the image control unit 145, and the animation (image) of the hold icon and the fluctuating icon is displayed on the image display device.

  In step T37-3, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not the variable effect pattern command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the general RAM 144. If the command has been received (step T37-3: Yes), The process moves to step T37-4, and if not received (step T37-3: No), the process moves to step T37-5.

  In step T37-4, the general CPU 142 determines the animation pattern of the variable effect from the group of the variable effects for displaying the background animation and the character animation, and sets (sets) the variable pattern in a predetermined area of the general RAM 144. Of animation pattern setting. Thereby, the display list including the animation scene information of the animation pattern of the fluctuation effect is output to the image control unit 145, and the animation (image) of the fluctuation effect is displayed on the image display device.

  In step T37-5, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the symbol pattern command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144. If the symbol pattern command has been received (step T37-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step T37-5. The process moves to T37-6, and if not received (step T37-5: No), the process moves to step T37-7.

  In step T37-6, the general CPU 142 determines a pattern animation pattern from a group of effect symbols for displaying the effect symbol animation and the fourth symbol animation, and sets (sets) the pattern animation pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144. A setting process of a symbol animation pattern is performed. Thereby, the display list including the animation scene information of the animation pattern of the symbol is output to the image control unit 145, and the animation (image) of the variable display of the effect symbol is displayed on the image display device.

  In step T37-7, the central control CPU 142 determines whether or not the command for the announcement effect has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the general RAM 144, and when the command has been received (step T37-7: Yes), The process moves to step T37-8, and if not received (step T37-7: No), the process moves to step T37-9.

  In step T37-8, the general CPU 142 displays a notice effect (foreseeing notice effect, one-shot notice effect, a normal notice effect, etc.) for notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit and a degree of expectation of the big hit. The animation pattern of the announcement effect is determined from the group of the announcement effect, and the animation pattern of the announcement effect to be set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144 is performed. Thereby, the display list including the animation scene information of the animation pattern of the announcement effect is output to the image control unit 145, and the animation (image) of the announcement effect is displayed on the image display device.

  In step T37-9, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not an opening effect command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144. If the command has been received (step T37-9: Yes), The process moves to step T37-10, and if not received (step T37-9: No), the process moves to step T37-11.

  In step T37-10, the overall CPU 142 determines the opening effect animation pattern from the group of opening effects for displaying the jackpot opening effect, and sets (sets) the opening effect animation pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144. Is set. Thereby, the display list including the animation scene information of the animation pattern of the opening effect is output to the image control unit 145, and the animation (image) of the jackpot opening effect is displayed on the image display device.

  In step T37-11, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not a command for a round effect has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the general RAM 144. If the command has been received (step T37-11: Yes), The process moves to step T37-12, and if not received (step T37-11: No), the process moves to step T37-13.

  In step T37-12, the general CPU 142 determines an animation pattern of a round effect from a group of round effects for displaying a jackpot round effect, and sets (sets) the animation pattern of the round effect in a predetermined area of the general RAM 144. Is set. Thereby, the display list including the animation scene information of the animation pattern of the round effect is output to the image control unit 145, and the animation (image) of the round effect of the jackpot is displayed on the image display device.

  In step T37-13, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not an ending effect command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144. If the command has been received (step T37-13: Yes), The process moves to step T37-14, and if not received (step T37-13: No), the current animation pattern setting process ends.

  In step T37-14, the overall CPU 142 determines an ending effect animation pattern from the ending effect group for displaying the jackpot ending effect, and sets (sets) the ending effect animation pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144. Is determined, and the current animation pattern setting process ends. Thereby, the display list including the animation scene information of the ending effect animation pattern is output to the image control unit 145, and the big hit ending effect animation (image) is displayed on the image display device.

(Operation effect processing of the liquid crystal control unit in the fourth embodiment)
FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating an operation effecting process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, in step T39-1, the general CPU 142 refers to the reception buffer of the general RAM 144 to determine whether or not a command for an operation effect has been received, and when the command has been received (step T39-1: Yes), Shifts the processing to step T39-2, and if not received (step T39-1: No), shifts the processing to step T39-4.

  In step T39-2, the overall CPU 142 stores information on the operation effect corresponding to the operation effect effect pattern specified by the received operation effect command (operation effect effect mode, operation promotion effect type, operation of the effect button 17). Is stored, and in step T39-3, a standby time until an effective period in which the operation of the effect button 17 is made effective is set, and the current operation effect process is ended.

  In step T39-4, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the validity period is waiting. If the validity period is waiting (step T39-4: Yes), the overall CPU 142 shifts the processing to step T39-5 and waits. If not (Step T39-4: No), the process moves to Step T39-9. It should be noted that whether or not the standby period of the valid period is set may be determined by determining whether or not the standby period of the valid period is set.

  In step T39-5, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the waiting time of the valid period has elapsed. If the waiting time has elapsed (step T39-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step T39-6. If the standby time has not elapsed (step T39-5: No), the current operation effect processing is ended.

  In step T39-6, the general CPU 142 sets the duration of the effective period for which the operation of the effect button 17 is effective and starts the effective period. In step T39-7, the operation included in the operation effect information described above. An operation promotion animation pattern corresponding to the type of promotion effect is set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 144. As a result, a display list including the animation scene information of the operation promotion animation pattern is output to the image control unit 145, and the operation promotion animation (the image imitating the production button 17) for promoting the operation of the production button 17 by the player is provided. ) Will be displayed on the image display device.

  In step T39-8, the general CPU 142 sets an operation promotion start command corresponding to the type of operation promotion effect included in the operation effect information described above in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144, and ends the current operation effect process. I do. As a result, the operation promotion start command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and a process for causing the effect button 17 to emit light in a predetermined mode or to operate the effect button 17 in a predetermined mode is performed. .

  In step T39-9, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the validity period in which the operation of the effect button 17 is valid, and if the validity period is in effect (step T39-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step T39. The process proceeds to -10, and if not during the valid period (step T39-9: No), the current operation effect process is ended.

  In step T39-10, the central CPU 142 determines whether or not the effect button 17 has been operated, that is, whether or not a detection signal (operation signal) from the effect button detection switch 17a has been input. If there is no (Step T39-10: No), the process proceeds to Step T39-12, and if there is an operation of the effect button 17 (Step T39-10: Yes), in Step T39-11, The duration of the valid period is cleared to end the valid period, and the process proceeds to step T39-13.

  In step T39-12, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not the duration of the valid period has elapsed. If the duration has elapsed (step T39-12: Yes), the general CPU 142 shifts the processing to step T39-13. If the continuation time has not elapsed (step T39-12: No), the current operation effect processing is ended.

  In step T39-13, the supervisor CPU 142 clears the operation promotion animation pattern stored in the supervisor RAM 144. As a result, a display list that does not include the animation scene information of the operation promotion animation pattern is output to the image control unit 145, and the animation (image) of the operation promotion effect is not displayed on the image display device.

  In step T39-14, the general CPU 142 sets an operation promotion end command in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. As a result, the operation promotion end command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and processing for stopping the emission of the effect button 17 and returning the effect button 17 to the initial position is performed.

  In step T39-15, the general CPU 142 sets an animation pattern of the operation effect corresponding to the operation mode of the operation effect included in the information of the operation effect in the predetermined area of the general RAM 144. As a result, the display list including the animation scene information of the animation pattern of the operation effect is output to the image control unit 145, and the animation (image) of the operation effect indicating the expectation of the jackpot is displayed on the image display device. Become.

  In step T39-16, the general CPU 142 sets an operation effect command corresponding to the operation effect effect mode included in the operation effect information described above, and ends the current operation effect process. As a result, a command for an operation effect is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and processing for causing the movable effect member 73 to emit light in a predetermined mode or to operate in a predetermined mode is performed.

(Fifth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  In the fifth embodiment, in relation to the fourth embodiment, a menu screen is displayed by operating the cross key 19, and an item of volume adjustment and an item of brightness adjustment are selected (via) from the menu screen. In that volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are performed. Therefore, the description of the same portions as those in the fourth embodiment will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

(Main Processing of Liquid Crystal Control Unit in Fifth Embodiment)
FIG. 149 is a flowchart illustrating the V blank interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 141 according to the fifth embodiment. In this flowchart, the volume setting process (step T33) and the brightness setting process (step T34) in the V blank interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 shown in FIG. 141 are replaced with an operation receiving process (step T33A). Therefore, the description of the other steps is omitted.

(Operation Accepting Process of Liquid Crystal Control Unit in Fifth Embodiment)
FIG. 150 and FIG. 151 are flowcharts illustrating an operation receiving process of the liquid crystal control unit 141 in the fifth embodiment.

  First, the supervising CPU 142 refers to the third determination table shown in FIG. 136 in step T33A-1 to determine whether or not the current state is a period during which an operation for enabling a menu screen to be displayed on the image display device is possible. Is determined, if it is the period during which the operation can be accepted (step T33A-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-2, and if it is not the period during which the operation can be accepted (step T33A-1: No), The process is moved to Step T33A-42.

  In step T33A-2, the central processing CPU 142 determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the general RAM 144 is “0”. If the third processing number is “0” (step T33A-2). -2: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-3, and if the third process number is not "0" (step T33A-2: No), the process proceeds to step T33A-8. The “third process number” is a process number indicating the progress stage of the menu operation, and is reset to “0” in the above-described initialization process of step T2 in FIG. 140.

  In step T33A-3, the general CPU 142 sets the display information of the menu operation guide image in a display list, and sets a menu operation guide command in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. Thus, the display list including the display information of the menu operation guide image is transmitted to the image control unit 145, and the process for displaying the menu operation guide image MAG on the image display device is performed. Further, a command for guiding a menu operation is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and a process for causing the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 to emit light is performed.

  In step T33A-4, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not a menu display operation has been performed based on whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the up, down, left, and right buttons has been input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If there is (Step T33A-4: Yes), the process proceeds to Step T33A-5, and if there is no menu display operation (Step T33A-4: No), the current operation accepting process ends. I do.

  In step T33A-5, the central CPU 142 sets display information of the menu screen (image) in place of the display information of the guide image of the menu operation already set in the display list, and proceeds to step T33A-6. Move. Accordingly, a display list including display information of the menu screen (image) is transmitted to the image control unit 145, and a process for displaying the menu screen on the image display device is performed.

  In step T33A-6, the general CPU 142 sets a monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) of the operation interval for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19, and in step T33A-7, the control CPU 144 stores the operation time in the general RAM 144. “1” is set to the process number of No. 3 and the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step T33A-8, the central processing CPU 142 determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the general RAM 144 is “1”, and when the third processing number is “1” (step T33A-8). If the third process number is not “1” (step T33A-8: No), the process proceeds to step T33A-24.

  In step T33A-9, the overall CPU 142 starts volume adjustment based on whether or not a detection signal for selecting a volume adjustment item in the menu screen displayed on the image display device is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. It is determined whether or not an operation has been performed. If there has been an operation for starting volume adjustment (step T33A-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-10, and if there has been no operation for starting volume adjustment (step T33A). In (-9: No), the process moves to step T33A-13.

  In step T33A-10, the supervisor CPU 142 sets display information on the volume adjustment screen instead of the display information on the menu screen (image) already set in the display list. Thereby, the display list including the display information of the volume adjustment screen is transmitted to the image control unit 145, and the process for displaying the background image of the volume adjustment and the notification image of the volume value indicating the current volume value on the image display device is performed. Will be performed.

  In step T33A-11, the overall CPU 142 clears the operation interval monitoring time for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19, and in step T33A-12, adds the third processing number stored in the overall RAM 144 to “ "2" is set, and the current operation accepting process ends. Thus, the operation interval of the cross key 19 is not monitored during the volume adjustment (display of the volume adjustment screen).

  In step T33A-13, the overall CPU 142 starts the brightness adjustment based on whether or not a detection signal for selecting an item of the brightness adjustment in the menu screen displayed on the image display device is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. It is determined whether or not an operation has been performed. If there has been an operation for starting brightness adjustment (step T33A-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-14, and if there has been no operation for starting brightness adjustment (step T33A). In (-13: No), the process moves to step T33A-17.

  In step T33A-14, the central CPU 142 sets display information on the luminance adjustment screen instead of the display information on the menu screen (image) already set in the display list. As a result, the display list including the display information of the brightness adjustment screen is transmitted to the image control unit 145, and the process for displaying the background image of the brightness adjustment and the notification image of the brightness value indicating the current brightness value on the image display device is performed. Will be performed.

  In step T33A-15, the general CPU 142 clears the operation interval monitoring time for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19, and in step T33A-16, adds the third processing number stored in the general RAM 144 to “ "3" is set, and the current operation accepting process ends. Thus, the operation interval of the cross key 19 is not monitored during the brightness adjustment.

  In step T33A-17, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether the operation interval monitoring time has elapsed. If the operation interval monitoring time has elapsed (step T33A-17: Yes), the overall CPU 142 proceeds to step T33A-20. The process is shifted, and if the operation interval monitoring time has not elapsed (Step T33A-17: No), the process is shifted to Step T33A-18.

  In step T33A-18, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not a detection signal for selecting an end item in the menu screen displayed on the image display device has been input from the cross key detection switch 19a. It is determined whether or not there is a menu ending operation. If there is a menu ending operation (step T33A-18: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-19, and if there is no menu ending operation (step T33A-18: No) In), the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step T33A-19, the supervisor CPU 142 clears the monitoring time of the operation interval, and in step T33A-20, clears the display information of the menu screen already set in the display list. Accordingly, a display list that does not include the display information of the menu screen is transmitted to the image control unit 145, and the normal screen in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed on the image display device is displayed.

  In step T33A-21, the central control CPU 142 sets “0” to the third process number stored in the central RAM 144, and in step T33A-22, determines whether or not the customer waiting effect is currently waiting. If it is determined that the customer waiting effect is waiting (step T33A-22: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-23, and if the customer waiting effect is not waiting (step T33A-22: No), Then, the current operation receiving process ends.

  In step T33A-23, the supervisor CPU 142 sets a waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) for the customer waiting effect, and ends the current operation accepting process. Thereby, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set in the customer waiting process of step T35 in FIG. 141 described above is reset. In other words, the customer waiting effect is executed after a waiting time (60 seconds) for the customer waiting effect from the time when the menu is terminated in the operation accepting process.

  In step T33A-24, the central processing CPU 142 determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the general RAM 144 is “2”, and when the third processing number is “2” (step T33A). If the third process number is not “2” (step T33A-24: No), the process proceeds to step T33A-33.

  In step T33A-25, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the left button for decreasing the volume value in the volume adjustment screen displayed on the image display device is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. It is determined whether or not an operation of decreasing the volume has been performed, and if an operation of decreasing the volume has been performed (step T33A-25: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-26, and the operation of decreasing the volume is performed. If not (step T33A-25: No), the process moves to step T33A-27.

  In step T33A-26, the overall CPU 142 performs a process of decreasing the volume, and ends the current operation accepting process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current volume value is larger than the lower limit of the adjustment range of the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode, and if not larger than the lower limit, without subtracting the volume value. The process of decreasing the volume this time is ended.

  On the other hand, if the current volume value is larger than the lower limit value, the volume value is subtracted by 1 and a notification signal of the volume value corresponding to the volume value after the subtraction is output to the voice control unit 148. As a result, the volume value corresponding to the volume value notification signal is set in the voice control unit 148 as the volume value of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the voice output device 9.

  The display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value after the subtraction is set in a display list. Thereby, the display list including the display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value after the subtraction is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value is displayed on the image display device. Will be done.

  In step T33A-27, the centralized CPU 142 determines whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the right button for increasing the volume value in the volume adjustment screen displayed on the image display device is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. It is determined whether or not an operation of increasing the volume has been performed, and if an operation of increasing the volume has been performed (step T33A-27: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-28, and the operation of increasing the volume is determined. If not (step T33A-27: No), the process moves to step T33A-29.

  In step T33A-28, the overall CPU 142 performs a process of increasing the volume, and ends the current operation accepting process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current volume value is smaller than the upper limit value of the adjustment range of the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode.If the current volume value is not smaller than the upper limit value, the volume value is not increased. The process of increasing the volume this time is ended.

  On the other hand, when the current volume value is smaller than the upper limit value, the volume value is incremented by 1 and a notification signal of the volume value corresponding to the volume value after the addition is output to the audio control unit 148. As a result, the volume value corresponding to the volume value notification signal is set in the voice control unit 148 as the volume value of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the voice output device 9.

  The display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value after the addition is set in the display list. As a result, a display list including display information of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the volume value after the addition is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the current volume value is displayed on the image display device. Will be done.

  In step T33A-29, the overall CPU 142 performs an operation of returning based on whether or not a detection signal for selecting an item of “return” in the volume adjustment screen displayed on the image display device is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. It is determined whether or not there is a return operation. If there is a return operation (step T33A-29: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-30, and if there is no return operation (step T33A-29: No). , The current operation accepting process ends.

  In step T33A-30, the central CPU 142 sets display information on the menu screen in the display list instead of the display information on the volume adjustment screen already set in the display list. Thus, the display list including the display information of the menu screen is transmitted to the image control unit 145, and the processing for displaying the menu screen on the image display device is performed.

  In step T33A-31, the overall CPU 142 sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19, and in step T33A-32, the central CPU 142 stores the operation interval monitoring time. “1” is set to the process number of No. 3 and the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step T33A-33, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the overall RAM 142 is “3”, and when the third processing number is “3” (step T33A-33). In step (-33: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-34. If the third process number is not "3" (step T33A-33: No), the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step T33A-34, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the down button for lowering the brightness in the brightness adjustment screen displayed on the image display device is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. It is determined whether or not there has been an operation for lowering the luminance, and if there has been an operation for lowering the luminance (step T33A-34: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-35, and there has been no operation for lowering the luminance. If it has (Step T33A-34: No), the processing is moved to Step T33A-36.

  In step T33A-35, the central CPU 142 performs the process of decreasing the luminance, and ends the current operation accepting process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current brightness value is larger than the lower limit value of the adjustment range of the brightness value corresponding to the adjustment mode. If not, the brightness value is reduced (decreased). The processing of the current brightness reduction is ended without causing the processing to be performed.

  On the other hand, when the current brightness value is larger than the lower limit value, the brightness value is subtracted by 1 and a notification signal of the brightness value corresponding to the brightness value after the subtraction is output to the image control unit 145. As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.

  Further, a notification command of a luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the subtraction is set in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. Thereby, the notification command of the brightness value is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the notification command of the brightness value is set for the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74). The luminance value is set in the lamp control unit 150.

  Further, the display information of the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the subtraction is set in a display list. Thereby, a display list including display information of the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the subtraction is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the current luminance value is displayed on the image display device. Will be done.

  In step T33A-36, the general CPU 142 determines whether or not a detection signal based on the operation of the up button for increasing the luminance in the luminance adjustment screen displayed on the image display device is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. It is determined whether or not there has been an operation for increasing the brightness, and if there has been an operation for increasing the brightness (step T33A-36: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-37, and there has been no operation for increasing the brightness. If it has (Step T33A-36: No), the processing is moved to Step T33A-38.

  In step T33A-37, the central CPU 142 performs the process of increasing the luminance, and ends the current operation accepting process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current brightness value is smaller than the upper limit value of the adjustment range of the volume value corresponding to the adjustment mode. If the current brightness value is not smaller than the upper limit value, the brightness value is increased (increased). The process for increasing the luminance this time is ended without causing the processing to be performed.

  On the other hand, when the current luminance value is smaller than the upper limit value, the luminance value is incremented by 1 and a notification signal of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the addition is output to the image control unit 145. As a result, the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value notification signal is set in the image control unit 145 as the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device.

  Further, a notification command of a luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the addition is set in the transmission buffer of the general RAM 144. Thereby, the notification command of the brightness value is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the brightness value corresponding to the notification command of the brightness value is set for the lamps (LEDs) of the various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74). The luminance value is set in the lamp control unit 150.

  Further, display information of a notification image of a luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the addition is set in a display list. As a result, a display list including display information of the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the luminance value after the addition is output to the image control unit 145, and the notification image of the luminance value corresponding to the current luminance value is displayed on the image display device. Will be done.

  In step T33A-38, the overall CPU 142 performs an operation of returning based on whether or not a detection signal for selecting a return item in the luminance adjustment screen displayed on the image display device is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. It is determined whether or not there is a return operation. If there is a return operation (step T33A-38: Yes), the process proceeds to step T33A-39, and if there is no return operation (step T33A-38: No). , The current operation accepting process ends.

  In step T33A-39, the central CPU 142 sets display information on the menu screen (image) in place of the display information on the volume adjustment screen or the luminance adjustment screen already set on the display list. Thus, the display list including the display information of the menu screen is transmitted to the image control unit 145, and the processing for displaying the menu screen on the image display device is performed.

  In step T33A-40, the general CPU 142 sets an operation interval monitoring time (for example, 3 seconds) for monitoring the operation interval of the cross key 19, and in step T33A-41, the control CPU 142 stores the operation time in the general RAM 142. “1” is set to the process number of No. 3 and the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step T33A-42, the overall CPU 142 determines whether or not the third processing number stored in the overall RAM 142 is “0”. If the third processing number is not “0” (step T33A-42). (42: No), the process proceeds to step T33A-43, and if the third process number is “0” (step T33A-42: Yes), the current operation accepting process ends.

  In step T33A-43, the centralized CPU 142 sets display information on the menu screen set in the display list (display information on the menu screen, display information on the volume adjustment screen, display information on the brightness adjustment screen, and the like). Clear As a result, a display list that does not include the display information of the menu-based screen is transmitted to the image control unit 145, and the effect design 70a is displayed on the image display device in a stationary display or a variable display, or for a customer waiting effect. Is displayed on the screen of the customer waiting effect in which the image is displayed.

  In step T33A-44, the overall CPU 142 clears the operation interval monitoring time, sets the third process number stored in the overall RAM 144 to “0” in step T33A-45, and executes the current operation accepting process. To end. As a result, the volume value of the production sound (game sounds such as BGM and SE) output from the audio output device 9 and the luminance value of the backlight of the image display device and the lamp (LED) of various lighting devices cannot be immediately adjusted. State. That is, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment cannot be performed unless the item of the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is selected after the menu screen is displayed.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the basic control and operation of the gaming machine 1 are the same as those of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. Therefore, even in the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the operation of the gaming machine at the time of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment using the changeover switch 22 and the cross key 19 is the same as in FIGS. 111 to 119 and FIG. 137. It goes without saying that it works. Further, the contents of the third embodiment may be applied to the present embodiment.

(Modification of circuit configuration of effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 152, a description will be given of a modification of the circuit configuration and control functions of the effect control board 130. FIG. 152A is a block diagram illustrating a modification of the circuit configuration of the effect control board 130 according to the modification, and FIG. 152B is a block diagram illustrating a control function of the sub-control unit 135.

  In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), in relation to the first to fifth embodiments, the effect control board 130 does not include the effect control unit 130m and the display control unit 140, but the effect is effected. The difference is that the control unit 130m and the display control unit 140 are integrated into a single sub-control unit 135. Therefore, the description of the same portions as those in the first to fifth embodiments will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

  The sub-control unit 135 includes a sub-CPU 135a for performing arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 135b in which an effect control program is stored, and a sub-RAM 135c as a work area during the arithmetic processing. The effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, A detection signal (operation signal) from the changeover switch 22 is input.

  The sub CPU 135a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 135b, and uses the sub RAM 135c as a work area while receiving commands received from the main control board 110 and input from each detection switch. In response to the detected signal, the audio control unit 148, the image control unit 145, and the lamp control unit 150 perform control to execute various effects (output data and commands).

  As shown in FIG. 152 (b), the functional configuration of the sub-control unit 135 includes a first control unit that performs processing equivalent to the control content of the above-described effect control unit 130m, and a control content of the liquid crystal control unit 141 described above. It is divided into a second control unit that performs a corresponding process.

  The first control unit transfers, to the second control unit, a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, a customer waiting command, various error designation commands, and the like, among the commands received from the main control board 110 via the sub RAM 135c. The command analysis (corresponding to the command analysis processing in FIG. 139) is performed.

  In addition, information updating that updates information stored in the sub RAM 135c based on the game state designation command received from the main control board 110, various storage designation commands, and the like (the game state update process and the hold information update process in FIG. 139) Is performed).

  Furthermore, the contents (type, mode, etc.) of various effects based on the starting opening winning command, the fluctuation pattern specifying command, the effect design specifying command, the opening specifying command, the round specifying command, the ending specifying command, etc. received from the main control board 110. Is determined, and the determination information is passed to the second control unit (a look-ahead effect determination process, a variable effect pattern determination process, a symbol pattern determination process, a preview effect determination process 1, a preview effect determination process 2, a preview effect determination process in FIG. 139). Decision process 3, equivalent to a jackpot effect decision process).

  The second control unit performs notification control (corresponding to a notification process of an occurrence event in FIG. 141) for notifying the occurrence of various events based on a reception command passed from the first control unit via the sub RAM 135c. Do.

  In addition, production control for causing the image control unit 145 and the voice control unit 148 to perform production based on the production decision information passed from the first control unit and the detection signal from the production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 141). Customer waiting processing, animation pattern setting processing, sound setting processing, operation production processing, production mode change processing, animation control processing, display list generation / output, drawing command processing, sound list generation / output, sound output command (Equivalent to processing, etc.).

  Further, adjustment control for adjusting the output amount (volume, luminance) of the effect in the image display device, various lighting devices, and the audio output device 9 based on the detection signal from the cross key detection switch 19a (the mode switching process in FIG. , Brightness setting process, and operation receiving process in FIG. 149).

  In this manner, instead of the effect control unit 130m and the display control unit 140, the sub-control unit 135 equipped with the control function of the effect control unit 130m and the control function of the display control unit 140 is integrated (CPU, ROM, RAM By reducing the number), the number of electronic components mounted on the effect control board 130 can be reduced, and the development cost and the development time can be reduced.

  In the above-described first to fifth embodiments and various modifications, the initial value of the volume and the initial value of the luminance set by operating the changeover switch 22 are changed by operating the cross key 19. It is also possible to disable the volume adjustment and the luminance adjustment by the cross key 19 and change the volume value and the luminance value set by the switch position of the switch 22 when the power is turned on (restored) by operating the switch 22 thereafter. Alternatively, assuming that the changeover switch 22 is not provided, the volume (initial) value and the luminance (initial) value that are fixedly set when the power is turned on (restored) may be changed by operating the cross key 19.

  When the operation of the cross key 19 and the operation of the changeover switch 22 during the display of the volume value notification image are performed simultaneously, the volume of the changeover switch 22 is changed more than the change of the sound volume value by the operation of the cross key 19. The setting of the initial value may be performed with priority, or the change of the volume value by operating the cross key 19 may be performed with priority over the setting of the initial value of the volume by operating the changeover switch 22. It may be.

  In addition, although the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment are performed using the cross key 19 and the effect button 17, an infrared sensor for detecting an operation such as a hand holding of the player and an infrared sensor for detecting a predetermined operation of the player are provided. The sound volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be performed using a detection element such as a touch panel that can detect an input such as an operation or operation of the player.

  Further, the setting of the power saving mode is switched by the changeover switch 22. However, a setting switch of the power saving mode different from the changeover switch 22 is provided, and the setting of the power saving mode is switched by operating the setting switch of the power saving mode. It may be. Further, the adjustment may be disabled during the power saving mode (transition period of the power saving mode), so that the volume control and the brightness adjustment using the cross key 19 during that period may not be performed.

  When the setting of the power saving mode is ON by the changeover switch 22 or the setting switch of the power saving mode (the adjustment modes 6 to A in FIG. 71), the volume can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. However, the volume may not be adjusted when the power saving mode is actually controlled.

  Further, the volume can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 while the notification image of the volume value is displayed, but the function of the cross key 19 may be changed according to the state of the game, For example, the volume control and the brightness adjustment can be performed by operating the cross key 19 during the adjustable period, and the effect mode and the type of BGM output from the audio output device 9 can be changed by operating the cross key 19 during the uncontrollable period. You may make it changeable.

  Further, the function of the cross key 19 may be changed according to the game state (normal game state, probability variation state). For example, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment can be performed by operating the cross key 19 in the normal game state. By operating the cross key 19 during the probability fluctuation state (including the case of the time saving game state and the case of not the time saving game state), the effect mode and the type of BGM output from the audio output device 9 can be changed. Is also good.

  Even when the volume value is set to the initial value “0” of the volume in the adjustment mode 1 by operating the changeover switch 22, if an important event occurs, the important event is output from the audio output device 9. Is output at a fixed volume value (volume of 120%), but if the volume value is set to “0” by operating the changeover switch 22, the sound output device 9 produces an effect. Neither a sound nor a notification sound of an important event may be output, or a non-audible sound having a volume of 0% may be output. If the volume value is changed by operating the cross key 19 after setting the adjustment mode 1 and then the volume value is returned to “0” again, the notification sound of the important event is changed to the fixed volume value (volume 120%).

  Further, the number of types of volume values that can be set by operating the cross key 19 may be set to be larger than the types of notification images of volume values. It is preferable to display the value type. For example, there are five types of the notification image of the volume value corresponding to the minimum volume and the notification image 5 of the volume value corresponding to the maximum volume, and the type of the volume value corresponds to the minimum volume (mute). If there are eight types of volume values “0” to “7” corresponding to the maximum volume, the notification image 1 of the volume value is displayed when the volume value is set to “0” to “3”. In the case of volume values "4" to "7", notification images 2 to 5 of the volume values may be displayed, respectively. Further, assuming that there are five types of volume value notification images in the same manner as described above, and the type of volume values is 10 types from a volume value “0” corresponding to the minimum volume to a volume value “9” corresponding to the maximum volume, It is preferable that two types of volume values are associated with the notification image of one volume value, and the notification images 1 to 5 of the volume value are sequentially displayed every time the volume value increases in two steps. In this way, it is possible to set a larger volume value than the type of the volume value notification image, and it is possible to notify the approximate volume value by the volume value notification image.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a display means for displaying an image relating to a game and a display control means for updating an image displayed on the display means at a predetermined update timing. And the display means executes the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and when the variable display has a special result, a special game advantageous to the player can be generated. Is common. In such a gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-100269), a predetermined valid period is generated during the change display of the identification information, and the operation unit such as the effect button is operated during the valid period. On the basis of this, there has been a device that activates the effect means (movable object) to execute the notification effect. However, there is room for improvement in the execution mode of the notification effect, and there is a problem that interest in the game is low.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, a display unit for displaying an effect image related to a game, and an image display unit for controlling display of the effect image on the display unit And input detection means capable of detecting a predetermined input from a player, a validity period generating means for generating a validity period in the course of the game, and a predetermined notification to the effect means. Effect executing means for executing an effect, wherein the image display means is configured to update an effect image displayed on the display means every time an update timing of a predetermined frame is reached, and the effect executing means includes: When a predetermined input is detected by the input detection means during the occurrence of the valid period, the notification effect is started at a frame update timing corresponding to the detection of the predetermined input, and When the predetermined input during occurrence period is not detected, so as to initiate the notification effect at the update timing of the frame corresponding to the non-detection of said predetermined input.

  By doing so, the effect of the notification effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  ◆ In addition, a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In general, a variable display of identification information is executed by an image display means based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and when the variable display has a special result, a special game advantageous to a player can be generated. It is. In such a gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-039662), there is a problem in that there is little devising to increase the appealing power of the player for the notification effect, and it is not possible to improve the interest in the game. .

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and the secondary control for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means. Means, and the slave control means, the image display means for displaying an effect image related to the game on the display means, the effect execution means for causing the effect means to execute a predetermined notification effect in the course of the game, The image display means is configured to update an effect image displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and the effect execution means is configured to execute a first notification effect. Effect producing means, and second effect executing means for executing a second information effect different from the first information effect, wherein the first effect executing means displays a predetermined effect image on the display means. The first notification effect is started at a frame update timing, and the second effect execution means starts the second notification effect at a frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command transmitted from the main control unit. It is supposed to.

  By doing so, it is possible to increase the appeal of the player for the notification effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

  ◆ In addition, a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In general, a variable display of identification information is executed by an image display means based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and when the variable display has a special result, a special game advantageous to a player can be generated. It is. In such a gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-039662), there is a problem in that there is little devising to increase the appealing power of the player for the notification effect, and it is not possible to improve the interest in the game. .

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and the secondary control for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means. Means, and input detection means for detecting a predetermined input from a player, wherein the slave control means comprises: an image display means for displaying an effect image relating to the game on a display means; A validity period generating means for generating a validity period, and an effect executing means for causing the effecting means to execute a predetermined notification effect, wherein the image display means changes the display means every time a predetermined frame is updated. An effect image to be displayed is configured to be updated, and the effect execution means includes a first effect execution means for executing a first notification effect accompanied by an occurrence of the effective period, and a first effect execution means which does not involve the occurrence of the effective period. A second effect execution means for executing a second notification effect, wherein the first effect execution means is adapted to detect the predetermined input when a predetermined input is detected during the occurrence of the valid period. The first notification effect is started at an update timing of a corresponding frame, and when a predetermined input is not detected during the occurrence of the valid period, the first notification effect is output at a frame update timing corresponding to non-detection of the predetermined input. The first notification effect is started, and the second effect execution means starts the second notification effect at an update timing of a frame corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command transmitted from the main control means.

  By doing so, it is possible to increase the appeal of the player for the notification effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

  ◆ In addition, a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In general, a variable display of identification information is executed by an image display means based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and when the variable display has a special result, a special game advantageous to a player can be generated. It is. In such a gaming machine (for example, JP-A-2014-039662), it is difficult to say that the notification effect is executed at a timing according to the progress of the game, and it is not possible to improve the interest of the game. There is a problem.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and the secondary control for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means. Means for executing a variable display of the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of the start condition, and performing a special game advantageous to the player when the variable display has a special result. The means comprises: an image display means for displaying an effect image relating to a game on the display means; and an effect execution means for causing the effect means to execute a predetermined notification effect.The image display means includes a timing for updating a predetermined frame. The first effect executing means is configured to update the effect image displayed on the display means each time the first effect effect is executed during the execution of the variable display. A second effect execution means for executing a second notification effect during execution of the special game, wherein the first effect execution means is configured to execute the second effect at a timing of updating a frame in which a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means. The first notification effect is started, and the second effect execution means starts the second notification effect at an update timing of a frame corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command transmitted from the main control means.

  By doing so, it is possible to increase the appeal of the player for the notification effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

  ◆ In addition, a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, includes a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a dependent control means for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means. In general, a variable display of identification information is executed by an image display means based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and when the variable display has a special result, a special game advantageous to a player can be generated. It is. In such a gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-039662), there is a problem in that there is little devising to increase the appealing power of the player for the notification effect, and it is not possible to improve the interest in the game. .

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, display means for displaying an effect image relating to a game, and display control means for displaying the effect image on the display means The gaming machine further comprises: an effect executing means for causing the effect means to execute a predetermined notification effect in the course of the game, wherein the display control means displays the effect on the display means every time a predetermined frame is updated. An image is updated, and the effect executing means starts the predetermined notification effect at an update timing of a frame in which a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means.

  By doing so, it is possible to increase the appeal of the player for the notification effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). Volume value setting means (production control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value, and a predetermined selection operation (volume adjustment item, luminance adjustment item) by a predetermined selection operation (cross key 19). And / or operation of the effect button 17), a selected image (menu screen) to be displayed on a predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71). ) And The selected image display means can display the selected image including a volume item (volume adjustment item) related to the setting of the volume value as the predetermined option, and the volume value setting means includes: The volume value can be set based on a selection operation for selecting the item of the volume during the display of the selected image.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). Volume value setting means (produce control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value, and satisfying a predetermined condition (the volume can be adjusted or not, and the adjustment can be performed during a period). And a guide notification unit for providing a guide notification indicating that the volume value can be set (display of a volume adjustment guide image, light emission of left and right buttons of the cross key 19) based on the volume value. The setting means is executing the guidance notification Based on that the predetermined operation unit is operated, so that it is possible set the volume value.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). A second volume value setting means (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting means to a predetermined volume value on the basis of the second volume value setting means. The first operation unit is in the first operation state (the switch shown in FIG. 71). When the positions are 0 to A and the switch positions are 0 to 5 in FIG. 74, the volume value can be set, and the first operation unit is in a second operation state different from the first operation state (FIG. 71). , And the switch positions 6 to F in FIG. 74), the volume value cannot be set.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). And a second volume value setting unit (production control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit to a predetermined volume value based on the game sound. In progress (while displaying special symbols, And the like) to output the effect sound from the sound output unit. If the volume value is set by the first volume value setting means during the output of the effect sound, the effect sound being output is newly set. The volume is changed to a volume corresponding to the volume value.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). A second volume value setting unit (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit to a predetermined volume value based on the first volume value setting unit; Left or right button of the four-way controller 19 during the period Volume information notifying means (effect control) for displaying a notification image of the volume value indicating the current volume value on a predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71) based on the operation. The second volume value setting means sets the volume value in response to the operation when the second operation unit is operated during the display of the volume value notification image. The volume value notifying unit, when the volume value is set by the second volume value setting unit while the notification image of the volume value is being displayed, notifies the volume value indicating the newly set volume value. An image is displayed on the predetermined display unit, and when the volume value is set by the first volume value setting unit while the notification image of the volume value is being displayed, a volume indicating the newly set volume value Do not display the value notification image on the predetermined display unit Unishi to have.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). A second volume value setting unit (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit to a predetermined volume value based on the first volume value setting unit; Left or right button of the four-way controller 19 during the period Volume information notifying means (effect control) for displaying a notification image of the volume value indicating the current volume value on a predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71) based on the operation. The second volume value setting means sets the volume value in response to the operation when the second operation unit is operated during the display of the volume value notification image. When the volume value is set during the display of the volume value notification image, the volume value notification unit determines whether the volume value is set by the first volume value setting unit or the second volume value setting unit. Regardless of the setting, the notification image of the sound volume value indicating the newly set sound volume value is displayed on the predetermined display unit.

  A sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound; and a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit according to a game state. , The volume value of the effect sound output from the sound output unit based on the operation of the first operation unit (the changeover switch 22), the volume value being one of a plurality of volume values (the initial value of the volume). The volume value set by the first volume value setting means is set to a predetermined value based on an operation of a first volume value setting means (display control section 140) for setting the crab and a second operation section (cross key 19). The second volume value setting means (production control board 130) for setting the volume value and the establishment of a predetermined display condition (the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated during the period in which the volume can be adjusted). A predetermined display unit (the first image display device 7). Or a volume value notifying unit (effect control board 130) for displaying a notification image of the volume value indicating the current volume value on the second image display device 71), and the second volume value setting unit includes the volume value. When the second operation unit is operated during the display of the notification image, the volume value is set in accordance with the operation, and the volume value notification unit is configured to display the second volume during the display of the volume value notification image. (2) When the sound volume value is set by the sound volume value setting means, a notification image of the sound volume value indicating the newly set sound volume value is displayed on the predetermined display unit, and during the display of the notification image of the sound volume value. When the volume value is set by the first volume value setting means, a notification image of the volume value indicating the newly set volume value is displayed on the predetermined display unit.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). A second volume value setting unit (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit to a predetermined volume value based on the first volume value setting unit; Left or right button of the four-way controller 19 during the period Volume information notifying means (effect control) for displaying a notification image of the volume value indicating the current volume value on a predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71) based on the operation. The second volume value setting means sets the volume value in response to the operation when the second operation unit is operated during the display of the volume value notification image. The first volume value setting unit operates the first operation unit even when the volume value is set by the second volume value setting unit while the notification image of the volume value is displayed. And the volume value is set in accordance with the operation.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). A second volume value setting unit (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit to a predetermined volume value based on the first resetting condition (the gaming machine 1) After the power supply to the ), The volume value resetting means (display control unit 140) for resetting the volume value to one of the plurality of volume values based on the volume value. Before the predetermined reset condition is satisfied, the sound volume value is reset to the sound volume value set by the first sound volume value setting means.

  A sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound; and a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit according to a game state. A predetermined game (variable display of a special symbol) is executed based on establishment of a start condition (a game ball winning in the first start port 45 or the second start port 47). In the gaming machine capable of giving a game value (big hit game, small hit game) to the player based on the result, the effect output from the sound output unit based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). Based on an operation of a first volume value setting unit (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial value of volume) and an operation of a second operation unit (cross key 19), The volume set by the first volume value setting means A second volume value setting means (production control board 130) for setting the volume value to a predetermined volume value, and a volume for resetting the volume value to any of the plurality of volume values based on the satisfaction of a predetermined reset condition. Value resetting means (display control section 140), wherein the predetermined resetting condition is that the second operation section has not been operated for a predetermined period in a customer waiting state in which the predetermined game is not executed. And a second condition that is satisfied when the volume value set by the first volume value setting means and a current volume value have a predetermined relationship. The setting unit resets the volume value to the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit before the predetermined reset condition is satisfied, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. , The first condition is satisfied but the second condition is satisfied If there is not to reconfigure the volume value.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and a production sound from the sound output unit according to a game state. And a production sound output means for outputting a sound output value from the sound output section based on an operation of a first operation section (changeover switch 22). (Initial value of volume) set by the first volume value setting means based on the operation of the first volume value setting means (display control section 140) and the second operation section (cross key 19). And a second volume value setting means (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value to a predetermined volume value, and a first period (for the gaming machine 1) Power supply) and a second period (adjustment) included in the first period. The first volume value setting means can set the volume value in the first period, and the second volume value setting means sets the volume value in the second period. I am trying to make it possible.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and Effect sound output means (effect control board 130) for outputting an effect sound from the sound output unit, based on establishment of a start condition (a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). In a gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined game (variable display of special symbols) to give a game value (generating a big hit game or a small hit game) to a player based on the result of the predetermined game, A first sound volume value setting means for setting the sound volume value of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to any one of a plurality of sound volume values (initial sound volume value) based on an operation of a sound unit (switch 22). Display control section 140) and a second operation section (cross key 19) A second volume value setting means (production control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting means to a predetermined volume value based on the operation of And a volume value resetting unit (display control unit 140) for resetting the volume value to the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit based on the progress of the game. When the sound output unit outputs the effect sound during the change (during special symbol fluctuation display, during a jackpot game, and the like), and the first sound value setting unit sets the sound value during the output of the effect sound. Changing the production sound being output to a volume corresponding to the newly set volume value, wherein the volume value resetting means performs the second operation unit in a customer waiting state in which the predetermined game is not executed. Is not operated for a predetermined period of time To, and so as to reset the volume value.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). Volume value setting means (produce control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value, and a situation (normal event, important event, special event, Judgment means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) for judging whether the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol, the arrival of the execution timing of the certain variation confirmation effect, the passing of the game ball to a specific area in the special winning opening 50, or the like has occurred. ) And said determining means A predetermined notification sound (a notification sound of a normal event, a notification sound of an important event, a production sound, a one-shot notification sound) is output from the sound output unit based on a determination that a situation in which a constant notification should be performed has occurred. And a notifying means (effect control board 130) for outputting a passing notification sound), and the conditions in which the predetermined notification should be performed include a first condition (the occurrence of a normal event, a change in volume value, and the like). A second situation that is more important than the first situation (the occurrence of an important event, the arrival of the execution timing of a certain-variable confirmation effect, the passing of a game ball to a specific area within the special winning opening 50, etc.), When it is determined that the first situation has occurred, the notifying unit outputs a first notification sound (a notification sound of a normal event, a notification sound of a volume) at a volume based on a current volume value. Output from the unit, and when it is determined that the second situation has occurred, the first A second notification sound (a notification sound of an important event, a single notification sound, a notification sound of passing) different from the notification sound is output from the sound output unit at a preset volume (fixed volume value). ing.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). Volume value setting means (performance control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value, and determining whether a situation (normal event) in which a predetermined notification should be performed during operation of the gaming machine has occurred. A predetermined notification sound is output from the sound output unit based on a determination unit (a main control board 110 and a payout control board 120) and based on the determination unit determining that a situation in which the predetermined notification should be performed has occurred. (Normal event notification sound) Notification means (effect control board 130) for causing the effect sound output means to output a volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit when the output of the predetermined notification sound is started. When the output of the predetermined notification sound is completed, the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit is restored to the volume before the decrease.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). Volume value setting means (production control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value, and determining whether a situation (an important event) in which a predetermined notification should be performed during the operation of the gaming machine has occurred. A predetermined notification sound is output from the sound output unit based on a determination unit (a main control board 110 and a payout control board 120) and based on the determination unit determining that a situation in which the predetermined notification should be performed has occurred. (Notification sound of important event) And a notifying means (effect control board 130) for causing the effect sound output means not to output the effect sound from the sound output unit when the predetermined notification sound is being output, or Sound is output from the sound output unit at a non-audible volume.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). Volume value setting means (performance control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value, and determining whether a situation (normal event) in which a predetermined notification should be performed during operation of the gaming machine has occurred. A predetermined notification sound is output from the sound output unit based on a determination unit (a main control board 110 and a payout control board 120) and based on the determination unit determining that a situation in which the predetermined notification should be performed has occurred. (Normal event notification sound) And a notifying means (effect control board 130) for causing the sound output unit to output the predetermined notifying sound at a volume lower than the volume of the effect sound when the effect sound is being output. Output from.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). A second volume value setting unit that sets the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit to a predetermined volume value based on a predetermined switching condition (ON / second volume of power saving mode setting) To the value setting means (effect control board 130) and OFF) Power-saving mode control means (production control board 130) for switching between a normal mode (non-power-saving mode) with a predetermined power consumption and a power-saving mode (power-saving mode) with a low power consumption, and operation of the first operation unit Power saving setting processing means (performance control board 130) for performing a process for changing a setting (setting of the power saving mode) related to the power saving mode switched by the power saving mode control means based on the The output means causes the sound output unit to output the effect sound during the progress of a game (during a special symbol change display, a jackpot game, etc.), and the first sound volume value setting means outputs the effect sound during the output of the effect sound. When the volume value is set, the effect sound being output is changed to a volume corresponding to the newly set volume value, and the power saving setting processing means causes the first operation unit to perform the first operation state. (Switch positions 0 to 5 and BF in FIG. 71, switch positions 0 to B in FIG. 74) and a second operation state different from the first operation state (switch positions 6 to A in FIG. 71, switch in FIG. 74). The setting of the power saving mode can be changed based on the operation to the position C to F).

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). A sound value setting means (effect control board 130) for setting the sound value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value, wherein the effect sound output means is in progress of a game (during a special symbol variation display, a big hit game) Etc.) from the sound output unit to output the effect sound, and the volume value setting means can set the volume value while the effect sound is being output by the effect sound output means.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). Volume value setting means (production control board 130) for setting the volume value of the production sound to a predetermined volume value, and establishment of a predetermined notification condition (determination of execution of a certain-change confirmation production is determined, Based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a specific area within the game 50, a notification sound (one-shot notification sound, Notification to output And an output unit, the notification sounds output means, and the notification sound to be output from the sound output unit in the volume value to a pre-set volume regardless (volume value of fixed).

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). A second sound volume value setting means (effect control board 130) for setting the sound volume value set by the first sound volume value setting device to a predetermined sound volume value based on the first sound volume value setting device; Is set based on the specified notification sound (new A first notification unit (producing control board 130) for outputting a set volume value and a notification sound indicating an adjustment mode from the sound output unit, and that the second volume value setting unit sets the volume value. And a second notification means (effect control board 130) for displaying a notification image of a sound volume value indicating the newly set sound volume value on a predetermined display unit.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and Effect sound output means (effect control board 130) for outputting an effect sound from the sound output unit, based on establishment of a start condition (a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). In a gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined game (variable display of special symbols) and giving a game value (big hit game, small hit game) to a player based on the result of the predetermined game, a predetermined operation unit ( A volume value setting means (production control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a predetermined volume value based on an operation of the cross key 19), and Waits for a customer who does not execute the predetermined game The customer waiting state includes a first period (waiting for a customer waiting effect) and a second period (during a customer waiting effect) different from the first period, and the volume value setting is performed. The means is capable of setting the volume value when the first period is during the customer waiting state, and is not allowed to set the volume value when the second period is during the customer waiting state. I have to.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). And a second volume value setting unit (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit to a predetermined volume value based on the first volume value. More than the number of the volume values set by the first volume value setting means A plurality of setting numbers (switch positions, adjustment modes) can be set, and the plurality of setting numbers are the same as the number of types of the volume value set by the first volume value setting means. (Switch positions 0 to 5 and adjustment modes 1 to 6 in FIG. 71) and surplus second set numbers (switch positions 6 to F and adjustment modes 7 to 16 in FIG. 71) other than the plurality of first set numbers. Wherein the plurality of first set numbers are different from each other in the volume value set by the first volume value setting means, and the second set number is the volume set by the first volume value setting means. The value is set to be the same as the specific first set number (one of the adjustment modes 1 to 6 in FIG. 71).

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). Volume value setting means (performance control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value, and establishing a predetermined display condition (the left button or the right button of the four-way controller 19 during the volume adjustment possible period). Is operated), a sound value notifying means (a directing effect) for displaying a sound image of a sound value indicating a current sound value on a predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71). A control board 130). The amount value informing means is so as to hide the notification image of the volume value and has passed (monitoring time interval between operations) a predetermined period from when the predetermined display condition.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and And a production sound output means (production control board 130) for outputting a production sound from the sound output unit. In the gaming machine, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on the operation of the first operation unit (switch 22). The first volume value setting means (display control unit 140) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to any one of a plurality of volume values (initial volume value), and the operation of the second operation unit (cross key 19). The second volume value setting means (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value set by the first volume value setting means to a predetermined volume value based on the first volume value setting means, and the supply of power to the gaming machine is started. The gaming machine in a predetermined initial state based on the Initialization means (main control board 110) for initializing (clearing the contents of the main RAM 110c and the stack area) to a state at the time of shipment, and the plurality of volume values based on the initialization by the initialization means. Volume value resetting means (display control unit 140) for resetting the volume value to any one of the above-mentioned volume values, wherein the volume value resetting means sets the first value before the initialization by the initialization means. The volume value is reset to the volume value set by the volume value setting means.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game (such as a variable display using a plurality of pieces of identification information) is executed based on the establishment of a start condition, and based on a result of the predetermined game. In general, a game value is given to a player. In such a gaming machine, a sound output section (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is provided, and the sound output section outputs a production sound at a predetermined volume in accordance with the progress of the game, or the operation section includes a sound output section. A predetermined effect is performed based on the operation (for example, JP-A-2014-233590). However, although the sound volume of the effect sound is adjusted according to the progress of the game and output from the sound output unit, there is a problem that the desired sound volume cannot be set.

  As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sound output unit (sound output device 9) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and In a gaming machine provided with a production sound output unit (production control board 130) for producing a production sound from a sound output unit, the sound output unit outputs the sound based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). Volume value setting means (effect control board 130) for setting the volume value of the effect sound to a predetermined volume value, based on the start of power supply to the game machine, Initialization means (main control board 110) for initializing (clearing the main RAM 110c and storage contents of the stack area) to an initial state (state at the time of shipment), and initialized to a predetermined initial state by the initialization means Notification that informs A notification sound output means (effect control board 130) for outputting (power-on notification sound) from the sound output unit, wherein the volume value setting means outputs the notification sound from the sound output unit. In such a case, the volume value cannot be set.

  With this configuration, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a desired volume.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a spinning-type gaming machine (a so-called slot machine). Further, the present invention can be used for a rock ball game machine and an arrangement ball game machine.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 General-purpose gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 Big winning port 70 First image display device (main liquid crystal)
71 Second image display device (sub liquid crystal)
110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 payout control board 130 effect control board 130a sub CPU

Claims (1)

A game machine comprising: a sound output unit capable of outputting a predetermined sound; and a production sound output unit configured to output a production sound from the sound output unit according to a state of a game.
First volume value setting means for setting a volume value of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to one of a plurality of volume values based on an operation of a first operation unit operable by a game clerk;
A second volume value setting unit that sets the volume value set by the first volume value setting unit to a predetermined volume value based on an operation of a second operation unit that can be operated by a player;
A variable effect execution means for executing a variable effect for notifying a determination result of whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Notification means for outputting a predetermined notification sound from the sound output unit based on the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality during operation of the gaming machine,
Volume value image display means for displaying a volume value image corresponding to a current volume value on a predetermined display unit based on an operation of the second operation unit;
Volume notification sound output means for outputting a volume notification sound from the sound output unit based on the volume value being set by the second volume value setting means,
The predetermined abnormality includes a first abnormality and a second abnormality that is more important than the first abnormality,
The effect sound output means,
Outputting a fluctuation effect sound during the execution of the fluctuation effect,
When the output of the predetermined notification sound based on the occurrence of the first abnormality is started during the output of the fluctuation effect sound, the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value of the plurality of volume values. Even if it is a value, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is lower than the previous volume, or the fluctuating effect sound is inaudible,
If the output of the based on the first abnormality occurs in the output of the variation effect sound predetermined alarm sound is completed, the predetermined notification sound based the volume of the fluctuation effect sound generation of the first abnormality output To the state before it was
The volume value image display means,
If the first operation unit is operated and the volume value is set while the volume value image is not displayed, the volume value image according to the newly set volume value is not displayed,
The volume notification sound output means,
When the second operation unit is operated and the volume value is set during the customer waiting state in which the fluctuation effect is not performed, the volume notification sound is output ,
During the output of the predetermined notification sound based on the occurrence of the first abnormality,
The setting of the volume value by the second volume value setting means is possible,
During the output of the predetermined notification sound based on the occurrence of the second abnormality,
A gaming machine wherein the setting of the volume value by the second volume value setting means is restricted .